Technical

9600LSY/LHR REL.1.0/2.
0 TECHNICAL HDBK
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
HANDBOOK GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QUICK GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 DOCUMENT GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Handbook applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 Purpose of the handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4 Handbook Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 Handbook history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.1 List of the editions and modified parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.2 Notes on Ed.01ADRAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.3 Notes on Ed.01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.4 Notes on Ed.02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.5 Notes on Ed.03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6 List Of Symbols And Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
16 17 20 21 21 21 22 23 25 25 28 28 28 28 29
DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 Introduction to the 9600LSY Radio System Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.2 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.3 9600LSY basic configurations and Network Element types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.4 Main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.5 Network applications of the 9600LSY equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 Introduction to system configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.2 Station types and configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03 02 01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
37
39 39 40 40 40 41 42 45 47 47 47
020927 020418 011115 DATE
S402092301 S402040402 validated CHANGE NOTE
G.CONSONNI ITAVE G.CONSONNI ITACO G.CONSONNI ITACO APPRAISAL AUTHORITY
E.CORRADINI ITAVE G.MAISTO E.CORRADINI ITACO E.CORRADINI ITACO F.BUTORI, G.MAISTO ORIGINATOR
ED
9600LSY REL.1.0/2.0 LHR TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 1 / 514
2.3.3 Channel configurations and protection schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4 Hardware components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.2 OPTINEX Rack and Top Rack Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.3 Transceiver subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.4 Baseband subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.5 ADM 1650SMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.6 FAN Subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.7 System wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.8 Installation materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.2 Station configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.3 Radio channel configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.4 System configuration for network solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.5 Branching configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 Radio Transmission features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.2 Frequency reuse technique (CCDP) and XPIC Cross Polarization Canceller . . . . . . . . 2.6.3 Transmitted power control: static and ATPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.4 Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 Signal Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7.2 STM0 & STM1 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7.3 SDH mapping adopted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7.4 SDH interface usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7.5 SOH bytes and service channel access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8 Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8.3 Synchronization in Regenerator station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8.4 Synchronization in WMSN station by means of 1650SMC ADM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9 Equipment Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9.3 The NE architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9.4 The F interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9.5 The Qecc/QB3 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9.6 ECT and RECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 Part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 Rack and shelves summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4 Top Rack Unit (TRU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 Board provisioning and expansion guideline in BB & TR shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.1 General equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.2 Channel provisioning/expansion guideline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6 Base Band shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6.1 Base Band shelf unit layout and equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6.2 SYSTEM CONTROLLER and FLASH CARD unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6.3 SERVICE and ADDITIONAL VOICE unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6.4 RRACHANNEL unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6.5 RRASTANDBY unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
50 51 51 51 52 54 58 61 62 62 63 63 63 68 76 77 82 82 82 90 93 97 97 97 98 99 100 109 109 109 109 109 114 114 114 115 117 117 118 121 121 122 126 128 129 129 131 134 135 140 144 147 149
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 2 / 514
3.6.6 MODEM unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6.7 PSU and PSF units operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6.8 Additional Housekeeping unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6.9 Kit Loudspeaker operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 Transceiver shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7.1 Transceiver shelf unit layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7.2 Equipping rules of Transceiver units or substitutive Dummy Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7.3 Composition of transceiver units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7.4 TRANSCEIVER unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8 Branching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8.1 Branching drawings and BranchingTransceivers connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8.2 Branching Front Plate Kit (Rx branching area) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9 FANS shelf and FANS assembled units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9.1 FANS shelf equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9.2 FANS assembled unit equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9.3 FANS assembled unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 SYSTEM CABLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 Shelves connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1 T.R.U. connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2 Base Band shelf access panel: SUBD connectors layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.3 Base Band shelf access panel: 2Mb/s WST connector layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.4 Transceiver shelf connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 Cable kits and cable types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 Power supply distribution connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 Signal connections between shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 ModemTransceiverBranching connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7 External interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.1 Power Line Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.2 SDH interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.3 Input / Output Unprotected WST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.4 Input / Output Protected WST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.5 Auxiliary Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.6 Management interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.7 Station Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.8 Summarizing / Housekeeping alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 Equipment Control Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.1 Control Subsystem Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.2 Control Subsystem Hardware Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.3 Control Subsystem Software Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.4 Signal Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.5 Remote Inventory subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.6 System Controller unit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.7 Flash Card description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.8 Additional Housekeeping unit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3 Power supply subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4 Baseband subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.1 Interconnection general block diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.2 RRACHANNEL STM1+1WST and STM0+0WST description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.3 RRASTANDBY STM1+1WST and STM0+0WST description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
150 153 154 155 156 156 156 157 158 168 168 168 169 169 169 171 175 175 176 176 178 180 181 183 190 191 193 202 202 202 202 202 203 207 208 208 215 215 217 217 237 242 245 274 276 280 281 282 285 285 287 289
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 3 / 514
5.4.4 STM1 optical module description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.5 128QAM MODEM STM1 1WST and STM0 0WST description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.6 SERVICE and ADDITIONAL VOICE unit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 Transceiver subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.1 Interconnection general block diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.2 DC/DC converter module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.3 Transmit and Service module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.4 Receive & IF Rx module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.5 Local Oscillator module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6 Fans subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 System Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.1 General characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.2 Power supply characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.3 Mechanical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3 Transceiver characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4 Regenerator and Modem characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.1 Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.2 XPIC & Combiner (XPIC STM1 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.3 Regenerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.4 Power consumption (Regenerator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5 Branching interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6 Protections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7 Environmental characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.1 General characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.2 Mechanically active substances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.3 ETS 300019 Class 3.2: partly Temperature controlled locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.4 ETS 300019 Class 3.1: Temperaturecontrolled locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.5 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.6 Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8 Optical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.1 Related Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.2 Hazard Level classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.3 Incorporated laser sources characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.4 Labelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.5 Aperture and fiber connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.6 Engineering design features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.7 Safety instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
292 293 297 302 302 304 305 309 310 312 315 315 316 317 323 323 324 326 326 328 329 331 332 332 333 333 333 334 335 337 338 339 339 339 339 340 340 340 340
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
7 MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2.1 EMC norms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2.2 Safety rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2.3 Maintenance Personnel skill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 Instruments and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.1 Software tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.2 System and Maintenance Tool Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4 Alarm Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.1 Centralized Equipment Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 355 356 356 356 357 357 357 358 361 361
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 4 / 514
7.4.2 Station Alarms (TRU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.3 Unit alarms managed by System Controller (SYSCO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.4 Alarm visual indications on units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.5 Summarizing / Housekeeping Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5 Set of spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5.1 Suggested Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5.2 General rules on spare parts management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5.3 Spare Flash Card management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6 Routine Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6.1 Routine Maintenance every year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6.2 Routine Maintenance for Fans Assembled Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 Corrective Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7.1 General flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7.2 Alarm acknowledgment and attending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7.3 TroubleShooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7.4 Unit replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.8 Faulty unit repair and Repair Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.8.1 Faulty unit sending back to repair center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.8.2 Repair Form filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
363 363 363 364 370 370 372 372 373 373 374 375 375 376 377 381 409 409 409
FREQUENCY PLANS & PART NUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

8 INTRODUCTION TO SECTION FREQUENCY PLANS & PART NUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 9640LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1 9640LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2 9640LSY frequency plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 9647LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1 9647LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2 9647LSY frequency plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 9662LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1 9662LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2 9662LSY frequency plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 9667LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1 9667LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2 9667LSY frequency plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 9674LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1 9674LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.2 9674LSY frequency plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 9681LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1 9681LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2 9681LSY frequency plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 9610LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1 9610LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2 9610LSY frequency plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
413 415 415 416 425 425 425 429 429 429 433 433 433 435 435 436 447 447 448 453 453 453 455 455 455
16 9611LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1 9611LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2 9611LSY frequency plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 5 / 514
17 9613LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1 9613LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2 9613LSY frequency plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

459 459 459
APPENDICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
18 DOCUMENTATION GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.2 Productreleaseversion handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.2.1 9600LSY specific equipment handbooks and CDROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.2.2 Related equipment handbooks and CDROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.3 General on Alcatel Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.3.1 CustomerIndependent Standard Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.3.2 Product levels and associated Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.3.3 Typical contents of Technical & Craft Terminal Operators Handbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.3.4 Documentation on paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.3.5 Documentation on CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.3.6 Handbook and CDROM supply to Customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.2 Compliance with European Norms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.3 Safety Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.3.1 General Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.3.2 Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.3.3 Dangerous Electrical Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.3.4 Harmful Optical Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.3.5 Risks of Explosions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.3.6 Moving Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.3.7 Heatradiating Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.3.8 Microwave radiations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.3.9 Specific safety rules in this handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.4.1 EMC General Norms Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.4.2 EMC General Norms Turnon, Tests & Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.4.3 EMC General Norms Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.5 Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.6 Suggestions, notes and cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.7 Labels affixed to the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.7.1 Label specific for 9600LSY Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.7.2 General use labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 465 466 466 471 472 472 473 475 477 479 481 483 483 483 484 484 485 486 487 489 489 490 491 491 492 492 493 493 494 494 495 495 496
HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION & ANNEXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505

20 HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION & ANNEXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.2 Hardware setting documents explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.3 List of enclosed documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.3.1 Documentation for hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.3.2 Other documents (Annexes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
507 507 507 510 510 513
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 6 / 514
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES

FIGURES Fig. 1. Backbone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Fig. 2. Ring clousure and radio spurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Fig. 3. Ring clousure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Fig. 4. Regenerator and WMSN station rack configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Fig. 5. Transceiver subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Fig. 6. Single channel transceiver block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Fig. 7. Baseband subrack equipped for 7+1/8+0 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Fig. 8. Single channel regenerator block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Fig. 9. Baseband functional protection scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Fig. 10. Baseband board positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Fig. 11. WMSN terminal rack equipped with 1650SMC ADM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Fig. 12. 1650SMC add drop multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Fig. 13. MST single channel functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Fig. 14. Fan Subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Fig. 15. 9600LSY 7+1/8+0 regenerator configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Fig. 16. 9600LSY 7+1/8+0 WMSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Fig. 17. 9600LSY 7+1 Regenerator configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Fig. 18. 9600LSY WMSNOS 7x STM1 configuration with radio protection for 7+1 STM1 transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Fig. 19. 9600LSY WMSN Two Sides configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Fig. 20. Channel arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Fig. 21. 3+1 terminal basic station layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Fig. 22. Terminal station layout: extension starting from A) basic layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Fig. 23. Terminal station layout: extension starting from B) basic layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Fig. 24. Terminal station layout: extension starting from C) basic layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Fig. 25. Terminal station layout: extension starting from D) basic layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Fig. 26. Terminal station layout: extension starting from E) basic layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Fig. 27. 4+0/4+1 EAST/WEST terminal basic station layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Fig. 28. Schematic diagram of transceiver to branching connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Fig. 29. 1 polar per rack branching version for 8 RF channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Fig. 30. Branching version for 8 RF channels, arranged in 2 polar per rack configuration . . . . . . . . 80 Fig. 31. Branching version for 3+1 configuration with Space Diversity, arranged in 2 polar per rack version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Fig. 32. XPIC operating principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Fig. 33. Frequency reuse system architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Fig. 34. 7+1 reused terminal with single protection (ch. 1H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Fig. 35. 2 x (7+1) reused terminal with double protection (on ch. 1H and 1V) in 1PPR solution . . 86 Fig. 36. Expansion from 7+1 single protection to 2 x (7+1) reused terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Fig. 37. Main / slave LO mutual protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Fig. 38. Branching interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Fig. 39. ATPC Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Fig. 40. Loopback A: RRA line loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Fig. 41. Loopback B: RRA internal loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Fig. 42. Loopback C: RFCOH Internal loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Fig. 43. EC position with respect to loopback points and consequent unavailability by RECT (CHx/y) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Fig. 44. Allowed and not allowed loopbacks by RECT (CHx/y) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Fig. 45. General Multiplexing Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Fig. 46. General European Multiplexing Structure with addition of 45 Mbit/s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Fig. 47. 1650SMC and unit SERGI front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 7 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 48. G.703 64 Kbit/s codirectional interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 49. RS422 A V11/V24 64 Kbit/s contradirectional interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 50. RS232C V24/V28 asynchronous interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 51. Synchronization Reference Source Priority Algorithm Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 52. SSM Algorithm Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 53. DCC management: Regenerator case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 54. DCC management: WMSN case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 55. Rack and shelves layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 56. Top Rack Unit front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 57. Layout of max 8 channels in single polarization configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 58. Layout of max 8 channels in double polarization configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 59. Single polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 60. Two polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack with the H channels on the left side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 61. 2 polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack with V channel on the left side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 62. Expansion procedure with reused channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 63. Unequipped Base Band shelf layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 64. Base Band shelf board equipment (slot numbering and board type and numbering) . . . . . Fig. 65. System Controller assembly, front connector numbering and and internal view . . . . . . . . . Fig. 66. FLASH CARD profile and insertion direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 67. System Controller front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 68. Service unit assembly, front connector numbering and and internal view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 69. Service unit front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 70. RRACHANNEL assembly view and front connector numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 71. RRACHANNEL unit front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 72. RRASTANDBY unit front view (particular) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 73. Modem unit assembly view and front connector numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 74. Modem unit assembly internal view and CANCCOMB equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 75. Modem unit front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 76. PSU and PSF units front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 77. Additional Housekeeping unit assembly view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 78. Kit Loudspeaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 79. Transceiver shelf equipment (slot numbering and board types and numbering) . . . . . . . . . Fig. 80. Transceiver assembly physical views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 81. Transceiver internal view: standard components and Main Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 82. Transceiver internal view: without Diversity Receiver and with TR.Frequency Reuse Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 83. Transceiver internal view: with Diversity Receiver and without TR.Frequency Reuse Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 84. Transceiver internal view: with Diversity Receiver and with TR.Frequency Reuse Kit . Fig. 85. Position of Hardware setting dip switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 86. Transceiver internal connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 87. Transceiver front connector numbering (TR without Rx diversity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 88. Transceiver front connector numbering (TR with Rx diversity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 89. Transceiver front view meaning of access points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 90. Branching Front Plate Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 91. Fan shelf (slot numbering and board types) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 92. FANS SHELF, FANS ASSEMBLED and substitutive COVER assembly views . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 93. Front view of FANS SHELF equipped with both FANS ASSEMBLED units . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 94. Top Rack Unit connector numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 95. Base Band shelf access panel: SUBD connectors layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 96. Base Band shelf access panel: 2Mb/s WST front connector layout and numbering . . . . . . Fig. 97. Transceiver shelf connector numbering at reartop side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
107 107 108 112 113 116 116 126 128 129 130 131 132 133 133 134 135 140 140 141 144 145 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 158 159 160 160 161 161 162 165 166 167 168 169 171 172 176 178 180 181
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 8 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 98. System cabling: types of used cables (A, B, C, D, E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 99. System cabling: types of used cables (F, G, H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 100. System cabling: types of used cables (K, N, P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 101. System cabling: types of used cables (KK, NN, PP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 102. System cabling: types of used cables (Q, R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 103. System cabling: types of used cables (S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 104. System cabling: types of used cables (T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 105. ModemTransceiverBranching connections: without Reuse and without Diversity . . . . Fig. 106. ModemTransceiverBranching connections: without Reuse and with Diversity . . . . . . . Fig. 107. ModemTransceiverBranching connections: with Reuse and without Diversity . . . . . . . Fig. 108. ModemTransceiverBranching connections: with Reuse and with Diversity . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 109. LHR system (N+1 / N+0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 110. WMSN system (N+1 / N+0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 111. Functional decomposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 112. Supervision process decomposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 113. Supervision process within atomic functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 114. RSPI functional decomposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 115. Regenerator section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 116. Radio sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 117. PM inside atomic functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 118. Equipment management function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 119. Fault management inside management function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 120. Performance events generation process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 121. PM inside management functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 122. DCC routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 123. 1+1 Protection Switch Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 124. M:N Protection Switch Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 125. LHR control subsystem architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 126. LHR communication interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 127. WMSN control subsystem architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 128. VMM module decomposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 129. SOH management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 130. Service channels functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 131. DCCR management (ADM towards RADIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 132. DCCR management (RADIO towards ADM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 133. DCCR management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 134. ATPC management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 135. MC management on RX terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 136. VC4 generation from 3 TUG3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 137. Sub STM1 terminal functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 138. TIM algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 139. The 16_BYTE machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 140. The 1_BYTE machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 141. Remote inventory subsystem architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 142. System Controller block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 143. DCCR and summarizing/housekeeping alarms management block diagram . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 144. Additional Housekeeping block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 145. Power Supply distribution from Top Rack Unit and Transceiver shelf Power Supply distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 146. Power Supply distribution in Baseband shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 147. Block diagram of Up to 7+1 Terminal configuration Tx side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 148. Block diagram of Up to 7+1 Terminal configuration Rx side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 149. RRACHANNEL block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 150. RRA STANDBY block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
184 185 186 187 188 189 189 195 197 199 201 215 215 217 218 219 220 222 222 223 227 228 229 230 232 233 234 238 239 241 244 248 250 252 253 254 256 257 259 262 270 271 271 275 277 279 281 282 283 285 286 288 291
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 9 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 151. STM1 optical module block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 152. MODEM block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 153. SERVICE block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 154. Switch logic N+1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 155. Input/output command signals of the Switch logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 156. Functional block diagram of Transceiver without Rx Diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 157. Functional block diagram of Transceiver with Rx Diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 158. Signals exchanged among Transceiver internal modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 159. Transmit and Service module block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 160. Block diagram of upconversion and amplification unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 161. Block diagram of Receive & IF Rx module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 162. Block diagram of Local Oscillator module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 163. Fan subsystem block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 164. FANS ASSEMBLED unit block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 165. ETSI Reference points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 166. Climatogram for Class 3.2 : Partly temperature controlled locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 167. Climatogram for Class 3.1: Temperaturecontrolled locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 168. Climatogram for Class 1.2: not temperature controlled storage location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 169. 9600 LSY BER curves (STM1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 170. 9600 LSY BER curves (STM0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 171. STM1 128 QAM typical RF spectrum (measured at point C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 172. STM1/STM0 128 QAM IF RX Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 173. Post demodulation filter STM1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 174. Post demodulation filter STM0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 175. STM1 /STM0 BER 1*103 and 1*106 threshold degradation for cochannel interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 176. STM1 BER 1*103 and1*106 threshold degradation for adjacent channel 40 MHz digital interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 177. STM1 BER 1*103 and 1*106 threshold degradation for adjacent channel 30 MHz digital interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 178. STM0 BER 1*103 and 1*106 threshold degradation for adjacent channel 14 MHz digital interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 179. Typical signature for STM1 capacity @ BER=1 X 10 E4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 180. Typical signature for STM1 capacity @ BER=1 X 10 E6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 181. Typical signature for STM0 capacity @ BER=1x10e4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 182. Typical signature for STM0 capacity @ BER=1x10e6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 183. Special cord for PRx measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 184. Special extractors and holder bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 185. System Controller front view (particular) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 186. Station Alarms on TRU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 187. Corrective Maintenance general flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 188. TroubleShooting starting with visual indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 189. PSU to be switched off/on for MODEM replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 190. General flow chart of Transceiver repair procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 191. Spare Local Oscillator subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 192. Spare Receiver subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 193. Spare Frequency Reuse kit module subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 194. Spare Transceiver + Main Receiver subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 195. Spare Frequency Reuse kit 3connector flat cable subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 196. Transceiver internal connectors for repair 1/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 197. Transceiver internal connectors for repair 2/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 198. Transceiver internal connectors for repair 3/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 199. Transceiver internal connectors for repair 4/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 200. Transceiver internal connectors for repair 5/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
292 296 299 300 301 303 303 304 305 307 309 310 312 313 316 334 335 337 341 342 343 344 345 345 345 346 347 347 348 349 350 351 359 360 361 363 375 378 385 388 390 392 395 396 399 403 404 405 405 406
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 10 / 514
Fig. 201. Transceiver internal connectors for repair 6/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 202. Repair form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 203. 9640 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR Recommendation F.635. fig.3/Annex 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 204. 9640 LSY Channel plan B: ITUR F.635 recommends 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 205. 9640 LSY Channel plan C: ITUR Recommendation F.382 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 206. 9640 LSY Channel plan D: ITUR F. 382 (Extended ) Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 207. 9640 LSY Channel plan E: DTI channel plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 208. 9640 LSY Channel plan F: ITUR Recommendation F.635, Annex 1, fig.6 . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 209. 9640 LSY Channel plan G: O.I.R.T. (Russia) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 210. 9647 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR Recommendation F.1099, Annex 1, fig. 2 . . . . . . . . . Fig. 211. 9647 LSY Channel plan B: Spain Defence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 212. 9662 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR F 383 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 213. 9662 LSY Channel plan B: O.I.R.T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 214. 9667 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR F.384, CEPT T/R 1402 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 215. 9674 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR F.385 Annex 3 L&H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 216. 9674 LSY Channel plan B: ITUR F.385 Annex 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 217. 9674 LSY Channel plan C: ITUR F.385 Annex 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 218. 9674 LSY Channel plan D: ITUR F.385 Rec. 1L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 219. 9674 LSY Channel plan E: ITUR F.385 Rec. 1M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 220. 9674 LSY Channel plan F: ITUR F.385 Rec. 1H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 221. 9681 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR F.386 ANNEX 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 222. 9681 LSY Channel plan B: ITUR F.386 ANNEX 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 223. 9681 LSY Channel plan C: ITUR F.386 ANNEX 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 224. 9610 LSY Channel plan A: MEDIASET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 225. 9611 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR F.387 rec. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 226. 9611 LSY Channel plan B: ITUR F.387 ANNEX 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 227. 9613 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR F.497 Rec.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 228. Example of SWP Release and Version numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 229. Example of Product levels and associated Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 230. Antistatic protection device kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 231. LSY equipment identification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 232. Largesubrack labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 233. Smallsubrack labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 234. Labels on units with standard cover plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 235. Modules label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 236. Internal label for Printed Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 237. Back panels internal label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 238. Label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N. and serial number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 239. Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N. and serial number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABLES Tab. 1. Quick guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 2. Handbook history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 3. List Of Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 4. List Of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 5. 9600LSY radio family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 6. 9600LSY user interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 7. LHR Terminal Regenerator System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 8. Couples of Radio Channels that can be used for protected service channels and WST . . Tab. 9. OH bytes suitable for handling on MST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 10. OH bytes suitable for handling on RST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 11. RFCOH byte structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 12. Reg. AUX/EOW user interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 13. 9600LSY Part list Common parts (frequency independent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
406 410 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 426 427 430 431 434 437 438 440 441 443 445 449 450 451 454 456 457 460 473 474 494 495 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 503
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
17 25 29 29 44 44 50 50 100 101 101 103 122
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 11 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Tab. 14. Rack and shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 15. TRU breaker utilization in 9600 LSY/LHR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 16. System Controller card equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 17. Additional Housekeeping unit equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 18. Service card equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 19. RRACHANNEL and RRASTANDBY cards equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 20. Modem cards equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 21. PSU cards equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 22. Dummy plates for RRAModem and PSU equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 23. PSF cards equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 24. Kit Loudspeaker equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 25. ESC DipSwitch Bank I4 setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 26. ESC DipSwitch Bank I1 setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 27. Transceiver units and substitutive dummy plates equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 28. Branching Front Plate Kit equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 29. Fans unit & cover equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 30. Equipping rules for FANS assembled unit in Basebandshelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 31. Base Band shelf access panel: SUBD connectors usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 32. Cable kits and cable types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 33. Power supply distribution: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT COMMON PARTS . . . . . . . . . Tab. 34. Power supply distribution: Cables belonging to FANS UNIT CABLE KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 35. Power supply distribution: Cables belonging to FANS UNIT EXTENSION CABLE KIT . . Tab. 36. Power supply distribution: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT FOR 1 EXTEN. CHANNEL FOR WMSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 37. Signal connections: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT COMMON PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 38. Signal connections: Cables belonging to FANS UNIT CABLE KIT and FANS UNIT EXTENSION CABLE KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 39. Signal connections: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT FOR 1 EXTEN. CHANNEL FOR WMSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 40. Signal connections: Cables belonging to ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 41. Summary of auxiliary channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 42. Aux channel G703 and RS232 BB shelfs M182 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 43. Out party line OW, TPH and loudspeaker BB shelfs M190 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . Tab. 44. Aux channel V11 BB shelfs M191 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 45. RJ45 Connector for 10baseT interface on System Controller unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 46. RS232 for F interface connection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 47. LHR Station Alarms connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 48. Out Remote alarms (GA1GA20) BB shelfs M193 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 49. Out Remote alarms (GA21GA40) BB shelfs M183 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 50. Out Housekeeping and Remote alarms (GA41GA48) BB shelfs M192 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 51. Input Housekeeping BB shelfs M185 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 52. Input Housekeeping Additional Housekeeping units M1 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 53. Fault management process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 54. Entities monitored by the performance monitoring primitives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 55. Switching Initiation Criteria Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 56. DCC Mapping & Interleaving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 57. Channels protectable for RFCOH bytes and 2 x 2Mbit/s WST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 58. Hazard level classification of different optical interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 59. LSY System Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 60. LSY Maintenance Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 61. Relationship between Alarm severity terminology displayed on C.T./O.S. and alarm severity terminology used for the System Controller unit remote alarm connector pins. . . . . . . . . Tab. 62. Relationship among remote alarms, housekeeping outputs and alarm primitives . . . . . . .
127 128 136 136 136 137 138 138 139 139 139 143 143 156 168 169 170 179 183 190 190 190 190 191 191 192 192 203 204 205 206 207 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 221 225 235 255 297 339 358 359 361 364
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 12 / 514
Tab. 63. Relationship between Remote and Station Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 64. Spare parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 65. Normal condition (no alarms) of LEDs on equipments units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 66. Transceiver internal cabling diagram according to configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 67. Implemented radiofrequency channel arrangements and list of Chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 68. 9640LSY Transceiver Part List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 69. 9647LSY Transceiver Part List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 70. 9662LSY Transceiver Part List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 71. 9667LSY Transceiver Part List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 72. 9674LSY Transceiver Part List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 73. 9681LSY Transceiver Part List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 74. 9610LSY Transceiver Part List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 75. 9611LSY Transceiver Part List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 76. 9613LSY Transceiver Part List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 77. Handbooks usage according to System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 78. Technical Handbooks related to the specific configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 79. Handbooks related to the specific product SWP management and local product control . Tab. 80. Installation and LineUp Handbooks related to the specific configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 81. Handbooks common to all Alcatel Radio Transmission products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 82. Handbooks common to Alcatel Network Elements using 1320CT platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 83. Documentation on CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 84. Handbooks related to the products hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 85. Documentation on CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 86. IEC 950 Table 16: Overtemperature limits, Part 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 87. Label references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 88. Example of correspondence between CS and suffix + ICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 89. Hardware setting documentation cross references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 90. List of enclosed hardware setting documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 91. List of enclosed Annexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
368 370 377 387 414 415 425 429 433 435 447 453 455 459 467 468 468 469 469 470 470 471 471 490 496 507 510 511 513
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 13 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
14 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
QUICK GUIDE Chapter 1 Document Guide PRELIMINARY INFORMATION SECTION CONTENT SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
HANDBOOK GUIDE
514 PAGE 21 20 17 16
15 / 514
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION
a) Warranty Any warranty must be referred exclusively to the terms of the contact of sale of the equipment this handbook refers to. ALCATEL makes no warranty of any kind with regards to this manual, and specifically disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. ALCATEL will not be liable for errors contained herein or for damages, whether direct, indirect, consequential, incidental, or special, in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material. b) Information The product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for information purposes only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on the part of ALCATEL. c) Copyright Notification The technical information of this manual is the property of ALCATEL and must not be copied, reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent. d) Safety recommendations The safety recommendations here below must be considered to avoid injuries on persons and/or damage to the equipment: 1) Service Personnel Installation and service must be carried out by authorized people having appropriate technical training and experience necessary to be aware of hazardous operations during installation and service and of measures to avoid any danger to them, to any other people and to the equipment. Access to the Equipment Access to the Equipment in use must be restricted to Service Personnel only. Safety norms Recommended safety norms are indicated in this manual as described in para.19.3 on pages 484 on. Local safety regulations must be used if mandatory. Safety instructions in this handbook should be used in addition to the local safety regulations. In the case of conflict between safety instructions stated in this manual and those indicated in local regulations, mandatory local norms will prevail. Should not local regulations be mandatory, then safety norms in this manual will prevail.
2)
3)
e)
Service Personnel skill Service Personnel must have been an adequate technical training on telecommunications and in particular on the equipment this handbook refers to. Without an adequate training, reading this handbook and the associated handbooks indicated in para.18.2 on page 466 is usually not enough to properly install, operate and maintain equipment.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 16 / 514
QUICK GUIDE
N.B.
In the documentation on CDROM, this table represent hyperlinks to the referenced parts.
Tab. 1. Quick guide If you need immediate operative information on how to: GENERAL TOPICS get information on system documentation have a very short description of the system read chapter 18 on page 465 of this handbook read para.2.4 on pages 51 thru 62 of this handbook in this handbook, for: BaseBand and Transceiver shelves as a whole, read para.3.5 on page 129 units in BaseBand shelf, read para.3.6.1 on page 135 units in Transceiver shelf, read para.3.7.2 on page 156 units in FANS shelf, read para.3.9.1 & 3.9.2 on page 169 units in OPTINEX rack and ADM shelf, refer to handbooks cited in para.18.2.2 on page 471
logically configure a station (or change its configuration) and logically provision equipment boards
have details on system cabling
read chapter 4 starting on page 175 of this handbook in this handbook, for: common parts (frequency independent), read para.3.2 on page 122 frequency dependent items, refer to the specific chapter listed in Tab. 67. on page 414
get item P/Ns (LHR)
Tab. 1. continues ..
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 17 / 514
GENERAL TOPICS FOR INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND MAINTENANCE get information on safety, EMC, ESD norms and equipment labelling read chapter 19 on page 483 of this handbook in this handbook, for: TRU: read para.3.4 on page 128 SYSTEM CONTROLLER and FLASH CARD unit: read para.3.6.2 on page 140 SERVICE and ADDITIONAL para.3.6.3 on page 144 VOICE unit: read
get operative information regarding the units (connectors, leds, buttons, hardware setting)
RRACHANNEL: read para.3.6.4 on page 147 RRASTANDBY: read para.3.6.5 on page 149 MODEM: read para.3.6.6 on page 150 PSU and PSF: read para.3.6.7 on page 153 Additional Housekeeping unit: read para.3.6.8 on page 154 Transceiver units: read para.3.7.4 on page 158 Branching: read para.3.8 on page 168 FANS: read para.3.9.3 on page 171 Kit Loudspeaker: read para.3.6.9 on page 155
carry out unit hardware setting Tab. 1. continues ..
read para.20.2 on page 507 of this handbook
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 18 / 514
.. continues Tab. 1. If you need immediate operative information on how to:
.. continues Tab. 1. If you need immediate operative information on how to: INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING physically install and cable the equipment hardware get Installation Handbook (Ref.[E] on page 469) and proceed as specified by it
for: install or update Craft Terminals and/or equipments software SWP R.1.0, get relevant CT Operators Handbook (Ref.[C] on page 468 SWP R.2.0, get relevant CT Operators Handbook (Ref.[D] on page 468
and read read its QUICK GUIDE (same topics)
commission equipment
get Lineup Guide (Ref.[F] on page 469) and proceed as specified by it MAINTENANCE
provision and manage spare parts
carry out routine maintenance
carry out corrective maintenance
To find any other kind of information not listed in the above table, please start reading para.1.4 on page 23, and then search the information according to the handbook structure described.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 19 / 514
SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING

a) Please refer to Chapter 19 on page 483 to obtain details regarding following information: Compliance with European norms Safety rules: TOPIC General rules Dangerous Electrical Voltages WARNING LABEL ON EQUIPMENT
Harmful optical signals
Risk of explosion
Moving mechanical parts
Heatradiating mechanical parts Microwave radiations
Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges: TOPIC WARNING LABEL ON EQUIPMENT
Device sensitive to electrostatic discharges
b)
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms) Other Labels affixed to the Equipment
Identical or similar information on Personal Computer, WorkStation etc., other than ALCATELs, loaded with software applications described in this or other Handbooks, is supplied in the Constructors technical documentation.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 20 / 514
1 DOCUMENT GUIDE 1.1 Introduction

This chapter contains all information regarding this handbook and is organized as follows: Handbook applicability Purpose of the handbook Handbook structure Handbook history List of symbols and abbreviations herebelow on page 22 on page 23 on page 25 on page 29
1.2 Handbook applicability

This handbook applies to the following product-releases: PRODUCT 9640LSY (3.6 4.2 GHz) 9647LSY (4.4 5.0 GHz) 9662LSY (5.9 6.4 GHz) 9667LSY (6.4 7.1 GHz) 9674LSY (7.1 7.7 GHz) 9681LSY (7.7 8.7 GHz) 9610LSY (10 10.7 GHz) 9611LSY (10.7 11.7 GHz) 9613LSY (12.75 13.25 GHz) RELEASE 1.00.00 2.00.00 1.00.00 2.00.00 1.00.00 2.00.00 1.00.00 2.00.00 1.00.00 2.00.00 1.00.00 2.00.00 1.00.00 2.00.00 1.00.00 2.00.00 1.00.00 2.00.00 ANV P/N 3DB 00581 AAAA 3DB 04272 AAAA 3DB 00584 AAAA 3DB 04274 AAAA 3DB 00587 AAAA 3DB 04276 AAAA 3DB 00590 AAAA 3DB 04278 AAAA 3DB 00593 AAAA 3DB 04280 AAAA 3DB 00596 AAAA 3DB 04282 AAAA 3DB 04288 AAAA 3DB 00599 AAAA 3DB 04284 AAAA 3DB 02270 AAAA 3DB 04286 AAAA FACTORY P/N 522.171.110 522.171.120 522.171.210 522.171.220 522.171.310 522.171.320 522.171.410 522.171.420 522.171.510 522.171.520 522.171.610 522.171.620 522.171.920 522.171.710 522.171.720 522.171.810 522.171.820
in the following configurations:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
LHR Regenerator related WMSN (LHR + 1650SMC)
Please refer to para.18.2 on page 466 for further information.
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 21 / 514
1.3 Purpose of the handbook

This handbook belongs to the Customer Documentation set envisaged for the equipment specified in para. 1.2 on page 21. Please refer to chapter 18 on page 465 to have the list and description of such Customer Documentation set. With reference to equipment configuration stated in para.1.2 on page 21, this handbook provides the following pieces of information: system description on two levels: first level and detailed level, both from system, hardware and software points of view system Technical Specifications system hardware structure: item Part Numbers and equipping rules (provisioning) unit operative hardware description: access point description (usage of led, pushbuttons, switches and connectors for Customer use), connection rules, hardware setting options system cabling spare parts provisioning preventive maintenance procedures corrective maintenance and unit replacement procedures (N.B.) N.B. In any case, the C.T. Operators Handbook must be always available to the Operator in charge of the equipment troubleshooting and repair, as it contains the information necessary to carry out troubleshooting through the Craft Terminal.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 22 / 514
1.4 Handbook Structure

This handbook is composed by a main handbook and enclosed documents. Information is divided into the following main sections and levels as detailed in the table of contents:
MAIN HANDBOOK
N.B. A summary description of the contents is given at the beginning of each chapter. INFORMATIVE LEVEL OPERATIVE LEVEL
SECTION HANDBOOK GUIDE Chapter 1 Document Guide It contains all information regarding this handbook. Quick Guide It allows to access immediately the most frequently needed operative pieces of information contained in this handbook, in its enclosed documents and in other related handbooks.
SECTION DESCRIPTIONS It describes all the equipment general and detailed system features including its application in the telecommunication network. Furthermore, it supplies the equipment description and specifications. The description is organized in the following levels: Chapter 2 System Description It gives the firstlevel description of 9600LSY equipment in both LHR Regenerator and WMSN (LHR+1650SMC) configurations. The information given should be enough to understand the equipment composition and operation and to read the operative level chapters as well as the description second level Chapter 3 Physical Configuration It gives detailed operative information regarding LHR Regenerator configuration only: the equipments items (P/Ns, equipping rules, labels for remote inventory) their physical and logical position in the system the unit assembly/subassembly and front panel drawings, with the usage description of the access points (connectors, visual indicators, buttons) hardware setting description summary and operative information on characteristics of external interfaces Chapter 4 System Cabling It gives in detail information regarding the system cabling of the LHR Regenerator as well as that for the connections between LHR and 1650SMC; moreover it gives the pinout description of connectors for Customer usage
Chapter 5 Functional Description It gives the secondlevel description of 9600LSY equipment in the LHR Regenerator configuration. Reading this chapter is not necessary to carry out standard installation commissioning and maintenance activities. Chapter 6 Technical Specifications It supplies in detail the technical characteristics of the 9600LSY in LHR Regenerator configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
table continues
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 23 / 514
table continues .. continues MAIN
HANDBOOK
INFORMATIVE LEVEL SECTION MAINTENANCE
OPERATIVE LEVEL
Chapter 7 Maintenance It describes the routine and corrective maintenance of 9600USY equipment in the LHR Regenerator configuration.
SECTION FREQUENCY PLANS AND PART NUMBERS It is the frequencydependent part of the handbook. It includes the following chapters: Chapter 8 Introduction to section Frequency plans & part numbers It gives general information regarding the use of the subsequent chapters. Each one of the subsequent chapters x is devoted to a specific 96xxLSY product and includes two main paragraphs: x.1 96xxLSY part list: the Part Numbers and the Remote Inventory Labels of the frequencydependent items (Transceivers) are given; x.2 96xxLSY frequency plans: the various frequency plans envisaged are described. SECTION APPENDICES Chapter 18 Documentation Guide It contains all information regarding the Customer Documentation set this handbook belongs to.
Chapter 19 SafetyEMCESD norms and equipment labelling It describes the equipment labelling and the norms mandatory or suggested that must be considered to avoid injuries on persons and/or damage to the equipment.
SECTION HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION & ANNEXES Chapter 20 Hardware Setting Documentation & Annexes It lists the enclosed documents having P/N different from that of this handbook (they can be used also as annexes to other handbooks) and describes how to use the Hardware Setting Documents enclosed.
ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS
INFORMATIVE LEVEL a) OPERATIVE LEVEL documents related to hardware setting options of the units for which they are envisaged (branching drawings and
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
b)
documents describing branching branchingtranceivers connections)
configurations
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 24 / 514
1.5 Handbook history 1.5.1 List of the editions and modified parts
The following Tab. 2. indicates the handbook parts new and modified with respect to the previous edition. Legend: n = new part m = modified part blank= part unchanged
The revision bars on the tables rows indicate changes in the structure (e.g. new sections, or information shifted within the handbook) with respect to the previous edition. Tab. 2. Handbook history HANDBOOK EDITION HANDBOOK GUIDE 1. DOCUMENT GUIDE 01 n n m m 02 03 04 05
DESCRIPTIONS 2. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 2.1. Introduction 2.2. Introduction to the 9600 LSY Radio System Family 2.3. Introduction to system configurations 2.4. Hardware components 2.5. Configurations 2.6. Radio Transmission features 2.7. Signal Transmission 2.8. Synchronization 2.9. Equipment Control 3. PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION 3.1. Introduction 3.2. Part list 3.3. Rack and shelves summary 3.4. Top Rack Unit (TRU)

n n n n n n n n n n n n n
n m m m m m m m m m m m
m m
m m m m
3.5. Board provisioning and expansion guideline in BB & TR shelves 3.6. Base Band shelf 3.7. Transceiver shelf 3.8. Branching 3.9. FANS shelf and FANS assembled units table continues
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

n n n n n
n m m
m m m
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 25 / 514
Tab. 2. Handbook history HANDBOOK EDITION 4. SYSTEM CABLING 4.1. Introduction 4.2. Shelves connectors 4.3. Cable kits and cable types 4.4. Power supply distribution connections 4.5. Signal connections between shelves 4.6. ModemTransceiverBranching connections 4.7. External interfaces 5. FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 5.1. Introduction 5.2. Equipment Control Subsystem 5.3. Power supply subsystem 5.4. Baseband subsystem 5.5. Transceiver subsystem 5.6. Fans subsystem 6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 6.1. Introduction 6.2. System Characteristics 6.3. Transceiver Characteristics 6.4. Regenerator and Modem Characteristics 6.5. Branching interfaces 6.6. Protections 6.7. Environmental characteristics 6.8. Optical Safety MAINTENANCE 7. MAINTENANCE 7.1. Introduction 7.2. Warnings 7.3. Instruments and accessories 7.4. Alarm Description 7.5. Set of spare parts 7.6. Routine Maintenance 7.7. Corrective Maintenance
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
n n n n n n n n n n n n n
m m
m m
m m
m m

n n n n
n m m

n n n
m m

n n n n n n n n
n m m m m m m m m m
7.8. Faulty unit repair and Repair Form table continues
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 26 / 514

01
02 n
03
04
05
Tab. 2. Handbook history HANDBOOK EDITION

01 n n n n n n n
02 m m
03
04
05
FREQUENCY PLANS & PART NUMBERS 8. 9. INTRODUCTION TO SECTION 9640 LSY
m m m m m m m n m m
10. 9647 LSY 11. 9662 LSY 12. 9667 LSY 13. 9674 LSY 14. 9681 LSY 15. 9610 LSY 16. 9611 LSY 17. 9613 LSY APPENDICES 18. DOCUMENTATION GUIDE 18.1. Introduction 18.2. Productreleaseversion handbook 18.3. General on Alcatel Customer Documentation
19. SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING 19.1. Introduction 19.2. Compliance with European Norms 19.3. Safety Rules 19.4. Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms) 19.5. Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges 19.6. Suggestions, notes and cautions 19.7. Labels affixed to the Equipment HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION & ANNEXES 20. HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION & ANNEXES 20.1. Introduction 20.2. Hardware setting documents explanation 20.3. List of enclosed documents (N.B.) N.B.

n n n n n n n n m m n n n n n n n n n n n n n m m m m m
the list of the enclosed documents is not stated in this table. The enclosed documents are listed in Tab. 90. on page 511 and Tab. 91. on page 513.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 27 / 514
1.5.2 Notes on Ed.01ADRAFT

Ed.01A created on October 23, 2001 is the first NEITHER validated NOR officially released issue.
1.5.3 Notes on Ed.01

Ed.01 created on November 15, 2001 is the first validated and officially released issue.

Ed.02 created on April 18, 2002. The following main changes have been done: the handbook structure has been modified: please read para.1.4 (Handbook Structure) on page 23; in Chapter 3 Physical Configuration : Part List has been updated; descriptions regarding equipment provisioning and unit operative information have been updated and improved in Chapter 6 Technical Specifications : Branching Interface description has been added, and Environmental characteristics description has been improved Chapter 7 Maintenance has been improved with revised and fully new parts, in particular with regard to information relevant to Spare Part Set, Preventive Maintenance and Corrective Maintenance (troubleshooting and unit replacement procedures) the new Chapter 8 Documentation Guide has been updated to list and describe new handbooks in the new Chapter 9 SafetyEMCESD norms and equipment labelling : information regarding equipment labelling has been updated in Chapter 19 Hardware Setting Documentation & Annexes : the list of enclosed documents has been updated

Ed.03 created on September 27, 2002. The following main changes have been done: the handbook structure has been modified: please read para.1.4 (Handbook Structure) on page 23 throughout the handbook: new items added: Frequency Reuse kit, Kit Loudspeaker (P/N and operative information) elimination of High Power Transceivers important changes and improvements regarding Transceivers: operative information in chapters 3 Physical Configuration and 4 System Cabling description in chapter 5 Functional Description spare part list and fully new repair procedure in chapter 7 Maintenance in chapter 3 Physical Configuration circuit breaker values updated Chapter 6 Technical Specifications updated in section Frequency Plans & Part Numbers: new chapter for 9610LSY, new Transceiver for 9681LSY in Chapter 19 Hardware Setting Documentation & Annexes : the list of enclosed documents has been updated. Errors found in previous edition have been corrected. Revision bars point out major (listed above) and minor (not listed above) modifications with respect to Ed.02. Revision bars in correspondence of empty lines or empty table rows, point out parts eliminated or shifted in other places of the handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 28 / 514
1.6 List Of Symbols And Abbreviations

Tab. 3. List Of Symbols
N.B.
This Table Lists Some Symbols Whose Interpretation Could Be Doubtful. SYMBOL MEANING AND COMMENTS In this handbook it is not the division symbol. It means from .. to ... E.g.: <value1> <value2> means: from <value1> (included) to <value2> (included) A polarization symbol like this:
POLARIZATION can be assumed as either horizontal SYMBOLS Once you have decided a polarization (e.g.
or vertical H )
the opposite direction symbol will be opposite polarization (e.g. V
Tab. 4. List Of Abbreviations
ABBREVIATION A AC ACSE ADC ADM AE AF AGC AIS ALS AMI ANSI AOW API APS ASE ASIC AT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
MEANING Alternate Current Association Control Service Element Analog to Digital Converter Add Drop Multiplexer Access Enable Atomic Function Automatic Gain Control Alarm Indication Signal Automatic Laser Shutdown Alternate Mark Inversion American National Standard Institute Additional Order Wire Access Point Identifier Automatic Protection Switching Application Service Element Application Specific Integrated Circuit Attend alarm Far Terminal Alarm Asynchronous Transfer Mode Automatic Transmitter Power Control
ATL ATM ATPC
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 29 / 514
ABBREVIATION ATTD AUG AUn AUX ATTendeD Administrative Unit n (Order) AUXiliary B BB BBE BCA BER BIPx CAN CCDP CFRD C/I CK CMI CMISE CPU CRCn CRU CSW CTP DA DC DCC DCC/M DCC/R DCN DEFEC DEM DF DIV DM DS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
MEANING Administration Unit Group
Base Band Background Block Error Common Battery Dial Pulsing (Telephone Set) Bit Error Rate Bit Interleaved Parity x C Controller Area Network (communication protocol patented by Robert Bosch GmbH) CoChannel Dual Polarized (Frequency reuse) Component Failure Rate Date Carrier to Interference ratio Clock Code Mark Inversion Common Management Information Service Element Central Processor Unit Cyclic Redundancy Check n Clock Reference Unit Common SoftWare Connection Termination Point D Distant Alarm Direct Current Data Communication Channels (D1D12) Multiplex Section DCC (D4D12) Regenerator Section DCC (D1D3) Data Communication Network FEC Decoder Demodulator Dialog Failure Diversity Degraded Minute Defect Second Department of Trade and Industry Dual Tone MultiFrequency E
DTI DTMF
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 30 / 514
ABBREVIATION EB
MEANING Error Block Errored Block Count Equipment Controller Embedded Control Channel External Communication Service Equipment Craft Terminal Equipment Engineering Equipment Failure Electronic Industries Association ElectroMagnetic Compatibility Equipment Management Function Engineering Order Wire Equipment Protection Switching Error Second European Telecommunication Report European Telecommunication Standard European Telecommunication Standard Institute Early Warning Early Warning High Early Warning Low Excessive BER F Front End Far End Block Error Forward Error Correction (Code) Far End Receiver Failure Failure Unit Failure rate Failed Switch Request Count Failed Switch Request Duration G
EBC EC ECC ECS ECT EE EF EIA EMC EMF EOW EPS ES ETR ETS ETSI EW EWH EWL EXCBER FE FEBE FEC FERF FIT FR FSRC FSRD
GB GF GM HBER
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Ground Benign Ground Fixed Ground Mobile H High Bit Error Rate High level Data Link Control Heterofrequency (Radio system configuration) High Early Warning
HDLC HET HEW
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 31 / 514
ABBREVIATION HK HPT HPC HS HST ID IDU IEC IF IRC ISO ISPB ISSB ITUR ITUT LAN LBER LC LED LEW LHR LHRC LO LOF LOP LOS LPA LPT LS LSY MC MCF MDT MIR
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
MEANING HouseKeeping High order Path Connection High Speed Hot StandBy I IDentifier InDoor Unit International Electro technical Commission Intermediate Frequency International Radiotechnical Commission International Standard Organization Intra Shelf Parallel Bus Intra Shelf Serial Bus International Telecommunication Union Radiocommunication International Telecommunication Union Telecommunication L Local Area Network Low Bit Error Rate Loss of Configuration Light Emitting Diode Low Early Warning Long Haul indoor terminal Regenerator Long Haul indoor terminal Regenerator Compact Local Oscillator Loss Of Frame Loss Of Pointers Loss Of Signal Lower order Path Adaptation Lower order Path Termination Low Speed Long haul SYstem M Monitoring Channel Message Communication Function Mean Dawn Time Loss of incoming pulses Multi Level Coding Monolithic Microwave Integrated Circuit Modulator
High order Path Termination
MLC MMIC MOD
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 32 / 514
ABBREVIATION MS
MEANING Multiplex Section Multiplex Section Adaptation Multiplex Section Alarm Indication Signal Multiplex Section OverHead Multiplex Section Protection Multiplex Section Remote Defect Indication Multiplex Section Remote Error Indication Multiplex Section Termination Mean Time Between Failures Mean Time To Repair N Not Applicable Nearend Defect Second Network Element Nearend Errored Block Count Network Element Function Application Noise Figure Net Filter Discrimination Not Urgent Non Return to Zero Not Urgent O Office Craft Terminal OutDoor Unit Out of Frame Second OverHead Operation and Maintenance Russian Regulatory Body Out Of Frame Operation System Overflow Order Wire P Personal Computer Plesiocronus Digital Hierarchy Physical Interface Phase Locked Loop Performance Monitoring Path Overhead Protection Switch Actual
MSA MSAIS MSOH MSP MSRDI MSREI MST MTBF MTTR NA NDS NE NEBC NEFA NF NFD NG NRZ NURG OCT ODU OFS OH O&M OIRT OOF OS OVF OW PC PDH PI PLL PM POH PSA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 33 / 514
ABBREVIATION PSAC PSAD PSR PSU QAM QOS RAPS RC RCIM RCT RECT RES RF RFCOH RL RLTS ROSE RPI RPS RRA RRR RRT RS RSOH RSPI RST RTF RX SA SBL SC SD SDH SEMF
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
MEANING Protection Switch Count Protection Switch Request Power Supply Unit Q Quadrature Amplitude Modulation Quality Of Service R Radio Automatic Protection Switch Radio Controller Radio Channel Identifier Mismatch Remote Craft Terminal Remote Equipment Craft Terminal Radio Equipment and Systems Radio Frequency Radio Frame Complementary Overhead Received Level Received Level Threshold Second Remote Operation Service Element Radio Physical Interface Radio Protection Switching Radio Regenerator Adaptation Radio Relay Repeaters Radio Relay Terminals Regenerator Section Regenerator Section Overhead Radio Synchronous Physical Interface Regeneration Section Termination Remote Terminal Failure Receiver/Received S Service Alarm Security Block System Controller Space Diversity Synchronous Digital Hierarchy Synchronous Equipment Management Function Synchronous E1 Regeneration Section Severly Errored Seconds Synchronous Equipment Timing Source
Protection Switch Actual Duration
SERS SES SETS
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 34 / 514
ABBREVIATION SF
MEANING Signal Failure Sub Network Connection Protection Section Overhead SOH Failure Synchronous Physical Interface Synchronous Path Sink Synchronous Radio Synchronous Radio Modem (Assembly) for Repeater Synchronous Radio Modem (Assembly) for Terminal Synchronous Radio baseband (Assembly) for Terminal Synchronous Radio baseband (Assembly) for Repeater Synchronisation Status Message Standby Synchronous Transport Module N (Hierarchic level) 51 Mbit transmission bit rate Supervisory Unit Switch T TeleAlarms Turn Around Time Terminal Connector / Tandem Connection Transversal Electric Mode Trace Identifier Mismatch Transmitted Level Transmitted Level Threshold Second Transmission and Multiplexing Telecommunication Management Network Termination Point Telephone TRansceiver Top Rack Unit Trail Termination Point Tributary Unit n (Order) Tributary Unit Group n (Order) Transmitter/Transmitted U Unavailability Unpressurized Rectangular Waveguide Type Urgent Alarm Urban Haul split mount terminal Multiplexer
SNCP SOH SOHF SPI SPS SR SRMR SRMT SRST SRSR SSM STBY STMN STM0 SU SW TA TAT TC TEM TIM TL TLTS TM TMN TP TPH TR TRU TTP TUn TUGn TX U
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
UDR UG UHM
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 35 / 514
ABBREVIATION UHR USK UT VCn VCO VF VHM WADM WLT WST XPD XPIC XPI XPIF XPOL Stackable Unit Unavailability Time V Virtual Container n (Order) Voltage Controlled Oscillator Voice Frequency Virtual Hardware Machine W
MEANING Urban Haul split mount terminal Regenerator

Wireless Add and Drop Multiplexer Wireless Line Terminal Way Side Traffic X Cross Polar Discrimination Cross Polar Interference Cancelled Cross Polar Interference Cross Polar Improvement Factor Cross Polar/Polarization
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 36 / 514
DESCRIPTIONS
SECTION CONTENT Chapter 2 System Description Chapter 3 Physical Configuration Chapter 4 System Cabling Chapter 5 Functional Description Chapter 6 Technical Specifications
PAGE 39 121 175 215 315
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 37 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
38 / 514
2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 2.1 Introduction

This chapter gives the firstlevel description of 9600LSY equipment in the LHR configuration, and comprehends the following main paragraphs: para.2.2 on page 40 Introduction to the 9600LSY Radio System Family This paragraph explains briefly the characteristics of 9600LSY equipment family. Introduction to system configurations This paragraph introduces the system composition of the 9600LSY Radio System Family, LHR configuration. Hardware components This paragraph describes the different assemblies and shelves that can be used to compose the available configurations of 9600LSY family, LHR configuration. Configurations This paragraph describes in detail the different configurations of 9600LSY family, LHR configuration, taking into account the various peculiar aspects. Radio Transmission features This paragraph describes in detail the Radio Transmission features of 9600LSY family. Signal Transmission This paragraph describes in detail the Signal Transmission features of 9600LSY family. Synchronization This paragraph describes in detail the Synchronization features of 9600LSY family. Equipment Control This paragraph introduces the Equipment control features of 9600LSY family.
para.2.3 on page 47
para.2.4 on page 51
para.2.5 on page 63
para.2.6 on page 82
para.2.7 on page 97
para.2.8 on page 109
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 39 / 514
2.2 Introduction to the 9600LSY Radio System Family 2.2.1 Foreword

This paragraph explains briefly the characteristics and applications of the 9600LSY Radio System Family, and comprehends the following main paragraphs: para.2.2.2 herebelow para.2.2.3 on page 41 para.2.2.4 on page 42 para.2.2.5 on page 45 General 9600LSY basic configurations and Network Element types Main Features Network applications
2.2.2 General
The 9600LSY digital radio relay system belongs to the second generation of the Alcatel SDH (Synchronous Digital Hierarchy ) radio family that has been developed aiming to match the demand of high quality microwave transmission links and following the SDH standards defined by International Organizations as ITUT, ITUR and ETSI. Special attention concerning the network management standards and its integration into a SDH based network has been paid. Big efforts have been done to expand as much as possible the versatility of the new radio family and the full compatibility with the optical systems to ensure the utilization of the radio media as natural complement to the optical fibre transmission. A 9600LSY radio system can be in fact utilized either with multiplex section termination (MST) or regenerator section termination (RST) functionality, can be used for optical loop closures or for fibre optic backup, for spurs or for backbone links and, in general, in all the network interconnections where the advantages due to an easy installation, a fast commissioning operations and time and cost saving solution are requested. The family supports radio transmission of STM0 (51 Mbps) and STM1 (155 Mbps) signals as well STM4 (622 Mbps) or STM16 (2.4 Gbps) connections, using a proper number of radio frequency channels in various configurations. A full set of synchronous and plesiochronous interfaces is available. By means of the new 9600LSY family, Alcatel intends to answer the growing demand of transmission capacity either for traditional telephone services or for the new dataoriented services (including ATM + IP networks, LAN/WAN networks) or for the evolution of the cellular market. The Alcatel 9600LSY system architecture, based on a full indoor structure, covers all the frequency bands from 4 to 13 GHz in a complete set of equipment configurations from 2 to 8 channels in protected (N+1) or unprotected (N+0) radio configurations.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 40 / 514
2.2.3 9600LSY basic configurations and Network Element types

The 9600LSY Long Haul system is based on the following configurations:
a)
Regenerator (Network Element type LHR) This radio system is basically composed by a rack containing up to eight transceivers, eight modemodulators and eight RRA, and can be configured as follows: CONFIGURATION N+1 with/without occasional traffic N+0 MIN 1+1 2+0 MAX 7+1 8+0
b)
Regenerator Compact (Network Element type LHRC) This radio system is basically composed by one subrack containing up to two transceivers, two modemodulators and two RRA, and can be configured as follows: 1+0 Terminal Regenerator 1+1/2+0 Terminal Regenerator 1:1 (with occasional traffic) Terminal Regenerator 1+1 HST (Hot Stand By) Terminal Regenerator Wireless Multi Service Node (WMSN) This radio system consists of a Regenerator and operates together with the MUX of ALCATEL ADM family, named 1650SMC. The assembly is called WMSN (Wireless Multi Service Node).
c)
This handbook deals with the LHR and related WMSN configurations only. For LHRC please make reference to the specific handbook (that has a different P/N, see Tab. 77. on page 467).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 41 / 514
2.2.4 Main features

Th Alcatel 9600LSY family exploits the experience gained with the previous SDH generations of radio equipment and provides an innovative answer to the most recent market requirements: Total interworking with other kinds of network elements present in the network aiming to make the network independent from transmission medium. Full integration in the Alcatel network management platform able to manage different types of network elements belonging to different technologies: OMSN, LT, OMSG, microwave radios, optical systems and submarine systems. 9600LSY is included in Alcatel network release plan, guaranteeing consistent feature support and allowing, in case of existing SDH NEs, not to change TMN platform, thus saving investments already done. Double identity of the equipment that can be inserted in the SDH network as: Radio regenerator to be easily introduced in transparent mode without affecting any modifications to the network. Wireless Multi Service Node (WMSN) One Side or Two Sides that can be considered as full performance OMSN or LT with different synchronous physical interface: radio instead of fibre.
Transmission capacity easily selectable between STM0 and STM1 according to the bandwidth availability and, if necessary, following an incremental approach. Bit rate capacity: the 9600LSY family allows the transmission of STM1 signals for all frequency bands from 4 to 13 GHz and STM0 for 7, 8 and 13 GHz bands, according to the customer needs. The system allows an easy migration from STM0 to STM1 (only hardware and software presettings are necessary) when the traffic and the band requirements are going to change. Auxiliary traffic can be added by means of RFCOH bytes corresponding to one 2 Mbit/s Way Side Traffic in STM1 case. Way Side Traffic in STM0 case is not available. Usage of 128 QAM as standard modulation. The high number of levels utilised allows to obtain a high spectrum efficiency that permits the utilisation of the following channel spacing : 28 MHz, 29 MHz, 29.65 MHz, 30 MHz and 40 MHz for STM1 capacity 14 MHz for STM0 capacity. Adoption of frequency reuse technique as option for all the supported frequency bands, allowing the transmission of 2x STM1 per channel: the way utilised to improve the spectrum efficiency is based on the CoChannel Dual Polarisation (CCDP) technique. This technique, consisting in transmitting two different STM1 channels on each radio channel utilising two different antenna polarisation, has been consolidated in the recent past by means of field proven results. In order to meet ITUR transmission quality objectives also in unfavourable propagation condition causing XPD degradation, Crosspolar Interface Canceller (XPIC) device is adopted to minimise the negative effects of the crosspolar interference signal, assuring an improvement factor of approx. 18 dB to the cross polar antenna discrimination. The function is implemented in an optional additional card to be plugged on each couple of demodulator boards of reused channel. Particular attention has been paid to the scalability of the system, allowing the extension of a deployed alternate polar (AP) system to a CCDP reused system only when necessary and consequently to a progressive investment. Two possible ways of extension and configurations are available: CCDP configurations using 2 protection channels up to 2 x (8+1) CCDP configurations using only 1 protection channel up to 7 working channels plus 1 standby.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 42 / 514
The frequency reuse is applicable to STM1 streams in all the frequency bands and with all the channel spacing foreseen in the ITUR recommendations, while it is not available in case of STM0 transmission.
Space Diversity reception as countermeasure against fading exploiting the new baseband combiner. Further powerful multipath countermeasures: multichannel hitless switch, transversal equaliser, configurable ATPC functionality, multileved coded modulation. High reliability in order to minimise field intervention. Fully software configurable terminals with software download capabilities. Protections: Different protection types are available for the 9600LSY systems: Radio Protection and Network Protection: Radio Protection (RPS). The high capacity long haul radio systems utilises, to perform the automatic protection of the radio channels, a multichannel switching device moving the channel to be protected on a spare bearer (standby channel). The function, implemented on the RX side is N+1 hitless type; it is transparent to other types of protection and in particular to network protection. The switch supplies the protection of the link either in case of failure of the equipment or for improving the quality performances of the link. In this last case the Early Warning criteria are utilised to achieve an error free changeover. Network Protection. For network protection the radio system in regenerator section configuration (RRA) will be fully transparent to APS channel and criteria allowing the OMSNs present in the network to perform the network protection activity. On the other hand the radio system in multiplex section configuration (WMSN) implements, as embedded function, network protection features like Trail protection and subnetwork protection (APS, SNCP etc.).
High integration of the full indoor structure with very compact size: configurations up to 8+0/7+1 terminal are housed inside a single N3 ETSI rack.
The characteristics Alcatel 9600LSY are compliant with current SDH standards defined within the International Organisations ITUT, ITUR and ETSI, with special attention to those standards concerning the network management and its integration into SDH based network.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 43 / 514
The 9600LSY series features the 128 QAM modulation offering excellent spectrum efficiency and covering the following frequency bands:
Tab. 5. 9600LSY radio family SYSTEM 9640 LSY (L4) 9647 LSY (U4) 9662 LSY (L6) 9667 LSY (U6) 9674 LSY 9681 LSY 9610 LSY 9611 LSY 9613 LSY FREQUENCY (GHz) 3.64.2 4.45.0 5.96.4 6.47.1 7.17.7 7.78.7 1010.7 10.711.7 12.75 13.25
In general, the equipment of this family may work, in case of for STM1 stream, in cochannel frequency reuse operation (CCDP), utilizing the XPIC optional kit, allowing the transmission of 2 x STM1 signals on a single RF channel. Reused configurations are not foreseen for STM0 capacity. In the following Tab. 6. the available users interfaces are listed depending on the 9600LSY station types (Regenerator or WMSN). Tab. 6. 9600LSY user interfaces REGENERATOR INTERFACES STM1 X STM0 X (STM1 subequipped) X (STM1 subequipped) STM1 X WMSN STM0 X (STM1 subequipped) X (STM1 subequipped) X (1 x 45 Mbit/s) X (1 x 34 Mbit/s) X (21 x 2 Mbit/s)
STM1 ELECTRICAL G.708
STM1 OPTICAL S1.1 G.957 STM1 OPTICAL L1.1 G.957 STM1 OPTICAL L1.2 G.957 140 Mbit/s 3 x 45 Mbit/s 3 x 34 Mbit/s
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
X X X X X X X
G.703 G.703 G.703 G.703
63 x 2 Mbit/s
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 44 / 514
2.2.5 Network applications of the 9600LSY equipment

The new generation of radio transmission system Alcatel 9600LSY family is specifically designed to provide a radio solution suitable for a large number of applications, including: New full radio infrastructures Closure of STM1, STM4 and STM16 fiber optic rings Backup to fiber optic trunk links Radio spurs of fiber/radio at STMn level Utilization as backbone link in national trunk networks. Interconnection of cellular networks with public switched networks.
In the following figures, some typical network applications are depicted.
RADIO REG. LT
RADIO REPEAT.
RADIO REG. LT
Backbone, fiber backup NxSTM1 (RRA, repeater)

WLT WLT
RADIO REG. LT
RADIO REPEAT.
RADIO REG. LT
Backbone, fiber backup NxSTM1 (WLT, repeater)
Fig. 1. Backbone
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 45 / 514
Ring closure STM16 2x(8+0 / 8+1)

RADIO REG. RADIO REG.
ADM
ADM
ADM
RADIO REG.
RADIO REG.
Radio spurs 1+1/3+1

Fig. 2. Ring clousure and radio spurs
RADIO REG.
RADIO REG. ADM
RADIO REG.
ADM
ADM
ADM
Ring closure STM4 (4+0 / 4+1east west)
Fig. 3. Ring clousure

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 46 / 514
2.3 Introduction to system configurations 2.3.1 Foreword

This paragraph introduces the system composition of the 9600LSY Radio System Family, and comprehends the following main paragraphs: para.2.3.2 herebelow para.2.3.3 on page 50 Station types and configurations Channel configurations and protection schemes
The handbook part that should be read before starting this paragraph is: para.2.2 on page 40 Introduction to the 9600LSY Radio System Family
2.3.2 Station types and configurations

Station types A complete terminal station utilizing a maximum of 8 radio channels is housed inside a single ETSI rack that, depending on the customer request, can be 2200 or 2000 mm high. The 1800 mm rack cannot be utilized. The structure of the equipment has been developed aiming to obtain a very simple structure, with an integration as high as possible and reducing at the minimum the number of different functional blocks and, inside each of them, reducing the number of different units and cards. These concepts have led to obtain an equipment structure only composed by the following functional blocks (see Fig. 4. on page 48): a radio assembly containing all the radio frequency and medium frequency circuits (transceiver shelf) a baseband subrack containing all the unit devoted to the modulation and demodulation functions, RRA functions, services management, radio protection switching and system controlling. a branching unit deployed at the top and bottom sides of the transceiver subrack. a Top Rack Unit (T.R.U.) for D.C.. primary power distribution and battery protection. a fan subrack, foreseen for all the configurations. a compact ADM 1650SMC with its additional fan subrack, that , when required, can be installed into the rack to perform all the functionalities managed by a multiplex section.
The configurations are easily expansible, passing from a lower one to a higher one simply adding, inside each functional block, the units needed to support the new radio channels utilized. In particular, the branching unit is equipped in advance with the channel circulators needed for the expansion up to 7+1, to consent to expand the radio terminal just connecting the RF filters to the branching, without the necessity to disassemble the branching itself. Thanks to a new design of narrow RF filters , the frequency reuse, available in all the frequency bands, can be obtained avoiding the utilization of the 3 dB hybrids for all the bands and all the frequency spacings, including 28 MHz. Despite to the new high integration of the LSY systems and thanks to volume decrease obtained on the branching, the space diversity optional functionality is supplied in all the configuration up to 7+1/8+0.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 47 / 514
TRU
ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING (optional)
TRU 1650 SMC SHELF RRA/MODEM AND ACCESS AREA (BASEBAND SHELF) Rx BRANCHING FANS FOR 1650SMC
RRA/MODEM AND ACCESS AREA (BASEBAND SHELF) Rx BRANCHING
FANS FOR RRA/MODEM
TRANSCEIVER SHELF
TRANSCEIVER SHELF
Tx BRANCHING REGENERATOR
Tx BRANCHING WMSN
Fig. 4. Regenerator and WMSN station rack configuration The Alcatel 9600LSY systems offer a full set of system configuration and protection schemes to meet any specific need in a network with a high degree of flexibility. Two are the envisaged station types, each supplying different functionality: Regenerator station (RST): is needed when the RSOH termination and MSOH transparency are requested. I/O network interface is STM1 electrical or optical. Multiplex station (MST): is necessary when a Wireless Multiservice Node (WMSN) (one side or two sides) has to be implemented. In this case the MST station is used at the terminal ends of the radio link and it gives the possibility to provide synchronous STM1 electrical and optical interfaces and plesiochronous 140 Mbit/s, 3x45 Mbit/s, 3x34 Mbit/s, 63x2 Mbit/s interfaces. It is possible to implement a full multiplex section features like synchronization, SOH termination, network protection (SNCP/I, SNCP/N and linear MSP), VCs cross connection, tributary adddrops.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 48 / 514
The maximum number of plesiochronous interfaces that are alternatively allowed by 1650SMC are as follows:
up to 3 cards 4x140 Mb/s. In this case the limitation is introduced by the LSY radio system that can transmit up to 8 x STM1 channels. up to 3 cards 3x34 Mb/s , utilizing 3x STM1 (or 3+1 STM1 in case of protection) channels radio side. up to 3 cards 3x34 Mb/s, utilizing 3x STM1 (or 3+1 STM1 in case of protection) channels radio side. up to 3 cards 21x2 Mb/s , utilizing 1x STM1 (or 1+1 STM1 in case of protection) channels radio side.
In the last three cases, if a single stream 34 Mb/s or 45 Mb/s or 21x2 Mb/s is required, an underequipped STM1 is utilized toward the radio baseband and a STM0 can be adopted for transmission on air. Station configurations The 9600LSY family allows the radio transmission of both STM1 and STM0 utilising protected and unprotected heterofrequency configurations N+0, N+1 type or 2x (N+1) CCDP. The basic configurations are named as follows: Long Haul extendible version N+1/N+2/N+0 terminal regenerator configuration (LHR) Long Haul extendible version N+1/N+2/N+0 terminal WMSN configuration (LHR + 1650SMC)
The high integration level allows to provide several types of configurations allowing to address different network applications : 7+1 8+0 7+1 8+0 Terminal regenerator Terminal regenerator Terminal WMSN Terminal WMSN in 1 ETSI rack in 1 ETSI rack in 1 ETSI rack in 1 ETSI rack
An already operating terminal regenerator can be reconfigured as a terminal WMSN simply adding a 1650SMC device to the radio regenerator equipment. Each configuration is easily expansible to a higher capacity just adding the foreseen expansion kits.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 49 / 514
2.3.3 Channel configurations and protection schemes

The LHR system can interface from two up to eight channels (STM0/STM1 Electrical or Optical signals and the corresponding Radio parts) and up to eight WST channels. The system configurations allowed are with Radio Protection Switching (N+1 without/with Occasional Traffic) or without Radio Protection Switching (N+0), according to the following table: Tab. 7. LHR Terminal Regenerator System Configurations SYSTEM CONFIGURATION NR. of channels N+0 CH 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 unpr.= unprotected 2+0 3+0 4+0 5+0 6+0 7+0 8+0 N+1 CH 1+1 2+1 3+1 4+1 5+1 6+1 7+1 prot.= protected N+1 & Occasional (1:N) CH 1+1 & Occ. 2+1 & Occ. 3+1 & Occ. 4+1 & Occ. 5+1 & Occ. 6+1 & Occ. 7+1 & Occ. Occ.= occasional ALL max WST 2 unpr. or 1 prot. 3 unpr. or 1 prot.+1 unpr. 4 unpr. or 1 prot.+2 unpr. 5 unpr. or 1 prot.+3 unpr. 6 unpr. or 1 prot.+4 unpr. 7 unpr. or 1 prot.+5 unpr. 8 unpr. or 1 prot.+6 unpr.
In N+0 configurations, channels are without protection. In N+1 configurations, channel 0 is always the standby channel. In N+1 & Occasional configurations (also known as 1:N protection architecture), channel 0 carries the occasional traffic, that is cut off whenever it becomes the recovery channel for any (faulty) of the protected channels. As indicated in Tab. 7. above, the WST configuration is independent from N+0 / N + 1 / 1:N system configuration. The couple of radio channels which carry both the protected service channels and WST ones (if any) is defined via software. These channels can be chosen among the following five couples: Tab. 8. Couples of Radio Channels that can be used for protected service channels and WST CHx 0 0 1 1 8 N.B. CHy 1 9 2 9 9
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Further information regarding protection schemes is given in para.5.2.1.5 on page 233.
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 50 / 514
2.4 Hardware components 2.4.1 Foreword

This paragraph describes the different assemblies and shelves that can be used to compose the available configurations of 9600LSY family, and comprehends the following main paragraphs: para.2.4.2 herebelow para.2.4.3 on page 52 para.2.4.4 on page 54 para.2.4.5 on page 58 para.2.4.6 on page 61 para.2.4.7 on page 62 para.2.4.8 on page 62 OPTINEX Rack and Top Rack Unit Transceiver subrack Baseband subrack ADM 1650SMC FAN Subrack System wiring Installation materials
As far as Branching configurations are concerned, refer to para.2.5.5 on page 77. The handbook part that should be read before starting this paragraph is: para.2.3 on page 47 Introduction to system configurations
2.4.2 OPTINEX Rack and Top Rack Unit

The OPTINEX rack has been designed to be used in all the new applications of optical and radio solutions thanks to the high room availability needed for the continuously increasing number of cable connections. The rack is available in two different heights: 2200 and 2000 mm. They both can be used either for regenerator or WMSN terminals. In fact, also the 2000mm version can host the terminals including the 1650SMC ADM and its fan unit. In general, OPTINEX rack can house 19 and 21 subracks. They must be compliant with ETSI 300 1193 standard. Using 19 subracks they must be installed utilizing mechanical adaptors. However, in the case of 9600LSY radios, the two main subracks (transceiver and baseband) are 21 wide, so they do not need any adapter to be installed in the rack. In the 9600LSY application, OPTINEX rack is usually supplied with the TRU unit (see para.3.4 on page 128). For special Customer needs, OPTINEX rack can be also supplied without the TRU unit. This handbook gives no detailed information on OPTINEX rack. For this purpose, please refer to OPTINEX rack specific documentation (see para.18.2.2.1 on page 471).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 51 / 514
2.4.3 Transceiver subrack

2.4.3.1 Mechanical assembly The transceiver mechanical assembly has the following dimensions: 530 mm (w) x 470 mm (h) x 240 mm (d) A complete view of the structure, fully equipped with 8 transceivers, is shown in Fig. 5.
Fig. 5. Transceiver subrack Each transceiver module is inserted in a vertical dedicated slot. The coaxial connections with Rx and Tx branching units are located at the top and bottom positions of each transceiver. Each module is equipped with the following units: Transmitter Receiver Tx Local Oscillator Rx Local Oscillator DC/DC converter
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 52 / 514
2.4.3.2 Transceiver block diagram A simple block diagram, illustrating the main functions performed by transceiver module, is shown in the following Fig. 6.
Fig. 6. Single channel transceiver block diagram The transmitter includes an IF amplifier, a SSB up converter, a local oscillator and a RF power amplifier. The utilization of a high rejection SSB upconverter permits to avoid the use of a RF filter at the output, allowing a wideband utilization of the unit.
The Automatic Transmitted Power Control (ATPC) function is included in the transceiver in order to decrease the Tx power output and dissipation in case of normal propagation and to push the maximum power up in deep fading conditions. This function may be disabled and the level of the transmitted RF power can be manually set by Craft Terminal configuration. The receiver includes a low noise RF preamplifier, an automatic imagine rejection down converter, an IF filter, a main amplifier with AGC and a local oscillator. A space diversity receiver, to be used in junction with a baseband signal combiner, is also available as countermeasure to the selective fading due to the multipath propagation of the signal. The advantages obtained by the baseband combiner utilization are mainly due to a higher reliability, thanks to the adopted digital technology, to the possibility of recovering very high delays between the two received signals and to the very reduced signature of the combined signal.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 53 / 514
2.4.4 Baseband subrack

The baseband subrack is used both in regenerator terminal stations and in WMSN stations. In the first case it is the sole baseband equipment installed in the rack; in the second it has to be associated with 1650SMC device that has to be installed in the upper right area of the rack just above the baseband subrack. It is mainly subdivided in three different areas: the upper area (access area) is devoted to host the interface connectors of WST , Service channels and remote alarms. in the centre of the subrack the channeldepending units (RRA and Modems, up to ten) are accommodated, together with the two common units : System Controller (SC) and the Service unit. in the bottom part, the DC/DC converters for supplying the d.c. voltages to the RRAModem units are allocated just under the relevant powered units. Two battery filters (including the DC/DC converters supplying the DC power for the common units ) are also installed in this area. 2.4.4.1 Mechanical assembly The physical dimensions of the subrack are: 490 mm (w) x 500 mm (h) x 250 mm (d). In the following Fig. 7. , the baseband subrack is shown.
Fig. 7. Baseband subrack equipped for 7+1/8+0 configuration

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 54 / 514
2.4.4.2 Regenerator Terminal Block Diagram Hereafter, the block diagram relevant to a single channel is pointed out.
REGENERATOR
RRA BOARD MODEM BOARD
TX STM1 ELET./OPT. INTERFACE RRA HTL SW RFCOH MODEM MODEM RX RT
AUX. SERV.
ATPC
DCCR
Aux.SERV. CH. 2x2 Mb/s V batt.
SERVICE & ATPC
WST
SERVICE UNIT
SYSTEM CONTROLLER
F QB3
DC/DC CONVERTER
ECT
OS
Fig. 8. Single channel regenerator block diagram The baseband subrack do not allow the protection neither of the physical interface (optical or electrical) of the channel, neither of the RRA function, because the embedded switching section, included inside each RRA unit is inserted between the RRA and modem function and therefore it protects only the radio section (modem and transceiver). See next Fig. 9.
BASEBAND SUBRACK
CH1
O/F int
RRA1
MODEM 1
TRANSCEIVER 1
HITLESS SWITCH
CH2
O/F int
RRA2
MODEM 2
TRANSCEIVER 2
CH3
O/F
RRA3
MODEM 3
TRANSCEIVER 3
CH0
O/F
RRA STBY
MODEM STBY
TRANSCEIVER STBY
(occasional)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 9. Baseband functional protection scheme
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 55 / 514
Fig. 10. herebelow indicates the slot position of the baseband subrack where the units can be installed in the various radio configurations. CONNECTOR AREA
SERVICE CEC
NOT USED
E STBY RRA
RRA SYSTEM CONTROLLER MODEM
MM
POWER SUPPLYSUPPL Y
CONTROLLE R
NOT USED
BATTERY FILTER
FILTER
Fig. 10. Baseband board positions In the following, the main characteristics of each unit is reported. 2.4.4.3 RRA board Performs the following main functions : STM1 bidirectional interface, electrical or optical selectable by means of interchangeable plugins Extraction/Insertion RSOH line side to/from Aux. Service Board Hitless Switch functionality. Just one unit has been developed for utilization with both STM1 and STM0 capacity. Each RRA unit is equipped with an embedded STM1 electrical interface. As an option, a S 1.1 STM1 optical interface can be used instead. This optical interface is realized by a plugin unit that can be installed in the RRA through the front panel. 2.4.4.4 RRA Standby board The unit performs the same functionalities of RRA board but, moreover, the hitless switch circuits (Tx/Rx distributors and a switching logic unit) are is installed on board and dedicated to the radio section protection. The protection supplied is N+1 type and it is also utilized in 1+1 configuration . Only one RRA STBY has been developed for utilization with both STM1 and STM0 capacity.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 56 / 514
2.4.4.5 Modem unit Performs the following main functions: Terminal modulator Terminal demodulator XPIC Baseband signal combiner Two different 128 QAM modems have been developed, according to the two capacities that can be transmitted: STM1 Modem with one 2 Mbit/s WST service stream: to be used in both alternate and copolar frequency arrangements with all the spacings including 28 MHz. The STM0 Modem without WST service stream: utilized in 7 , 8 and 13 GHz bands with 14 MHz channel spacing in both alternate and copolar frequency arrangements. Each modem can be equipped with an optional plugin board . This board gives the access to the IF signals necessary to the demodulator for XPIC or for Space Diversity functionalities. In case of presence of both functions the modem must be equipped with two identical plugin boards. 2.4.4.6 Service Unit The Service board provides an external access to the auxiliary service channels, utilizing SUBD connectors in the subrack connector area. Moreover the unit manages the ATPC functionality. Service unit consents the terminal to transmit one WST 2 Mb/s service stream in Radio Frame Complementary OverHead in protected way on channels x and y (that can be chosen among the couples specified in Tab. 8. on page 50), and contains the logic switching unit. The WST interface is present on the unit front panel. The accesses to the other WST service streams that can be transmitted one for each channel in nonprotected way are in the connector area. 2.4.4.7 System Controller The S.C. is devoted to the equipment management. It exchanges alarms, commands and management information with the other units of the equipment and provides the following interfaces for local and remote management: Channel communication for TMN utilizing a QB3 interface (BNC connector) info model based F interface (RS232 toward the local PC) (SUBD 9 pin connector) towards Local Craft Terminal QECC interface for remote management through DCC channels. 2.4.4.8 Additional Housekeeping unit This optional unit (equipped as depicted in Fig. 4. on page 48) increases by 18 the number of Housekeeping inputs available. 2.4.4.9 Power Supply PSU units are grouped in 2units groups (i.e. PSU0+PSU1, PSU2+PSU3, ...). Each PSU pair converts and then distributes, through the backpanel, power supply to the correspondent pair of RRA, whereas each PSU board supplies only the associated MODEM board (i.e. PSU0 supplies only MODEM0 board, etc.) If not utilized, the P.S. slots are provided with a front plate cover. Each P.S. gets the primary voltage from both batteries, connected in parallel. The P. S. units supply the secondary power voltage to all the units starting from the primary voltage: 48 to 60 Vdc ( 20%); The system can also be powered by batteries with different voltage: 24 Vdc ( 20%). In this case, onpurpose designed DC/DC converters are available and have to be installed in the lower area of the rack.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
2.4.4.10 Battery filter Two battery filters, located in the lower side positions of the subrack, supply the DC power to the common units (System Controller, Service) in 1+1 protected way.
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 57 / 514
2.4.5 ADM 1650SMC

2.4.5.1 WMSN rack configuration
When the Wireless Multi Service Node functionality is requested, an additional 1650SMC ADM has to be installed in the upper position of the LSY rack, just above the baseband regenerator subrack . WMSN provide the mapping functionality (STM1 frame creation), synchronization management and tributary adddrop, network protection and VCs crossconnection.
Fig. 11. WMSN terminal rack equipped with 1650SMC ADM 2.4.5.2 ADM 1650SMC mechanical assembly A detailed view of the 1650SMC adddrop multiplexer is shown in Fig. 12.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 12. 1650SMC add drop multiplexer
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 58 / 514
2.4.5.3 WMSN block diagram In Fig. 13. , the block diagram of the MST functionality, relevant to a single channel, is shown.
Fig. 13. MST single channel functional block diagram This configuration, in particular, gives the possibility to manage up to 8 STM1 channels lineside and to transmit them radio side with or without radio protection, in the following configurations: Up to 7+1 or 8+0 configuration in one direction (OS). The obtained functionality is the one corresponding to a Line Terminal (LT). Up to 4+0 or 4+1 configuration in two different directions (TS). The terminal is configured as a Wireless Add Drop Multiplexer . The 1650SMC equipment consist of the following subsystem units: Compact ADM Access module Auxiliary and overhead Power supply The Compact ADM is built upon a matrix that can accept, through an access module providing the physical interface for the asynchronous or synchronous signals, a maximum of 63x2 Mb/s, 3x34 Mb/s, 3x45 Mb/s, 140 Mb/s or 155 Mb/s streams. Inside the ADM, a synchronization unit provides the timing reference needed by all the components of the network element, with a max. daily drift of 0.37 ppm. A control subsystem realizes the Synchronous System Management Function (SEMF), according with ITUT G.783 recommendation. The subsystem operates with a double controlling system utilizing an Equipment Controller (EC) for DCC networking and a Shelf Controller (SC) for alarm detection and reporting, performance monitoring and equipment protection switching.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
A wide range of auxiliary service channels is offered according to SDH standards utilizing SDH and POH bytes. These bytes are used for alignment word, parity check, network management operations, performance monitoring; some data and orderwire channels are available to the user.
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 59 / 514
The unit utilizes a power supply distributed architecture where the 48/60 V battery voltage is distributed to all the cards and here is DC/DC converted to the voltages necessary to each card.
Two batteries can be used at the input, with automatic selection on the one with higher voltage. The distribution is protected against single converter failure. This handbook gives no detailed information on 1650SMC equipment. For this purpose, please refer to 1650SMC specific documentation (see para.18.2.2.2 on page 471) with the following exception:
In the application for 9600LSY, the FAN SHELF used for 1650SMC is not that described in the 1650SMC documentation, but that described in this handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 60 / 514
2.4.6 FANS Subrack

The usage of the fan unit inside the rack is mandatory to respect Safety international standards and the utilization is compulsory in all the system configurations, either in regenerator and WMSN case. The FANS subrack is developed to be used both in regenerator and in WMSN configurations. In the first case it is installed only between the baseband subrack and the transceiver assembly, just above the receiving branching. In the second case a second fan subrack is moreover installed in the higher part of the rack, just under the 1650 MC unit. The subrack, 600mm wide and 50 mm high, can contain one or two subunits with 4 fans each as shown in the Fig. 14. herebelow.
SUBUNIT A
SUBUNIT B
Fig. 14. FANS Subrack As a general rule, a subunit must be equipped when there are boards over their ventilation area. Further information on equipping rules are given in para.3.9 on page 169.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 61 / 514
2.4.7 System wiring

a) Internal connections Four different connection kits have been designed to cover all the needed system configurations: Common kit This cable kit is utilized in all the configurations in quantity 1. It includes the cables for : Can bus Unit presence Rack lamps Battery cables Channel dedicated kit It includes all the connections among the units relevant to each single channel. It has to be foreseen with quantity equal to the total number of radio channels present in the terminal, including the spare channel. Two different codes are present in this category: one for channels without space diversity, a second one for channels with space diversity. Optional kit for reused channels It includes the cables needed for the frequency reuse operation. They are the IF cables and RF cables for the synchronization of the Rx local oscillators. One kit is used for one couple of reused channels. Two different codes are envisaged: one kit foresee short length cable needed for reused channels connection inside the same rack. The second must be used when the interconnections are relevant to two different racks. Interconnection cables to 1650SMC Three dedicated cable kits have been developed for the interconnection from the radio regenerator to the 1650SMC unit: Common part cable kit (including rack lamp cable) 1+1/2+0 basic cable kit (signal cables) 1 cable kit for one extension channel (signal cables, one for each added channel besides 1+1/2+0))
b)
External connections Main signal interfaces of the terminal are present on the front panel of each RRA unit. Alarm interconnections are directly present in the access area of baseband subrack and no distributor board is foreseen neither in baseband nor in TRU subrack.
2.4.8 Installation materials

This handbook gives no detailed information on Installation materials, as well as on Installation procedures and Commissioning procedures and related Acceptance Test documents. For this purpose, please refer to specific documents REF. [E] and [F] on page 469.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 62 / 514
2.5 Configurations 2.5.1 Foreword

This paragraph describes in detail the different configurations of 9600LSY family taking into account the various peculiar aspects, and comprehends the following main paragraphs: para.2.5.2 herebelow para.2.5.3 on page 68 para.2.5.4 on page 76 para.2.5.5 on page 77 Station configurations Radio channel configurations System configuration for network solutions Branching configurations
As far as Fan subrack configurations are concerned, refer to para.2.4.6 on page 61. The handbook parts that should be read before starting this paragraph are: para.2.3 on page 47 para.2.4 on page 51 Introduction to system configurations Hardware components
2.5.2 Station configurations

The 9600LSY family allows the radio transmission of both STM1 and STM0 utilizing protected and unprotected heterofrequency configurations N+0, N+1 or 2x (N+1) CCDP type. Several types of configurations are available, allowing to address different network applications . Referred to the maximum rack implementation, the list shows the widest allowed configurations: 7+1 8+0 7+1 8+0 2x(7+1) Terminal regenerator Terminal regenerator Terminal WMSN Terminal WMSN Terminal regenerator or WMSN CCDP in 1 ETSI rack in 1 ETSI rack in 1 ETSI rack in 1 ETSI rack in 2 ETSI racks
The complete list of the possible configurations foreseen for the 9600LSY family is hereafter indicated, subdivided in several blocks: a) Regenerator configuration utilizing copolar branching solution: CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
9600LSY REG. 1+1 9600LSY REG. 2+1 9600LSY REG. 3+1 9600LSY REG. 4+1 9600LSY REG. 5+1 9600LSY REG. 6+1 9600LSY REG. 7+1 9600LSY REG. 2+0 9600LSY REG. 3+0 9600LSY REG. 4+0 9600LSY REG. 5+0 9600LSY REG. 6+0 9600LSY REG. 7+0 9600LSY REG. 8+0
1 RACK 1 NETWORK ELEMENT 1 RADIO PROTECTION CHANNEL (only in N+1) 1 POLARIZATION PER RACK
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 63 / 514
b)
Regenerator configuration utilizing alternatepolar branching solution: AP AP AP AP AP AP AP AP AP AP AP AP AP AP
1 RACK 1 NETWORK ELEMENT 1 RADIO PROTECTION CHANNEL (only in N+1) 4 CHANNELS MAX ON H POLARIZATION 4 CHANNELS MAX ON V POLARIZATION
c)
Regenerator configuration utilizing single protection channel, installed into a single rack and with alternatepolar branching solution: 1STBY 1STBY 1STBY 1STBY 1STBY 1STBY 1STBY 1STBY 1STBY 1STBY 1STBY 1STBY 1STBY 1STBY
9600LSY REG. 1+1 FREQUENCY REUSE 9600LSY REG. 2+1 FREQUENCY REUSE 9600LSY REG. 3+1 FREQUENCY REUSE 9600LSY REG. 4+1 FREQUENCY REUSE 9600LSY REG. 5+1 FREQUENCY REUSE 9600LSY REG. 6+1 FREQUENCY REUSE 9600LSY REG. 7+1 FREQUENCY REUSE 9600LSY REG. 2+0 FREQUENCY REUSE 9600LSY REG. 3+0 FREQUENCY REUSE 9600LSY REG. 4+0 FREQUENCY REUSE 9600LSY REG. 5+0 FREQUENCY REUSE 9600LSY REG. 6+0 FREQUENCY REUSE 9600LSY REG. 7+0 FREQUENCY REUSE 9600LSY REG. 8+0 FREQUENCY REUSE d)
1 RACK 1 NETWORK ELEMENT 1 PROTECTION CHANNEL 4 CHANNELS MAX ON H POLARIZATION 4 CHANNELS MAX ON V POLARIZATION 4 DIFFERENT FREQUENCIES MAX 8 CHANNELS MAX
Regenerator configuration utilizing double protection, installed into two racks and copolar branching solution: CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
9600LSY REG. 2x(1+1) 9600LSY REG. 2x(2+1) 9600LSY REG. 2x(3+1) 9600LSY REG. 2x(4+1) 9600LSY REG. 2x(5+1) 9600LSY REG. 2x(6+1) 9600LSY REG. 2x(7+1) 9600LSY REG. 2x(2+0) 9600LSY REG. 2x(3+0) 9600LSY REG. 2x(4+0) 9600LSY REG. 2x(5+0) 9600LSY REG. 2x(6+0) 9600LSY REG. 2x(7+0) 9600LSY REG. 2x(8+0)
2 RACKS 2 NETWORK ELEMENTS 2 RADIO PROTECTION CHANNELS (only in N+1) SECOND RACK ONLY FOR REUSED CHANNELS 1 POLARIZATION PER RACK 8 CHANNELS MAX PER EACH RACK
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 64 / 514
9600LSY REG. 1+1 9600LSY REG. 2+1 9600LSY REG. 3+1 9600LSY REG. 4+1 9600LSY REG. 5+1 9600LSY REG. 6+1 9600LSY REG. 7+1 9600LSY REG. 2+0 9600LSY REG. 3+0 9600LSY REG. 4+0 9600LSY REG. 5+0 9600LSY REG. 6+0 9600LSY REG. 7+0 9600LSY REG. 8+0
e)
Regenerator configuration utilizing double protection, installed into two racks and alternatepolar branching solution: AP AP AP AP AP AP AP AP AP AP AP AP AP AP
9600LSY REG. 2x(1+1) 9600LSY REG. 2x(2+1) 9600LSY REG. 2x(3+1) 9600LSY REG. 2x(4+1) 9600LSY REG. 2x(5+1) 9600LSY REG. 2x(6+1) 9600LSY REG. 2x(7+1) 9600LSY REG. 2x(2+0) 9600LSY REG. 2x(3+0) 9600LSY REG. 2x(4+0) 9600LSY REG. 2x(5+0) 9600LSY REG. 2x(6+0) 9600LSY REG. 2x(7+0) 9600LSY REG. 2x(8+0)
2 RACKS 2 NETWORK ELEMENTS 2 RADIO PROTECTION CHANNELs (only in N+1) SECOND RACK ONLY FOR REUSED CHANNELS 2 POLARIZATIONS PER RACK 4 CHANNELS MAX ON H POLARIZATION PER EACH RACK 4 CHANNELS MAX ON V POLARIZATION PER EACH RACK
NOTE: The rack and the subracks have been designed to host up to 10 channels, even if the normal maximum configuration is limited to 8 channels. In fact, the expansion of the systems without traffic interruption is available only for this last maximum configuration. However, it could be possible , for particular customer requirements or utilizing some channel plans, to foresee even the possibility to get 10 channels per rack. A terminal can be configured as a WMSN simply adding a 1650SMC device to the radio regenerator equipment . Each configuration is easily expansible to higher capacities just adding the foreseen expansion kits. In Fig. 15. and Fig. 15. , a view of a 8 channel regenerator terminal and 8 channel WMSN are respectively shown
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 15. 9600LSY 7+1/8+0 regenerator configuration
Fig. 16. 9600LSY 7+1/8+0
WMSN
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 65 / 514
In the next Fig. 17. , the block diagram of a 7+1 regenerator is shown.
RADIO PROTECTION SWITCHING STM1 STM1 STM1 STM1 STM1 STM1 STM1 USER INT/RST USER INT/RST USER INT/RST USER INT/RST USER INT/RST USER INT/RST USER INT/RST MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
Fig. 17. 9600LSY 7+1 Regenerator configuration Next Fig. 18. shows a block diagram illustrating a Wireless Multiservice Node for 7 x STM1 channels transmitted in only one direction (OS) and configured with radio protection implementing a 7+1 radio configuration.
7X STM1or 140 or 3x45 or 3x34or 63x2 Mb/s
OMSN
TRAF.PORT TRAF.PORT TRAF.PORT TRAF.PORT TRAF.PORT TRAF.PORT TRAF.PORT AGGREG. AGGREG. AGGREG. AGGREG. AGGREG. AGGREG. AGGREG. RST RADIO PROTECTION SWITCHING RST RST RST RST RST RST
REGENERATOR
MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER
Fig. 18. 9600LSY WMSNOS 7x STM1 configuration with radio protection for 7+1 STM1 transmission.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 66 / 514
In the next Fig. 19. a Wireless Multiservice Node (eastwest) two sides configuration (WMSNTS) with four STM1 streams for each direction is presented with possibility to drop/insert each STM1 signal.
Fig. 19. 9600LSY WMSN Two Sides configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 67 / 514
2.5.3 Radio channel configurations

Channel arrangement The following Fig. 20. shows the configurations supported according to the frequency arrangement.
.....
V (H) H (V)
.....
Alternate channel dualpolarized, up to (7+1) / (8+0) (ACDP operation)
.....
V (H)
H (V)
.....
Cochannel dualpolarized, up to (7+1) / (8+0) (CCDP operation)
Fig. 20. Channel arrangement
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 68 / 514
Frequency Channel assignment according to station layouts In the following the possible station layouts will be analyzed with the relevant evolutions.
Fig. 21. shows an example of basic configurations from which the possible evolutions are depicted in following Fig. 22. thru Fig. 26.
channels 1357 BB
A)
O n e p o la r p e r r a c k (3 + 1)
channels 1234 BB
1 2 3 4
B)
One polar per rack (3 + 1)
channels 13 13 REUSED BB REUSED channels 12 REUSED BB
C)T w o
p o l a r p e r rack
(3 + 1 ) f r e q. R e u s e
12
1 2
D)
Two polar per rack ( 3 +1) f r e q. R e u s e
channels 13 24 BB
1 2
3 4
E )Two
(3 + 1)
polar per rack
Fig. 21. 3+1 terminal basic station layouts
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 69 / 514
Fig. 22. shows channel assignment rearrangement starting from basic layout of case A) of previous Fig. 21. on page 69.
channels 1357
channels 1357 1357
reused
BB
BB
One polar per rack
3+1
T w o p o l a r p e r rack (7+1/8+0) Freq.Reuse
channels 1357 2468
channels 1357 1357
channels 2468 2468
reused
BB
reused
BB
BB
T w o p o l a r p e r r a c k (7+1 )
T w o p o l a r p e r rack 2* (7+1/8+0) Freq.Reuse
channels 1357 2468
channels 1357 2468
reused
BB BB
T w o p o l a r p e r r a c k 2 * (7+1 ) f r e q. R e u s e
Fig. 22. Terminal station layout: extension starting from A) basic layout
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 70 / 514
Fig. 23. shows channel assignment rearrangement starting from basic layout of case B) of previous Fig. 21. on page 69.
channels channels 1234 12345678
BB BB
One polar per rack
3+1
O n e p o l a r p e rr a c k (7+1)
channels 1234 1234
channels 12345678
channels 12345678
reused
BB BB
reused
BB
T w o p o l a r p e r r a c k (7+1) F r e q. R e u s e
O n e p o l a r p e r rack 2 x (7+1) Freq.Reuse
channels 1234 1234
channels 5678 5678
reused
BB BB
reused
T w o p o l a r p e r r a c k 2 * (7+1) f r e q. R e u s e
Fig. 23. Terminal station layout: extension starting from B) basic layout
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 71 / 514
Fig. 24. shows channel assignment rearrangement starting from basic layout of case C) of previous Fig. 21. on page 69.
channels channels 13 13 1324 1324
reused
BB
reused
BB 3
Two polar per rack (3+1) Freq.Reuse
channels 1357 1357
channels 1324 1324
channels 5768 5768
reused
BB
reused
BB
reused
BB
5 7
Two polar per rack (7+1/8+0) Freq.Reuse
Two polar per rack 2* (8+0) Freq.Reuse
channels 1357 1357
channels 2468 2468
reused
BB
reused
BB
Two polar per rack 2* (7+1/8+0) Freq.Reuse
Fig. 24. Terminal station layout: extension starting from C) basic layout
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 72 / 514
Fig. 25. shows channel assignment rearrangement starting from basic layout of case D) of previous Fig. 21. on page 69.
reused
BB 3
reused
BB
channels 1234 1234
channels 5678 5678
reused
BB
reused
BB
5 7
Fig. 25. Terminal station layout: extension starting from D) basic layout
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 73 / 514
Fig. 26. shows channel assignment rearrangement starting from basic layout of case E) of previous Fig. 21. on page 69.
reused
BB
BB
Two polar per rack (3+1)
channels 1357 2468
channels 1324 2413
channels 5768 6857
reused
BB BB
reused
BB
Two polar per rack (7+1)
channels 1357 2468
channels 1357 2468
reused reused
BB BB
Two polar per rack 2* (7+1) Freq.Reuse
Fig. 26. Terminal station layout: extension starting from E) basic layout
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 74 / 514
Fig. 27. shows an example of 4+0/4+1 EAST/WEST terminal basic configurations.

channels 135 135 24 BB 24
1 2
3 4
A)
T w o p o la r e a s tw e s t p e r r a c k 2*(4 + 1)
channels 135 135 13 13

reused BB reused
B)
T w o p o la r e a s tw e s t p e r r a c k 2*(4 + 1) f r e q. R e u s e
channels 123 123 12

reused
12
reused
1 2 3
C) T w o
p o la r e a s tw e s t p e r r a c k
2*(4 + 1) f r e q. R e u s e
BB
12345
channels 12345 BB
1 2 3 4 5
D) O n e
p o l a r e a s tw e s t p e r r a c k
2*(4 +1)
Fig. 27. 4+0/4+1 EAST/WEST terminal basic station layouts
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 75 / 514
2.5.4 System configuration for network solutions

Besides the radio configurations presented previously, the 9600LSY family supplies an answer to various transmission problems supplying particular functional solutions. The purpose of this paragraph is to describe these functionalities giving some simple system block diagrams and/or short comments. Space Diversity All the available configurations in all the frequency bands of 9600LSY family may include the Space Diversity protection. This feature is obtained adding to the system a second receiver connected, through a dedicated branching, to the Space diversity second antenna. This second receiver, exactly equal to the main one, is installed inside the transceiver unit, in the dedicated area just aside the main one. The two IF signals (coming from the main and diversity receivers) are sent to the modem, where are processed by two demodulators and summed by a new designed baseband combiner. To achieve this function, one plugin IF module with A/D converters must be added to the modem unit. Expansion procedure 9600LSY is a fully expansible radio system. It means that, starting from the minimum 1+1 / 2+0 configuration, it is possible to increase the traffic capacity adding to the station the units necessary to increase the number of radio channels up to the maximum allowed by the configuration. The expansion procedure is reported in para.3.5.2 on page 131.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 76 / 514
2.5.5 Branching configurations

The branching for N+0 or N+1 configurations is realized in two different ways to be connected to a single or double polarized antenna (1 or 2 polarizations per rack versions) and can manage up to 8 RF channels. In both cases, Tx and Rx filters and channel circulators are accommodated in two horizontal lines respectively at the bottom side and at the upper side of the transceiver subrack. They are connected to the antenna circulators sited over the top of the rack by means of branching connections installed along one or both rack side walls. Depending on the frequency band, the branching is realized utilizing coaxial connection (4 and 5 GHz bands) or using waveguides (from 6 GHz to 13 GHz). The branchings connected to the space diversity receiver (this function is foreseen in all the bands and for all the configurations) follow the technological choice utilized for the main branching. The utilization of narrow band RF branching filters allows to avoid the use of 3 dB hybrids ( 3dB couplers previously used for CCDP application) in all the frequency plans and for all the frequency spacings including 28 MHz. In all configurations, the connections among transceivers and relevant channeldepending branching units are realized by vertical parallel coaxial cables without any cross connection. This realization permits to simplify the installation operations (see Fig. 28. herebelow).
Rx Diversity branching
Rx branching Coaxial interconnections
Branching H or V
Branching V or H
Tx branching
Channel circulator block + RF filter Channel circulator block without RF filter Fig. 28. Schematic diagram of transceiver to branching connections
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 77 / 514
Branching extension without traffic interruption More and more often customers require to expand installed systems without causing traffic interruption. Following this requirement, a particular branching solution has been developed. This solution consists in having all the channel circulators needed for the maximum rack configuration installed in advance, even if , at first, only a few of them are really utilized. Dedicated codes including four circulators have been inserted in the catalogue. These blocks, one code for each frequency band, are usable for all the terminal configurations. The unused circulator port that will be connected to the filter branching in the future when expanding of the system, is closed by a short circuit device. This device consents the signal to flow toward the antenna in transmission side or toward the first active receiver in receiving side. During the expansion operation, the short circuits devices are removed and the branching filters are connected to the open circulator port, with easy and very short operation. In such a way the traffic interruption can be minimized at minimum. Taking in account that operating in TX side the expansion is performed adding the new channels as last respect to the existing ones, this operation could be considered safe from the traffic interruption point of view. In Rx side the new channel are inserted between the antenna circulator and the first existing channels. For this reason removing the short circuit device and leaving open the antenna port can lead to a lack of signal to the following Rx channels until the new filter in installed. Moreover, if in the receiving side the space diversity functionality is present, operating the expansion in separated time on the main receiver branching and on the diversity receiver branching , the traffic interruption can be completely avoid. The circulators blocks are available in the bands from 6 to 13 GHz included. At these frequences, the additional cost due to the presence of all the circulators even not utilized can be supported by the systems, even in case of simple configurations. At 4 and 5 GHz, on the contrary, the cost of the circulators is much heavier. For this reason the described solution is not applied, and the traditional method (addition of the needed circulators at the moment of the expansion) is still utilized. Whatever is the number of working channels present in the rack, the number of the circulator blocks to be used is 4 if the space diversity is not present, and 6 if it is implemented. This rule is valid both with copolar and alternate polar branching solution. Balanced branchings The so called balanced branchings consents to get a constant attenuation of the branching for all the channels relevant to the same terminal. So, also the system gain is constant whatever channel it is referred to. To get this performance the rule that has been followed is to insert the successive transmitters to the first following the first and , on the contrary, to insert the added receiver before the existing ones. The next figures give an exemplification of the balanced branching connections in the two cases of one polarization per rack and two polarization per rack. Solution for branching in 6L band ( 9662LSY) ITUR F. 383 channel plan foresees a frequency distance between the innermost channel of 44.49 MHz. This narrow distance between channels 8 and 1 has obliged to insert, inside the branching in transmission side, a dedicated wideband filter to avoid local interference between said channels that supplies an additional filtering to the residual spectrum power generated by the transmitter 8 or 1 at the frequency of the receiver 1 or 8 . This filter is always installed in the branching, in all configurations (copolar and alternate polar) and in independent way respect to the channels effectively installed in the link. It means that even if channels 8 and 1 are not utilized, the branching contains the filter. In such a way, we are free to install successively the channels 8 and 1 for expansions of the link, without necessity to add the filter and , at last, without causing traffic interruption.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 78 / 514
One polarization per rack branching In Fig. 29. herebelow, the branching version for 8 RF channels arranged in 1 polar per rack configuration is shown. The picture include the space diversity optional branching. MAIN SP.DIV.
SP.DIV.Rx
MAIN Rx BRANCHING
RX 0
RX 1
RX 2
RX 3
RX 4
RX 5
RX 6
RX 7
TX 0
TX 1
TX 2
TX 3
TX 4
TX 5
TX 6
TX 7
Tx BRANCHING
Fig. 29. 1 polar per rack branching version for 8 RF channels The first slot on the left of the transceiver subrack is used for the spare transceiver (TR 0). All the transceivers present in this configuration are connected to the single polarized branching and are housed utilizing the slots in sequence starting from left side. Please note the branching positions utilized for transmitter and receiver filters in the balanced branching solutions.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 79 / 514
Two polarizations per rack branching In Fig. 30. herebelow, the branching version for 8 RF channels arranged in 2 polar per rack configuration is shown. The example here reported includes the space diversity option.
SP.DIV. ANTENNA
MAIN ANTENNA
SP.DIV. Rx BRANCHING
MAIN Rx BRANCHING
RX 0
RX 1
RX 2
RX 3
RX 6
RX 7
RX 8
RX 9
TX 0
TX 1
TX 2
TX 3
TX 6
TX 7
TX 8
TX 9
Tx BRANCHING
Fig. 30. Branching version for 8 RF channels, arranged in 2 polar per rack configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 80 / 514
In Fig. 31. herebelow, a 3+1 configuration, again with 2 polarization per rack, is reported, in this case including the space diversity functionality. Note that the expansion of the system is obtained progressively filling the transceiver subrack (and the branching, as consequence) adding new units starting from the left and right external sides of the subrack.
Diversity Rx Branching
Main Rx branching
RX0
RX1
RX8
RX9
TX0
TX1
TX8
TX9
Tx branching
Fig. 31. Branching version for 3+1 configuration with Space Diversity, arranged in 2 polar per rack version The first slot on the left of the transceiver subrack is reserved to the transceiver utilized for protection (TR0). It can work either on H or V polarization, depending on the RF channel utilized . As a consequence, the branching installed in the left part of the rack can be connected either to the H antenna polarization or the V one. Once that the polarization (H or V) of the left side branching has been chosen, all the units that must be connected to this antenna polarization will be installed on the left side and connected to this branching . The others (connected to V or H polarization) will be installed and connected to the branching located on the right side.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 81 / 514
2.6 Radio Transmission features 2.6.1 Foreword

This paragraph describes in detail the Radio Transmission features of 9600LSY family, and comprehends the following main paragraphs: para.2.6.2 herebelow para.2.6.3 on page 90 para.2.6.4 on page 93 Frequency reuse technique (CCDP) and XPIC Cross Polarization Canceller Transmitted power control: static and ATPC Loopbacks
The handbook parts that should be read before starting this paragraph are: para.2.3 on page 47 para.2.4 on page 51 Introduction to system configurations Hardware components
2.6.2 Frequency reuse technique (CCDP) and XPIC Cross Polarization Canceller
2.6.2.1 Introduction Efficient bandwidth is a relevant issue in the digital radio application. Multilevel signalling is a standard mean to get high spectral efficiency. Unfortunately its sensitivity to channel impairments increases with the number of modulation levels. In radio links carrying several channels, additional bandwidth saving is usually achieved by using both horizontal and vertical polarization, with cross polarized adjacent channels to minimize interference. A further improvement of transmission capacity can be obtained by the simultaneous use of the RF channel for two independent digital transmissions on orthogonal polarization, which is commonly addressed to as Crosspolarized cochannel frequency reuse technique. Frequency reuse systems actually result in doubling the spectral efficiency of conventional transmissions. However this is paid in terms of additional signal distortion, because of inevitable crosscoupling of dual polarized channels. This is due both to propagation conditions (notably rain and ground reflections) and imperfections in the antennae and waveguide feeders. The result of reduced cross polarization discrimination (XPD) is cross polarization interference (XPI) , which sums up with intersymbol interference generated by channel dispersions and give rise to potentially serious impairments in detection. XPI and intersymbol interference can be jointly contrasted by resorting to adaptive processing techniques. Baseband equalizations together with cross polarization interference canceller (XPIC) allow signal distortion to be kept within tolerable limits, thus making frequency reuse a viable option.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 82 / 514
2.6.2.2 XPIC Operating principle and receiver architecture The idea behind the XPIC operation is that of adjusting the amplitude and phase of the received signal samples of the opposite polarization, so as to provide an estimate of the XPI corrupting the desired copol signal. This estimate can then be subtracted from the main signal, producing crosspol interference cancellation. Taking into account the timevarying nature of the channel, the XPIC operation must be adaptively adjusted according to a proper rule to track the variation in both copolar and crosspolar channels parameters. To counteract both XPI and multipath fading, the joint use of XPIC and adaptive equalization is advised. Following this approach, the adopted crosspol cofrequency receiver structure results in an arrangement of four adaptive bandspaced transverse filters, as show in Fig. 32.
H pol. received signal EQUALIZER H data
XPIC H error signal
V error signal XPIC
V pol. received signal EQUALIZER V data
Fig. 32. XPIC operating principle In the same figure the XPIC updating criterion is also addressed. The XPIC tapweights are adjusted so as to minimize the correlation between crosspol received signal and copol error signal. This operation minimizes the correlation between error signal and cross polarization interference. A fundamental issue in a frequency reuse system design is the receiver recover capability. As a matter of fact, deep fading occurrences, which can produce a system loss of lock, are usually of short duration, so that also moderate hysteresis effects on system lockin can severely increase the total outage time (C/I typical values 2 5 dB). Therefore, care must be taken in the choice of the receiver synchronization strategies, in order to avoid any interaction between dualpol sections of receiver during the recovery process. The adopted frequency reuse system architecture is sketched in Fig. 33. on page 84.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 83 / 514
H IF LO RX H DATA
UP
DOWN CONV
IF
DEM + XPIC
H DATA
MOD
CONV
TX
LO
master
.
V DATA LO
synchr.
slave
MOD
UP
CONV
TX RX
DOWN CONV
IF
DEM + XPIC V IF
V DATA
LO
Fig. 33. Frequency reuse system architecture The only design constraint is that a common RF local oscillator is used for both dualpol signals, while two independent decision directed carrier recovery loops are employed for the demodulation from IF to baseband for each equalizer canceller pair input signals. This approach preserves the precise phase and frequency relationship between the received signal and the crosspol signal used for XPI cancellation. And this is true even when the carrier associated with the received signal is out of lock. Such coherence has very important implications because without cancellation, when the terminal is out of lock, XPI distortion will be so severe that the terminal will not easily regain lock. Another advantage of such an arrangement is that no constraints are imposed on Tx oscillators. In addition, a joint recovery process of crosspol carriers is avoided. The equalizer/canceller system operation is based on dualpol received signal samples. Therefore, a critical point of receiver design is to devise the proper signal sampling strategy. We chose to employ a separate symbol synchronizer for each crosspol branch of the receiver. As indicated in Fig. 33. , the same clock is used to sample the input signal of an equalizer and of the associated XPI canceller. This makes the XPIC operation independent of the synchronization of dual polarized transmitted data streams. It is of great importance to observe that the above synchronization strategies result in a complete independence of operation of the receiver branches on opposite polarization. This allows operation even when the receiving digital terminal on the opposite polarization is out of service. 2.6.2.3 XPIF Factor The receiver performance can be assessed in term of the XPI rejection capability of the canceller. This is quantified by the crosspolarization improvement factor (XPIF), which is the difference of the carrier to XPI ratio (C/XPIs) corresponding to a predefined error performance in a dual polarized system with and without XPIC, respectively. Typical values (optimum phase) for a 128 MLC system is 22 dB. 2.6.2.4 XPIC Card The XPIC card is a daughter board that has to be inserted in both modem units of the main and reused channel of each bearer that is reused. This unit is installed in the system only if the reuse of frequency is implemented. It can be also added to the modem in second step if a expansion of the system utilizing the reuse of a frequency is required after the first installation. The unit has a second utilization, again as daughter board, as baseband combiner when the space diversity functionality is implemented in the link. In case of both functionality presence (XPIC and Space diversity), two units are necessary and both must be installed inside the modems.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 84 / 514
2.6.2.5 Rack configurations for frequency reuse Frequency reuse technique allows to double the transmission capacity of each radio channel; a certain number of channels is then transmitted at the same frequency of the main one on the second antenna polarization. We can envisage two main different topologies of reused systems: with one spare channel and with two spare channels. a) Reused systems with a single protection channel Terminals with a single protection channel are installed in only one rack . The maximum number of channels is 8 and up to 4 different frequencies can be utilized. Each terminal is identified in the network as a single N.E.. Higher configurations are not allowed. Fig. 34. hereafter reported shows an example of a reused terminal . In the example all the channels are reused and the spare channel, transmitted by the first transceiver installed on the left side of the shelf, is channel 1H. The configuration obviously utilizes double antenna polarization.
TRU
RRA/MODEM AND ACCESS AREA (BASEBAND SHELF)
Rx BRANCHING
CROSSCORRESPONDENCE OF HV CHANNELS
1 2 3 4 HHHH
4 3 2 1 VVVV
CHANNELS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Tx BRANCHING
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 34. 7+1 reused terminal with single protection (ch. 1H)
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 85 / 514
b)
RACK 0 TRU
RACK 1 TRU
Rx BRANCHING
Rx BRANCHING
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 HHHHHHHH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 VVVVVVVV
CHANNELS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Tx BRANCHING
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Tx BRANCHING
Fig. 35. 2 x (7+1) reused terminal with double protection (on ch. 1H and 1V) in 1PPR solution In the figure, two other slots are available in each rack for future expansion. The shown terminal layout foresees the side to side rack position, but the back to back solution is also possible.
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 86 / 514
Reused systems with two protection channels Two protection channels are available when a complete 2x(n+1) system is installed in two racks. In this case there will be two n+1 systems , one for each rack, using n+1 frequencies. One spare channel for each rack is present. Maximum number of channels for each polarization is 8 (including the spare channel). A terminal, configured as above, always consists of two independent Network Elements, one for each rack. Two different solutions are available: each rack can be configured with alternate polarization and with only one polarization. If the tworack system is foreseen since the beginning, a solution with only one polarization per rack is recommended. In case of future expansion, in fact, there is no necessity to connect the branchings of the two racks, avoiding heavy mounting operations and long traffic interruptions. However, the with 2PPR solution is also available. Obviously if an 1PPR or 2PPR existing system has to be expanded with reused channels utilizing the second rack, the AP or CP solution, already adopted in the installed system has to be foreseen also in the second rack. In Fig. 35. below, a 7+1 reused terminal with double spare channels, with the 2 polar per rack recommended solution, is shown.
c)
Expansion of a single protection reused system to double protection Fig. 36. herebelow shows the expansion of a single protection reused terminal to a higher configuration. Taking into account the limitation concerning the maximum allowed configuration in case of single protectionsingle rack terminal (7 working channels and 4 different frequencies), the expansion utilizes a second rack . In this case the system is modified into a double protection one. The second spare channel is housed in the second rack (in the shown case on ch. 2H) . The rack utilized for the expansion utilizes the 2PPR configuration used by the first rack. This solution consents to expand a single rack double polarized terminal up to 7+1/8+0 reused configuration. The new added rack will be identified as a second network element .
TRU
TRU
Rx BRANCHING
Rx BRANCHING
1 3 5 7 HHHH
7 5 3 1 VVVV
2 4 6 8 HHHH
8 6 4 2 VVVV
CHANNELS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Tx BRANCHING RACK 0
Tx BRANCHING RACK 1
Fig. 36. Expansion from 7+1 single protection to 2 x (7+1) reused terminal
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 87 / 514
2.6.2.6 Interconnections in reused systems The specific connections needed for the terminals equipped for the frequency reuse technique are hereafter described: Local Oscillator Synchronization The two local oscillators connected to the two RF receivers (main and reused) working on each reused frequency must be together synchronized. This function is obtained by a phase lock loop system utilizing a 2 GHz reference signal transferred from the L.O. of the main receiver ( master local oscillator) to the L.O. of the reused receiver (slave local oscillator). This connection is performed by means of a coaxial cable between oscillators and a Frequency Reuse Kit (a special module and associated cabling) inside the Master Oscillator. In case of failure of the main local oscillator or lack of the synchronization signal due to whatever cause , the slave Rx L.O. of the reused channel utilizes its own RF signal , obviously unlocked to the main LO, to feed the Rx down converter and to maintain in service the reused channel. In case of failure of the master LO, The slave one can assume the master functionality and to be utilized as source of the reference signal to be used to feed the signal to the frequency multiplier contained in the main LO and allowing the protection of the master LO . Fig. 37. herebelow shows how the mutual protection between the two LOs can be obtained. MASTER LO SLAVE LO
2GHz oscillator
2GHz oscillator
FR module
Synch. signal coaxial cable
XN multiplier
XN multiplier
RF OUT
RF OUT
Fig. 37. Main / slave LO mutual protection If main and reused channels are located in different racks , cable interconnections between the two racks are needed . The maximum loss acceptable is 10 dB and the cable length is y 7 m . I.F. interconnection cables The XPIC unit, to perform the interference cancellation, must receive the IF signal from both main and reused receiver. For this reason, in addition to the standard cables (used in a nonreused systems), a IF cable for each XPIC unit must be utilized to connect the main receiver to the demodulator of the reused system and vice versa. Two dedicated cable kits, including both the LO and IF connections, are foreseen. They are available with different cable lengths depending on the connection necessity (inside the same rack or between the two racks). Only one kit is needed for a couple of reused channels.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 88 / 514
RF branching interconnection In case of single polarized rack used in two racks terminal, no branching interconnections are needed between the racks, each of them being connected directly and independently to one antenna port. On the contrary, in case of usage of alternate polarization on both racks, the transceivers utilizing the same antenna polarization must be connected to the same branching. It means that the some waveguides or cables (depending on the frequency band) will connect the two racks to send to the two antenna polarization all the H and all the V channels. Following Fig. 38. shows how this is carried out.
RX BRANCHING
RX BRANCHING
TX BRANCHING
TX BRANCHING
RACK 0
RACK 1
Fig. 38. Branching interconnections All the branching configurations do not include passive hybrids. Their utilization has been avoided thanks to the use of narrow channel filters that allows to transmit channels down to a minimum distance of 28 MHz on the same branching .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 89 / 514
2.6.3 Transmitted power control: static and ATPC

The product allows two ways to adjust the transmitted power: the first one in a static way, the second one under automatic control loop (ATPC function). 2.6.3.1 Transmit power static adjustment The capability to adjust transmitted power in a static and fixed way has been introduced for those countries where, due to internal rules, the ATPC function is not accepted or for those hops in which, due the short length and interface problems, a fixed reduced transmitted power is preferred. The range of the possible attenuation depends on the frequency band involved and is detailed in chapter Technical Specifications. The step for adjustment is 1 dB, with an accuracy of 0.5 dB. The setting of the transmitted power can be performed locally by means of ECT. 2.6.3.2 ATPC function The automatic control of the transmitted power (ATPC) function allows to regulate the transmitted power in order to supply a reduced power in situation of normal propagation and the maximum power in conditions of fading. In synchronous radio link systems, the ATPC device is considered a very important function taking into account the following advantages: reduction of the internal interferences of the radio system and with other systems reduction of the average consumption of the transmitter considering that the maximum power is supplied for small percentages of time improvement of the averages conditions of the transmitter about the linearity and consequent reduction of phenomena of background error due to non linear distortion that with ATPC could be revealed only in conditions of fading possibility to increase the System Gain as a consequence to the reduction of the Backoff on the power transmitted taking into account what above mentioned substitution of a possible microwaves attenuator to realize different range of power.
As far as concern the values relative to the operating range of the ATPC, refer to chapter Technical Specifications. ATPC working principle The ATPC system is based on a control loop of the power transmitted between a TX transmitter and a RX receiver connected in a radio link. With reference to Fig. 39. on page 91, the receiver furnishes through the AGC voltage the information of the received power to the ATPC controller; it compares the voltage with threshold values (presettable) and according to the obtained result send through to the ATPC controller on the remote station of the link the orders of increase/ decrease of transmitted power. These orders are processed and therefore transferred to the associated transmitter.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 90 / 514
STATION A
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel. PRX
STATION B
RX IF
MOD
IF VATPC COMATPC
DEM
ATPC CONTROL
AGC
RFCOH INSERT
RFCOH EXTRACT
RX FAILURE ATPC DATA PRX ATPC
ATPC DATA
DEM
IF
RX
PRX
PTX
TX
IF
MOD
N.B.
ATPC regulation shown in one direction of transmission only and valid for each channel Fig. 39. ATPC Functionality
The information of control of the transmitted power is exchanged between the two stations of a link utilizing service channel at 64 Kbit/s inserted in RFCOH bytes (avoiding to touch standard SOH bytes). In the protected configurations these information are transmitted 1+1 protected. The information regarding the ATPC functionality can be resumed in the following (for each channel): received power (absolute digital value to be transmitted towards the remote station in order to move the Tx output power). Rx failure (for remote Tx inhibition with reused system configuration) ID_channel + ID_direction (for identification of ATPC channel in order to avoid problems in case of crosstalk/interference or in case of 1+0 eastwest configuration release 2.0)
These information are organized in registers of SPRI (Serial Peripheral Register Interface) where the PRx and ID_ch information are transmitted with higher priority than Rx fail. The information for each channel received in remote station is sent to the relevant transmitter where the PRx information received is compared to the thresholds set and it is decided to send up or down or hold commands to the RF transmitter. The Rx failure received in the Tx remote station is used to switch off the relevant transmitter in case of frequency reuse or to set the Tx at low Pout in case of standard configuration (no frequency reuse application). The service channel above mentioned is a point to point type and in the SDH systems is terminated in each RRA/Modemodulator.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 91 / 514
Organization of the control system The ATPC control system is replied for each channel without any centralized function. The system control is organized in two parts for each channel and for each direction: the Rx system control implementing PRx detection, eventual Rx failure detection and insertion of the above data in RFCOH bytes the Tx system control implementing extraction of data from RFCOH bytes and PTx drive. ATPC Threshold management The transmitter is able to change the output power in the range MAX TL (max level) and MIN TL (min level). The transceiver has an its own default value for MAX TL, MIN TL and NOM TL (nominal level). It is possible to set the following values: A MAX TL A MIN TL with the constrain: MIN TL x A MIN TL x NOM TL A MIN TL x A MAX TL x MAX TL The extreme thresholds MAX TL and MIN TL are reported in the data sheet (see par. 3.3.2) It means that: the ATPC range is not fixed but variable according to the values set for A MAX TL and A MIN TL the max ATPC output power can be different from the max output power of the transmitter and the ATPC functionality can be maintained with reduced range The receiver has an its own default value (not changeable) for a receive power threshold called EXTRA POWER threshold depending on the signal (STM1 or STM0) corresponding to guaranteed threshold 10E6. On the receiver it is possible to set a received power Low threshold for loop activation within the following limits: LOW threshold: in the range from 40 dBm to EXTRA POWER threshold dBm When the received signal decreases and overcomes the LOW threshold the transmitter increases the output power up to the nominal value. Only if the received signal overcomes the EXTRA POWER threshold the transmitter increases the output power reducing its backoff (if LMA>LN only). The hysteresis for both thresholds is 3dB. The PRx value sent to the transmitter is refreshed with 10ms time interval. In case of loss of Tx_Rx ATPC signal, exchanged between Tx and Rx, the output power is frozen and an ATPC loop alarm must be activated (no other actions are taken); when the communication is restored the ATPC loop alarm is disactivated after an hysteresis to be defined. It is possible to enable or to disable ATPC function: when ATPC is disabled the output power can be driven normally according to 3.3.2. Every power change, from manual to automatic and viceversa is performed at the speed of 1dB /10ms.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(max level ATPC) (min level ATPC)
where where
A MAX TL x MAX TL A MIN TL y MIN TL
To be sure that a decreasing of Rx power of one receiver corresponds to a PTx increasing of the relevant Tx in remote station an identifier station code must be used. The same identifier station code should be set on the two station involved in the ATPC functionality avoiding that in crosstalk/interference or RFCOH bypass in repeater the Tx in one station can be driven by a not relevant Rx.
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 92 / 514
2.6.4 Loopbacks
The loopback function makes fault location and maintenance tests fast and simple.
In 9600LSY, the following loopbacks can be performed: Line loopback (RRA) A Line Loopback is a loopback where the incoming signal to a physical port is looped back onto the outgoing signal (see Fig. 40. ) Internal loopback (RRA RFCOH) An Internal Loopback is a loopback where the internal outgoing signal of a port is looped back onto its internal incoming signal (see Fig. 41. and Fig. 42. )
SPI
RST
RST
RPS
RFCOH
MODEM
RT RSPI
RRA
Fig. 40. Loopback A: RRA line loopback
MD
TRI
SPI
RST
RST
RPS
RFCOH
MODEM
RT RSPI
RRA
Fig. 41. Loopback B: RRA internal loopback
MD
TRI
SPI
RST
RST
RPS
RFCOH RSPI
MODEM
RT RSPI
RRA
Fig. 42. Loopback C: RFCOH Internal loopback
MD
TRI
All of these are loop and continue loopbacks (the signal is sent back and continues its path).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
the residual BER values (RBER) are not guaranteed in Radio Local Loop condition on.
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 93 / 514
2.6.4.1 Caution: channel lockout To make measures on a loopedback channel meaningful, the following sequence must be followed:
channel lockout on channel loopback on measures This avoids that possible arising alarms can activate protections. To exit from this conditions, thus leading system back to normal operating conditions, perform reverse command sequence: end of measures channel loopback off channel lockout off Channel lockout on/off and loopback on/off are performed by Craft Terminal (see Operators Handbook for details). 2.6.4.2 Caution: recoverable and unrecoverable loopbacks (with RECT) A LHR Network Element can be controlled, besides by the local Craft Terminal (ECT), by a Remote Craft Terminal (RECT). In certain conditions, that are explained here, loopbacks setup by RECT are not recoverable by RECT, therefore their settingup by RECT must be avoided. The remote control by RECT is carried out by means of the DCC channel which allows to access the Equipment Controller from the Remote Craft Terminal, as depicted in Fig. 53. on page 116. DCC control channel uses two radio channels, in 1+1 protected configuration. The couple of radio channels (x,y in Fig. 53. on page 116) which carry the protected service channel (as well as the WST channels, if any) is defined via software. These channels can be chosen among the five couples defined in Tab. 8. on page 50. Figure in Fig. 43. on page 95 shows the position of the Equipment Controller EC with respect to the loopback points A,B,C (these loopbacks are named as indicated in previous Fig. 40. thru Fig. 42. ). Therefore, having defined x&y the couple of radio channels transporting the service channel, the following rules must be followed for loopback settingup: loopbacks on channels other than x&y: there are no limitations (as these channels are not used for DCC communication purposes): loopbacks setup by the local or remote Craft Terminal can be always removed by the local or remote Craft Terminal loopbacks on channels x&y (used for DCC communication purposes) setup by the local or remote Craft Terminal: can be always removed by the Local Craft Terminal with regard to the remotion possibility by Remote Craft Terminal : a) if only one DCC channel is available, i.e., when any of CHx or CHy is unavailable for any reason, the loopback cannot be removed by the Remote Craft Terminal, according to the direction from which the RECT tries (unsuccessfully) to access the controlled NE, because its EC is not reachable, as depicted in Figures and in Fig. 43. on page 95. if both DCC channels are available, the loopback remotion by RECT is possible; obviously: unrecoverable loopbacks must never be setup on both channels CHx and CHy no failure on the other channel (not loopedback) CHx or CHy should occur in the meanwhile otherwise the same unrecoverable condition of previous point a ) will occur.
b)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 94 / 514
BB
A
RT
C
B EC
BB
A B EC C
RT
RECT
BB
A B EC C
RT RECT
LOOPBACKS NOT RECOVERABLE BY REMOTE CRAFT TERMINAL A = RRA (RMD) line loopback (see Fig. 40. on page 93) B = RRA (RMD) internal loopback (see Fig. 41. on page 93) C = RFCOH (RMD) Internal loopback (see Fig. 42. on page 93) Read carefully text to interpret correctly this figure Fig. 43. EC position with respect to loopback points and consequent unavailability by RECT (CHx/y)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 95 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
STATION 1
RT BB IBB A A C EC C EC B B BB A C EC B RT RT RT
STATION 0 STATION 2 STATION 3
03 RECT CONTROL
1320CT or OS
BB
955.203.292 Q STATION 2
RT BB C EC EC B C A A B BB
EC
STATION 3
RT
STATION 1
RT RT
STATION 0
BB C EC B A
BB
Read carefully text to interpret correctly this figure

1320CT or OS
EC
Fig. 44. Allowed and not allowed loopbacks by RECT (CHx/y)
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
ALLOWED LOOPBACKS (RECOVERABLE BY RECT)
NOT ALLOWED LOOPBACKS (NOT RECOVERABLE BY RECT)
A = RRA (RMD) line loopback (see Fig. 40. on page 93) B = RRA (RMD) internal loopback (see Fig. 41. on page 93) C = RFCOH (RMD) Internal loopback (see Fig. 42. on page 93)
96 / 514
2.7 Signal Transmission 2.7.1 Foreword

This paragraph describes in detail the Signal Transmission features of 9600LSY family, and comprehends the following main paragraphs: para.2.7.2 herebelow para.2.7.3 on page 98 para.2.7.4 on page 99 para.2.7.5 on page 100 STM0 & STM1 Transmission SDH mapping adopted SDH interface usage SOH bytes and service channel access
2.7.2 STM0 & STM1 Transmission

One of the most important peculiarity of the 9600LSY family is to allow the selection of the system capacity according to the customer needs (and allowing band saving utilizing STM0 capacity, if it can be useful). In particular, this feature can be applied to 7, 8 and 13 GHz bands, utilizing well defined channel arrangements for medium capacity transmission. Please refer to section FREQUENCY PLANS & PART NUMBERS to analyze the frequency arrangements and the channel steps foreseen for the various frequencies in case of STM0. Of course, the STM0 transmission is suitable to transport also plesiochronous signals with capacity 21x2 Mbit/s, 1 x 34 Mbit/s or 1 x 45 Mbit/s and the systems have been studied to allow an easy migration from STM0 to STM1 (or viceversa) when the traffic and the band requirements are going to change. As far as concerns the Way Side Traffic capacity, it is possible to transmit a single 2 Mbit/s WST stream for each channel carrying STM1, whether in case of STM0 it is not possible to transmit any WST. It is necessary to underline that no direct interfaces at STM0 level are foreseen. In case of STM0, the interface user side is always at STM1 level but only the first VC3 is mapped ; in this way it is possible to maintain the same electrical or optical interface (part numbers) independently from the signal capacity. The real transformation between STM1 interface and STM0 signal takes place inside the RRA/Modem unit before modulation (or after demodulation) function. In case of migration from one capacity to the other, no RRA change is necessary. Only the modem has to be substituted inside the baseband assembly; simple hardware and software presettings (with a new software configuration) are sufficient to upgrade the system.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 97 / 514
2.7.3 SDH mapping adopted

Generalized Multiplexing structure Fig. 45. shows the more generalized multiplexing structure obtained merging the ITUT G.707 multiplexing figure with the correspondent figure of ITUR F.750 (that shows also the RRRP functional reference point for STM0 transmission). Note that in European Standard only a subset of the generalized multiplexing structure is adopted, where only plesiochronous interfaces at 2, 34 and 140 Mbit/s are used, but also the multiplexing of 3xAU3 into AUG is forbidden (see Fig. 46. ).
Fig. 45. General Multiplexing Structure
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 46. General European Multiplexing Structure with addition of 45 Mbit/s
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 98 / 514
2.7.4 SDH interface usage

The system can provide several kinds of user interfaces that may be synchronous (SDH) or plesiochronous (PDH) and depend on the type of stations involved (Regenerator or WMSN) and the type of transmitted bit rate (STM1 or STM0) All the available interfaces are summarized, according to the different possible situations In Tab. 6. on page 44. Details about electrical characteristic of each interface are reported in chapter Technical Characteristics. It is important to point out that in case of WMSN station (obtained coupling a 9600LSY Regenerator with a 1650SMC device) inside the same rack), the interface between 9600LSY Regenerator and 1650SMC is electrical and the equipment is represented by two separated N.Es . Some general information that are valid for each version (line rate, physical interface) of the SDH and PDH traffic interfaces are herewith outlined: a) general rules for SDH unit: b) SOH/POH bytes management according to the standard TTP or CTP rules (see also NERM) Optical interfaces according to the standard G.957 short and long haul (see also NERM) Automatic Laser Shutdown in compliance with G.958
general rules for PDH unit: POH bytes management according to the standard TTP rules: (see also NERM) Asynchronous bit mode mapping into the relevant VC payload. Structure and /or notstructured PDH signals are transparently transported. The frame structure information (e.g. : CRC,E,A,S bits) are neither handled nor monitored: bidirectional passthrough at the PDH/SDH interfaces; furthermore, any potential PDHAIS condition is transparently forwarded into the relevant VC. Detection of VC signal fail conditions set to all 1 the outgoing PDH stream.
Detection of the incoming PDHAIS conditions (G.706 standard, detection time = 4 frames) can be enabled/disabled, without consequent actions at VC layer.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 99 / 514
2.7.5 SOH bytes and service channel access

2.7.5.1 Overview In the SDH system some SOH bytes (of SDH frame) are used to transmit the service channels. So we can distinguish: c) RSOH bytes, that can be inserted/extracted both in multiplex and in regenerator station, and d) MSOH bytes that can be inserted/extracted only in multiplex station.
Moreover, radio side, the transmission of 1 Way Side Traffic service stream (only in case of STM1 transmission) is performed mapping it on the bytes of two columns of the RFCOH. The AUX/EOW bytes handled by the Regenerator and by the WMSN support two types of applications: 1) Local access as termination: the auxiliary bytes of a trail termination can be bidirectionally interconnected to the voice/data interfaces of the local service unit embedded in the equipment itself. Crossconnection: the auxiliary bytes of two different trail terminations can be bidirectionally interconnected providing an auxiliary channel passthrough between every couple of STM1 ports or different OH sections; it means each single byte can be configured to be passedthrough from one direction (i.e. line side) to another one (i.e. radio side).
2)
The auxiliary bytes connections are always unprotected and the selection of the bytes and the ports are performed by CT/OS. The dashed cells in Tab. 9. herebelow show the set of potential OH bytes suitable to be processed as auxiliary channels at the section or the path terminations, with the associated meaning. RFCOH is a proprietary function implemented to transmit radio specific information (DSI, ATPC, MC, WST) and to reroute over radio hop a few RSOH byte terminated. Tab. 9. OH bytes suitable for handling on MST 1 A1 B1 RSOH 2 A1 d d 3 A1 D D 4 A2 E1 5 A2 d d 6 A2 f f 7 J0 F1 8 n n f 9 n n f 1 2 3 4 f f f f f f f f n 5 6 7 8 9 1 J1 B3 C2 G1 F2 H4 F3 K3 N1 VC4/3 OH
MSOH

D1 B2 D4 D7 D10 S1
B2 f f f f
B2 f f f f

D2 K1 D5 D8 D11 f
f f f f f
f f f f M1

D3 K2 D6 D9 D12 E2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 100 / 514
Tab. 10. OH bytes suitable for handling on RST 1

2 A1 d d
3 A1 d d
4 A2 E1 D2
5 A2 d d
6 A2 f f
7 J0 F1 D3
8 n n f
9 n n f 1 2 3 4 5 6
A1 B1 RSOH D1
MSOH
PASS THROUGH
7 8 9
Tab. 11. RFCOH byte structure Column 1 DSI ATPC D1 D2 D3 E1 F1 d,n,f d,n,f MC MC MC MC MC FAIL serv + K0 d,n,f d,n,f d,n,f Column 2
where the meaning of the bytes is summarized as follows: for RSOH bytes: A1A2: J0: d: n: f: B1: E1: F1: D1D2D3: 6 bytes: A1= (11110110) A2=(00101000) for frame alignment; RS Trace for STM identification; 6 bytes for media specific usage; 4 bytes reserved for National Use; 4 bytes reserved for Future international standardization; RS Error checking (BIP8) for regeneration section. RS Voice for order wire channel; data channel as user channel; RS DCC data communication channel [192 Kb/s (TMN bytes for regenerator section)];
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 101 / 514
for MSOH bytes: B2: E2: n: f: K1K2: MS Error checking (BIP24) for terminal station. MS Express channel. 2 bytes reserved for National Use; 26 bytes reserved for Future international standardization; MPS channel K1(b1..b8) and K2(b1..b5), MSFERF/AIS K2(b6..b8): 110 indicates that the receive end is detecting a section failure or is receiving MSAIS; MS DCC data communication channel [576 Kb/s (TMN bytes for multiplex section)]; SDH Synchronization Quality Level: S1 (b5..b8) Multiplex Section Remote Error Indication
D4..D12: S1: M1: for POH bytes: J1: B3: C2: G1: F2: F3: H4: K3: N1: for RFCOH bytes:
Path trace (check end to end path connection) Performance monitoring (BIP8 of VC4) Signal label (full or empty VC) Path status (FERF,FEBE) backward to the origin Path user service channel Path user service channel Multiframe alignment (indicates tributary location) 4 bits for APS channel, 4 bits spare Network operator byte for Tandem Connection Monitoring (TCM) function
Proprietary channels MC: k0: DSI: ATPC: Monitoring channel:EWL, EWH, HBER, RTF, FAIL SERV. Proprietary radio channel identifier Digital Switching Information channel for RPS Data channel for automatic transmitting power control
RSOH bytes rerouted over radio hop E1: F1: D1D2D3: radio Order Wire radio data channel RS DCC data communication channel [192 Kb/s (TMN bytes for regenerator section)];
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 102 / 514
2.7.5.2 Regenerator Case As far as the 9600LSY Regenerator, it allows the management of:
Termination of RSOH or RFCOH bytes to auxiliary ports RSOH RFCOH bytes cross connection
The following Tab. 12. shows for the Regenerator the possible AUX/EOW user interfaces suitable to access the terminated channels: Tab. 12. Reg. AUX/EOW user interfaces USER INTERFACES 9600 baud with interface V24/V28 (selectable) 64 Kb/s G.703 (one is 64/128Kb/s selectable) 64 Kb/s V11 64/128 Kb/s V11 (SW configurable) 64 Kb/s G.703 (Party line) Voice frequency (E1) (EOW) Voice frequency (E1) (Party line) Voice frequency (point to point between adjacent radio sections) QUANTITY 1 3 3 1 1 1 3 1
Among them it is possible to choose, by software presetting, up to six 64 Kbit/s channels plus one voice frequency channel (EOW), to be transmitted radio side in 1+1 protected way and to be dropped and inserted in every radio station. With reference to Tab. 10. on page 101, the RSOH bytes terminated line side may be in principle mapped upon software configuration control in the following interfaces as summarized in the following table: USER INTERFACES RFCOH bytes (line side) [1] V.11 E1 F1 d,f,n [2] X X X V.24 X X X G.703 X X X EOW (Q 23) X
Notes: [1] [2]
For the DCCR (D1D3) and J0 the interfaces is towards SC max 14 bytes d,n,f.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 103 / 514
With reference to Tab. 11. on page 101, the RSOH bytes terminated radio side through the RFCOH function may be in principle mapped upon software configuration control in the following interfaces as summarized in the following table: USER INTERFACES RFCOH bytes (radio side) [1] V.11 E1 F1 5 bytes out of d,f,n X X X V.24 X X X G.703 X X X EOW (Q 23) X
Note: [1] For the DCCR (D1D3) and k0 the interface is towards SC Practically common usage of user interfaces and possible mapping is: E1 always terminated on the EOW two ways (line side and radio side) F1 plus max 3 bytes accessible (normally radio side) through the user interfaces 2 x 64 Kb/s, 1 x V11 and 1 x V24. Each interface (with the exception of the voice type ) supports only one direction; the same byte can be assigned to different direction (for example line side and radio side) using 2 interfaces.
Way Side Traffic (WST) Additionally, the regenerator allows the transmission, radio side, of one 2 Mb/s Way Side Traffic (WST) that represents a service traffic in addition to the main one. Both the WST and service channels are transmitted using the radio frame complementary overhead (RFCOH, an arbitrary and unstandardized extra SDH frame overhead). The main features of the 2 Mbit/s WST Channels management are the following: STM1 capacity: One 2 Mbit/s Way Side Traffic can be inserted in each STM1 channel whatever is the channel spacing (28, 29, 29,65, 30, 40 MHz) used in the channel plans. STM0 capacity: No 2 Mbit/s Way Side Traffic can be inserted. WST protection: WST can be transmitted in unprotected way, one for each radio channel, by means of the interfaces (1.0/2.3 75 Ohm coax male connectors) allocated in the access area of the subrack. The possibility to transmit one 2Mb/s WST stream in protected way (on channels 0 and 1 ) is also given. In this case the access is located on the front panel of Service unit that hosts the WST switching functionality. Automatic switching criteria are : Signal Fail (SF), HBER, LBER and EW.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 104 / 514
2.7.5.3 WMSN Case WMSN functionality is realized utilizing a1650SMC adddrop multiplexer . When WMSN functionality is implemented, all the accesses to services are located on the 1650SMC unit, and the ones located on the regenerator section no longer are no longer utilized. For the description of the available service channels relevant to this unit, please refer to 1650SMC Technical Handbook. For an easy clarification about the service accesses, hereafter the front view of the 1650SMC view is reported in Fig. 47. herebelow. The service access ports are located on the SERGI card: for the DCCR (D1D3) and J0 the interfaces is towards SC for the DCCM (D4D12) , S1 and M1 the interface is towards SC. POH bytes of terminated VC4
In particular, the SERGI unit supplies the access to the auxiliary channels (A) and to the 2 Mb/s Service stream (B) . Moreover, the connection for the telephone jack is present (C).
(A)
(B)
(C)
1650SMC SERGI Fig. 47. 1650SMC and unit SERGI front view
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 105 / 514
2.7.5.4 Engineering Order Wire characteristic The EOW Channel allows the access to the phone services of the system. It is interfaced with the telephone set with DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) Tones and with association circuits, branching, exchange and receiving of the phone signal. The EOW Channel allows the following types of linking: between two station (selective call) between one station and all the others (omnibus call) between one and more stations called in selective mode (multi selective call).
Numbering System The compatibility with the actual generation of devices is guaranteed by the type of numbering used, with the two digits that identify the actual The above statement, limited the max number of devices linked in 90. Is important to remember that the numbers available are from 10 to 99. The omnibus call number is identify in the number 00, as in the actual boards. The multiselective call can be utilized connecting in conference mode up to the maximum number of available telephone numbers (90). This new release is full compatible with the current systems, except few new features here below described: Introduction of the time checks during a phones call. Automatic ring management (Routing)
A second voice channel is also available for voice transmission in point to point link between adjacent regenerator terminals. The interface is present on the connector area of the baseband equipment and the channel can be addressed on one byte of RFCOH . In case of WMSN configuration it is possible also to connect by cable the service to 1650SMC unit to be inserted in MSOH and to be available in MST sections.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 106 / 514
2.7.5.5 Data Channel Characteristics a)

In case of G.703 64 Kbit/s codirectional interface the timing signals (64 KHz and 8 KHz) are derived from the data stream.
Fig. 48. G.703 64 Kbit/s codirectional interface b) In case of RS422 A V11/V24 64 Kbit/s contradirectional interface the timing signal (64 KHz and 8 KHz) are directed towards the user. The code is NRZ.
Fig. 49. RS422 A V11/V24 64 Kbit/s contradirectional interface
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 107 / 514
c)
In case of RS232C V24/V28 asynchronous up to 9600 baud no timing signals are required. The signal is internally over sampled up to 64 KHZ. The code is NRZ.
Fig. 50. RS232C V24/V28 asynchronous interface
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 108 / 514
2.8 Synchronization 2.8.1 Foreword

This paragraph describes in detail the Synchronization features of 9600LSY family, and comprehends the following main paragraphs: para.2.8.2 herebelow para.2.8.3 herebelow para.2.8.4 herebelow Introduction Synchronization in Regenerator station Synchronization in WMSN station by means of 1650SMC ADM
2.8.2 Introduction
SDH transmission operates on general principles that implies the existence of timing devices that form part of a synchronizing network. Different behaviors for synchronization are present depending from the type of station either Regenerator or WMSN.
2.8.3 Synchronization in Regenerator station

In this case each incoming STM1 stream takes the network synchronization that is recovered by the equipment and forwarded to the radio hop or to the line retiming the transmitted signal by means of the recovered clock. The regenerator does not need any other synchronization circuit.
2.8.4 Synchronization in WMSN station by means of 1650SMC ADM

The synchronization requirements implies that a WMSN equipment must include a synchronization subsystem for a slave clock which functions are specified in ITUT Rec. G.783 as the Synchronous Equipment Timing Source (SETS). The Alcatel 9600LSY radio families are provided with 1650SMC ADM unit that supplies such functionalities. By selecting the external or internal reference source, the equipment works synchronized to the reference. The 1650SMC unit can automatically change the reference involved if the selected one is not correct or can holdover the operation mode if no input reference is available. 1650SMC supplies the synchronizing and timing signals to all the equipment units (N.B.) by selecting the synchronizing signal among the available input references. To this purpose the unit can: select the reference source involved; change the reference (or mode) when it losses synchronism; lock the Local Oscillator to the reference available; work in Hold Over/Free Running LO mode when all references are lost.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
In a radio terminal only the ADM takes directly the synchronism from the internal synchronization path, while units of other subracks take indirectly the synchronism by means of its own phase locked oscillators (e.g. modemodulators). Finally there are units that do not need synchronism at all (e.g. units of transceiver). 03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 109 / 514
ED
The automatic selection of one of the possible synchronization sources is performed on the base of quality (SSM algorithm) or priority criteria: a) Priority Algorithm See flow chart in Fig. 51. on page 112. The reference source choice is performed checking the signal quality by detecting for every STM1 synchronization source: LOS (= LOS + MSAIS + LOF + EXCBER) DRIFT
and for every 2 Bit/s interface or synchronous tributary selected as source: b) LOS (= LOS + AIS + LOF) DRIFT LOF (+ LOM + CRC4 MISMATCH) For 2 Mbit/s interface only
SSM Algorithm See flow chart in Fig. 52. on page 113. If the Timing Marker procedure is enabled, the CRU checks the S1 Bytes from the synchronous frame of the selected sources and the preset value of the 2 Mbit/s sources then, by the SSM algorithm, chooses the better source to be used. The SSM algorithm is in compliance with ETSI DE/TM 10156. The two Algorithms define synchronization source, by switching the reference. The switch between the source is hitless. The switch from one reference to the other one occurs without passing through the Holdover mode. The reference, sent to the PLL circuits, generates the 622 MHz signal used for internal synchronization. The PLL can operates in these following different modes: Normal The PLL output is frequency locked to one of the selected references. Holdover In absence of an external reference, the clock stored the frequency difference to the last reference. This information is used to fix the oscillator frequency value. The holdover mode guarantees .37 ppm of frequency drift within the first 24 h 03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 110 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
The Compact ADM unit also provides an output synchronization signal at 2.048 MHz with an interface according G.703 (T4 signal in G783) This signal is squelched when the unit is working in Free Running or in Hold Over modes. A maximum of 6 independent references can be defined by mixing type and PDH/SDH parts (the selection is accomplished by means of craft terminal). The selection may happen between: timing reference signals coming from the TTF blocks on CompactADM (T1 signal in G783) timing reference signals coming from the SDH ports (T1 signal in G783) 2.048 MHz signal coming from the PDH ports (T2 signal) 2.048 MHz clock coming from external source (T3 signal in G783) The choice of the sources can be made in independent manner for the internal clock reference output and for the external 2 MHz output. By Craft Terminal it is also possible either to enable or to disable the Timing Marker algorithm.
Free running Without any reference and information stored in memory, the VCO oscillates at its natural frequency. Frequency variations can be due to temperature variations, components degradation etc. The free running stability is 4.6 ppm. The following setting can also be managed by Craft Terminal: Lock out The command allows to disable/enable a timing input from being considered as possible source of timing. Forced switch The command allows to force the selection of a timing input. If the source forced becomes unavailable, the internal oscillator will be selected. Manual selection of timing source The command allows to force the selection of a timing input. If the source manual selected becomes unavailable, the manual mode is terminated and automatic selection algorithm is initiated.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 111 / 514
The allowable timing references, pointing by S, must be arranged according to decreasing priority level (i.e. priority level of timing reference pointing by Sj is y than priority level of Sj+1) Fig. 51. Synchronization Reference Source Priority Algorithm Flow Chart
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 112 / 514
The allowable timing references, pointing by S, must be arranged according to decreasing priority level (i.e. priority level of timing reference pointing by Sj is >= than priority level of Sj+1). Fig. 52. SSM Algorithm Flow Chart
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 113 / 514
2.9 Equipment Control 2.9.1 Foreword

This paragraph introduces the Equipment control features of 9600LSY family, and comprehends the following main paragraphs: para.2.9.2 para.2.9.3 para.2.9.4 para.2.9.5 para.2.9.6 herebelow on page 115 on page 117 on page 117 on page 118 Introduction The NE architecture The F interface The Qecc/QB3 interface ECT and RECT
2.9.2 Introduction
9600LSY Digital Radio Relay Systems cannot operate correctly without Control and Management Functions which are usually partially embedded as Synchronous Equipment Management Function (SEMF) and Message Communication Function (MCF) in the involved Network elements.. Equipment control may be performed locally through an Equipment Craft Terminal (1320 CT) or remotely through a Craft Terminal in a remote site. External control units may be dedicated to a Radio subnetwork or may be the Control Elements of an SDH Network including Radio Links, Fiber Optic Lines, Synchronous Multiplexers and CrossConnect Equipment. Inside an overall Managed Telecommunication Network, SDH Digital Radio Relay Systems are part of a Managed Synchronous Network. The 9600LSY DRRS equipment interfaces the TMN according to ETSI Standard and ITUT Rec G.784, G.773 and ITUR Rec 750. The architecture of the management process, which is intrinsically a distributed process based on Manager and Agent Functions, may influence in the design, the Equipment Control Architecture and the identification of the Network Elements to be managed. To connect SDH Radio Equipment to a TMN System Qtype Interfaces are used, adopting the standard Infomodel based QType Interfaces Qecc and QB3 for a full integration in a multivendor environment.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 114 / 514
2.9.3 The NE architecture

A Digital Radio Relay Link identified as a Radio Switching Section is composed of two Radio Relay Terminals (RRT). Each physical entity RRT is a SDH NEs and therefore according to ITUT Rec G.784 they must have TMN Q3 and Qecc Interfaces. All the SDH NE must be able to terminate the Regenerator Section (RS). Two types of RRT are available depending on the ability to terminate a Multiplex Section (MS) or a Regenerator Section (RS) only. This ability is required when the RRT having PDH tributaries (140 Mb/s, 2, 34 or 45 Mb/s) behaves like an SDH Multiplexer (i.e. WMSN station composed at least by two NEs: 1650SMC + LHR). When the RRT has SDH tributaries this ability is not strictly required and therefore the RRT may be equipped with an RRA (Radio Regenerator Adaptation) Assembly (Regenerator station equal to the NE LHR/LHRC). Associated to the RS and the MS there are in the SOH of the SDH frame two Embedded Control Channels (having as physical interfaces the D1D3 bytes in the RSOH and D4D12 bytes in the MSOH) carrying the management information between the ends of the RS and MS respectively. These channels are terminated in the Message Communication Function (MCF), located in the Equipment Controller of the NE, which behaves like a Packet Switching Node. The communication interface of these channels on the physical interfaces D1D3 and D4D12 is a 7layer full OSI protocol stack as defined in ITUT Rec G.784 named Qecc. While the intersite or interoffice communications links between SDH NEs will normally be formed from the SDH ECCs, within a particular site (intrasite connections) or when the SDH NE is acting as Gateway Network Element (GNE) towards a Data Communication Network connecting the NE with an Operation System (OS) a 7layer full OSI protocol stack named QBX is used. QBX is a Q3 type interface and with reference to the foreseen protocol suites: QB1 is a Connection oriented over X.25 (CONS1) interface, QB2 is a Connectionless Mode over X.25 (CLNS2) interface and QB3 is a Connectionless Mode over ISO 8802 LAN interface. The previous Qtype interfaces in their standardized versions implies the use of a Management Application Software based on an objectoriented Information Model and the use at the 7th layer of the OSI stack of protocols as CMISE, ROSE and ACSE. The availability on the NE of all these QType TMN interfaces do not imply the contemporary use of all of them. Their use and the criteria for selecting them is the TMN network designer responsibility according to the management traffic load and the network layout. The only limitation imposed by standards is that in the RRRs (and obviously in the RRTs equipped with RRA) the only RSOH has to be terminated whereas the MSOH has to be passedthrough. As far as the QB3 and Qecc interfaces is concerned the following criteria in their use have been adopted. In the WMSN station equipped with the Mux assembly, on the line side the DCC bytes of the MSOH and the RSOH are transferred to the MCF and then processed by the SEMF or rerouted by the MCF to their destination. While the DCCM bytes of the MSOH are reinserted in the SDH frame, the DCCR bytes of the RSOH are reinserted in the SDH frame through the RFCOH and MODEM units with 1+1 protection (Radio Channel 1 and 0). In the Regenerator station, while the DCCR of the RSOH are processed in the same way as previously described, the MSOH remains untouched and is carried transparently.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 115 / 514
STATION A
STATION B
TR
radio channels x,y (N.B.)

D1D3
TR
MD
MD

D4D12 D1D3
RPS
radio channels x,y D4D12
RPS

D4D12 D1D3
RRA SEMF
RRA SEMF
F
MCF
F
MCF
1320CT QB3
QB3
ECT for Station A RECT for Station B Fig. 53. DCC management: Regenerator case
STATION A (REG.)
D1D3
STATION B (WMSN)
TR
TR
MD
MD
RPS

D4D12
RPS
D4D12 D1D3
RRA SEMF
RRA SEMF MCF
MUX
D1D3
D4D12 D1D3
SEMF MCF
F
MCF
F
1320CT QB3 1320CT QB3
ECT for Station A RECT for Station B
ECT for Station B RECT for Station A Fig. 54. DCC management: WMSN case
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
The couple of radio channels (x,y in Fig. 53. and Fig. 54. above) which carry the protected service channel (as well as the WST channels, if any) is defined via software. These channels can be chosen among the five couples defined in Tab. 8. on page 50.
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 116 / 514
2.9.4 The F interface

The F interface is the control interface connecting a Craft Terminal to a Equipment Controller. The F interface is not a standard interface since in TMN there is only the F interface as reference point between WSF (Work Station Function) and OSF (Operation System Function) and the F interface is not yet standardized. An F interface has been standardized for all the ALCATEL equipment and is using the following protocols: Physical Layer: Standard: EIA RS232C/ITUT V24V28 Type: Pointtopoint, Asynchronous full Duplex Transmission rate: 38600 bit/s Connector: 9 pin female Sub D Data Link Layer: Asynchronous HDLC standard protocol ISO 3309 ISO 4335 ISO 7809
In 9600LSY terminal regenerator, F interface is located on the front panel of the System Controller unit. In case of WMSN configuration, F interface available on 1650SMC unit is the one to be utilized as terminal interface and represents the unique access to the terminal. In this case, by means of RECT software it is possible to control, besides all the other terminals, also the functionality of the regeneration section of the WMSN terminal. For this reason, the RECT option has to be always foreseen in case of WMSN functionality.
2.9.5 The Qecc/QB3 interface

In the TMN (Telecommunication Management Network) Architecture, while Qecc is the communication interface on the DCCs (Data Communication Channel) used as ECCs (Embedded Control Channel) in a SDH Subnetwork, the QB3 interface is used to interface the SDH Subnetwork to the OSs, usually through a DCN (Data Communication Network). The Gateway Function performing the protocol conversion (from Qecc to QB3 and vice versa) is carried out by the GNE (Gateway Network Element) of the subnetwork.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 117 / 514
2.9.6 ECT and RECT

ECT ALCATEL TMN management products 1320 CT called Craft Terminals (CT) consists of a compatible personal computer and application software specially developed for monitoring transmission equipment. The CT designed to monitor a single transmission equipment is called Equipment Craft Terminal (ECT) or 1320 CT. For each station an ALCATEL proprietary Software Package (SWP) is to be employed: SWP REG. 9600LSY for the Regenerator station and, additionally, SWP 1650SMC for the WMSN station. The Equipment Craft Terminal, connected to the F interface of the Equipment Controller, enable an operator to perform locally the following Element Management functions: Equipment Management Transmission Management Test management External points management Alarm (fault) management Synchronization management Radio Management Performance Monitoring Management Event log manager Overhead Management Connection Management Software Management Communication and Routing Management Security Management Support Management RECT The Remote Equipment Craft Terminal is a feature only present in the Single NE Link architecture which allows the local operator, using an ECT connected to the F interface of the Equipment Controller, to zoom and perform a complete set of management operations on all the reachable SDH NEs in the SDH. The Remote NE can be physically reached through QB3/Qecc. The Remote Craft Terminal feature applies in NR5 to both Q3 and QB3* NEs, with the exception of DXC. The feature is basically the same as for NR3 NEs, with the usual difference related to the support of TSDIM interface for the management of Q3 NEs. Despite the fact that this is supposed to be a NE related feature, it becomes a network feature considering that the network can be composed of both Q3 and QB3* NEs and that an harmonization is necessary between the two technologies. The IMCT is able to manage both Q3 and QB3* NEs (in the sense that both QB3* and Q3 application are working simultaneously), but it shall be connected to a Q3 NE. Viceversa Nectas CT will keep on being able to manage only QB3* NEs, and it shall obviously be connected to a QB3* NE. Its worth reminding that RECT can be connected to any NE pertaining to the same area of the local NE and to any NE pertaining to different areas (assuming that the DCN network has been correctly designed and hence interarea communication is possible from networking viewpoint). As far as DXC is concerned, the RECT feature is not supported, i.e. a DXC CT can be connected to only one DXC at a time.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 118 / 514
Of course, due to the limitation of the physical resources in the Equipment Controller of the NE, some network design constraints must be taken into account as the total number of managed NEs (64), the number of the QB3 NEs (32), the number of the QB3* NEs (32), the number of associations permanently open (31) between the CT and the remote NEs. The RECT features and limitations are briefly the following: 1) 2) The RECT function provides a remote login facility similar to those offered by an OS to manage several configured NEs, included the local one. The contemporaneous presence of the RECT function and an OS is possible. The access disable flag avoids access conflict between the OS and both RECT and ECT on some operations as configuration modification and remote control with access filtering. The NE which may be remotely controlled by a RECT must be configured and must be loaded with the same SW version supporting the RECT function. A NE not supporting RECT function shall refuse the incoming association issued by a RECT and the ECT displays only local information. Only three RECTs shall be active at a time over one NE. The coexistence of ECTs and RECTs in the whole network is guaranteed since the conflict in configuring the QB3 NEs is solved locally by the NE itself. The operator, through the RECT function, is able to see the alarm synthesis of the whole network . In a SDH network the maximum number of QB3 NEs equipped with the RECT function are 32 and the maximum number of NEs (QB3* NEs and QB3 NEs) manageable by the RECT function are 64. These figures identify what it is understood as small SDH network for which the RECT function may substitute the Element Manager. Refer to CT Operators Handbooks listed in Tab. 79. on page 468, Tab. 82. on page 470, and para.18.2.2.2 on page 471 for further information on: HW and SW requirement of the PC to be used as ECT and RECT detailed description of ECT and RECT functionalities and operations allowed.
3)
4)
5) 6)
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 119 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
120 / 514
3 PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION 3.1 Introduction

This chapter gives detailed operative information regarding: the equipments items (P/Ns, equipping rules, labels for remote inventory) their physical and logical position in the system the unit assembly/subassembly and front panel drawings, with the usage description of the access points (connectors, visual indicators, buttons) hardware setting description
Please refer to chapter 4 on page 175 detailed operative information regarding: system cabling pinout description of connectors for Customer usage and is organized as follows: Part list: Rack and shelves summary: Top Rack Unit (TRU) on page 122 on page 126 on page 128 on page 129, including:
Board provisioning and expansion guideline in BB & TR shelves General equipping rules on page 129 Channel provisioning/expansion guideline on page 131
Base Band shelf on page 134, including: Base Band shelf unit layout and equipping rules on page 135 SYSTEM CONTROLLER unit operative information on page 140 SERVICE unit operative information on page 144 RRACHANNEL unit operative information on page 147 RRASTANDBY unit operative information on page 149 MODEM unit operative information on page 150 PSU and PSF units operative information on page 153 Additional Housekeeping unit operative information on page 154 Kit Loudspeaker operative information on page 155 Transceiver shelf on page 156, including: Transceiver shelf unit layout Equipping rules of Transceiver units or substitutive Dummy Plates Composition of transceiver units TRANSCEIVER unit operative information Branching on page 168, including: Branching drawings and BranchingTransceivers connections Branching Front Plate Kit (Rx branching area) FANS shelf and FANS assembled unit on page 169, including: FANS shelf equipping rules on page 169 FANS assembled unit equipping rules on page 169 FANS assembled unit operative information on page 171
on page 156 on page 156 on page 157 on page 158
on page 168 on page 168
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 121 / 514
3.2 Part list

Tab. 13. 9600LSY Part list Common parts (frequency independent) REF [x] is used in other parts of this handbook to refer to the item. REF NAME RACK AND TRU [1] [2] [3] OPTINEX RACK WITH TRU OPTINEX RACK WITHOUT TRU TRU 3AN44815AA 282501018 3AN44816AA 282501019 3DB00734AA 593230032 1 1 1 (A) in Fig. 55. page 126 (B) in Fig. 55. page 126 para. 2.4.2 page 51 ANV P/N Factory P/N MAX Qty POS EQUIP. RULES
CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A 72VDC CIRCUIT BREAKER 2A 72VDC CIRCUIT BREAKER 4A 72VDC [4] CIRCUIT BREAKER 10A 72VDC CIRCUIT BREAKER 15A 72VDC CIRCUIT BREAKER 20A 72VDC KIT FUSERBREAKER SUBRACKS [5] [6] SUBRACK 2G LH RT SUBRACK
1AB162710001 001791351 1AB162710002 001791352 1AB162710003 001791353 1AB162710005 001791355 1AB162710006 001791356 1AB162710007 001791357 3DB03114AA 299702945 para.3.4 page 128
3DB02143AA 593230033 3DB02294AA 593230034 3DB03242AA 593230036 3DB03238AA 411200559
1 1
(D) in Fig. 55. page 126 (G) in Fig. 55. page 126 (E) , (L) in Fig. 55. page 126 (A) in Fig. 91. page 169
[7]
FANS SUBRACK H=50
para. 3.9 page 169
[8]
FANS ASSEMBLED
Tab. 13. continues ...
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 122 / 514
.. continues Tab. 13. REF NAME

ANV P/N Factory P/N
MAX Qty
POS
EQUIP. RULES
SYSTEM WIRING [9] [10] [11] [12] CABLE KIT COMMON PARTS CABLE KIT 1 CHANNEL NO SPACE DIV. CABLE KIT 1 CHANNEL WITH SPACE DIV CABLE KIT FOR REUSE (1 RACK) CABLE KIT FOR REUSE (2 RACKS) CABLE KIT FOR 1 EXTEN. CHANNEL FOR WMSN 3DB02842AA 299702891 3DB02843AA 299702892 3DB02844AA 299702893 3DB02845AA 299702894 3DB02846AA 299702895 3DB03202AA 299702950 3DB03264AA 299702953 3DB03266AA 299702954 3DB03213AA 299702951 3DB03214AA 299702952 1 8 8 4
[13] [14]
8 8 1 1 1 8
[15] FANS UNIT CABLE KIT [16] FANS UNIT EXTENSION CABLE KIT PLUGS KIT COMMON PART (LSY) PLUGS KIT 1 CHANNEL EXTENSION (LSY) Tab. 13. continues ...
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 123 / 514
.. continues Tab. 13. REF NAME RSA/RRA [17] RRA CHANNEL [18] RRA STANDBY [19] MODEM LH STM1 1WST [20] MODEM LH STM0 0WST 3DB02147AA 411200537 3DB02151AA 411200538 3DB02136AA 411200535 3DB02140AA 411200536 3DB00829AA 487210334 3DB03373AA 487210822 3DB02155AA 411200539 3DB02158AA 483200156 3DB02162AA 411200540 1AB15177001 084617912 1AB15050001 084617902 3DB02740AA 411200550 3DB00619AA 478200004 3DB01806AA 478200006 8 1 8 8 (D) in Fig. 64. page 135 Tab. 20. pg 138 (C) in Fig. 64. page 135 (G) in Fig. 64. page 135 ANV P/N Factory P/N MAX Qty POS EQUIP. RULES
Tab. 19. pg 137
[21] CANCCOMB STM1
16
[22] CANCCOMB STM0 [23] SERVICE [24] ADDITIONAL VOICE [25] SYSTEM CONTROLLER [26] [27] 48MB FLASH CARD (standard) FLASH CARD 80MB (for future applications)
8 1 1 1 (B) in Fig. 64. page 135 (A) in Fig. 64. page 135 Fig. 65. page 140 (H) in Fig. 55. page 126 (E) in Fig. 64. page 135 (F) in Fig. 64. page 135
Tab. 20. pg 138 & Fig. 74. pg 151
Tab. 18. pg 136 Tab. 16. pg 136 Tab. 16. pg 136 Tab. 17. pg 136 Tab. 21. pg 138 Tab. 23. pg 139
[28] ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING [29] DC/DC CONVERTER BB 2G LH
1 8
[30] FILTER P.S.U. 5.3/3.4V OPTICAL MODULES [31] S1.1 OPTIC.INTERF. FC/PC [32] S1.1 OPTIC. INTERF. SC/PC Tab. 13. continues ...
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
3AL78815AA 474166420 3AL78815AB 474166424
8 8
(C) , (G) in Fig. 64. page 135
Tab. 19. pg 137
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 124 / 514
.. continues Tab. 13. REF NAME

ANV P/N Factory P/N
MAX Qty
POS
EQUIP. RULES
EQUIPMENT ACCESSORIES [33] BRANCHING FRONT PLATE KIT 3DB03382AA 299702965 3AN49589AA 299701212 3DB03010AA 299702912 3DB03190AA 299702947 3DB03609AA 261202666 3DB04125AA 299722014 3CY07335AA 299702019 3DB03008AA 299702910 3DB03007AA 299702909 3DB01926AA 487239034 1 (F) in Fig. 55. page 126 (C) + (D) in Fig. 64. page 135 (E) inFig. 64. page 135 (A) in Fig. 79. page 156 Fig. 92. page 171 (J) in Fig. 55. page 126 Tab. 28. pg 168
[34] DUMMY PLATE W40 (RRA) DUMMY PLATE L40 (DC/DC CONV.)
Tab. 22. pg 139
[35]
8 8
[36] RT FRONT PLATE KIT
Tab. 27. pg 156 Tab. 29. pg 169 Tab. 24. pg 139
[37] COVER [38] KIT LOUDSPEAKER [39] TELEPHONE KIT (DTMF) [40] LSY SYSTEM TOOL KIT [41] LSY MAINTENANCE TOOL KIT DISTRIBUTOR FRAME M.W.W.
2 1 1 1 1 1
para.3.6.3 on page 144 para.7.3.2 on page 358 t.b.d. future release
TRANSCEIVERS: Refer to part lists specific for each frequency (i.e. specific chapter listed in Tab. 67. on page 414). SOFTWARE AND SOFTWARE LICENCES: Refer to Operators Handbooks listed in Tab. 79. on page 468 INSTALLATION MATERIALS: Refer to Installation Handbook ref.[E] on page 469 DOCUMENTATION: Refer to para.18.2 on page 466. end of Tab. 13.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 125 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
C J Legend on page 127
03 REGENERATOR F E H D G A B J C Fig. 55. Rack and shelves layout WMSN
3.3 Rack and shelves summary
955.203.292 Q I L
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
126 / 514
Tab. 14. Rack and shelves
POS in NAME Fig. 55. OPTINEX RACK WITH TRU (A) OPTINEX RACK WITHOUT TRU TRU ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING SUBRACK 2G LH FANS SUBRACK H=50 Area for Rx branching (F) BRANCHING FRONT PLATE KIT RT SUBRACK Area for Tx branching 1650SMC KIT LOUDSPEAKER
P/N (REF in Tab. 13. on page 122) [1]
DESCRIPTION
para.2.4.2 on page 51 [2] [3] [28] [5] [7] [33] [6] [38] para.3.4 on page 128 para.3.6.8 on page 154 para.3.6 on page 134 para.3.9 on page 169 para.3.8.1 on page 168 para.3.8.2 on page 168 para.3.7.1 on page 156 para.3.8.1 on page 168 para.2.4.5 on page 58 para.3.6.9 on page 155
(B) (C) (D) (E) (L)
(G) (H) (I) (J)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 127 / 514
3.4 Top Rack Unit (TRU)

The T.R.U. subrack is located at the rack top area of the OPTINEX rack and appears as follows: RED (1) RED (2) YELLOW GREEN 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B BREAKERS BATTERY A Fig. 56. Top Rack Unit front view The main functions are: a) Power supply distribution to all the functional blocks present in the rack. It is possible to distribute the two battery voltages up to 6 functional blocks installed into the rack. All the output voltages are protected by automatic circuit breakers (up to 12). In general, the choice of the breakers, existing also for lower current ranges, has to be chosen following the effective current consumption needed by the subracks. Maximum current supplied by each battery shall not exceed 60 A. Tab. 15. TRU breaker utilization in 9600 LSY/LHR BREAKER NUMBER 1A and 1B 2A and 2B 3A and 3B 4A and 4B 5A and 5B 6A and 6B USAGE transceiver slot 1 to 5 transceiver slot 6 to 10 baseband subrack ADM 1650 SMC FANS for BB subrack FANS for ADM subrack MAX ABSORBED POWER (W) 335 335 250 NOMINAL ABSORBED CURRENT (A) 12.5 12.5 9.5 CIRCUIT BREAKER 15 A 15 A 10 A 4A 2A 2A BREAKERS BATTERY B
see 1650 SMC documentation 40 40 1.5 1.5
N.B.
The value of circuit breakers is determined as follows:
Circuit Breaker (A) = [ (Max Absorbed Power (W)) / (Nominal Battery Voltage (48V)) * 1.5 * 1.2] For circuit breaker and Fuserbreaker P/Ns see REF.NO TAG in Tab. 13. on page 122 b) Station alarm management A rack lamp unit is inserted in the TRU box to display the rack alarm general indications. For the lamp meaning description, please refer to para.7.4.2 on page 363. Extension Q2 bus unit or rack alarm distribution unit (optional units, in alternative).
c)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Top Rack Unit Hardware settings Please refer to OPTINEX rack specific documentation (see para.18.2.2.1 on page 471).
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 128 / 514
3.5 Board provisioning and expansion guideline in BB & TR shelves 3.5.1 General equipping rules
According to Fig. 57. herebelow and Fig. 58. on page 130: a) b) in Base Band shelf, units SYSCO, SERV, PSF1 and PSF2 are always equipped the number associated to RRA, MD and PSU groups is related to physical (but not necessarily also logical) channel (0 9). The same number identifies the associated TRI
PHYSICAL CHANNEL BASE BAND SHELF TR SHELF
0 1 .... 9
RRA0 RRA1 .... RRA9
MD0 MD1 .... MD9
PSU0 PSU1 .... PSU9
TRI0 TRI1 .... TRI9
c)
only 8 RRA, MD and PSU groups and the associated TRI can be equipped at most. The slot positions that must be used depend on the system configuration; in particular: 1) with single polarization configurations, RRA, MD, PSU and TRI groups must be equipped in the logical number sequence 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 (see Fig. 59. on page 131). Thus, in these configurations, RRA, MD, PSU and TRI groups 8 and 9 are never equipped, as depicted in Fig. 57. herebelow;
S Y
S R
R R E R D D S R D D A A A A 0 3 C V 2 1 2 1 3 0 O
R M
R R M
R M R M R M R D R D R D D A 5 A 6 A 7 A 4 5 4 7 6 R R M
P S F 1
P S U 0
P S U 1
P S U 2
P S U 3
P S U 4
P S U 5
P S U 6
P S U 7
T R I 0
T R I 1
T R I 2
T R I 3
T R I 4
T R I 5
T R I 6
T R I 7
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

R M R M R D R D A 8 A 9 9 8 P S 8 P S 9 P S F 2 U U T I T I R 8 R 9
UNITS NEVER EQUIPPED
Fig. 57. Layout of max 8 channels in single polarization configurations
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 129 / 514
2)
with double polarization configurations, RRA, MD, PSU and TRI groups must be equipped in the sequence 0, 8, .... (see Fig. 60. on page 132, Fig. 61. on page 133 and Fig. 62. on page 133). Thus, in these configurations, RRA, MD, PSU and TRI groups 4 and 5 are never equipped, as depicted in Fig. 58. herebelow;
S Y
S R
R R R E R D D S R D D A A A A 3 0 C V 1 2 2 1 3 0 O
R M
R M
P S F 1
P S U 0
P S U 1
P S U 2
P S 3
T R I 0
T R I 1
T R I 2
T R I 3

M R M P S 4 P S 5 U U T I T I R 4 R 5
R M R M R D R D R D A 5 A 6 A 4 5 4 6
R M R D A 7 7
R M R M R D R D A 8 A 9 9 8
P S U 6
P S U 7
P S U 8
P S U 9
P S F 2
UNITS NEVER EQUIPPED
T R I 6
T R I 7
T R I 8
T R I 9
Fig. 58. Layout of max 8 channels in double polarization configurations d) in the unused slots, dummy plates mus be equipped to ensure EMC performance as well as equipment correct ventilation;
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 130 / 514
3.5.2 Channel provisioning/expansion guideline

9600 LSY is a fully expansible radio system. It means that, starting from the minimum 1+1 / 2+0 configuration, it is possible to increase the traffic capacity adding to the station the units necessary to increase the number of radio channels up to the maximum allowed by the configuration. Hereafter the expansion procedure is reported with the help of some figures illustrating the slots to be used to house the added transceivers inside the mechanical assembly. Please, keep in mind that for the RRA/modem units the same procedure is still valid; it means that the Base Band shelfs slots corresponding to those utilized for the transceiver will host the associated RRA/modem units. In this way the connections between transceivers and relevant modem units is realized by vertical parallel coaxial cables, without cable crossconnections. a) If the branching unit utilizes a single polarization, the transceivers and the branching unit will be added using the slots starting from left and going toward the right side of the subrack, as shown in the next Fig. 59. The maximum channel number depends on the channel plan. In every case the maximum number of transceiver that can be housed in the subrack is 8. The slot used for the protection transceiver (slot 1) is fixed and it is the first on the left of the subrack. The example reported in the figure is limited to 4 channels. 1+1/2+0 configuration expansion to 2+1/3+0 expansion to 3+1/4+0
H (V)
Fig. 59. Single polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 131 / 514
b)
The slot used for the protection transceiver (slot 1) is fixed and it is the first on the left of the subrack. So, the antenna polarization of the radio channel used for protection (H or V) defines which branching (H or V) will be installed at the left side of the rack. For the above reason, it is important to keep in mind that H or V positions are not strictly associated to the left or right side of the subrack. The maximum channel number depends on the channel plan. The example reported in Fig. 60. is limited to 4 channels. It refers to a system with spare channel on H antenna polarization and, consequently, with transceivers and branching connected to H polarization on the left side of the subrack. 1+1/2+0 configuration expansion to 2+1/3+0 (adding 1 RT on V pol) expansion to 3+1/4+0 (adding 1 RT on H pol)
1 H
2 V
1 H
4 V
2 V
1 H
5 H
2 4 V V
H 2 1 V 1 2 4 1 2 4 5
Fig. 60. Two polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack with the H channels on the left side
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 132 / 514
If the branching unit utilizes two antenna polarizations , the transceivers and the branching unit will be added installing them stating from the side walls and filling the subrack going toward the subrack centre, in position left or right depending on the polarization of each transceiver, as shown in the next figure.
c)
The next Fig. 61. shows the other possibility, in which the spare channel (2) utilizes the V polarization and, consequently, the transceivers and branching are connected to V polarization and are installed on the left side of the subrack. 1+1/2+0 configuration (1 RT on H pol and 1 RT on V pol) expansion to 2+1/3+0 (adding 1 RT on V pol) expansion to 3+1/4+0 (adding 1 RT on V pol)
2 V
3 H
2 V
4 V
3 H
2 V
4 V
6 V
3 H
H V
2 3
2 3
2 3
Fig. 61. 2 polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack with V channel on the left side The above figure shows only two of the possible expansions that depend on the mixing of (H) and (V) transceivers that must be utilized. d) The next Fig. 62. gives an example of the installation of the units in case of frequency reuse technique utilization in a 7+1 protected terminal. At first, the terminal utilizes the first 4 channels (with channel 4 V as spare channel). The successive expansion of the system is performed adding the channels working on the same frequencies but transmitted on the opposite antenna polarization. 3+1/4+0 configuration 7+1/8+0 configuration
4 V
2 V
3 H
1 H
4 V 1
2 V
1 3 V V 2
4 2 H H 3
3 1 H H 4
H V 1
2 3
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 62. Expansion procedure with reused channels
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 133 / 514
3.6 Base Band shelf

The following Fig. 63. shows the boardunequipped shelf layout. SUBD CONNECTORS 2MB WST CONNECTORS
ACCESS AREA
BOARD EQUIPMENT AREA
Fig. 63. Unequipped Base Band shelf layout The board equipment area is described in para.3.6.1 on page 135. The access area is described in: para.4.2.2 on page 178 as far as SUBD connector area is concerned para.4.2.3 on page 180 as far as 2Mbit/s WST connector area is concerned
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 134 / 514
3.6.1 Base Band shelf unit layout and equipping rules

Please refer to para.3.5 on page 129, for Board provisioning and expansion guideline in BB & TR shelves
2 3
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
S Y S C O A
S E R V
R R A 0 C
R M R D A 0 1
M D 1
R M R D A 2 2
R M R D A 3 3
R M R D A 4 4
R M R D A 5 5
R R A 6
M D 6
R M R D A 7 7
R M R D A 8 8
R M R D A 9 9
B P S F 1 F
G P S U 0 E
C P S U 1 E 27
C D P S U 2 E 28 P S U 3 E 29 D
C D P S U 4 E 30
C P S U 5 E 31
C D P S U 6 E 32
C D P S U 7 E 33
C D P S U 8 E 34
C D P S U 9 E 35 P S F 2 F 36
24 25
26
Fig. 64. Base Band shelf board equipment (slot numbering and board type and numbering) For: slot (A) equipment, refer to para.3.6.1.1 on page 136 slot (B) equipment, refer to para.3.6.1.3 on page 136 slots (C) + (G) + (D) + (E) equipment, refer to para.3.6.1.4 on page 136 slot (F) equipment, refer to para.3.6.1.5 on page 139.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 135 / 514
3.6.1.1 System Controller card Tab. 16. System Controller card equipping rules SLOT IN BASEBAND SHELF (see Fig. 64. on page 135) The SYStem COntroller (SYSCO) card contains the subunit ESCON (in its turn, housing the equipment configuration data memory device FLASH CARD) and the external connectors for the QB3 and F interfaces.
(A)
UNIT SYSCO FLASH CARD
P/N (REF in Tab. 13. on page 122) [25] [27] or [26] in alternative
Label for Remote Inventory SYSCO MEMDEV
N.B.
Refer to para.3.6.2 on page 140 for the unit physical views and operative information.
3.6.1.2 Additional Housekeeping unit Tab. 17. Additional Housekeeping unit equipping rules POSITION IN OPTINEX RACK (see Fig. 55. on page 126) The Additional Housekeeping unit is an optional module to expand the number of housekeeping (up to 40 input contacts in all).
(C)
UNIT ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING
Label for Remote Inventory HKDEV
N.B.
3.6.1.3 Service card Tab. 18. Service card equipping rules SLOT IN BASEBAND SHELF (see Fig. 64. on page 135) The SERVice (SERV) card contains the auxiliary AUX/EOW service channels, the protection of the WST channels and the service channels, the switch logic of the RPS protection (used only in case of 1+1 and N+1 configurations) and it can host (as option) a module (TPHDEV), adding a voice channel.
(B)
UNIT SERV
P/N (REF in Tab. 13. on page 122) [23] [24]
Label for Remote Inventory SERV TPHDEV
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ADDITIONAL VOICE
N.B.
Refer to para.3.6.3 on page 144 for the unit physical views and operative information. 03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 136 / 514
ED
3.6.1.4 RRA, MD and PSU card groups and dummy plates a)

RRA
Tab. 19. RRACHANNEL and RRASTANDBY cards equipping rules SLOT IN BASEBAND SHELF (see Fig. 64. on page 135) Read carefully General equipping rules on page 129. The RRA units are connected to the transmission line through one optical or electrical interface. The electrical interface is placed directly on RRA units, instead the optical one on a optical module placed inside the RRA unit itself (a drawer into the front panel). Slot 3 of Base Band shelf can be used as a standby radio channel in N+1 and 1+1 configurations; otherwise it is used as a main radio channel in N+0 configuration. In N+1 and 1+1 configurations, this slot can be equipped by a RRAS (RRA standby) unit and only in N+1, the same interface previously described for the RRA (optical) can be provided, if extra traffic is actuated; in N+0 configuration, this slot can be equipped by a RRA unit, in this case the optical interface module can be provided. Just one physical RRA unit exists both for transmission of STM1 signal or subSTM1 one. The same thing is applied to the RRAS unit. P/N (REF in Tab. 13. on page 122) Label for Remote Inventory RRA
(C) and (G)
UNIT
RRA CHANNEL all slots (C) RRA STANDBY slot (G) only S1.1 OPTIC. INTER.FC/PC S1.1 OPTIC. INTER.SC/PC N.B.
[17]
[18]
RRAS
[31]
IS1.1
[32]
IS1.1
For the unit physical views and operative information, refer to para.3.6.4 on page 147 for the RRACHANNEL, and to para.3.6.5 on page 149 for the RRASTANDBY.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 137 / 514
b)
MD
Tab. 20. Modem cards equipping rules SLOT IN BASEBAND SHELF (see Fig. 64. on page 135) Read carefully General equipping rules on page 129. The MoDem (MD) card types contain the modulator and demodulator function units. Only 128 QAM is supported in the current release. For each type of MD (supporting STM1 or sub STM1 signal), an IF module is used in case of space diversity configuration as daughter board of the MD board. The same physical module is used also in case of frequency reuse configuration, always as a daughter board, but only for MD supporting STM1 signals. In case of space diversity with frequency reuse configuration with MD supporting STM1 signals, two of these daughter boards are used.
(D)
UNIT
P/N (REF in Tab. 13. on page 122) [20] [21] [19] [22]
Label for Remote Inventory RRAMD1280W0 IF1WCX RRAMD1281W1 IF0WC
MODEM LHSTM11WST CANCCOMB STM1 MODEM LHSTM00WST CANCCOMB STM0 N.B. c) PSU
Tab. 21. PSU cards equipping rules SLOT IN BASEBAND SHELF (see Fig. 64. on page 135) Read carefully General equipping rules on page 129. The PSU boards power the Base Band shelf. Usually PSU units are equipped in pairs (PSU0 + PSU1, PSU2 + PSU3, etc.), because each PSU pair gives power supply in protected mode to a pair of MD and RRA, that are so protected from the failure of a single PSU: PSU0 + PSU1 PSU2 + PSU3 PSU4 + PSU5 PSU6 + PSU7 PSU8 + PSU9
(E)
(MD0+RRA0) + (MD1+RRA1) (MD2+RRA2) + (MD3+RRA3) (MD4+RRA4) + (MD5+RRA5) (MD6+RRA6) + (MD7+RRA7) (MD8+RRA8) + (MD9+RRA9) P/N (REF in Tab. 13. on page 122) Label for Remote Inventory PSL4860
UNIT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
DC/DC CONVERTER BB 2G LH N.B.
[29]
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 138 / 514
d)
Dummy plates
Tab. 22. Dummy plates for RRAModem and PSU equipping rules
SLOT IN BASEBAND SHELF (see Fig. 64. on page 135) When a group of RRA, MD and PSU is not equipped, the corresponding slots must be closed by dummy plates, to ensure EMC performance as well as equipment correct ventilation. UNIT P/N (REF in Tab. 13. on page 122) Label for Remote Inventory
(C) + (D) (E)
DUMMY PLATE W40 (RRA + MD) DUMMY PLATE L40 (DC/DC CONV.)
[34]
[35]
3.6.1.5 PSF cards Tab. 23. PSF cards equipping rules SLOT IN BASEBAND SHELF (see Fig. 64. on page 135) The PSF boards contain the filter for the PSU boards and the DC/DC converter to supply System Controller and SERVICE boards; the two PSF boards are in protection between them.
(F)
UNIT FILTER P.S.U. 5.3/3.4V
Label for Remote Inventory PSF
N.B.
3.6.1.6 Kit Loudspeaker Tab. 24. Kit Loudspeaker equipping rules POSITION IN OPTINEX RACK (see Fig. 55. on page 126) The Kit Loudspeaker is an optional unit to be inserted inside TRU. The kit includes the cable for its connection to the system.
(J)
UNIT KIT LOUDSPEAKER
Label for Remote Inventory
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 139 / 514
3.6.2 SYSTEM CONTROLLER and FLASH CARD unit operative information

Refer to: para.2.4.4.7 on page 57 for a brief functional description of the unit para.3.6.1.1 on page 136 for physical composition and P/Ns. chapter 5, and in particular: para.5.2.6 on page 276, for the detailed functional description of the SYSCO unit para.5.2.7 on page 280, for the detailed functional description of the Flash Card The following information is given hereafter: Fig. 65. herebelow shows the unit assembly view Fig. 66. herebelow shows the FLASH CARD profile and insertion direction Fig. 67. on page 141 depicts the unit front view : for the front connectors usage, please refer to para.4.7.6 on page 207. the usage of the pushbuttons Lamp Test (7) and Reset (9), is explained in para.4.7.6 on page 207, and in chapter 7 on page 355. the usage of the other pushbuttons and leds is explained in chapter 7 on page 355.
para.3.6.2.2 on page 142 describes the hardware setting options dependent on SWP and system configuration. Subunit ESCON
J1 J2 J3 M1 M2 M3 System Controller main board (ESC) Flash Card
Fig. 65. System Controller assembly, front connector numbering and and internal view
TOP SIDE
INSERTION
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 66. FLASH CARD profile and insertion direction
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 140 / 514
(9) Reset Button J1 I/O for QB3 10 BASE 2 (2 BNCs in parallel)
J2
J3
M1
I/O RJ45 for QB3 10 BASE T and DEBUGN or local EC debug I/O RJ45 for CAN 0 BB and local EC debug M2
M3
F interface for ECT
(1) OR of all URGENT alarms (red) (2) OR of all NOT URGENT alarms (red) (3) ATTENDED alarm (yellow) (4) OR of all ABNORMAL conditions (yellow) (5) OR of all INDICATIVE alarms (yellow) (7) Lamp Test Pushbutton (8) Alarm storing Pushbutton (Attended) (6) bicolor led: red on: Card failure alarm green flashing: SW download in progress (internal or toward other boards) off: normal condition
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 67. System Controller front view
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 141 / 514
3.6.2.1 Lamp Test & Reset buttons With reference to Fig. 67. on page 141, the pushbuttons Lamp Test (7) and Reset (9) allow the following operations: Lamp test X X Reset Effect System lamp test of all the leds in all units of Baseband shelf (Transceivers not affected) EC (Equipment Controller) reset RC (Radio Controller) reset N.B. to perform this operation, hold Lamp Test pushed and contemporarily push Reset
For the meaning of EC and RC, make reference to para.5.2.2.1.2 on page 237.
3.6.2.2 Hardware settings Refer to MSZZQ documents relative to the System Controller unit for the TC and DipSwitch physical position on the board (see Tab. 89. on page 510). In the following, only the DipSwitch banks associated to software configurations are taken into consideration (for other DipSwitch banks and TC meaning, please refer to the above cited documents). a) on subunit ESCON (see Fig. 65. on page 140) : a Dipswitch bank allows to clear (erase) the System Configuration memory. The use of this dipswitch bank is explained in the 9600LSY Operators Handbook. ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) These dipswitches must be usually in OFF position. If unproperly set, these dipswitches will reset the FLASH CARD content, and you will loose all the software herein contained (programs and system configuration data) b) on main board ESC (see Fig. 65. on page 140) : 1) Equipment Type: EQTYPE field is fixed to 0110 (Dec. 6) to indicate Long Haul system (there are no Dipswitch banks to set).
continues..
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 142 / 514
N.B.
Before using Tab. 25. or Tab. 26. for configuration setting/change purposes, verify that the values correspond to those stated in the CT Operators Handbook associated to the Software Package (SWP) running on your system. In the case of conflict between the values stated in this manual and those indicated in CT Operators Handbook, these latter will prevail. 2) BKPV (BacKPanel Version) field according to following Tab. 25.
Tab. 25. ESC DipSwitch Bank I4 setting BKPV I4 switches 3 0 0 0 2 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 2 LHRC Long Haul indoor terminal Regenerator Compact LHR Long Haul indoor terminal Regenerator LHRR Long Haul indoor terminal Regenerator Repeater
Dec
Description
DipSwitch I4 /45678 must be set to 1 (Open or Off).
3)
SLOTID field for LHR according to following Tab. 26.
Tab. 26. ESC DipSwitch Bank I1 setting SLOTID I1 switches 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Dec 2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
Equip. Type
Subrack BB
Subrack TRI
STM0/ STM1 STM0
Space Diversity
5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
3 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
SRTRI1HET 1 2 3 4 SRTRIN 5 N+1 6 SRTRISDN 7 8 SRTRIN 9 N+0 10 SRTRISDN 0 11 STM1 SD DipSwitch I1 /78 must be set to 1 (Open or Off). SRBBN0 STM0 SD STM1 STM1 STM0 SD SRBBN1 STM0 SD STM1 1+1 HET STM1 SRBB11 STM0 SRTRISD1HET STM1 STM0 SD SD
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 143 / 514
3.6.3 SERVICE and ADDITIONAL VOICE unit operative information

Refer to: para.2.4.4.6 on page 57 for a brief functional description of the unit para.3.6.1.3 on page 136 for physical composition and P/Ns. chapter 5, and in particular para.5.4.6 on page 297, for the detailed functional description of the unit The following information is given hereafter: Fig. 68. herebelow shows the unit assembly view Fig. 69. on page 145 depicts the unit front view : for the front connectors (J1) (J2) usage, please refer to para.4.7.4 on page 202. the usage of the front connector (J5) and leds in LINE O.W. area is explained in para.3.6.3.1 on page 146. the usage of leds in LINE TPH area is explained in para.3.6.3.2 on page 146. the led (3) and pushbutton (4) are presently unused. the other indications are selfexplaining.
para.3.6.3.3 on page 146 describes the hardware setting options. Optional subunit ADDITIONAL VOICE (TPHDEV)
J1 J2 J3 J4 J5 SMA
Fig. 68. Service unit assembly, front connector numbering and and internal view
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 144 / 514
J1 PROTECTED WST 2 Mbit/s J2
J3 NOT OPERATIVE IN CURRENT RELEASE J4 (1) Indication of the No of the Rx protected channel (1 digit display) (2) Manual operation of N+1 logic (yellow) J5 Telephone jack
(6) line busy (yellow) (7) line free (green) (8) line busy (yellow) (*) (9) line free (green) (*) operative only with TPHDEV equipped
(3) Loudspeaker activated (green) (4) Pushbutton for loudspeaker activation/deactivation
(*)
(10) Card failure alarm (red)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 69. Service unit front view
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 145 / 514
3.6.3.1 EOW Channel use After having connected the DTMF Telephone Kit (Ref.[39] in Tab. 13. on page 122) to the telephone jack (connector (J5) in Fig. 69. on page 145), the User can implement two call modes: selective omnibus activates a twoway speech link between two users activates a oneway link with all users
The User number, within a 10 to 99 range, is software programmable. To make an omnibus call, digit 00. Front LED indications (LINE O.W. area in Fig. 69. on page 145): (7) (green) on: (6) (yellow): on: flashing: free line
engaged line call received and acknowledged
Keys on telephone handset: * : forced line release # : line seizure
Three PartyLine (VF TX/RX A,B and C) paths are available on BB shelfs connector M190 (see Tab. 43. on page 205).
3.6.3.2 TPH Channel use (Additional Voice) It is possible only with subunit TPH equipped inside SERVICE board. The DTMF Telephone Kit (Ref.[39] in Tab. 13. on page 122) must be connected to the system through pins 7 and 20 of BB shelfs connector M190 (see Tab. 43. on page 205). The call procedure is equal to that explained in para.3.6.3.1 above but, in this case, the leds in LINE TPH area are used instead. Two PartyLine (VF TX/RX A and B TPH) paths are available on BB shelfs connector M190 (see Tab. 43. on page 205).
3.6.3.3 Hardware settings Refer to MSZZQ documents relative to the Service unit for the TC and DipSwitch physical position on the board and their meaning (see Tab. 89. on page 510).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 146 / 514
3.6.4 RRACHANNEL unit operative information

Refer to: para.2.4.4.3 on page 56 for a brief functional description of the unit point a ) on page 137 for physical composition and P/Ns. chapter 5, and in particular: para.5.4.2 on page 287, for the detailed functional description of the unit para.5.4.4 on page 292, for the detailed functional description of the optical module The following Fig. 70. shows: the protection cap (fixed by a screw) that must be removed to access the unit front panel, and must be repositioned after having connected the cables the drawer (fixed by two screws) that must be removed only in case an optional a STM1 optical module has to be equipped.
J1 J2
Protection cap
Drawer extractable for the insertion of a STM1 optical module Fig. 70. RRACHANNEL assembly view and front connector numbering 3.6.4.1 Front connectors usage Refer to para.4.7.2 on page 202. Other information in Fig. 71. on page 148.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
3.6.4.2 Hardware settings None
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 147 / 514
STM1 ELECTR. INTRF.
J1 yellow marker INPUT OUTPUT green marker J2
Hole for drawer extraction (present also in optical modules)
ALS restart key SC/PC OPTIONAL STM1 OPTICAL MODULE INPUT OUTPUT
ALS restart key FC/PC (1) Card failure alarm (red)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 71. RRACHANNEL unit front view
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 148 / 514
3.6.5 RRASTANDBY unit operative information

Refer to: para.2.4.4.4 on page 56 for a brief functional description of the unit point a ) on page 137 for physical composition and P/Ns. chapter 5, and in particular para.5.4.3 on page 289, for the detailed functional description of the unit As far as the protection cap and extractable drawer are concerned, the assembly view is as in Fig. 70. on page 147. The front view is as in Fig. 71. on page 148, with a difference in the lower part, where there is the display shown in Fig. 72. herebelow:
Indication of the No of the Tx protected channel (1 digit display)
Tx
Fig. 72. RRASTANDBY unit front view (particular) 3.6.5.1 Front connectors usage Refer to para.4.7.2 on page 202. 3.6.5.2 Hardware settings None
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 149 / 514
3.6.6 MODEM unit operative information

Refer to: para.2.4.4.5 on page 57 for a brief functional description of the unit point b ) on page 138 for physical composition and P/Ns. chapter 5, and in particular para.5.4.5 on page 293, for the detailed functional description of the unit The following Fig. 73. shows the protection cap (fixed by a screw) that must be removed to access the unit front panel, and must be repositioned after having connected the cables:
J1 J2 J3 J4 J5 MODEM mother board
Protection cap
Fig. 73. Modem unit assembly view and front connector numbering 3.6.6.1 Front connectors usage Refer to para.4.6 on page 193. Other information in Fig. 74. on page 151 and Fig. 75. on page 152. 3.6.6.2 Hardware settings They are on the mother board. Refer to MSZZQ documents relative to the Modem unit for the TC and DipSwitch physical position on the board and their meaning (choosing the unit type according to the P/N in Tab. 89. on page 510. WARNING: there are different Modem units).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 150 / 514
The following Fig. 74. :

depicts the internal connections between IF2 and IF3 inputs and the corresponding CANCCOMB submodules describes the equipping rules of CANCCOMB submodules in the various configurations.
POS.A IF INPUT MAIN IF2 INPUT IF3 INPUT POS.B
STM0 CASE CONFIGURATION NO SPACE DIVERSITY SPACE DIVERSITY N.B. : XPIC not envisaged with STM0 POS.A UNEQUIPPED CANCCOMB STM0 POS.B UNEQUIPPED UNEQUIPPED
STM1 CASE CONFIGURATION NO SPACE DIVERSITY AND NO XPIC SPACE DIVERSITY OR XPIC SPACE DIVERSITY AND XPIC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
POS.A UNEQUIPPED CANCCOMB STM1 CANCCOMB STM1
POS.B UNEQUIPPED UNEQUIPPED CANCCOMB STM1
Fig. 74. Modem unit assembly internal view and CANCCOMB equipping rules
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 151 / 514
Modulator output blue marker
J1
Modulator output monitoring
J2
Main demodulator input red marker
J3
IF2 input
J4
see Fig. 74. on page 151 IF3 input J5
(1) Card failure alarm (red)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 75. Modem unit front view
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 152 / 514
3.6.7 PSU and PSF units operative information

Refer to:
para.2.4.4.9 on page 57 for a brief functional description of the PSU unit point c ) on page 138 for physical composition and P/Ns of the PSU unit para.2.4.4.10 on page 57 for a brief functional description of the PSF unit para.3.6.1.5 on page 139 for physical composition and P/Ns of the PSF unit chapter 5, and in particular para.5.3 on page 282, for the detailed functional description of the units
(1) ON/OFF switch
(3) Input Power Supply

A1
(2) PSU switched on (green)
(4) PSF powered on (green) PSF
PSU 3.6.7.1 Power supply connector pinout (on PSF unit) Pins A1 A2 A3 +BATT GND BATT Meaning +BATTERY Ground Battery
Fig. 76. PSU and PSF units front view 3.6.7.2 Front connector on PSF unit usage
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Refer to Tab. 33. on page 190. 3.6.7.3 Hardware settings None
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 153 / 514
A3
3.6.8 Additional Housekeeping unit operative information

Refer to: para.2.4.4.8 on page 57 for a brief functional description of the unit para.3.6.1.2 on page 136 for physical composition and P/Ns. chapter 5, and in particular para.5.2.8 on page 281, for the detailed functional description of the unit
M1
M2
(1) LED Fig. 77. Additional Housekeeping unit assembly view 3.6.8.1 Legend and connectors usage a) b) c)
(M1) SUBD25 pins female connector pinout: see Tab. 52. on page 213. (M2) SUBD9 pins male connector: see Tab. 40. on page 192. LED (red): indicates the failure of Additional Housekeeping unit
3.6.8.2 Hardware settings None
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 154 / 514
3.6.9 Kit Loudspeaker operative information

3.6.9.1 Installation
The Kit Loudspeaker is an optional unit to be inserted inside TRU and connected to the system as depicted in Fig. 78. herebelow. Refer to para.3.6.1.6 on page 139 for physical composition and P/Ns.
To equip the Kit, remove the TRU plate (4 screws) and fix the kit with the same screws
To be connected to BB connector M190 (see Fig. 95. on page 178)
Fig. 78. Kit Loudspeaker 3.6.9.2 Hardware settings None 3.6.9.3 Usage
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
With reference to Fig. 69. on page 145 (Service unit front view): Pushbutton (4) activates/deactivates the loudspeaker Green led (3) on indicates the loudspeaker activation.
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 155 / 514
3.7 Transceiver shelf 3.7.1 Transceiver shelf unit layout

The Transceiver shelf unit layout is depicted in the following Fig. 79. herebelow: T R I 0 T R I 1 T R I 2 T R I 3 T R I 4 T R I 5 T R I 6 T R I 7 T R I 8 T R I 9
10
Fig. 79. Transceiver shelf equipment (slot numbering and board types and numbering) General equipping rules Please refer to para.3.5 on page 129, for Board provisioning and expansion guideline in BB & TR shelves.
3.7.2 Equipping rules of Transceiver units or substitutive Dummy Plates

Tab. 27. Transceiver units and substitutive dummy plates equipping rules SLOT IN TRANSCEIVER SHELF (see Fig. 79. on page 156)
TRANSCEIVER
Read carefully General equipping rules on page 129. Each Transceiver is an assembly made up by components that, from item provisioning and maintenance points of view, are independent items that are equipped, for types and number, according to the system configuration, as shown herebelow: COMPONENTS TYPES AND NUMBER FREQUENCY DIVERSITY TRI LO R FR KIT REUSE N N 1 2 1 0 N Y 1 2 1 1 or 0 Y N 1 2 2 0 Y Y 1 2 2 1 or 0 Refer to para.3.7.3 on page 157 for details. N.B. For the P/Ns and Remote Inventory Labels of TRI units and modules, please refer to the specific chapter between those listed in Tab. 67. on page 414.
(A)
DUMMY PLATE
When a transceiver is not equipped, the corresponding slot is closed by a dummy plate. Label for P/N Remote UNIT (REF in Tab. 13. on page 122) Inventory RT FRONT PLATE KIT [36]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 156 / 514
3.7.3 Composition of transceiver units

a)
TRI (Tranceiver) The transceiver units have different P/Ns for the following characteristics (N.B.): frequency range modulation (128 QAM, 64 QAM) This P/N is comprehensive of the Transceiver box (see Fig. 80. on page 158) and the following internal components (see Fig. 81. on page 159): RT control Amplifier Up Converter Delay Line DC/DC Converter together with the associated internal cabling and the cabling relevant to the connection of Rx and Tx LOs. This P/N does not include the LO, R and FR KIT components, that are defined as separate items.
b)
LO (Local Oscillator module) There are always two Local Oscillators modules inside a transceiver, one for the Rx section, the other for the Tx section (see Fig. 81. on page 159). The Local Oscillator modules have different P/Ns for the following characteristics (N.B.): frequency range possible application for a particular channel plan Inside a TRI, these Local Oscillators must have the same P/N.
c)
R (Receiver module) There can be one or two receiver modules inside a transceiver: in the case the Transceiver is used without the Space Diversity configuration, there is only one Receiver (named Main Receiver) as shown in Fig. 81. on page 159 and Fig. 82. on page 160, and the unit front connectors are those depicted in Fig. 87. on page 165; in the case the Transceiver is used with the Space Diversity configuration, two Receivers (respectively named Main Receiver and Diversity Receiver) are equipped as shown in Fig. 83. on page 160 and Fig. 84. on page 161, and the unit front connectors are those depicted in Fig. 88. on page 166. The Receiver Modules have different P/Ns for the following characteristics (N.B.): frequency range The Receiver P/N includes the associated internal cabling. Inside a TRI, the Main Receiver and Diversity Receiver must have the same P/N.
d)
FR KIT (Frequency Reuse kit) Only in case of Frequency Reuse systems: one Frequency Reuse kit is equipped inside the transceiver housing the Rx Local Oscillator defined as Master, as depicted in Fig. 82. on page 160 and Fig. 84. on page 161. inside the transceiver housing the Rx Local Oscillator defined as Slave, the Frequency Reuse kit is not equipped . The Frequency Reuse kit has the same P/N for all frequency bands. The Frequency Reuse kit P/N includes the module and the associated internal cabling.
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The P/Ns of TRI units and modules must belong to the same Frequency Plan group: please refer to the specific chapter between those listed in Tab. 67. on page 414.
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 157 / 514
3.7.4 TRANSCEIVER unit operative information

Refer to: para.2.4.3.2 on page 53 for a brief functional description of the unit previous para.3.7.2 and 3.7.3 for physical composition and P/Ns. The following information is given hereafter: Assembly views Internal composition Hardware settings Internal interconnection diagram Front connectors usage 3.7.4.1 Assembly views
herebelow on page 159 on page 161 on page 162 on page 165
COVER PLATE A TO REMOVE FOR INTERNAL SERVICE (HARDWARE SETTING OR REPAIR). Arrows show screws for cover remove/fix.
COVER PLATE B NEVER TO BE REMOVED
TRI P/N and Remote Inventory
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 80. Transceiver assembly physical views
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 158 / 514
3.7.4.2 Internal composition

FREQUENCY REUSE DIVERSITY All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel. USAGE TR HOUSING
INTERNAL COMPONENTS Fig. 81. herebelow Fig. 82. on page 160, in addition to those shown in Fig. 81. Fig. 81. herebelow Fig. 83. on page 160, in addition to those shown in Fig. 81. Fig. 84. on page 161, in addition to those shown in Fig. 81. Fig. 83. on page 160, in addition to those shown in Fig. 81.
N N Y
LO MASTER LO SLAVE
N Y Y
LO MASTER LO SLAVE
MAIN RECEIVER
PLATE COVERING MAIN RECEIVER DC/DC CONVERTER
RX LOCAL OSCILLATOR DELAY LINE
TX LOCAL OSCILLATOR RT CONTROL
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
UP CONVERTER
AMPLIFIER
Fig. 81. Transceiver internal view: standard components and Main Receiver
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 159 / 514
TR.FREQUENCY REUSE KIT

Fig. 82. Transceiver internal view: without Diversity Receiver and with TR.Frequency Reuse Kit
DIVERSITY RECEIVER
MAIN RECEIVER (inside)
N.B.
The Diversity Receiver is mounted on the PLATE COVERING MAIN RECEIVER (see Fig. 81. page 159)
Fig. 83. Transceiver internal view: with Diversity Receiver and without TR.Frequency Reuse Kit
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 160 / 514
DIVERSITY RECEIVER
TR.FREQUENCY REUSE KIT
MAIN RECEIVER (inside) N.B. The Diversity Receiver is mounted on the PLATE COVERING MAIN RECEIVER (see Fig. 81. page 159)
Fig. 84. Transceiver internal view: with Diversity Receiver and with TR.Frequency Reuse Kit 3.7.4.3 Hardware settings They are on subunit RT CONTROL (see Fig. 85. herebelow) and are accessible removing the cover plate A depicted in Fig. 80. on page 158. Refer to MSZZQ documents relative to the Transceiver unit for the TC and DipSwitch physical position on the board and their meaning (choosing the unit type according to the P/N in Tab. 89. on page 510. WARNING: there are different Transceiver units).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
HARDWARE SETTING DIP SWITCHES Fig. 85. Position of Hardware setting dip switches
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 161 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED A I
3.7.4.4 Internal interconnection diagram
N.B.
03
955.203.292 Q
Letters denote particulars enlarged on following pages
B B
Fig. 86. Transceiver internal connection diagram
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
F G
162 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
continues ..
03
955.203.292 Q
Enlarged particulars of Fig. 86. page 162
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
163 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
.. continues
03
955.203.292 Q
Enlarged particulars of Fig. 86. page 162
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
164 / 514
3.7.4.5 Front connectors usage DIVERSITY

DESCRIPTION Fig. 87. herebelow Fig. 88. on page 166 Fig. 89. on page 167 (meaning of access points)
N Y Y or N
N.B.
For connection with Modem and Branching, refer to para.4.6 on page 193.
J9
J10 J11 J12 M2 J5 J6 J7 J8 I1
J13 J14
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 87. Transceiver front connector numbering (TR without Rx diversity)
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 165 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED J1 J2 J3 J6 J4 J7 J5 M1 J8 J13 J14 J9 J10
03
955.203.292 Q
Fig. 88. Transceiver front connector numbering (TR with Rx diversity)
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
J11 J12 M2 I1
166 / 514
Rx diversity section N.B.1

Rx main section Input RF Rx main J9
J1
Input RF Rx diversity
J2 J3 J4
Output 1 IF Rx divers. Output 2 IF Rx divers. Output IF Rx divers. monitoring M1 N.B.2
red marker Output 1 IF Rx main J10 Output 2 IF Rx main J11 Output IF Rx main monitoring N.B.2 M2 J12
blue marker J5 J6 Input IF Tx
ON/OFF switch (1) Unit switched on (green)
I1
LO Rx Remote (Input or Output)
J7 LO Rx monitoring J8 LO Tx monitoring (2) OR of internal alarms (red)
N.B.1 Rx diversity sections elements are present only in units equipped with Rx diversity (see Fig. 88. on page 166) N.B.2 Socket to connect a recording instrument, to monitor the Rx input field value (see Fig. 183. on page 359) RF Tx output monitoring RF Tx output J13 J14
Fig. 89. Transceiver front view meaning of access points

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 167 / 514
3.8 Branching 3.8.1 Branching drawings and BranchingTransceivers connections

Branching drawings, organized per frequency bands and type (with/without Frequency Reuse/Diversity) are given as separate documents annexed to this handbook. Their list is given in Tab. 91. on page 513. These drawings indicate also the connections among the branching and the Transceivers. As far as the number of channels are concerned, such drawings show only some of the possible configurations.
3.8.2 Branching Front Plate Kit (Rx branching area)

Tab. 28. Branching Front Plate Kit equipping rules SLOT IN OPTINEX RACK (see Fig. 55. on page 126)
BRANCHING FRONT PLATE KIT

Equipping this kit, after having set up the connections involved in Rx branching area, is mandatory in operating conditions to ensure correct equipment ventilation.
(F)
UNIT BRANCHING FRONT PLATE KIT
Label for Remote Inventory
Fig. 90. Branching Front Plate Kit

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 168 / 514
3.9 FANS shelf and FANS assembled units 3.9.1 FANS shelf equipping rules
Presently, there can be either one or two FAN shelves, see pos. (E) and (L) in Fig. 55. on page 126: FAN shelf pos. (E) is mandatory in all configurations FAN shelf pos. (L) is mandatory whenever the 1650SMC shelf is equipped.
3.9.2 FANS assembled unit equipping rules

The FANS SHELF contains one or two independent FANS ASSEMBLED units, as depicted in following Fig. 91. :
FANSL A 1
FANSL B 2
Fig. 91. Fan shelf (slot numbering and board types) Tab. 29. Fans unit & cover equipping rules SLOT IN FAN SHELF (see Fig. 91. on this page) Each fan unit contains four fans, a DC/DC converter and an internal control unit. When one of the FANS ASSEMBLED is not equipped, the corresponding slot must be closed by COVER to guarantee correct ventilation. For FANS ASSEMBLED equipping rules, refer to: para.3.9.2.1 on page 170 (Base Band shelf) para.3.9.2.2 on page 170 (ADM shelf) UNIT FANS ASSEMBLED COVER N.B. P/N (REF in Tab. 13. on page 122) [8] [37] Label for Remote Inventory FANSL
(A) (B)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 169 / 514
3.9.2.1 Equipping rules for FANS assembled unit in Basebandshelf Tab. 30. Equipping rules for FANS assembled unit in Basebandshelf E= NE = equipped not equipped POLARIZATION single polarization (see Fig. 59. on page 131) two antenna polarizations (see Fig. 60. on page 132) CONFIGURATION up to 2+1 / 3+0 3+1 / 4+0 all
FANSLA FANSLB
E E E
NE E E
As far as the ADMshelfs FANSshelf is concerned, only one FAN ASSEMBLED unit is envisaged (FANSL B, on the rack right side).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 170 / 514
3.9.3 FANS assembled unit operative information

Fig. 92. herebelow and Fig. 93. on page 172 show the physical views of the FANS shelf and FANSL unit and substitutive COVER assemblies.
FANS SHELF
FRONT PLATE
COVER (must be equipped in not used FANS ASSEMBLED slots to guarantee correct ventilation) FANS ASSEMBLED Fig. 92. FANS SHELF, FANS ASSEMBLED and substitutive COVER assembly views
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 171 / 514
Hole for unit extraction
(1) LED
Power supply input
M1
M3
Can Bus Connector
DIPSWITCH
I O
O I
M2
Can Bus Connector
I1
I2
Power supply input
M4
Legend on page 173 Fig. 93. Front view of FANS SHELF equipped with both FANS ASSEMBLED units Hardware settings see point c ) on page 173
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 172 / 514
Legend for Fig. 93. : a)

(M1) (M4) Power supply connectors :

Usage and connection: see: Tab. 34. on page 190 (Basebandshelfs FANSshelf) Tab. 35. on page 190 (ADMshelfs FANSshelf)
Pinout: Pins A1 A2 A3 +BATT GND BATT Meaning +BATTERY Ground Battery
b)
(M2) (M3) CANBUS connectors:

see Tab. 38. on page 191
c)
(I1) (I2) DIPSWITCHES : to be set according to the position in the rack:

I1 I I O O I2 I O I O Subrack No 0 1 2 3 Usage Baseband shelf future use ADM shelf future use
d)
LED (red): indicating a failure in the FANS ASSEMBLED unit
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 173 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
174 / 514
4 SYSTEM CABLING 4.1 Introduction

This chapter describes the 9600LSY system cabling with the following information: location of access points for cabling, with the exception of those present on the units front plates, that are described in the paragraphs of previous chapter. types of cables used for internal connections pointtopoint cabling of internal connections description of pinout of connectors for external connections. This paragraph does not describe: the internal connections effective cable routing inside the equipment the kinds of cables used for external connections
For this information, please refer to the Installation Handbook (REF.[E] on page 469). This chapter is organized as follows: Shelves connectors, on page 176, including: T.R.U. connectors, on page 176 Base Band shelf access panel: SUBD connectors layout, on page 178 Base Band shelf access panel: 2Mb/s WST connectors layout, on page 180 Transceiver shelf connectors, on page 181 Cable kits and cable types, on page 183 Power supply distribution connections, on page 190 Signal connections between shelves, on page 191 ModemTransceiverBranching connections, on page 193 External interfaces, on page 202, including: Power Line Interface, on page 202 SDH interfaces, on page 202 Input / Output Unprotected WST, on page 202 Input / Output Protected WST, on page 202 Auxiliary Channels, on page 203 Management interfaces, on page 207 Station Alarms, on page 208 Summarizing / Housekeeping alarms, on page 208, including: General characteristics, on page 208 Out Housekeeping and Remote alarms, on page 209 Input Housekeeping alarms, on page 212
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 175 / 514
4.2 Shelves connectors 4.2.1 T.R.U. connectors

M6 M8 M7 M5 M4 M2 M3 M1
Alarm Extension
Box TRU
2A 1A 3A
4A 5A
6A 1B
Front view
2B 3B 4B 5B 6B
T.R.U.
Front view
M9
T.R.U.
Rear view
DC input and distribution

M10
b b+
b b+
a a+
a a+ Rear view without cover
Legend on page 177 Fig. 94. Top Rack Unit connector numbering
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 176 / 514
Legend for Fig. 94. : a)

(a) (a+) (b) (b+) (a) (a+) (b) (b+) :

Primary BATT.A and BATT.B. Power Supply input and distribution frame (N.B.)
b)
(M7) :
for usage see Tab. 37. on page 191; pins connected in parallel to connector (M8)
c)
(M6) :
for usage see Tab. 39. on page 192; pins connected in parallel to connector (M8)
d)
(M1) to (M5) and (M10) :

RM Interface connections; pins connected in parallel to connector (M8)
e)
(M9) :
Power Supply, alarm and service connections (N.B.)
f)
(1A) to (6B) :
Output Power Supply connectors/breakers toward the user shelves indicated in Tab. 15. on page 128. For the physical connection from connector/breakers to the user shelves, make reference to para.4.4 on page 190.
N.B.
For further information on TRU unit (in particular for hardware presettings), please refer to OPTINEX rack specific documentation (see para.18.2.2.1 on page 471).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 177 / 514
4.2.2 Base Band shelf access panel: SUBD connectors layout
M179 M180
M194 M191 M182
M187
M185 M193 M188 M184
M183
M186
M192
M190
M189
Legend: see Tab. 31. on page 179 N.B. Dot in connector front view indicates Pin 1 Fig. 95. Base Band shelf access panel: SUBD connectors layout
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 178 / 514
Tab. 31. Base Band shelf access panel: SUBD connectors usage
CONN. CONN. TYPE
SIGNALS Can 0 B.B Terminator
USAGE see Fig. 104. on page 189 or
M179
SUBD9 pins female Additional Housekeeping
see Tab. 40. on page 192 see Tab. 37. on page 191 see Tab. 41. on page 203 and Tab. 42. on page 204 see Tab. 49. on page 210 see Tab. 37. on page 191 see Tab. 51. on page 212 see Tab. 37. on page 191 see Tab. 38. on page 191 see Fig. 104. on page 189 see Fig. 104. on page 189 see Tab. 41. on page 203 and Tab. 43. on page 205 see Tab. 41. on page 203 and Tab. 44. on page 206 see Tab. 50. on page 211
M180 M182
SUBD25 pins female SUBD25 pins female
Can Bus RT Aux channel G703 and RS232 Out Remote alarms (GA21GA40) Rack lamps Input Housekeeping RT missing connections Can 0 bus extension toward FAN Shelf 0 CAN 1 (Download) Terminator CAN 1 (Download) Terminator Out party line OW,TPH and loudspeaker Aux channel V11 Out Housekeeping and Remote alarms (GA41GA48) Out Remote alarms (GA1GA20) Rel command HST
M183 M184 M185 M186 M187 M188 M189 M190
SUBD25 pins female SUBD9 pins male SUBD25 pins female SUBD25 pins female SUBD9 pins female SUBD9 pins female SUBD9 pins female SUBD25 pins female
M191
SUBD25 pins female
M192
SUBD25 pins female
M193 M194
SUBD25 pins female SUBD25 pins female
see Tab. 48. on page 209 for future use
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 179 / 514
4.2.3 Base Band shelf access panel: 2Mb/s WST connector layout
green markers
OUT 1 IN
J1 J2
OUT 2 IN CH0 yellow markers CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 CH9
J3 J4
In current release only connectors (J1) and (J2) are used for the connection of the 2Mbit/s WST of the corresponding channel. Connectors (J3) and (J4) are not used. Fig. 96. Base Band shelf access panel: 2Mb/s WST front connector layout and numbering
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 180 / 514
4.2.4 Transceiver shelf connectors
M2 M4 M5 M7 M6
BATT.B FOR TRANCEIVERS 59 Legend on page 182 Fig. 97. Transceiver shelf connector numbering at reartop side BATT.A BATT.A
M1
M3
BATT.B FOR TRANCEIVERS 04
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 181 / 514
Legend for Fig. 97. : a) Power supply connectors (M2)
(M3) (M5) (M6) :

Usage and connection: see para.4.4 on page 190 Pinout: Pins A1

A A3
Meaning +BATT +BATTERY
A2
A1
GND
Ground
A3
BATT
Battery
b) c)
(M1) (M4) connectors: for usage see Tab. 37. on page 191. (M7) connector: CAN RT bus terminated by a CAN bus terminator (see Fig. 104.
on page 189).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 182 / 514
4.3 Cable kits and cable types

The following Tab. 32. lists the cable kits envisaged for 9600LSY system and indicates the cable types used in such kits, the drawing of which are given in the associated figures. Notes for figures: a) b) the writings on cable connectors (like (A1) , (A2) , etc.) are used as CABLE SIDE information in the following paragraphs, to point out the correct cable connections; some labels are colored. In conjunction with the colored markers present on some units, this facilitates cabling, matching the colour on cable label with that of colored marker on the unit front plate; in the CannonCannon cables the pin connection is 1:1 (i.e. pin 1 left connected to pin 1 right, pin 2 left connected to pin 2 right, etc.).
c)
Tab. 32. Cable kits and cable types CABLE KIT CABLE KIT COMMON PARTS CABLE KIT 1 CHANNEL NO SPACE DIV. CABLE KIT 1 CHANNEL WITH SPACE DIV CABLE KIT FOR REUSE (1 RACK) CABLE KIT FOR REUSE (2 RACKS) (N.B.1) CABLE KIT FOR 1 EXTEN. CHANNEL FOR WMSN FANS UNIT CABLE KIT P/N (REF. in Tab. 13. on page 122) REF.[9] REF.[10] REF.[11] REF.[12] REF.[13] REF.[14] CABLE TYPES A, B, C, D, E F, G H K, N, P KK, NN, PP A, D S B REF.[15] Q B FANS UNIT EXTENSION CABLE KIT ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING Canbus Terminator (N.B.2) REF.[16] REF.[28] R D T FIGURE Fig. 98. page 184 Fig. 99. page 185 Fig. 99. page 185 Fig. 100. page 186 Fig. 101. page 187 Fig. 98. page 184 Fig. 103. page 189 Fig. 98. page 184 Fig. 102. page 188 Fig. 98. page 184 Fig. 102. page 188 Fig. 98. page 184 Fig. 104. page 189
N.B.
1 2
the use of this kit is not specified in current edition of this handbook. Each Can bus line must be terminated by a plug with two load resistors (120 ohm resistors mounted on SUBD9 pins male connectors inserted on female connectors).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 183 / 514
A: 3pins female for power supply

A1 N.B. A2
B: 3pins female 450 for power supply
B1
N.B.
B2
C: 9pins Cannon male / 9pins Cannon male

N.B. C1
C2
D: 9pins Cannon female / 9pins Cannon male

D1
D2
N.B.
E1
E: 25pins Cannon male / 25pins Cannon male
E2
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
Labelling depending on cable usage Fig. 98. System cabling: types of used cables (A, B, C, D, E)
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 184 / 514
F: Siem.M. 1.02.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.02.3 900

F1
RT n J10
blue label
signal flow
MODEM n J3
red label
F2
G: Siem.M. 1.02.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.02.3 900
G1
RT n J5
red label
signal flow
MODEM n J1
blue label
G2
H: Siem.M. 1.02.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.02.3 900
H1
RT n J2
white label
signal flow
MODEM n J4
white label
H2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 99. System cabling: types of used cables (F, G, H)
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 185 / 514
K: Siem.M. 1.02.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.02.3 900

K1
RT n J11 V (H)
white label
signal flow
MODEM n J4 H (V)
white label
K2
RT n J11 H (V)
white label
signal flow
MODEM n J4 V (H)
white label
P: Siem.M. 1.02.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.02.3 900
P1
RT n J11 V (H)
white label
signal flow
MODEM n J5 H (V)
white label
P2
RT n J11 H (V)
white label
signal flow
MODEM n J5 V (H)
white label
N: SMA.M. 900 / SMA.M. 900
RT n J6 H (V)
N1 white label
signal flow
RT n J6 V (H)
white label N2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 100. System cabling: types of used cables (K, N, P)
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 186 / 514
KK: Siem.M. 1.02.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.02.3 900

KK1
RT n J11 V (H) (RACK1)

white label
signal flow
MODEM n J4 H (V) (RACK2)

white label
KK2
RT n J11 H (V) (RACK1)

white label
signal flow
MODEM n J4 V (H) (RACK2)

white label
PP: Siem.M. 1.02.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.02.3 900
PP1

white label
signal flow
MODEM n J5 H (V) (RACK2)

white label
PP2

white label
signal flow
MODEM n J5 V (H) (RACK2)

white label
NN: SMA.M. 900 / SMA.M. 900
NN1 white label
signal flow
white label NN2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 101. System cabling: types of used cables (KK, NN, PP)
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 187 / 514
Q: 9pins Cannon male 300 / 9pins Cannon male

Q2 Q1
R: 9pins Cannon male 300 / 9pins Cannon male 300

R2
R1
Fig. 102. System cabling: types of used cables (Q, R)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 188 / 514
S: 1channel extension
S1
signal flow
S2
Sub.ADM STM n J1
yellow label
Sub.ADM STM n J2
green label
RRA n J2
yellow label S3
signal flow
RRA n J1
green label
S4 Fig. 103. System cabling: types of used cables (S)
T: CANbus terminator
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 104. System cabling: types of used cables (T)
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 189 / 514
4.4 Power supply distribution connections

N.B. For CABLE TYPE and CABLE SIDE related information, please refer to para.4.3 on page 183.
Tab. 33. Power supply distribution: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT COMMON PARTS CABLE TYPE N. 1 1 1 A 1 1 1 CABLE SIDE (A1) & LABEL Sub. RT / M2 Batt.A Sub. RT / M3 Batt.B Sub. RT / M5 Batt.A Sub. RT / M6 Batt.B Sub. B.B. / M1 Batt.A Sub. B.B. / M2 Batt.B (N.B.1) (N.B.1) (N.B.1) (N.B.1) (N.B.3) (N.B.4) CABLE SIDE (A2) & LABEL (N.B.2) T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 1A T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 1B T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 2A T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 2B T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 3A T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 3B
Tab. 34. Power supply distribution: Cables belonging to FANS UNIT CABLE KIT Cables belonging to FANS UNIT CABLE KIT CABLE TYPE B N. 1 1 CABLE SIDE (B1) & LABEL Fans Unit down (up) / M1 Batt.A (N.B.5) Fans Unit down (up) / M4 Batt.B (N.B.5) CABLE SIDE (B2) & LABEL (N.B.2) T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 5A T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 5B
Tab. 35. Power supply distribution: Cables belonging to FANS UNIT EXTENSION CABLE KIT CABLE TYPE B N. 1 1 CABLE SIDE (B1) & LABEL Fans Unit down (up) / M1 Batt.A (N.B.6) Fans Unit down (up) / M4 Batt.B (N.B.6) CABLE SIDE (B2) & LABEL (N.B.2) T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 6A T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 6B
Tab. 36. Power supply distribution: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT FOR 1 EXTEN. CHANNEL FOR WMSN CABLE TYPE A N. 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
CABLE SIDE (A1) & LABEL ADM CONGI / C1 ADM SERGI / S1 (N.B.7) (N.B.7)
CABLE SIDE (A2) & LABEL (N.B.2) T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 4A T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 4B
N.B.
see Fig. 97. page 181 see Fig. 94. page 176 connected to Power Supply input connector of PSF1 (see Fig. 64. page 135) connected to Power Supply input connector of PSF2 (see Fig. 64. page 135) connected to Power Supply input connectors M1/M4 (see Fig. 93. page 172) of BBs FANS shelf (see POS.(E) in Fig. 55. on page 126) connected to Power Supply input connectors M1/M4 (see Fig. 93. page 172) of ADMs FANS shelf (see POS.(L) in Fig. 55. on page 126) refer to 1650SMC documentation
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 190 / 514
4.5 Signal connections between shelves

N.B.
For CABLE TYPE and CABLE SIDE related information, please refer to para.4.3 on page 183.
Tab. 37. Signal connections: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT COMMON PARTS CABLE 1st. SIDE CABLE TYPE E C D N. CABLE SIDE E1 C1 D1 LABEL & CONNECTION Sub. RT / M4 Sub. RT / M1 Sub. BB / M184 (N.B.1) (N.B.1) (N.B.2) CABLE SIDE E2 C2 D2 CABLE 2nd SIDE LABEL & CONNECTION Sub. BB / M186 Sub. BB / M180 (N.B.2) (N.B.2)
1 1 1
TRU Alarm ext. / M7 (N.B.3)
Tab. 38. Signal connections: Cables belonging to FANS UNIT CABLE KIT and FANS UNIT EXTENSION CABLE KIT a) Configuration: BB FAN shelf only CABLE 1st. SIDE CABLE TYPE Q T b) N. CABLE SIDE Q1 T LABEL & CONNECTION Fans Unit down (up) / M2 (N.B.4) Fans Unit down (up) / M3 (N.B.4) CABLE SIDE Q2 CABLE 2nd SIDE LABEL & CONNECTION Sub. BB / M187 (N.B.2)
1 1
Configuration: BB FAN shelf + ADM FAN shelf CABLE 1st. SIDE CABLE 2nd SIDE CABLE SIDE Q2 R2 LABEL & CONNECTION Sub. BB / M187 (N.B.2)
CABLE TYPE Q R T
N.
CABLE SIDE Q1 R1 T
LABEL & CONNECTION Fans Unit down (up) / M2 (N.B.4) Fans Unit down (up) / M3 (N.B.4) Fans Unit down (up) / M3 (N.B.5)
1 1 1
Fans Unit down (up) / M2 (N.B.5)
N.B.
1 2 3 4 5
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
see Fig. 97. page 181 see Fig. 95. page 178 see Fig. 94. page 176 connected to connectors M2/M3 (see Fig. 93. page 172) of BBs FANS shelf (see POS.(E) in Fig. 55. on page 126) connected to connectors M2/M3 (see Fig. 93. page 172) of ADMs FANS shelf (see POS.(L) in Fig. 55. on page 126)
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 191 / 514
Tab. 39. Signal connections: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT FOR 1 EXTEN. CHANNEL FOR WMSN CABLE TYPE D S N.
CABLE 1st. SIDE CABLE SIDE D1 S1 n S2 N.B. 1 2 3 Sub.ADM STMn / J2 (N.B.1) S3 LABEL & CONNECTION ADM CONGI / C3 (N.B.1) CABLE SIDE D2 S4
CABLE 2nd SIDE LABEL & CONNECTION TRU Alarm ext. / M6 (N.B.2) RRAn / J2 RRAn / J1 (N.B.3) (N.B.3)
Sub.ADM STMn / J1 (N.B.1)
refer to 1650SMC documentation see Fig. 94. on page 176 see Fig. 71. on page 148
Tab. 40. Signal connections: Cables belonging to ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING CABLE 1st. SIDE CABLE TYPE D N.B. 1 2 N. CABLE SIDE D1 LABEL & CONNECTION Housek. / M2 (N.B.1) CABLE SIDE D2 CABLE 2nd SIDE LABEL & CONNECTION Sub. BB / M179 (N.B.2)
see Fig. 77. on page 154 see Fig. 95. page 178
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 192 / 514
4.6 ModemTransceiverBranching connections

The connections among Modems, Transceivers and Branching depend on the following possible configurations: case a ) : without Reuse and without Diversity see page 194 case b ) : without Reuse and with Diversity see page 196 case c ) : with Reuse and without Diversity see page 198 case d ) : with Reuse and with Diversity see page 200
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 193 / 514
a)
Without Reuse and without Diversity See Fig. 105. on page 195. In this figure, the writings near the arrows (that show the signal direction) on the cable indicate the CABLE TYPE and the CABLE SIDE information. E.g. G2 near MODEM J1 means that: cable type G is used and that its side G2 has to be connected to MODEMs connector J1 signal flows out from connector J1 N.B. For CABLE TYPE and CABLE SIDE related information, please refer to para.4.3 on page 183.
To locate the front connectors indicated in such figure, use: for MODEM unit: Fig. 75. on page 152 for TRANSCEIVER unit: Fig. 87. on page 165
For the connections between TRANSCEIVER unit and Rx / Tx Branching, refer to documents cited in para.3.8.1 on page 168. Requirements: MODEM does not need any CANCCOMB module (see Fig. 74. on page 151) TRANSCEIVER: internal components: standard configuration (see Fig. 81. on page 159).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 194 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
TRANSCEIVER SHELF RX BRANCHING BASE BAND SHELF G1 G2
J5 J6 J5 J1 J3 J4 J2
TX BRANCHING
03
J14 J9 J10 J11
955.203.292 Q F2 F1 TRANSCEIVER n
MODEM n
Fig. 105. ModemTransceiverBranching connections: without Reuse and without Diversity
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
195 / 514
b)
Without Reuse and with Diversity See Fig. 106. on page 197. In this figure, the writings near the arrows (that show the signal direction) on the cable indicate the CABLE TYPE and the CABLE SIDE information. E.g. G2 near MODEM J1 means that: cable type G is used and that its side G2 has to be connected to MODEMs connector J1 signal flows out from connector J1 N.B. For CABLE TYPE and CABLE SIDE related information, please refer to para.4.3 on page 183.
To locate the front connectors indicated in such figure, use: for MODEM unit: Fig. 75. on page 152 for TRANSCEIVER unit: Fig. 88. on page 166
For the connections between TRANSCEIVER unit and Rx / Tx Branching, refer to documents cited in para.3.8.1 on page 168. Requirements: MODEM needs one CANCCOMB module (see Fig. 74. on page 151) TRANSCEIVER: internal components: configuration with Diversity Receiver, in addition to standard components (see Fig. 83. on page 160).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 196 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
TRANSCEIVER SHELF BASE BAND SHELF RX BRANCHING H1 G1 G2 H2
J2 J1 J5 J6 J3 J5 J1 J3 J4 J2
TX BRANCHING
03
J14 J9 J10 J11
955.203.292 Q F2 F1 TRANSCEIVER n
MODEM n
Fig. 106. ModemTransceiverBranching connections: without Reuse and with Diversity
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
197 / 514
c)
With Reuse and without Diversity See Fig. 107. on page 199. In this figure, the writings near the arrows (that show the signal direction) on the cable indicate the CABLE TYPE and the CABLE SIDE information. E.g. G2 near MODEM J1 means that: cable type G is used and that its side G2 has to be connected to MODEMs connector J1 signal flows out from connector J1 N.B. For CABLE TYPE and CABLE SIDE related information, please refer to para.4.3 on page 183.
The connections must be done between two contiguous pairs of channels, i.e.: (MODEM 0 + TRANSCEIVER 0) connected to (MODEM 1 + TRANSCEIVER 1) (MODEM 2 + TRANSCEIVER 2) connected to (MODEM 3 + TRANSCEIVER 3) .... (MODEM 8 + TRANSCEIVER 8) connected to (MODEM 9 + TRANSCEIVER 9) To locate the front connectors indicated in such figure, use: for MODEM unit: Fig. 75. on page 152 for TRANSCEIVER unit: Fig. 87. on page 165
For the connections between TRANSCEIVER unit and Rx / Tx Branching, refer to documents cited in para.3.8.1 on page 168. Requirements: both MODEMs need one CANCCOMB module (see Fig. 74. on page 151) TRANSCEIVERs: the two transceivers are configured differently from each other: one Transceiver as follows: internal components: configuration with TR.Frequency Reuse Kit, in addition to standard components (see Fig. 82. on page 160) hardware setting: the Rx Local Oscillator must be configured as MASTER
the other Transceiver as follows: internal components: standard configuration (see Fig. 81. on page 159) hardware setting: the Rx Local Oscillator must be configured as SLAVE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 198 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
TRANSCEIVER SHELF RX BRANCHING BASE BAND SHELF K1 F1 G1 N1 G2 F2
J5 J6
TX BRANCHING
03 MODEM EVEN H (V)

J14 J5 J1 J3 J4 J2 J9 J10
955.203.292 Q TRANSCEIVER H (V) TRANSCEIVER V (H) K2

J5 J5 J1 J3 J4 J2 J6 J11
K2
MODEM EVEN +1 V (H)
J14 J9 J10 J11
F2
Fig. 107. ModemTransceiverBranching connections: with Reuse and without Diversity
3DB 02839 AA AA N2 G1 K1 F1
514
G2
199 / 514
d)
With Reuse and with Diversity See Fig. 108. on page 201. In this figure, the writings near the arrows (that show the signal direction) on the cable indicate the CABLE TYPE and the CABLE SIDE information. E.g. G2 near MODEM J1 means that: cable type G is used and that its side G2 has to be connected to MODEMs connector J1 signal flows out from connector J1 N.B. For CABLE TYPE and CABLE SIDE related information, please refer to para.4.3 on page 183.
The connections must be done between two contiguous pairs of channels, i.e.: (MODEM 0 + TRANSCEIVER 0) connected to (MODEM 1 + TRANSCEIVER 1) (MODEM 2 + TRANSCEIVER 2) connected to (MODEM 3 + TRANSCEIVER 3) .... (MODEM 8 + TRANSCEIVER 8) connected to (MODEM 9 + TRANSCEIVER 9) To locate the front connectors indicated in such figure, use: for MODEM unit: Fig. 75. on page 152 for TRANSCEIVER unit: Fig. 88. on page 166
For the connections between TRANSCEIVER unit and Rx / Tx Branching, refer to documents cited in para.3.8.1 on page 168. Requirements: both MODEMs need two CANCCOMB modules (see Fig. 74. on page 151) TRANSCEIVERs: the two transceivers are configured differently from each other: one Transceiver as follows: internal components: configuration with Diversity Receiver and with TR.Frequency Reuse Kit, in addition to standard components (see Fig. 84. on page 161) hardware setting: the Rx Local Oscillator must be configured as MASTER
the other Transceiver as follows: internal components: configuration with Diversity Receiver, in addition to standard components (see Fig. 83. on page 160) hardware setting: the Rx Local Oscillator must be configured as SLAVE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 200 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
TRANSCEIVER SHELF RX BRANCHING BASE BAND SHELF N1 H1 P1 F1 G1 G2 F2 H2
J2 J1 J5 J6 J3
TX BRANCHING
03 MODEM EVEN H (V)

J14 J5 J1 J3 J4 J2 J9 J10
955.203.292 Q TRANSCEIVER H (V) TRANSCEIVER V (H) P2

J2 J1 J5 J3 J6 J11
P2
J5 J1 J3 J4 J2
MODEM EVEN +1 V (H)
J14 J9 J10 J11
H2
F2
Fig. 108. ModemTransceiverBranching connections: with Reuse and with Diversity
3DB 02839 AA AA G1 H1 P1 F1 N2
514
G2
201 / 514
4.7 External interfaces 4.7.1 Power Line Interface

The Power Line interface is located on the TRU unit (see Fig. 94. on page 176). The main characteristics are reported in para.6.2.2 on page 323.
4.7.2 SDH interfaces

The SDH interfaces (line side) can be electrical or optical. Their access is on the front panel of units RRACHANNEL and RRASTANDBY (1 channel per unit); see para.3.6.4 on page 147 (RRACHANNEL), and para.3.6.5 on page 149 (RRASTANDBY). Electrical interfaces The connector used is Siemens, 1.0/2.3 75ohm male coax. The main characteristics are reported in para.6.4.3 on page 329. Optical interfaces The connector used is SC/PC or FC/PC. The main characteristics are reported in para.6.4.3 on page 329. For Optical Safety refer to para.6.8 on page 339.
Maximum cables number: N.8 inputs and N.8 outputs.
4.7.3 Input / Output Unprotected WST

The Subrack Access Area provides external access for WST channels by Siemens connectors, 1.0/2.3 75ohm male coax. The main characteristics are reported in para.6.4.3 on page 329. Maximum cables number: N.8 inputs and N.8 outputs on BaseBand Subrack access area; see para.4.2.3 on page 180.
4.7.4 Input / Output Protected WST

Input /Output WST protected is available on Service unit (see para.3.6.3 on page 144) The connector used is Siemens 1.0/2.3 75ohm male coax. The main characteristics are reported in para.6.4.3 on page 329. Maximum cables number: N.1 input and N.1 output.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 202 / 514
4.7.5 Auxiliary Channels

The Subrack Access Area provides external access for auxiliary channels by three SUBD 25 pins female connectors specified in the following. This table sums up the interfaces available: Tab. 41. Summary of auxiliary channels N. bit/s Format asynchronous V24/V28 (selectable) G703 inserted/ extracted Connector wires Notes
9600
RSOH/RFCOH
64k 64k
RSOH/RFCOH RSOH/RFCOH
M182 on BB access area. See Tab. 42. on page 204
12
3 or 2+1
V11 64K/128K
RSOH/RFCOH (128 K) only RFCOH
M191 on BB access area. See Tab. 44. on page 206 RJ11 Connector (J5) on Service Unit (Fig. 69. page 145)
24
(SW configurable) connected to 1 or 2 bytes
Speech
telephonic
RSOH/RFCOH
EOW
3 1
Speech Speech
I/O 3dBm I/O 3dBm Out 400 mW 4 ohm
RSOH/RFCOH RFCOH EOW (only extract) M190 on BB access area. See Tab. 43. on page 205
12 4
Analog Party line TPH Available on Remote Unit to loudspeaker
Speech
64k
G703
RFCOH or ADM
M182 on BB access area. See Tab. 42. on page 204
TPH to ADM
The main characteristics are reported in para.6.2.1 on page 317.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 203 / 514
Tab. 42. Aux channel G703 and RS232 BB shelfs M182 connector pinout M182 : SUBD25 pins female PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 9 14 10 11 12 13 14 13 25 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 N.B. Connector position in Fig. 95. on page 178. G703 TX TPH G703 RX TPH 64 kb data channel output for VOAD 64 kb data channel input for VOAD DATI 9600 RX 9.6 kb data channel input GND G703 TX (A) G703 RX (A) G703 TX (B) G703 RX (B) G703 TX (C) G703 RX (C) 64 kb data channel output port A 64 kb data channel input port A 64 kb data channel output port B 64 kb data channel input port B 64 kb data channel output port C 64 kb data channel input port C G703 TX+ TPH G703 RX+ TPH 64 kb data channel output for VOAD 64 kb data channel input for VOAD DATI 9600 TX 9.6 kb data channel output SIGNAL NAME G703 TX+ (A) G703 RX+ (A) G703 TX+ (B) G703 RX+ (B) G703 TX+ (C) G703 RX+ (C) SIGNAL DESCRIPTION 64 kb data channel output port A 64 kb data channel input port A 64 kb data channel output port B 64 kb data channel input port B 64 kb data channel output port C 64 kb data channel input port C
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 204 / 514
Tab. 43. Out party line OW, TPH and loudspeaker BB shelfs M190 connector pinout M190 : SUBD25 pins female
PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 14 10 11 12 13 14 13 25 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 N.B.
SIGNAL NAME VF TX+ A VF TX+ B VF TX+ C VF RX+ A VF RX+ B VF RX+ C WIRE A TPH VF TX+ A TPH VF TX+ B TPH VF RX+ A TPH VF RX+ B TPH LOUDSPEAKER + GND VF TX A VF TX B VF TX C VF RX A VF RX B VF RX C WIRE B TPH VF TX A TPH VF TX B TPH VF RX A TPH VF RX B TPH LOUDSPEAKER
SIGNAL DESCRIPTION analog party line output path A analog party line output path B analog party line output path C analog party line input path A analog party line input path B analog party line input path C output telephone (TPH) analog party line output path B VOAD analog party line output path A VOAD analog party line input path B VOAD analog party line input path A VOAD output loudspeaker negative
analog party line output path A analog party line output path B analog party line output path C analog party line input path A analog party line input path B analog party line input path C output telephone (TPH) analog party line output path A VOAD analog party line output path B VOAD analog party line input path A VOAD analog party line input path B VOAD output loudspeaker negative
Connector position in Fig. 95. on page 178.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 205 / 514
Tab. 44. Aux channel V11 BB shelfs M191 connector pinout M191 : SUBD25 pins female PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 9 14 10 11 12 13 14 13 25 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 N.B. SIGNAL NAME DATI+ V11 TX (A) CK+ V11 TX (A) DATI+ V11 RX (A) DATI+ V11 TX (B) CK+ V11 TX (B) DATI+ V11 RX (B) DATI+ V11 TX (C) CK+ V11 X (C) DATI+ V11 RX (C) DATI+ V11 TX (D) CK+ V11 TX (D) DATI+ V11 RX (D) GND DATI V11 TX (A) CK V11 TX (A) DATI V11 RX (A) DATI V11 TX (B) CK V11 TX (B) DATI V11 RX (B) DATI V11 TX (C) CK V11 TX (C) DATI V11 RX (C) DATI V11 TX (D) CK V11 TX (D) DATI V11 RX (D) 64 kb data channel negative output port A TX clock negative port A 64 kb data channel negative input port A 64 kb data channel negative output port B TX clock negative port B 64 kb data channel negative input port B 64 kb data channel negative output port C TX clock negative port C 64 kb data channel negative input port C 64 kb data channel negative output port D TX clock negative port D 64 kb data channel negative input port D SIGNAL DESCRIPTION 64 kb data channel positive output port A TX clock positive port A 64 kb data channel positive input port A 64 kb data channel positive output port B TX clock positive port B 64 kb data channel positive input port B 64 kb data channel positive output port C TX clock positive port C 64 kb data channel positive input port C 64 kb data channel positive output port D TX clock positive port D 64 kb data channel positive input port D
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 206 / 514
4.7.6 Management interfaces

The System Controller unit (see Fig. 67. on page 141) provides the following external access points:
I/0 for TMN (QB3) BNC connector 10BASE2 RJ45 connector 10BASET and EC Debug Network or EC local debug: Tab. 45. RJ45 Connector for 10baseT interface on System Controller unit Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 GND TPRXN Signal TPTXP TPTXN TPRXP
Craft terminal interface (F) The connection for F interface (RS232 to local PC) is provided on ESC unit through a standard SUB 9pin female connector: Tab. 46. RS232 for F interface connection table RS232 (SAM side) Not used Not used 5 Not used 3 2 Not used Not used RJ45 (PC side) Not used Not used 4 Not used 8 7 Not used Not used
PAIR 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4
WIRE A B A B A B A B
COLOR White / Blue ring Blue White / Orange ring Orange White / Green ring Green White / Brown ring Brown
N.B.
The special cable needed to connect the CRAFT TERMINAL to the system is supplied with the equipment.
Can Bus and RC debug local access by RJ45 for Alcatel internal use only.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 207 / 514
4.7.7 Station Alarms

Station alarm interface access is provided in TRU unit, connectors (M1) to (M5); see Fig. 94. on page 176. Tab. 47. LHR Station Alarms connector pinout PIN 1 2 3 1 5 6 9 4 5 6 7 8 9 ALARM +VSERV C RATTD ABN RURG RNURG VSERV CH TOR GND MEANING +Service battery Alarm storing command Yellow LED switch on Alarm storing Yellow LED switch on Abnormal condition Red LED (1) switch on Urgent alarm Red LED (2) switch on Not Urgent alarm Service battery Green LED switch on buzzer VBATT1 failure or VBATT2 failure GROUND HW HW HW HWSW SW HWSW HWSW HW/SW
For further information, please refer to para.7.4.2 on page 363.
4.7.8 Summarizing / Housekeeping alarms

4.7.8.1 General characteristics Standard Housekeeping I/O Input (station alarms) Output (station controls) N 22 48 Housekeeping external unit I/O Input (station alarms) N 18 (additional)
The interface characteristics here indicated apply both to summarizing alarms and housekeeping alarms: The presence of active alarm correspond to closed relay contact with a common wire available to the customer. Electrical characteristics (V is voltage between the warm and the common wires) are: open contact 72 p V p 2V closed contact 2 p V <= 0V I p 0.2mA I p 50mA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 208 / 514
4.7.8.2 Out Housekeeping and Remote alarms Summarizing and Out Housekeeping interface access is provided by means of three SUBD 25pins female connectors on Access area subrack specified in the following tables Tab. 48. thru Tab. 50. For the meaning of the signals, please refer to Tab. 62. on page 364.
Tab. 48. Out Remote alarms (GA1GA20) BB shelfs M193 connector pinout M193 : SUBD25 pins female PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 14 10 11 12 13 14 13 25 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 N.B. SIGNAL NAME OUTGA1 OUTGA3 OUTGA5 OUTGA6 OUTGA8 OUTGA10 OUTGA11 OUTGA13 OUTGA15 OUTGA16 OUTGA18 OUTGA20 GND OUTGA2 OUTGA4 COMA OUTGA7 OUTGA9 COMB OUTGA12 OUTGA14 COMC OUTGA17 OUTGA19 COMD SIGNAL DESCRIPTION output general alarm output general alarm output general alarm output general alarm output general alarm output general alarm output general alarm output general alarm output general alarm output general alarm output general alarm output general alarm gnd output general alarm output general alarm common rele output general alarm output general alarm common rele output general alarm output general alarm common rele output general alarm output general alarm common rele
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 209 / 514
Tab. 49. Out Remote alarms (GA21GA40) BB shelfs M183 connector pinout M183 : SUBD25 pins female PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 14 10 11 12 13 14 13 25 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 N.B. SIGNAL NAME OUTGA21 OUTGA23 OUTGA25 OUTGA26 OUTGA28 OUTGA30 OUTGA31 OUTGA33 OUTGA35 OUTGA36 OUTGA38 OUTGA40 GND OUTGA22 OUTGA24 COME OUTGA27 OUTGA29 COMF OUTGA32 OUTGA34 COMG OUTGA37 OUTGA39 COMH SIGNAL DESCRIPTION output general alarm output general alarm output general alarm output general alarm output general alarm output general alarm output general alarm output general alarm output general alarm output general alarm output general alarm output general alarm gnd output general alarm output general alarm common rele output general alarm output general alarm common rele output general alarm output general alarm common rele output general alarm output general alarm common rele
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 210 / 514
Tab. 50. Out Housekeeping and Remote alarms (GA41GA48) BB shelfs M192 connector pinout
M192 : SUBD25 pins female PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 14 10 11 12 13 14 13 25 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 N.B. SIGNAL NAME OUTHK1 OUTHK3 OUTHK5 OUTHK6 OUTHK8 OUTHK10 OUTGA41 OUTGA43 TAND OUTGA45 OUTGA47 TOR GND OUTHK2 OUTHK4 COMI OUTHK7 OUTHK9 COML OUTHK42 OUTHK44 COMM OUTHK46 OUTHK48 COMN housekeeping output housekeeping output common rele housekeeping output housekeeping output common rele housekeeping output housekeeping output common rele housekeeping output housekeeping output common rele output general alarm output general alarm SIGNAL DESCRIPTION housekeeping output housekeeping output housekeeping output housekeeping output housekeeping output housekeeping output output general alarm output general alarm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 211 / 514
4.7.8.3 Input Housekeeping alarms Summarizing and Out Housekeeping interface access is provided by means of one SUBD 25pins female connector on Access area subrack specified in the following Tab. 51. herebelow. With the use of the Additional Housekeeping unit, it is possible to increase by 18 the HK Inputs. The access is on the same unit (see Tab. 52. on page 213). Tab. 51. Input Housekeeping BB shelfs M185 connector pinout M185 : SUBD25 pins female PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 14 10 11 12 13 14 13 25 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SIGNAL NAME INHK1 INHK3 INHK5 INHK7 INHK9 INHK11 INHK13 INHK15 INHK17 INHK19 INHK21
SIGNAL DESCRIPTION housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input
GND INHK2 INHK4 INHK6 INHK8 INHK10 INHK12 INHK14 INHK16 INHK18 INHK20 INHK22 housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 212 / 514
Tab. 52. Input Housekeeping Additional Housekeeping units M1 connector pinout M1 : SUBD25 pins female
PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 14 9 10 11 12 13 13 25 14 15 16 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 N.B.
SIGNAL NAME INHK1EXT INHK2EXT INHK3EXT INHK4EXT INHK5EXT INHK6EXT INHK7EXT INHK8EXT INHK9EXT INHK10EXT INHK11EXT INHK12EXT INHK13EXT INHK14EXT INHK15EXT INHK16EXT INHK18EXT GND XX XX XX XX XX
SIGNAL DESCRIPTION housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input housekeeping input
internal use internal use internal use internal use internal use
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 213 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
214 / 514
5 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 5.1 Introduction

The general block diagrams for LHR and WMSN configurations are respectively shown in following Fig. 109. and Fig. 110.
CMI 9 RRA SW RFCOH MD TR
DCCR
WST 2Mb/s SW RFCOH MD TR
RRA
DCCR
WST 2Mb/s CMI 1
RRA
SW
RFCOH
MD
TR
DCCR
DCCR EOW
ECT OS
QB3
SC
DCCR
SERVICE
64 Kb
WST 2Mb/s
DCCR DCCR
CMI 0
RRA
DISTRIB.
RFCOH
MD
TR
RADIO PROTECTION
Fig. 109. LHR system (N+1 / N+0)
RRA CMI 7
DCCR
SW
RFCOH
MD
TR
WST 2Mb/s RRA SW RFCOH MD TR
DCCR
WST 2Mb/s
CMI 2 CMI 1
1650SMC
RRA SW RFCOH MD TR
DCCR DCCR EOW
CMI 0
F QB3
SC
DCCR
SERVICE
64 Kb
WST 2Mb/s
Nx64 Kb
DCCR DCCR
RRA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
DISTRIB.
RFCOH
MD
TR
ECT
OS
RADIO PROTECTION
Fig. 110. WMSN system (N+1 / N+0)
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 215 / 514
This chapter describes in detail the functional operation of LHR equipment. This handbook gives no detailed information on 1650SMC equipment. For this purpose, please refer to 1650SMC specific documentation (see para.18.2.2.2 on page 471) with the following exception:
In the application for 9600 LSY, the FAN SHELF used for 1650SMC is not that described in the 1650SMC documentation, but that described in this handbook.
The handbook parts that should be read before starting this chapter are: chapter 2 on page 39 chapter 3 on page 121 System description Physical Configuration
Information given in this chapter is organized as follows: Equipment Control subsystem that includes: Control Subsystem Architecture (HW+SW): Control Subsystem Hardware Architecture: Control Subsystem Software Architecture: Signal Management: Remote Inventory subsystem: System Controller unit description: Flash Card description: Additional Housekeeping unit description: Power Supply subsystem: para.5.2 starting on page 217 para.5.2.1 starting on page 217 para.5.2.2 starting on page 237 para.5.2.3 starting on page 242 para.5.2.4 starting on page 245 para.5.2.5 starting on page 274 para.5.2.6 starting on page 276 para.5.2.7 starting on page 280 para.5.2.8 starting on page 281 para.5.3 starting on page 282
Baseband subsystem: para.5.4 starting on page 285 that includes: Interconnection general block diagrams: para.5.4.1 starting on page 285 RRACHANNEL STM1+1WST and STM0+0WST : para.5.4.2 starting on page 287 RRASTANDBY STM1+1WST and STM0+0WST : para.5.4.3 starting on page 289 STM1 optical module: para.5.4.4 starting on page 292 128QAM MODEM STM1 1WSTandSTM0 0WST: para.5.4.5 starting on page 293 Service and Additional Voice unit: para.5.4.6 starting on page 297 Transceiver subsystem: that includes: Interconnection general block diagrams: DC/DC converter module: Transmit and Service module: Receive & IF Rx module: Local Oscillator module: Fans subsystem: para.5.5 starting on page 302 para.5.5.1 starting on page 302 para.5.5.2 starting on page 304 para.5.5.3 starting on page 305 para.5.5.4 starting on page 309 para.5.5.5 starting on page 310 para.5.6 starting on page 312
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 216 / 514
5.2 Equipment Control Subsystem 5.2.1 Control Subsystem Architecture

The equipment control subsystem is the full set of software facilities and the full set of hardware items, devices and connections necessary to support such software. This paragraph provides the overall architecture of this subsystem describing the macro functionalities performed (reported in the following in italic character) and partitioning these functionalities into hardware and software components. 5.2.1.1 Functionalities Digital transmission systems can be broadly described as a collection of multiplexing, framing, transport, routeing, timing and protection processes. Each of these processes can be decomposed into a collection of atomic functions. These atomic functions interact with other functionalities, the equipment management functionalities, which provide the atomic functions with configuration data and monitor the signals they are processing, providing performance monitoring and alarms conditions to an external management system, which is able to access to these information by means of communication functions. Thus, the product functionalities can be broadly described according to the following functional decomposition (see Fig. 111. herebelow): Atomic Functions (AF) Equipment Management Functions (EMF) Message Communication Functions (MCF)
atomic function
fault & performance monitoring
atomic function EMF MCF
DCC line side
DCCR radio side
atomic function configuration & provisioning

Fig. 111. Functional decomposition The generic supervision process inside the NE, describes the way in which the occurrence of a disturbance or fault is analyzed with the purpose of providing an appropriate indication of performance and/or detected fault condition.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 217 / 514
Transmission and equipment supervision processes are concerned with the management of the transmission resources in the network and they are only interested in the functionality provided by a NE. They require a functional representation of the NE that is implementation independent. From transmission point of view, most atomic functions monitor the signals they are processing for certain characteristics and provide performance information and/or alarm conditions based on these characteristics. Therefore, transmission supervision process provides information on the external interface signals that are processed by an NE. Any equipment fault is represented by the unavailability of the affected functions because the transmission management has no knowledge of the equipment as such. Equipment supervision process is concerned with the fault localization and repair of the equipment itself. It does not require a knowledge of the transmission network. The supervision process is performed both in the atomic functions and in the management functions, so it can be decomposed into major subprocesses: atomic function fault management and performance monitoring, management function fault management, management function performance monitoring and radio performance monitoring (see Fig. 112. herebelow). These processes are described in the next paragraphs.
Atomic function Fault & Performance Monitoring process
pZZZ
Management function Performance Monitoring process
cZZZ Management function Fault Management process
rpZZZ Management function Radio Performance Monitoring process
Fig. 112. Supervision process decomposition
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 218 / 514
5.2.1.2 Atomic Functions 5.2.1.2.1 Supervision process

5.2.1.2.1.1 Fault management and performance monitoring process The following Fig. 113. shows the supervision process inside the atomic functions. The anomalies integration, consequent action control and defects correlations functions are components of the fault management process and are performed both in the trail termination function and in trail adaptation function. The performance monitoring primitives processing function represent the performance monitoring process and is performed only inside the trail termination function. The output signals cZZZ are the input signals for the management function fault management process, while the output signals pZZZ are the input signals for the management function performance monitoring process.
Anomalies Defects Near end Anomalies
Perf. Mon. Primitives Processing
1 second primitives pZZZ/rpZZZ
Anomalies Integration
Near end defects dZZZ
Fault Cause cZZZ Defects Correlation
Consequent Actions aZZZ
Consequent Actions Control
report options enable/disable
Fig. 113. Supervision process within atomic functions Fault management process Anomalies integration (f1) Anomalies integration (or defect filter) provides a persistency check on the detected anomalies while monitoring the data stream. When passed the defect is being detected. Two class of defects are reported to the defect correlation for further processing: transmission and equipment defects. Equipment defects (hardware fault) with signal transfer interruption will be reported per replaceable unit. These defects will cause a performance primitive N_DS (see below) activation if equipment protection (EPS) is not available. This function is performed by HW. Consequent action control (f2) This process provides the generation and the control of action consequent to detected defects. The consequent action control process for each specific atomic function is described in the related sections. This function is performed by HW.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 219 / 514
These processes are summarized, for each atomic function, in Tab. 53. on page 221. In order to simplify the reading of this table, it could be useful to remember the meaning of the RSPI functional block (see ITUR 750 and ETS 300 635). It represents the radio frequency signal conversion into an internal logic level STM1 signal, and viceversa. It contains the following radio functions (see Fig. 114. below): Modulation and TX functions in the Transmit side Demodulation and RX functions in the Receive side
rxLOS rxFail
demLOS
demFail
Radio side
Receive function Transmit function
Demodulation function Modulation function
txFail txLOS
modFail
modLOS
Fig. 114. RSPI functional decomposition If it is not possible to distinguish between loss of signal and internal failure for a given subfunction with a sufficient degree of confidence, the minimal set of defect should be txFail, modFail, rxFail and demFail.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 220 / 514
Defects correlation (f3) Defect correlation process provides correlation to reduce the amount of information offered to the EMF. It determines, from a set of activated defects, which fault is present. This function is performed by SW.
Tab. 53. Fault management process Functional Blocks SPI source (optical) Defect Transmit Degraded Transmit Fail SPI source (electrical) SPI sink (electrical/optical) Loss of Signal Loss of Frame RST source RST sink (line side) RST sink (radio side) RSPI RFCOH source RSPI RFCOH sink Trace Identifier Mismatch Trace Identifier Mismatch Loss of Frame Consequent Action AIS AIS AIS AIS AIS Defect Correlations not Transmit Fail not Loss of Signal Fault Causes Transmit Degraded Transmit Fail Loss Of Signal Loss Of Frame
not (Loss of Signal or Trace Identifier Loss of Frame) Mismatch (1) Trace Identifier Mismatch
not (rxLOS or rxFail Loss Of Frame or demLOS or demFail) not (rxLOS or rxFail Radio Channel or demLOS Identifier Mismatch or demFail or Loss of Frame) not txLOS (2) txLOS txFail
Radio Channel Identifier Mismatch
AIS
RSPI source
txLOS txFail modFail
AIS AIS AIS AIS
not (txLOS or txFail ) modFail (2) not rxLOS (2) not (rxLOS or rxFail) (2) rxLOS rxFail demLOS
RSPI sink
rxLOS rxFail demLOS demFail
Not (rxLOS or rxFail demFail or demLOS) (2)
(1)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(2)
This defect correlation is configuration dependent: N+0: not (rxLOS or rxFail or demLOS or demFail or Loss of Frame) N+1/N+2: not (rxLOS or rxFail or demLOS or demFail or Loss of Frame or Radio Channel Identifier Mismatch). These defects are those generated by the channel currently working (RPS protection), the same defects generated by the channel currently in standby state are not considered in this defect correlation procedure. This defect correlation is different from the one reported in draft MI/TM4048 (stable part)
In unbalanced configurations, defects coming from the unbalanced channels and generated from the not working function (Rx or Tx) must be inhibited.
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 221 / 514
Performance monitoring process The requirements for the performance monitoring is to provide both performance monitoring quality of service (SDH regenerator section quality of service and typical radio sections quality of service) and performance monitoring of radio specific parameters. a) Sections quality monitoring The performance monitoring of SDH regenerator section (line side) must be consistent with the performance monitoring of the remaining part of the SDH network ( e.g. optical link ). Methodology used to provide performance monitoring are defined in DEN/TM 2246, ETS 300 417 series and ITUT rec. G.783, G.784 and G.829. The evaluations on line side signal is given by means of B1 according to the standard methodology.
ADM
LHR
.......
MST
RST
SPI
SPI
RST
.. .....
Regenerator Section
Fig. 115. Regenerator section Two different radio sections must be monitored (see Fig. 116. below): a) Hop Section: the section between two radio stations inside the protection section. Due to the RPS location it is not possible to perform the monitoring of the hop section by means of standard methodologies. It must be provided in a proprietary way by means of Forward Error Correction. Link Section: the section identifying the protected section (the section outside the radio protection switching). The performance monitoring of the radio link section may be performed by using B1 bytes at each side of the section. Methodology used to provide this performance monitoring are defined in DEN/TM 2246, ETS 300 417 series and ITUT rec. G.783, G.784 and G.829.
b)
LHR/WMSN ...
RST RPS RFCOH RSPI RSPI
LHR/WMSN
RFCOH RPS RST
...
Radio HOP
Radio LINK
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 116. Radio sections
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 222 / 514
b)
Radio specific parameter monitoring Radio specific performance monitoring deals with monitoring of the radio specific functional blocks RSPI and RPS. The parameters provided by this PM is used in close conjunction with the ordinary ones related to quality transmission. The global performance monitoring process performed in the LHR atomic functions is described in the following Fig. 117. This process is completely applicable to the WMSN equipment. In this case the PM related to the functional blocks performed by the WADM/WLT (i.e. at multiplex section level by using B2 bytes) are added.
to EMF
to EMF
One second primitives
RLS1 RLS2
TLS1 PSAD
FSRD NEBC
NDS OFS
One second filter
Performance PSA primitives
PSR
FEC
RL
TL
EB
Defect
OOF
RPS
RSPI
RST
Fig. 117. PM inside atomic functions The one second primitives processing performs an integration of reported anomalies and defects by counting them during a one second interval. At the end of each one second interval the contents of the counters is made available to the performance monitoring process within the EMF for further processing. Hereafter these performance primitives are described: Near end Errored Block Count (N_EBC) (f11) This primitive counts, every second, the number of errored nearend blocks within that second. A block is errored if one or more EDC violations are detected. Near end defect second determination process (N_DS) (f12) Every second with at least one occurrence of TSF consequent action (LOS, LOF, TIM ....) or equipment defect is indicated as a near end defect second. Out of Frame Second (OFS) A OFS is a second in which the frame alignment process was in the OOF state for at least a part of that second. 03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 223 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Transmitted Level Threshold Second (TLTS) A Transmitted Level Second is generated if in one second period the detected TL is greater than a predefined threshold. The threshold value is also expressed in dB. One additional TLTS corresponding to a different threshold is optional (TBD). This processing is performed only if ATPC functionality is available. Protection Switch Actual Duration (PSAD) Protection Switch Actual Duration represents one second period in which a channel is in the switched status for at least a fraction of that second. This event is generated only for automatic switches. This event is defined for any channel involved in the protection scheme, both protected and protecting channel, for protected channel this means that the associated traffic is carried by the protecting channel, for the protecting channel that it is carrying traffic from a protected channel. TBD in case of 1+1 non revertive mode (protected and protecting). Failed Switch Request Duration (FSRD) A Failed Switch Request Duration represents one second period in which at least for a fraction of that second, an automatic switch request is detected active on the associated channel while it is carrying regular traffic and the request cannot be completed. This event is required only for working channels.
Hereafter the performance primitives that dont require one second filter are described: Protection Switch Actual Count (PSAC) Protection Switch Actual Count represents the number of protection switch actual occurrences in one second. This counter is defined for any protected (working) or protecting (standby) channel involved in the protection scheme (1+1, N+1, N+2). In case of protecting channel this counter represents the number of any actual switch from any protected channel to this channel. Failed Switch Request Count (FSRC) Failed Switch Request Count represents the number of occurrences in one second of the following events: a protection switch request is activated on a working channel and the protecting channels are not available a working channel is restored from a protecting channel while the request is still active on that channel. This event must be generated only on protected channel. It must be generated in all the protection scheme. The activation of a switch criterion on a given channel doesnt increment the counter if another activation criterion is already present on that channel.
The one second primitives processing is performed by SW. The following Tab. 54. reports, for each atomic function, the entity monitored by the performance primitives and the one second primitives provided to EMF for further processing.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 224 / 514
Received Level Threshold Second (RLTS) A Received Level Second is generated if in one second period the detected RL is below a predefined threshold. The threshold value is also expressed in minus dBm. At least two RLS events are required corresponding to two different threshold values (TBD).
Tab. 54. Entities monitored by the performance monitoring primitives Functional Block SPI source (electrical/optical) RST source (line and radio side) SPI sink (electrical/optical) RST sink (line side) Monitored Entity Frame Alignment SDH RS Out Of Frame Errored Block Transm. Def. => LOS, LOF, TIM) Eqpt Def. => EQ Errored Block Transm. Performance Primitives OFS N_EBC N_DS One Second Primitives
RST sink (radio side)
Radio Link Section
N_EBC
(1) Def. RSPI source RSPI RFCOH sink RSPI sink Transmitted level Frame Alignment Received level
Def. => N_DS demLOS, LOF, RCIM, TIM Eqpt => EQ TLTS3 TLTS4 OFS RLTS1 RLTS2 RLTSN N_EBC
TL > Thres. 3 TL > Thres. 4 (opt.) Out Of Frame RL < Thres. 1 RL < Thres. 2 RL < Thres. N (opt.)
Radio Hop (2)
FEC
Transm. Def. => rxLOS, N_DS rxFail, demLOS, demFail, LOF, RCIM Eqpt Def. => EQ RPS Protection switch actual PSA Protection switch failed PSAC PSAD FSRC FSRD (1)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(2)
The transmission performance primitives are configuration dependent: N+0: demLOS, LOF, TIM N+1/N+2: demLOS, LOF, RCIM, TIM. The demLOS, LOF, RCIM defects are those generated by the channel currently working (RPS protection), the same defects generated by the channel currently in standby state are not considered as performance primitives. Radio Hop performance monitoring hasnt be provided in N+0 configurations. 03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 225 / 514
ED
5.2.1.2.2 Test management process In LHR NEs line and internal loopbacks can be performed at different levels, as described in para.2.6.4 on page 93. The signal that is sent after the loopback can be an AIS (loop and AIS) or the same signal as it was received (loop and continue). Test process is performed by HW (according to software control).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 226 / 514
5.2.1.3 Management Functions The management functions are handled by means of synchronous equipment management function block described in the following figure. It provides the means through which the synchronous network element function is managed by an internal or external manager.
SEMF Supervision Process
fault & PM AFs
NER configuration & provisioning
MAF
MCF
Fig. 118. Equipment management function The SEMF interacts with the atomic functions by exchanging information across the MP reference points. This information flow is related to configuration and provisioning data and to anomalies and defects detected in the atomic functions. The EMF contains a number of filters that provide supervision process by means of a data reduction mechanism on the information received across the MP reference points. The filters outputs are available to the management application functions (MAF), via the network element resources (NER). The NER provide event processing and data storage, while the MAF process the information provide to and by the NER. The MAF represents the information as managed object according to the object oriented approach. The MAF converts performance data and implementation specific hardware alarms into object oriented messages for transmission on DCCR channel and/or on Q interface. It also converts object oriented messages coming from external manager into internal specific messages for AF configuration. The information to and from MAF is provide by means of the message communication function (MCF).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 227 / 514
5.2.1.3.1 Supervision process Fault management process The following Fig. 119. shows the subprocesses composing the fault management process.
Unit Alarms
Fault Cause Fault Cause Persistency Severity Assignment
Alarms Logging
Alarms Reporting
MCF
Station Alarms
Fig. 119. Fault management inside management function Fault cause persistency (f4) The equipment management function performs a persistency check on the fault causes before generating an alarm. > Number of seconds for declaring and clearing the failure TBD. EMF fault management severity assignment EMF fault management logging EMF fault management reporting Unit alarms generation (f5) Station alarms generation (f7) They represent a synthesis of alarm with the purpose to provide an audible and visual indication to the station operator.
All the equipment defects (including the ASICs faults) must be reported per replaceable unit. If a replaceable unit is reported as being faulty, all the signals processed by this unit are assumed to be interrupted. The atomic function performed by this unit will represent this situation activating the performance primitive Defect Second (DS). All these processes are performed by SW.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 228 / 514
Performance monitoring process The one second primitives related to the SDH regenerator section quality of service and typical radio section quality of service must to be processed to determine the performance events (ES, SES, BBE). This process is explained in the following Fig. 120.
Monitored Second
Defect ? (p_DS) N N Anomalies? (p_EBC >0) Y EB >=2400 ? N N Available State ? Y ES = ES +1 BBE = BBE + EB
Available State ? Y SES = SES +1
Data Collection
Fig. 120. Performance events generation process
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 229 / 514
The following Fig. 121. shows the PM process inside the management functions.
Performance Reporting
QOS Alarm Performance History Information Threshold crossing control
Performance data collection
Performance Count Inhibition
Performance Events SES ES BBE
Event processing
RPSI, RPS one second performance primitives
OFS
NEBC
NDS
Fig. 121. PM inside management functions EMF performance monitoring event processing (PM filter: f13, f14, f15, f16) EMF performance count inhibition EMF performance monitoring data collection (f31) One second performance events are collected into current registers (15minutes and 24 hours). Notice that no processing are necessary on RSPI and RPS one second performance primitives to generate performance events. EMF performance monitoring recent registers history management (f31) At least 16 recent registers are required for 15 minutes and 1 for 24 hours. EMF performance monitoring reporting management (f32) EMF performance monitoring threshold crossing check management
All these functionalities are, of course, performed by SW.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 230 / 514
5.2.1.3.2 Configuration and provisioning process The information flow over the MP reference points related to configuration and provisioning data is described in details for each atomic function in ETS 300 417 series and in G.783. It is to be noted the necessity to provide to the RFCOH atomic functions with the following information: the radio channel identifier expected value (to be compared with the one received on radio side, functionality performed sink side) the radio channel identifier value to be inserted in frame (functionality performed source side) This information flow refers both to configuration and provisioning data passed to the atomic functions and to status reports coming from the atomic function as response to a request from SEMF. The channel number associated to each RT position and the definition of which positions assume the spare rule in the radio protection scheme (RPS) must be configured by ECT operator. This functionality is completely performed by software. 5.2.1.3.3 Software download Software download process (local and remote) has the same feature already implemented for new generation of the Alcatel equipment. In synthesis: this process is hitless and causes no loss of control functionality when in progress a roll back to previous release is available when problems arises with the new software version. This functionality is completely performed by software. 5.2.1.3.4 Security This functionality is completely performed by software. 5.2.1.3.5 Time stamping Events are time stamped with the resolution of one second (according to G.784). This functionality is completely performed by software.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 231 / 514
5.2.1.4 Message Communication Functions This function provides facilities for the transport of the TMN messages. It receives and buffers messages from the DCC, Q and F interfaces and from EMF. Messages not addressed to the local site are relayed to one or more outgoing DCCs in accordance with the local routing procedures and/or to Q interface (see the following figure). In this way the TMN can be provided with a direct logical link to any SDH equipment via a single Q interface and the interconnecting DCCs. MCF is associated with all atomic functions having a physical interface.
NE 1
NE 2
NE 3
AF
DCC
DCC
AF
DCC
DCC
AF
EMF
EMF
EMF
MCF
MCF
MCF
Q TMN
Fig. 122. DCC routing Q interface When the access to the TMN is provided by the Q interface, it will be conform to the ITUT G.773. QB3 protocol stack
F interface F protocol stack
DCC interface Only DCCR are managed in the MCF in case of LHR (line and radio side). DCCR and DCCM are managed, line side, in case of WADM/WLT DCC protocol stack.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 232 / 514
5.2.1.5 Protections Several types of protections are present in LHR equipment. They can be categorized into two classes: trail and equipment protection. The protection types can be characterized by the following parameters: protection architectures (1+1, M:N) operation type (revertive, notrevertive) protection switch requests Hereafter this parameters are described only for Radio protection, in case of equipment protection similar considerations can be applied. 5.2.1.5.1 Radio Protection (RPS) Radio Protection is a trail protection. It is used to provide protection for a working channel. Generally, this function provides m protection channels for n signals against trail associated failures, both for hardware failure and temporary signal degradation or losses due to propagation effects (e.g. rain or multipath phenomena).The signal on the working channel is protected. This type of protection is performed by switching a working channel to a protection section when the working section fails or when its performance falls below the required level. A RPS function is used to perform the switching between the protection and working section. The status of the sections is made available to the RPS function to allow it to decide when an automatic switch should be performed. Protection architectures LHR equipment can support two different protection architectures : 1+1 or M:N. They are characterized by the detection of failure events by the RSPI function; and the resultant reconfiguration uses the protection switching functions that are in the RPS. A 1+1 protection architecture has one working (protected) trail supporting one normal traffic signal, one protection (protecting) trail and a permanent bridge. At the source end, the normal traffic signal is permanently bridged to both working and protection trail. At the sink end, the condition of the two traffic signals are monitored and the better of the two is selected. Due to permanent bridging, the 1+1 architecture does not allow an extra unprotected traffic signal to be provided. In 1+1 architecture single ended switching is provided. The switching is complete when the traffic signal (service) is selected from protection trail at the end detecting the fault. The sink end transfers the traffic signal (service) without communication with the source end. This architecture is used both in revertive and nonrevertive mode.
Protection Section RFCOH RSPI RSPI RFCOH
RST
RPS Working Section RFCOH RSPI NE A RSPI RFCOH
RPS
RST
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NE B
Fig. 123. 1+1 Protection Switch Architecture
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 233 / 514
A M:N protection architecture has N working (protected) trails supporting a normal traffic signal and M protecting trail that may support the normal signal (if a protection switch is active) or an extra traffic signal or a null signal (if no protection switch is active), At the source end, when a defect condition is detected on a working trail, or under the effect of appropriate external commands, the transported signal is routed over the protection trail and the possible extra traffic is lost. At the sink end, the signal from this protection trail is selected instead. In M:N architecture dual ended switching is necessary. The traffic signal is switched from the active to the protection trail at both ends of the protection span. Dualended switching requires a communication channel between the two end of the protection trail. This channel is called RAPS (Radio Automatic Protection Switching) or DSI channel. RAPS provides information regarding the activation of switching procedure or about information on the channel status that have to be shared at both ends of the connection. Under dualended switching protocol, switching at only one end is not allowed. The two ends have to communicate each other to synchronize the transfer of the traffic signal (service). If, at one end, a switching criterion is detected, with a certain priority, a parallelizing request for the involved traffic signal is sent to the remote end. When the positive acknowledge is received, the switching is performed. This architecture is used in the revertive mode.
Protection Section RST .. .. .. RFCOH RSPI . . . . . . Working Section RST RFCOH RSPI RSPI RFCOH RST RSPI . . . RFCOH RST . . .
NE A
NE B
Only present if extra (occasional) traffic is supported.
Fig. 124. M:N Protection Switch Architecture Operation Type Operation type may be Revertive or Notrevertive. M:N architecture is always revertive, 1+1 architecture may be revertive or not, this parameter can be set by the management system, in revertive case it is possible to specify if the restore has to act on channel 0 or on channel 1. In revertive mode of operation, the working channel is switched back to the working section when the working section has recovered from failure or when a switch command is released. In nonrevertive mode of operation, the switch is maintained even after recovery from failure or release of a switch command.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 234 / 514
Switching Initiation Criteria Priority Management When more than one switch request are present, the highest priority is served. Refer to the list given in the following Tab. 55. This information cannot be set up by the management system. Tab. 55. Switching Initiation Criteria Priority
Priority 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 N.B. Lockout
Radio Protection Switch Request
Forced Switch AutoSwitch Signal Fail (SF) AutoSwitch High Bit Error Rate (HBER) AutoSwitch Low Bit Error Rate (LBER or EWH) AutoSwitch Early Warning (EW or EWL) Manual Switch Wait To Restore Do Not Revert [1] Exercise [1] No Request [1] Do Not Revert and Exercise Request have been listed in this order because an exercise request can only be performed when the protection channel is not in use.
Another priority criteria is associated to each channel. This information is used to select the channel of highest priority when different channels have the same switch request. This priority may be set up by the management system. Lockout, forced and manual switch, exercise are external requests (from management system). In the following some of these RPS requests are explained. Lockout The lockout RPS request is applicable to a working and to a protection trail, in both cases it excludes one trail (working or protecting) from protection schema. In fact it prevents a working trail from being protected and it prevents a protection trail from being used for protection. Exercise Exercising the RPS is done in order to detect silent failures on the RPS. The exercise operation performs all the steps to perform a switch except for the actual switch. Two types of exercise may be used: a)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
b)
Single exercise: the operator send one command to perform a single exercise. At the end of the operation, the NE returns the result to the OS. Continuous Exercise: after starting by the operator, the exercise operation is repeated till the operator sends the stop command.
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 235 / 514
HBER is generated by the RSPI functional block LBER (or EWH): generated by the RSPI functional block EW (or EWL): Early Warning generated by the RSPI functional block Signal Fail: generated from RSPIlossOfSignal and fails (RxLos, RxFail, DemLos, DemFail, LOF and RCIM of the RFCOH block and Equipment Defect for the functional block RSPI and RFCOH (TBC).
Wait to restore In the revertive mode, a working channel will be switched back to its working section when the working section has recovered from its failure. In order to prevent several protection switches due to an intermittent failure, a failed section must be faultfree during a fixed period of time called waittorestore(WTR) period before it can be used again by a working channel. An Auto Switch condition will override the WTR period. The WRT period is not configurable by the management system. In the nonrevertive mode, when the working section has recovered from its failure it will go directly to the Do Not Revert state.
5.2.1.5.2 Equipment Protection (EPS) Equipment protection is provided on: RRA unit when the user interface is protected Transceiver unit (Tx only) and RRA unit (RFCOH block only) in HST configurations
Protection architecture is 1+1 only. No EPS is provided on tributary and aggregate (WADM/WLT subrack) units. As consequence the clock reference unit function (on board the aggregate unit) is not protected. No protection of the units composing the control subsystem (i.e. System Controller and Service units) is envisaged (the payload traffic is not affected by their loss, because configuration data are present also, and thus survive, on the peripheral units). Equipment configuration data, as a whole, are contained in a nonvolatile memory in the System Controller unit. Such data can be backupped and restored to/from the Equipment Craft Terminal/OS in order to limit the eventual reconfiguration of the NE to the delta between the back up configuration and the state before the crash is occurred. 5.2.1.5.3 Network Protections WADM/WLT provides the following network protections: MSP on STM1 ports SNCP on all the virtual container
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 236 / 514
Automatic Switch Initiation Criteria An automatic switch is only initiated upon detection of a failure at the receiving end(i.e. Sink side). If a failure occurs at the transmission end (i.e. Source side), an automatic switch will be initiated by the remote(i.e. far end) network element when it detects the failure at its receiving end. The failures that can be detected at the receiving end are the following:
5.2.2 Control Subsystem Hardware Architecture

This paragraph describes the control subsystem hardware architecture, defines the control elements, the function partitioning among them and the external and internal interfaces managed by this subsystem. 5.2.2.1 LHR control subsystem architecture 5.2.2.1.1 Function partitioning The control subsystem provides the resources to support the communication interfaces and the processing functions required by the TMN. As described in the previous para.5.2.1 on page 217 (Control Subsystem Hardware Architecture), the functionalities performed by the control subsystem can be summarized as follows: Message Communication Function (MCF) Synchronous Equipment Management Function (SEMF) Virtual Machine Management Function (VMMF) Physical Machine Management Function on whole equipment basis (PMMF/E) Physical Machine Management Function on unit basis (PMMF/U) Basic Functions (BF) Each of these functionality groups includes functions with similar characteristics in terms of scope of operation and performance requirements. In fact: MCF have to support a high routing throughput and dont require a high availability Management functions dont require a strict real time processing and a high availability BF require a strict real time processing and high availability 5.2.2.1.2 Control elements The control elements supporting the functionalities described above are: Equipment controller (EC) Radio Controller (RC) Supervisory Units (SU) The control elements logical hierarchy is depicted in Fig. 125. on page 238. The functionalities are splitted on the control elements composing the control subsystem architecture. Equipment Controller One EC has in charge the MCF and VMMF: it provides resources (physical interfaces and protocol stack) required for the communication between NE and the management systems (OS and ECT), it performs all the control and management functions of the virtual machine (info model). No protection of this control element is performed. The EC is physically located aboard the System Controller board. Radio Controller One RC has in charge the PMMF/E: it provides the resources to support the control and management functions related to the real physical machine. No protection of this control element is performed. The RC is physically located aboard the System Controller board.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 237 / 514
Supervisory Units The SUs have in charge the PMMF/U and the AF. This function requires a real time processing of the data coming from the ASICs. The SU on board of each unit has the aim to provide an uniform interface towards the RC avoiding a RC dependency from the HW where the SUs are accommodated. One SU is accommodated in each unit.
OS
QB3
ECT
F EC ISSB RC
System Controller
CAN
Rem Inv
Local uP
Rem Inv
Local uP
SU
SU
Fig. 125. LHR control subsystem architecture
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 238 / 514
5.2.2.1.3 Communication interfaces A set of (serial and parallel) interfaces are defined as part of the control subsystem to support the communication task. They can be classified as system internal or external interfaces. All the communication links used by the different processing functions (RC and EC) to exchange data each other or to read/write data from/to the controlled objects (ASICs or other devices on board the different cards in the equipment) are defined as internal interfaces. External interfaces are defined as the communication links provided by the control subsystem towards external devices used for Operation and Maintenance functions or system debug activities. All the interfaces are reported in Fig. 126. with the association of the units supporting these interfaces.
EC
ISSB
RC SC
CAN
Inv. Mem.
RRA uP
Inv. Mem.
SW uP
Inv. Mem.
SERV uP
Inv. Mem.
MOD uP
SPI SW
ASIC
SPI
SPI
ASIC
ASIC
RRAn
SERV
MODn
RT uP
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Inv. Mem.
RTn
Fig. 126. LHR communication interfaces
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 239 / 514
External Interfaces The control subsystem provides the following external communication interfaces: QB3 interface F interface Qecc interface DBG interface HK/RA interface QAUX interface All the above interfaces are supported, at the NE level, by the EC processor, as part of its MCF and VMMF. The QB, F, Qecc, Qaux interfaces are available as communication links between the NE and external control equipments, as required by the TMN environment. The QB3 protocol stack requires a 10BASE2 (or 10BASET) physical layer and IEEE 802.2 / 802.3 for the data link layer. Through this interface the NE is connected to a LAN for message exchange with the OS station. The F interface is a local communication port provided to connect the NE to a local Craft Terminal station (PC or WS); this interface is implemented as a low speed RS232 port (bit rate is 38,4 Kbit/s max). Remote CT functionality is performed by routing CT messages to DCCs and viceversa. The Qecc interface is defined as a TMN related communication interface based on the use of the Embedded Communication Channels, available in the SOH portion of the SDH frame, as physical layer. Through the Qecc interface the NE can exchange management messages with a remote OS (or Craft Terminal) station. Qecc interface is implemented as a TDM serial link between the EC function and the ASICs on board of port units. The TDM channel is terminated by the MHDLC, providing for the selection of the channels to terminate and performing the standard HDLC functions. This interface uses the LAPD (ITUT Q.921) as data link layer protocol, this protocol is performed by the MCF inside the EC function. The Qaux interface is provided as an additional TMN communication interface for message exchange between the NE and a remote OS station, based on the use of a 2 Mbit/s proprietary channel. The DBG interface is a proprietary interface available for software debug activities. A local communication port for debug is required for each processor (EC and RC) on board the System Controller. The local debug ports are a low speed RS232 UART based interface, available for VT100 or equivalent debug console. An equipment network interface for debug activities should be provided as well, implemented as a 10BASE2 Ethernet channel. The EC function should provide a router function between this port and the internal ISSB bus to allow the use of this port for debugging of RC processor too. A set of traditional parallel I/O interfaces for local signaling of alarm presence, such as rack lamps, front panel LEDs and so on are provided by the EC processor. Internal Interfaces The control subsystem provides the following internal communication interfaces: ISSB (Intra Shelf Serial Bus) interface CAN interface SPI interface The ISSB (Intra Shelf Serial Bus) interface is basically an equipmentinternal Local Area Network for communications among the different microprocessors in the same shelf: the EC processor and the RC processor and other possible processors. It is a multimaster HDLCbased backplane serial bus. The CAN interface allows to connect the RC processor to the microprocessor on board the units. It is a serial broadcast bus, each node connected to the bus receives all the messages sent by the other ones. A local filtering mechanism on each node permit to manage only the messages related to the node. The maximum speed is 1 Mbit/s up to 40 meters length.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 240 / 514
5.2.2.2 WMSN control subsystem architecture The main characteristics of the WMSN control subsystem architecture are the following (see Fig. 127. herebelow): LHR and ADM equipments (1650SMC) control architecture reuse This means that from the management system point of view this equipment is seen as two different network elements (both of them with an own address). In this way the LHR and ADM hardware control architecture are reused without any modification, allowing to preserve the independence of the software developments of the ADM and radio parts. Only one F and QB3 interface The F and QB3 interfaces are present on the ADM part. The radio part sees the TMN information by means of Qecc interfaces. RECT application is used to manage both the ADM part (directly connected) and the radio part (via Qecc).
RECT
OS
QB3
ISSB
QECC EC EC
ISSB
SC
RC
ADM Controller SPI ISPB
System Controller (radio)
CAN
Rem Inv
ASIC
Rem Inv
ASIC
Rem Inv
Local uP
Rem Inv
Local uP
Unit
Unit
Unit
Unit
ADM part
Legend :
RADIO part
EC : Equipment Controller (MCF, SEMF: Virtual Machine) RC : Radio Controller (SEMF: Physical Machine) SC : Shelf Controller (SEMF: Physical Machine) ISSB : Intra Shelf Serial Bus SPI : Serial Peripheral & Inventory CAN : Controller Area Network bus ISPB : Intra Shelf Parallel Bus
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 127. WMSN control subsystem architecture
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 241 / 514
5.2.3 Control Subsystem Software Architecture

This paragraph describes the software architecture of the equipment control subsystem. 5.2.3.1 LHR control software architecture 5.2.3.1.1 Functional Decomposition The software implemented functions can be divided into the following groups: Message Routing Function (MRF) It represents all the functions necessary to set up a management network intermediate system (intermediate system communication function): QB3 protocol stack (layer 1 thru 3) Qecc protocol stack (layer 1 thru 3) F protocol stack (layer 1 thru 7) Virtual Machine Management Function (VMMF) It represents all the functions necessary to set up a management network end system (end system communication function) and to control and manage the virtual machine. No strict real time is required. QB3 protocol stack (layer 4 thru 7) Qecc protocol stack (layer 4 thru 7) NER MAF EMF fault management: enable/disable alarm reporting alarm severity assignment EMF performance monitoring Configuration and provisioning (virtual machine) Persistent database management Software download and management Security Physical Machine Management Function (PMMF) It represents all the functions necessary to control and manage the physical machine. No strict real time is required. EMF fault management EMF performance monitoring Configuration and provisioning (physical machine) Basic Function (BF) It represents all the strict real time signal processing functions that can be performed without accessing the ASICs card fail alarm generation: this alarm is an OR of different equipment alarm primitives alarms correlation between equipment and transmission alarms (transmission alarms are masked by equipment alarms) standby cards alarms inhibition (transmission alarms of EPS and RPS standby cards) alarms time stamping, according to the time at which the alarm status change has been read from ASIC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 242 / 514
5.2.3.1.2 Module Decomposition According to the functional decomposition described in the previous para.5.2.3.1.1 on page 242, the partitioning of the software into the main design entities, the function and the purpose of each of them are described hereafter. a) Virtual Machine Manager The Virtual Machine Manager is composed of two main parts (see Fig. 128. on page 244): Common Software (CSW) CSW provides two different services: External Communication Service (ECS) It manages the protocols for the communication with the manager OS and IMCT. Network Element Function Application (NEFA) This component provides a representation of the network element by means of an information model. This information model describes the equipment from the management point of view as a collection of managed objects, which can be manipulated by a management system. NEFA component is composed by a common part (NEFAC) independent from the physical resources of the network element that represents only the functionalities performed in terms of functional managed objects, and a specific part (NEFAS) dependent from the physical resources that implements the equipment managed objects.
Virtual Hardware Machine (VHM) VHM manages the communication with the RC function both in terms of application data (it sends to the RC the provisioning data and receives status and alarms) and in terms of communication driver. The messages exchanged between EC and RC are logical messages (information model oriented). This component stores to persistent memory the data configuration coming from the management systems.
b)
Physical Machine Manager Physical Machine Manager provides a proprietary representation of the managed system in terms of transmission resources and physical resources. It implements the PMM functions and generally provides the conversion between the data how they are known from the physical machine and the info model representation based on managed objects.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 243 / 514
External Communication Service (ECS)

Common Software (CSW)
NEFA Common (NEFAC)
NEFA Specific (NEFAS)
NEFA
dataBase Handler (dBH) Physical Machine Manager (PMM) VHM EC/RC Interface Handler
Fig. 128. VMM module decomposition 5.2.3.2 WMSN control software architecture From the software architecture point of view, this equipment is composed by two completely independent parts, with different aims: Radio functionalities management See the LHR software architecture for the functional and module decomposition description (para.5.2.3.1 on page 242). ADM functionalities management The functional and module decomposition of this part is inherited by the related ADM product (please refer to 1650SMC specific documentation).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 244 / 514
5.2.4 Signal Management

This paragraph describes the signal management performed by 9600LSY equipment.
5.2.4.1 STM1 frame structure and WST mapping Two types of frame can be envisaged depending on frequency channeling applications: STM1 + 2xWST (8 columns) + RFCOH (2 columns)
A1 B1 D1 B2 D4 D7 D10 S1 A1 MD MD B2 A1 MD MD B2 A2 E1 D2 K1 D5 D8 D11 M1 A2 MD MD A2 J0 F1 D3 K2 D6 D9 D12 E2 NU NU NU NU NU NU
ADMINISTRATIVE UNIT OVERHEAD
RFCOH channels (2 columns) MD: Media dependent bytes NU: Bytes reserved for national use MSOH bytes are in bypass condition STM1 + RFCOH (2 columns)
A1 B1 D1 B2 D4 D7 D10 S1 A1 MD MD B2 A1 MD MD B2 A2 E1 D2 K1 D5 D8 D11 M1 A2 MD MD A2 J0 F1 D3 K2 D6 D9 D12 E2 NU NU NU NU NU NU
2xWST channels (8 columns)
ADMINISTRATIVE UNIT OVERHEAD
RFCOH channels (2 columns) MD: Media dependent bytes NU: Bytes reserved for national use MSOH bytes are in bypass condition
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 245 / 514
5.2.4.2 STM0 frame structure STM0 + RFCOH (2 columns) A1 B1 D1 H1 B2 D4 D7 D10 S1 A2 E1 D2 H2 K1 D5 D8 D11 M1 J0 F1 D3 H3 K2 D6 D9 D12 E2 1xWST channel (4 columns)
RFCOH channels (2 columns)
The Multiplex Section Remote Error Indication (MSREI) M1 is rerouted inside the STM0 frame from byte #(9,6) of STM1 frame. MSOH bytes are in bypass condition. A single WST channel (2.048 Kbit/s) is composed by 36 bytes as described in the following: Information (1 byte) WST_POH (1 byte) Information (8 bytes) P_WST Sg_stn Information (8 bytes) P_WST Sg_stn Information (8 bytes) stn stp 0 Sg_stn Information (7 bits) Information (6 bytes) WST (2.048 Kbit/s) WST_POH: P_WST: Sg_stn: Sg_stp: Information: global SDH plus WST parity (BIP8 operation) dedicated WST parity (BIP2 operation) negative stuffing opportunity positive stuffing opportunity 32 bytes Sg_stp Sg_stp Sg_stp 1st byte
36th byte
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 246 / 514
The characteristics of the frame are resumed in the following table: Symbol rate [Mbit/s] Channel spacing [MHz] 40 30.0 29.65 29.0 28.0 28.0 14
Signal
WST
n. columns
Code redundancy
f/Sr 1.612 1.209 1.195 1.168 1.128 1.161 1.645
Reuse operation Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes
STM1
280
7.69%
24.812
STM1 STM0
1 1
272 96
7.69% 7.69%
24.103 8.507
The STM1 signal with 0 WST channel is used only for special application (frequency reuse operation in 28 channel spacing). The STM0 signal with 1_WST is derived directly from the STM1 frame with 2_WST channels dividing by three. RFCOH SERVICES STRUCTURE The structure of SERVICE CHANNELS inside the RFCOH area is the following: RFCOH column xx DSI ATPC D1 D2 D3 E1 F1 reserved for service channel reserved for service channel Monitoring channel management: 1.X EWL alarm 2.X EWH alarm 3.X HBER alarm 4.X ATL alarm [X=1 to 10number of channel] 5.1 FAIL service 0 (ATL_rfcoh1) 5.2 FAIL service 1 (ATL_rfcoh2) 1.1 1.9 2.7 3.5 4.3 5.1 1.2 1.10 2.8 3.6 4.4 5.2 1.3 2.1 2.9 3.7 4.5 column yy 1.4 2.2 2.10 3.8 4.6 1.5 2.3 3.1 3.9 4.7 K0 reserved for service channel reserved for service channel reserved for service channel 1.6 2.4 3.2 3.10 4.8 1.7 2.5 3.3 4.1 4.9 1.8 2.6 3.4 4.2 4.10
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The decision to select the MC signal coming from ch_ 0 or ch_1 is implemented according to the local DEM alarms (and BIP4 parity code).
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 247 / 514
SOH MANAGEMENT This block diagram of Fig. 129. herebelow shows some connection for SOH bytes management: the SOH_BUS (5.1 Mb/s) thats used to transport the RSOH bytes information from all the lineside channels (0,1,2, , N) towards AUX board. the RFCOH_BUS (1.152 Mb/s) towards channel_0 and channel_1 (radioside)
Available bytes with standard interface (NxG.703) and with RS385 interface (NxV11).
CH_0 CH_1 CH_2 Crossconnection matrix RFCOH CH_0
CH_1
CH N BYPASS FUNCTION
SOH BUS
E1 F1 1.8 1.9 2.2 2.3 2.5 2.6 2.8 2.9 3.2 3.3 3.5 3.6 3.8 3.9
ATPC DSI MC E1 F1 D1 D2 D3 CH1 (#) CH2 (#) CH3 (#) CH4 (#) CH5 (#)
EXTERNAL INTERFACES
Fig. 129. SOH management
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 248 / 514
In case of RRA application, the access to SOH bytes is provided by RRA itself; in case of WADM and WLT application, the access to SOH bytes is concentrated in the baseband part implementing WADM/WLT functionality.
Each RSOH_byte, if terminated, must be terminated and accessible both at radioside and lineside. The managed bytes (lineside) are the following: E1 F1 #1.8, #1.9, #2.2, #2.3, #2.5, #2.6, #2.8, #2.9, #3.2. #3.3, #3.5, #3.6, #3.8, #3.9 E1 and F1 are always connected (radioside) to specific RFCOH channels. The other ones can be connected (radioside) to 5 available interfaces. In terminaltoterminal application the passthrough mode for each RSOH_byte is provided. In WADM/WLT terminal application with radio repeater, when a specific service channel must be dropped in the regenerator, the interested RSOH byte is rerouted in the RFCOH area according with the service channel columns format (1152 Kbit/s stream): Column 1 DSI ATPC D1 D2 D3 E1 F1 Channel #1 Channel #2 MC MC MC MC MC FAIL serv + K0 Channel #3 Channel #4 Channel #5 Column 2
The selection of byte rerouting is performed by ECT/OS.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 249 / 514
RST
RFCOH
RSOH termination
E1 F1
USER INTERFACES
D1, D2, D3 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5

CROSS CONNECTION MATRIX FOR SERVICE CHANNELS
ATPC DSI MC
RSOH termination
RST
RFCOH
RSOH standard_bytes passthrough function
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 130. Service channels functional block diagram
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 250 / 514
RSOH standard_bytes passthrough function
The line side SOH bytes can be managed on the ten RST sections available in the maximum system configuration ( 8+0 or 7+1 ).
SOH bytes handling: Byte Handling type Access type User interface
E1 F1 MSU_RSOH N.U._RSOH D1:D3 J0
terminated terminated terminated terminated terminated terminated
Voice channel DTMF or 64 Kbit/s 64 Kbit/s 64 Kbit/s 64 Kbit/s 192 Kbit/s 64 Kbit/s
G.703 or V.11 G.703 or V.11 G.703 or V.11 G.703 or V.11 Internal towards SC Internal towards SC
MSOH
bypassed
Inside the RRA unit the passthrough function of RSOH bytes is provided, in order to transmit channels coming from ADM line equipment in transparent mode through the radio system.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 251 / 514
DCCR Management The DCCR are managed by EC both in lineside and radioside. The DCCR towards lineside are provided by the connection for all the channelunits, but are managed by EC only the streams towards CH_0 and CH_1 on radioside, where they are inserted inside the RFCOH bytes.
RFCOH SECTION
RST SECTION
CH_0
Lineside
EPLD CK+SYNC REF
Radioside
CK+SYNC
DCCR extraction lineside & mapping in 6.48 Mb BUS
DCCR extraction
RSOH insertion
LOGIC
CK+SYNC from RFCOH radioside
EPLD
CK+SYNC
RST SECTION
RFCOH SECTION
CH_1
RST SECTION
RFCOH SECTION
CH_9
Fig. 131. DCCR management (ADM towards RADIO)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 252 / 514
CK+SYNC All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
RFCOH SECTION
RST SECTION
CH_0
Radioside
EPLD
Lineside
CK+SYNC REF
DCCR extraction
DCCR mapping
DCCR demapping from 6.48 Mb BUS & insertion line side
EPLD
RFCOH SECTION
RST SECTION
CH_1
CK+SYNC
RFCOH SECTION
RST SECTION
CH_9
Fig. 132. DCCR management (RADIO towards ADM)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 253 / 514
Notes (see figure below): On RST section the DCCR are inserted/extracted by dedicated pins (192 Kbit/s) on contradirectional interface. The DCCR extracted from RST on channels 0, 1, 2 and the DCCR radioside are mapped inside the first 6.48 Mbit/s DCC frame (link 1). The DCCR extracted from RST on channels 3, 4, 5, 6 are mapped inside the the second 6.48 Mbit/s DCC frame (link 2). The DCCR extracted from RST on channels 7, 8, 9 are mapped inside the the third 6.48 Mbit/s DCC frame (link 3).
RST section (channels 0) RST section (channels 1)

MUX/DEMUX
6.48 Mb/s [link 1]
6.48 Mb/s [link 2]
SC
RST section (channels 9)
6.48 Mb/s [link 3]
RFCOH section (channel 0)

SWITCH
RFCOH section (channel 1)
Fig. 133. DCCR management
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 254 / 514
Tab. 56. DCC Mapping & Interleaving The DCC frame is composed by 101.25 bytes (6.48 Mbit/s), and takes into account the information from/to four STM1 channels: CR D1(#1) D3(#1) DM D5 D7 D9 D11 CF2 F2 DF3 x CR D1(#2) D3(#2) DM D5 D7 D9 D11 CF2 F2 DF3 xx CR D1(#3) D3(#3) DM D5 D7 D9 D11 CF2 F2 DF3 x CR D1(#4) D3(#4) DM D5 D7 D9 D11 CF2 F2 DF3 DR D2(#1) CM D4 D6 D8 D10 D12 DF2 CF3 F3 DR D2(#2) CM D4 D6 D8 D10 D12 DF2 CF3 F3 DR D2(#3) CM D4 D6 D8 D10 D12 DF2 CF3 F3 DR D2(#4) CM D4 D6 D8 D10 D12 DF2 CF3 F3
x x x x x x x x x x
DR, DM, DF2, DF3: D1, D4, F2, F3: CR, CM, CF2, CF3: X: 5.2.4.3 ATPC Management
positive stuffing opportunity bytes negative stuffing opportunity bytes colored stuffing bytes empty bytes
The information regarding the ATPC functionality can be resumed in the following (for each channel): received power (absolute digital value to transmit towards the remote station in order to move the Tx output power) Rx failure (for remote Tx inhibition with reused system configuration) ID_channel + ID_direction (for identification of ATPC channel in order to avoid the repeater bypass of information and the exactly indication of transmission direction in case of 2+0 (N+0) eastwest configuration)
They can be organized in registers of the CAN_BUS where the PRx and ID_ch information are transmitted with higher priority than Rx fail. They can be sent to the remote station by means 64Kb/s channel 1+1 protected. The information for each channel received in remote station is sent to the relevant transmitter where the PRx information received is compared to the thresholds set and it is decided to send up or down or hold commands to the RF transmitter. The Rx failure received in the Tx remote station is used to switch off the relevant modulator. It will be switched on after Rx failure removal. Of course the Rx failure alarm is not comprehensive of propagation alarms. The ATPC management is performed between two RFCOH sections. That means that in a repeater is present an ATPC management EAST side and an ATPC management WEST side that work independent way. The block diagram represented in the following is valid for terminal configuration but can be considered valid also for repeater configuration EAST (or WEST) side if RRA unit indication is substituted with DROP_INSERT unit indication.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 255 / 514
RX1 unit RX0 unit

PRX DETECTION From AGC VOLTAGE
RRA1 unit RRA0 unit

Rx failure
RFCOH EXTRACTION All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
MICROPROCESSOR
CAN_BUS EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER
SERVICE UNIT/ATPC
64 Kb/s
TX1 unit TX0 unit

RFCOH INSERTION
MOD On/off
MICROPROCESSOR
Rx failure
CAN BUS EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER SERVICE UNIT/ATPC
Fig. 134. ATPC management
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 256 / 514
5.2.4.4 MC management on RX terminal
RRA 1
RRA 0 RFCOH HITLESS SW
DEMUX 0
DEMUX 1
SWITCH
ATL_RFCOH1 ATL_RFCOH0
DEM 0
OR local + remote
DEM 1
OR local + remote
DEM 2
OR local + remote
LOGIC
DEM 9
OR local + remote
Fig. 135. MC management on RX terminal
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 257 / 514
5.2.4.5 Sub STM1 framing processing In case of multiplexing of an AU4 via AUG, the position and the justification of AU4 structure is managed by octets H1H2H3 type: H1 NDF 1 0 H2 POINTER H3 Negative justification
because the other part of the AUOH area: H1 Y Y H2 U U H3 H3 H3
is filled with octets: Y = 1001nn11 (where n is a nonspecified value) U = 11111111 In this sense, we can assume that the only managed transport situation is for an AU4 structure inside an STM1 signal, and the STM0 design is mapped with 3xVC3 structures (partially filled with the first container only) into an AU4 unit (European standard). The demultiplexing operation from an STM1 signal to an STM0 signal can be provided taking one column for each three columns group, considering that only the first VC3 inside the AU4 structure of STM1 frame contains the significant payload. The VC4 POH is maintained in STM0 frame. The fixed stuffing columns (11, 12) of STM1 frame are removed in STM0 frame. When the STM1 standard interface is formed by an STM0 signal, the AUOH row is mapped according to the previous description (H1, H2 and H3 are extracted from the STM0 format), and B2 parity calculation has to be recomputed with the following criteria: B2(#1) = B2 coming from STM0 frame B2(#2) = Y U H3 B2(#3) = Y U H3
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 258 / 514
Starting from three TUG3 units, it is possible to generate the VC4 structure with the mapping of 3xTUG3, 18 bytes of fixed justification and the VC4 POH as described below:
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel. 86 bytes 86 bytes 86 bytes
TUG3
TUG3
TUG3

VC4 POH FILLED BYTES
VC4
261 bytes
Fig. 136. VC4 generation from 3 TUG3
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 259 / 514
During the multiplexing/demultiplexing of the STM0 signal for the transmission in the radio section of the first TUG3 tributary, it is necessary to consider the following multiplexing structure, provided in SDH European hierarchy:
3rd TUG3 3rd TU3: unequipped All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
2nd TUG3
2nd TU3: unequipped
STM1
AUG
AU4
VC4
TUG3
TU3
VC3
C3 = 34.368 Kbit/s
X7
TUG2 TU12 VC12 C12 = 2.048 Kbit/s
So, when we speak of STM0 signal transmission we intend a nonstandard interface, based on a single TUG3 container (the first) coming from the mapping of an AU4 partially equipped. The 2nd and 3rd TUG3 are always considered as filled with TU3s unequipped container.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 260 / 514
STM1 multiplexing structure with 3xTUG3 carrying VC3 container inside an AU4 unit VC4 POH
1st TU3 pointer
1st VC3 POH
H1 H2 H3 H1 Y Y H2 U U H3 H3 H3
H1 H2 H3
H1 H2 H3
3xVC3 (interleaved)
H1 H2 H3 H1 H2 H3
1st VC3
Where: Y=10010011 U=11111111 Fixed stuffing bytes NOTE: In case of AU4 pointer = 0 (NDF=0110 and SS_bits=10) the default value for AUOH row is: AUOH = H1 Y Y H2 U U H3 H3 H3 = 68 93 93 00 FF FF 00 00 00 In case of 3xVC3 mapping structure, the TU3 pointers for the unequipped containers are fixed to: H1 H2 H3 = 68 00 00 (NDF=0110, SS_bits=10, pointer=0, pointer offset=0)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The STM0 frame is defined as that frame obtained from the STM1 one, by reducing its capacity to one third of it. The SOH bytes are divided into triplets, and the first byte is taken while the other two discarded. The Higher Order container is a VC4/3, carried in an AU4/3.
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 261 / 514
The most important advantage of this solution is the possibility to transmit only the significant part of an STM1 signal sub equipped on a radio equipment, without any multiplexing/demultiplexing operation or pointer processing; using the radio network element as a pure regenerator NE.
RST
RREI
RPI
RF branching
RF branching
RPI
RREI
RST
NNI: RST: RREI: RPI:
network node interface regenerator section termination radiorelay equipment interface radio physical interface Fig. 137. Sub STM1 terminal functional block diagram
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 262 / 514
For hardware convenience it is defined a new entity: AU4/3 carrying a VC4/3, being them structured as an one third of an AU4. The AU4/3 mapping carries VC3, VC2, VC12 by two pointer levels (AU_level and TU_level, cascaded); moreover, fixed stuff columns in their mapping into AU4/3 are in fixed position with respect to the VC4/3 carrier.
STM1 / STM0 frame processing algorithm:
RPS
RSOH termination
MUX
B1 calculation:
the calculation is made over all bytes of the frame after scrambling and the result is inserted in the next frame before scrambling.
WST & services Insertion on STM1 frame Div by 3 RPS Services insertion on STM0 frame
Filling all 0 bytes for columns Nx2 & Nx3 (except A1, A2 and AUOH row) M1 change position B2(#5.1) compensation B2 compensation B3 compensation
RST section
RFCOH section
STM0 / STM1 frame processing algorithm:
RPS WST & services extraction on STM1 frame MUX
B1 handling:
the byte is recovered from the SDH frame after and is descrambling compared with the the calculation over previous elapsed frame
RSOH insertion and B1 calculation
Services extraction on STM0 frame
Interleaving of all 0 bytes for columns Nx2 & Nx3 Rewriting A1, A2 Rewriting AUOH
RPS M1 change position.

(M1 is moved in the original position [#9.6] and 00 configuration is inserted in [#9.4] byte) B2 compensation B3 compensation
B2 (#1, #3) compensation

RFCOH section RST section
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 263 / 514
5.2.4.6 SOH handling in normal operation condition SOH handling in normal operation condition according to the default hardware configuration:
SOH BYTES A1 A2 B1 E1 F1 D1 D2 D3 J0
TX SIDE Refresh Refresh insert insert insert insert character or multiframe insert insert Bypass
RX SIDE Refresh Refresh insert insert insert insert character or multiframe insert insert Bypass
NOTE
All the RSOH bytes are managed one by one
M.S.U. NU_RSOH MSOH
All the MSOH bytes are in a fixed bypass condition without any possibility to be managed.
This operation is involved in Radio Section Termination area (RST) as in the following block diagram:
TX_SIDE SIGNAL FLOW
Line side
RST
RPS
RFCOH RRA
RSPI RADIO
Radio side
RX_SIDE SIGNAL FLOW
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 264 / 514
5.2.4.7 Alarms detected in RST section Alarm

Consequent action MSAIS MSAIS MSAIS OFS count
LOS (loss of signal) LOF (loss of frame) TIM (trace identifier mismatch) OOF (out of frame) MSAIS (multiplex section AIS) MSRDI (multiplex section remote defect indication)
TIM:
when J0 byte, extracted from SDH stream received, is different from the data written in J0_register by microprocessor interface (according to the regenerator section trace algorithm), Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM) alarm is detected and the AIS condition is activated. the Multiplex Section Remote Defect Indication is used to return an indication to the transmit end that the received end has detected an incoming section defect or is receiving MSAIS. MSRDI is generated by inserting a 110 code in positions 6, 7 and 8 of the K2 byte before scrambling. the Multiplex Section AIS indication detect an incoming AIS signal. MSAIS is generated by inserting a 111 code in positions 6, 7 and 8 of the K2 byte before scrambling. the Out of Frame Second (OFS) is declared when the STM1 frame alignment process is in the OOF state. This parameter is used as additional performance parameter.
MSRDI:
MSAIS:
N.B.
The proprietary management of K0 channel (Radio Channel Identification) inside the RFCOH section is the same of J0 in RST section. The detected alarm is the following: Alarm RCIM (Radio Channel Identifier Mismatch) Consequent action MSAIS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 265 / 514
In the following diagram is indicated the functional representation of the system with the alarms indication as reported to ECT/OS:
LOS LOF
TIM (JO)
TX_LOS TX_FAIL MOD_LOS MOD_FAIL
SPI
RST
RST
RPS
RFCOH
RRA channel
RSPI
MOD + TX
LINESIDE
RADIOSIDE
TX FAIL (#) TX DEGRADED (#) TIM (JO) LOS LOF RCIM (K0)
RX_LOS RX_FAIL DEM_LOS DEM_FAIL
SPI
RST
RST
RPS
RFCOH
RRA channel
RSPI
RX + DEM
(#) referred to optical interface.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 266 / 514
In the following diagram is indicated the functional representation of the system with the primitives for the performance monitoring as reported to ECT/OS.
OOF EB (B1)
TL
SPI
RST
RST
RPS
RFCOH
RRA channel
RSPI
MOD + TX
LINESIDE
RADIOSIDE
EB (B1)
PSA PSR OOF
RL FEC
SPI
RST
RST
RPS
RFCOH
RRA channel
RSPI
RX + DEM
Legend: EB: OOF: TL: Errored Block Out of Frame Transmitted level, is the level of the estimated transmitter power at the transmitter output. The parameter is represented by two values: an integer fixed value expressed in [dBm] defining the transmitted power value; an integer offset value expressed in [dB] representing the variation with respect to the nominal value. Received level, is the level of the estimated received power at the input of the receiver. In 2 release both value will be reported. The parameter unit shall be expressed in [dBm] and represented by the rounded nearest integer. Protection Switch Actual, represents any actual switch from a protected (working) channel to a protecting (standby) channel Protection Switch Request, represents any activation of a switch initiation criteria which may lead to automatic switches from a working channel to a standby channel and viceversa.
RL:
PSA:
PSR:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 267 / 514
5.2.4.8 Regenerator Section trace management K0 expected (radio side) K0 transmitted (radio side) J0 transmitted (radio side) J0 transmitted (line side) J0 expected (radio side)
RST sink
RST source
RPS
RFCOH source
RFCOH source
RPS
RST sink
RST source
RRA channel (TX side)
RRA channel (RX side)
Action to P: J0 mismatch alarm (with MSAIS insertion in frame) J0 received value
Action to P: K0 mismatch alarm (with MSAIS insertion in frame) K0 received value J0 mismatch alarm (with MSAIS insertion in frame) J0 received value
NOTES: J0 is represented by an integer of 15 digits (multiframe mode9 or one byte (insert character mode). The default value for J0 is 0000 0001 (unspecified Regenerator Section Trace). The methodology of J0 management is described in the following para.5.2.4.8.1 on page 269. K0 is represented by 6 bits (inside a RFCOH byte). K0_mismatch alarm is detected after 3 consecutive frame of erroneous K0 received, and it is used as channel switching criteria. In the system without protection, J0 only is managed. K0 transmitted and K0 expected are fixed to the default value (K0 = 000000). In a repeater configuration only K0 management is performed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 268 / 514
J0 expected (line side)
5.2.4.8.1 J0 management The J0 byte located at # (1, 7) byte in an STM1 is allocated to a Regenerator Section Trace. This byte is used to transmit repetitively a Section Access Point Identifier so that a section receiver can verify its continued connection to the intended transmitter. Within a national network, or within the domain of a single operator, this Section Access Point Identifier may use either a single byte (containing the code 0255) or the Access Point Identifier format as defined in clause 3/G.831. At international boundaries, or at the boundaries between the networks of different operators, the format defined in clause 3/G.831 shall be used unless otherwise mutually agreed by the operators providing the transport. A 16byte frame is defined for the transmission of Section Access Point Identifiers where these conform to the definition contained in clause 3/G.831. The first byte of the string is a frame start marker and includes the result of a CRC7 calculation over the previous frame. The following 15 bytes are used for the transport of 15 T.50 characters (international Reference Version) required for the Section Access Point Identifier. The 16byte frame description is given in Table 4/G.707 reported herebelow: TABLE 4/G.707 16byte frame for Trail APId Byte # 1 2 3 : 16 1 0 0 : 0 X X X C1 X X Value (bit 1, 2, ,8) C2 X X C3 X X C4 X X : X X X X C5 X X C6 X X C7 X X
NOTES 1 C1C2C3C4C5C6C7 is the result of the CRC7 calculation over the previous frame. C1is the MSB. 2 0XXXXXXX represents a T.50 character. In the case of interworking of equipment implementing the STM identifier functionality (see N.B.) and equipment employing the Regenerator Section Trace function, the latter shall interpret the pattern 0000001 in J0 as Regenerator Section Trace unspecified. This unspecified Regenerator Section Trace can also be used if no use of the Regenerator Section Trace is made. N.B. STM identifier: C1 In earlier versions of the Recommendation, the content of bytes located at S (1, 7, 1) or [1, 6N+1] to S (1, 7, N) or [1, 7N] was defined as a unique identifier indicating the binary value of the multicolumn, interleave depth coordinate, c. It may have been used to assist in frame alignment.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 269 / 514
5.2.4.8.2 Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM) detector The Trail Trace Identifier is a 16_BYTE or 1_BYTE string used in SDH to detect misconnections inside a communication network. A receiver has to validate the received string, in order to be sure that it has not been corrupted by line errors, and compare it with an expected value, in order to verify that it is connected with the right transmitter. If this is not the case, the receiver has to declare a TIM (Trace Identifier Mismatch) alarm. The 1_BYTE string is made by a single byte (containing the code 0255), while the 16_BYTE frame is structured as previously described. In the following, the algorithm to detect the TIM condition is described: this algorithm is applied at all SDH layers in which Trail Trace Identifier feature is defined, so it is suitable for processing byte J0 (section trace) and bytes J1, J2 (VCi path trace). The algorithm behavior is shown in the following Fig. 138. :
DATA
16_BYTE
t, f, d
COMB
t, f, d
t, f, d
TIM1/16 machine
TIM 1/16 alarm
1/16
1_BYTE t = true f = false d = dontcare

valid CRC7 TIMX alarm
TIM
TIMX machine
valid CONST
Fig. 138. TIM algorithm Incoming data are at the same time checked in order to find the standard 16_BYTE string with multiframe alignment word and CRC7, or a fixed 16 times repeating 1_BYTE string. The preset 16/1 is needed to tell the system if a 16_BYTE or a 1_BYTE string is expected. After validation process (correct CRC7 and multiframe for the 16_BYTE string, same value 16 times for the 1_BYTE string), the received string is compared with the expected one. If the preset 16/1 is set to 16, the comparison with 1 is always false; if the preset 16/1 is set to 1, the comparison with 16 is always false. Each output (that can assume three possible values: false, true, dontcare if the received string has not been validated) of the two comparisons is sent, through a COMB function, to a state machine (the TIM1/16 machine) with four states: alarm, not alarm, and two intermediate states. False causes the state machine moving towards the alarm state, true causes the state machine moving towards the not alarm state, dontcare leaves the machine in the state it is. In parallel, further control is performed by the TIMX machine, in such a way that if for 8x16 times neither a fixed string nor a correct multiframe alignment word plus CRC7 can be found, the TIM alarm is anyway declared (this feature is not required by standards at now). The TIM algorithm described is fully compliant with the standard promptness requests about maximum detection time and is able to detect all possible crossmisconnections: expected 1_BYTE string, with a different 1_BYTE or a 16_BYTE string received; expected 16_BYTE string, with a different 16_BYTE or a 1_BYTE string received; expected 1_BYTE or 16_BYTE string, with a random string received.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 270 / 514
Here below, TIM algorithm is described in more details: a)

16_BYTE DETECTOR As it can be seen in the following Fig. 139. , the 16_BYTE detector internally consists of four functions: a multiframe aligner in order to synchronize the machine itself to the 16_BYTE frame; a CRC7 extractor, in order to calculate the CRC7 from the received frame; a mismatch detector, in order to determine whether a received 16_BYTE frame is different from the expected string; a command generator, which drives the TIM1/16 machine, depending on the outputs of the preceding two functions.
CRC7 detector 8
valid CRC7
DATA
Multiframe Aligner
sync
Command Generator Mismatch detector 8

match
t, f, d
DATA EXP
1/16
Fig. 139. The 16_BYTE machine b) 1_BYTE DETECTOR The 1_BYTE detector internally consists of four functions: a mod 16 counter, in order to generate an independent sync; a 16 byte integrator, which detects whether the received bytes are of the 1_BYTE type; a mismatch detector, in order to determine whether a received 1_BYTE is different from the expected one; a command generator, which drives the TIM1/16 machine, depending on the outputs of the preceding two functions.
8
DATA sync
16 byte integrator MOD 16 counter Command Generator Mismatch detector 8

DATA EXP 1/16 match
valid const
t, f, d
Fig. 140. The 1_BYTE machine 5.2.4.8.3 K0 management The K0 bits were defined in RFCOH section to perform a proprietary regenerator section trace internally to the switching section. K0 is represented by 6 bits (inside a RFCOH byte). K0_mismatch alarm is detected after 3 consecutive frame of erroneous K0 received, and it is used as channel switching criteria.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 271 / 514
5.2.4.9 N+1 Repeater configuration
0, 1 channels
DEMODULATOR ALIGNER DROP / INSERT MODULATOR All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
RFCOH management: E1, F1, K0, DCCR, ATPC, DSI, MC, CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4, CH5 NxWST management
2, 3, 4, .... channels
DEMODULATOR ALIGNER DROP / INSERT MODULATOR
RFCOH management: E1, F1, K0, DCCR, ATPC, DSI, MC, CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4, CH5 NxWST management
Optional: necessary in case of WST dropinsert only, or in case of K0 application requirement
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 272 / 514
5.2.4.10 MC management on Repeater configuration DROP 1 WE

DROP 0 WE OR operation on local EWL and EWH alarms
DEMUX 0
DEMUX 1
MUX 0
MUX 1
SWITCH
SPLIT
DEM 0
DEM 1
DEM 9
Remote modem alarms ATL_rem RFCOH 0 ATL_rem RFCOH 1
Local modem alarms
ATL_loc RFCOH 0 ATL_loc RFCOH 1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 273 / 514
5.2.5 Remote Inventory subsystem

See Fig. 141. on page 275. The Remote Inventory function permits the operator to retrieve information about any card or module present on the equipment. The available information, written in a 64x16 bit EEPROM on board (RI device), is: construction date, code number, maker name, Cardtype, etc. (see details in the Operator Handbook). The Remote Inventory function is present in all the cards. The RI can be also present on some submodules assembled on the board (such as optical modules, microcontrollers and so on). The relevant data are transported by the CAN bus and are managed by the System Controller unit, which, besides the information retrieved from the units RI device, add the slot identifier (ID) information. The System Controller unit can also manage the visual indications of the board (LEDs) and some I/O parallel commands/contacts/alarms that can eventually be transferred by means of the CAN bus. The agent microcontroller on each unit manages the Remote Inventory, with the exception of Power Supply Units (PSU) and Battery Filter units (PSF), that are supported by ESC Agent. The Remote Inventory of units submodules (CANCCOMB modules, Additional TPHDEV and Optical interface) are supported by the respective Agent Unit.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 274 / 514
CAN 0 BB
SERVICE
SERVICE WEST
Extension HK
HST DRIVER
If unit TPH
Add.
If unit TPH
Add.
additional TPHDEV
MD0
MD1
MD2
MD3
MD4
MD5
MD6
MD7
MD8
MD9
IF unit unit If IF unit unit If IF unit unit If IF unit unit If IF unit unit If IF unit unit If IF unit unit If IF unit unit If IF unit unit If IF unit unit If IF unit unit If IF unit unit If IF unit unit If IF unit unit If IF unit unit If IF unit unit If IF unit unit If IF unit unit If IF unit unit If IF unit unit If
CANCCOMB MODULES
CH0
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH9
Optical If unit interface
OPTICAL MODULES
HC12 ESC Agent
N.12 Enable
PSU0
PSU1
PSU2
PSU3
PSU4
PSU5
PSU6
PSU7
PSU8
PSU9
ESC Unit
Battery filter 1
Battery filter 2
CAN 0 BB Remoty inventory Bus Enable Clock Data input Data output +3.3V gnd Missing
EEPROM
N.B.
SERVICE WEST and HST DRIVER not present in current release Fig. 141. Remote inventory subsystem architecture
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 275 / 514
5.2.6 System Controller unit description

Refer to para.3.6.2 on page 140 for the unit physical views and operative information. The Equipment System Controller (ESC) unit is made with two boards: the mother board and the subunit ESCON. The block diagram of Fig. 142. is relevant to the whole unit (mother board and the subunit ESCON). The subunit ESCON performs the main functions: Equipment controller Radio controller DCCR management Remote Inventory management Station alarms management Summarizing alarms management Housekeeping alarms management
The mother board performs the following main functions: DCCR Mux /demux Alarm expansion I/0 Housekeeping /Station alarms/ Summarizing alarms with relays to Access area subrack Management of CANBUSes of baseband shelf and RT shelf Management of parallel missing card alarms Drivers and connectors for Equipment controller and Radio controller I/O circuits Management of Power Supply and Battery alarms ANDOR function Routering of SPRI register with a dedicate microcontroller.
On the board there is an 8bits microcontroller, to convert the bus SPI of ESCON into CAN 0 BBBUS, Can 1 BBBus and CanRT bus. The functions of Equipment Controller and Radio controller are described in para.5.2.2 on page 237. The functions for the Remote Inventory management are described in para.5.2.5 on page 274.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 276 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
CAN0 BB MPC860 EN ISS B MPC860 EN F QB3 (10base 2) RC EC SPI Local bus FPGA FPGA Can 0 Can 1 Control. Control.
N.B.
03 CAN0 BB
EXP. ALARM HC12
Resistive Load
955.203.292 Q CAN 1 Download FPGA CAN RT

HC12 Router FPGA SPIL SPRI
RTX1RTX1 RTX2 RTX2 RTX3RTX3 RTX4RTX4 RTX5RTX5 RTX6 RTX7RTX7 RTX8 RTX9 RTX0 RTX6 RTX8 RTX9
Resistive Load
Resistive Load
CAN 0 BB and RC local debug ocal
MD1MD1 MD2MD2 MD3 MD3 MD4MD4 MD5MD5 MD6MD6 MD7 MD7 MD8 MD9MD9 MD0 MD8
QB3 (10base T and Debug_N or EC debug local)
Resistive Load
Resistive Load
CH2 CH2CH3 CH0CH1 CH1 CH3 CH4CH4 CH5CH5CH6CH6CH7CH7 CH8CH8CH9CH9
P I O/HK UART
SERVICE WEST and HST DRIVER not present in current release
Fig. 142. System Controller block diagram
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
SERVICE
SERVICE Extension HST HKHK DRIVER WEST
Card Missing and RT Power Supply Alarms
CAN0 BB
SPI
Remote Inventory BB Power Supply and Battery filter
277 / 514
DCCR Management See Fig. 143. on page 279. The System controller manages the DCCR at line side and radio side. In order to connect DCCR to the Controller, the FPGA inside ESCON board requires a particular bidirectional link working at 6.48 Mhz. In order to avoid slips on dropped DCCR byte, due to different frequency between the clock extracted from STMj (j=0 to 9) and the local timing used to resynchronize the resulting DCCR subframe, a stuffing mechanism is realized. The DCC mapping and interleaving is described in Tab. 56. on page 255. An EPLD performs three bidirectional links in order to insert/extract the DCCR line side of the all RRA units, and DCCR radio side from/to Service unit: On the first link 6.48.48 Mbit/s are mapped : DCCR 192Kbit from/to Service units DCCR 192Kbit from/to RRASTB0 DCCR 192Kbit from/to RRA 1 DCCR 192Kbit from/to RRA 2 On the second link 6.48 Mbit/s are mapped: DCCR 192Kbit from/to RRA 3 DCCR 192Kbit from/to RRA 4 DCCR 192Kbit from/to RRA 5 DCCR 192Kbit from/to RRA 6 On the third link 6.48 Mbit/s are mapped: DCCR 192Kbit from/to RRA 7 DCCR 192Kbit from/to RRA 8 DCCR 192Kbit from/to RRA 9 DCCR 192Kbit from/to RRA 6
Summarizing/Housekeeping Alarms See Fig. 143. on page 279. The ESCON subunit manages 9 Input and 14 Output signal alarms. By means of the alarms expansion circuit located on ESC mother board, there are 22 Input and 56 Output signals available. In 9600LSY application the following number of alarms are managed: 22 HK input 10 HK output 46 output alarms
In order to reduce the power consumption, all relays are switched off in normal conditions; the presence of active alarms corresponds always to closed contact with a common wire available to the Customer. The electrical characteristics of relays are: (V is voltage between the warm wire and the common one).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
open contact 72 v V v 2V closed contact 2 v V v 0V
I v 0.2mA I v 50mA
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 278 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
158
138 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
03
374 8 OE A CK 374 8 ESCONX
OUT 1
INT TUP
HK1 HK2 HK3 HK4 GA3 GA4 GA5 GA6
HK 14
HK 1316 IN 14
4 4 SEL Vcc 158

OUT 14
Lamp OUT 11 alarms OUT 12 OUT 13
}
0 1SEL 2
ANDOR
Link 1
Link 2
Link 3
955.203.292 Q
4 4 SEL
IN 68
HK 58 HK 1720
4 8
E N OE B CK 374 8 OE C CK 374 8
GA7 GA8 GA9 GA10 GA11 GA12 GA13 GA14
Rack lamps to M184 connector of M184 to Access area (BB shelf)
158 SEL
IN 912
GA 912 GA 21,22 ORALIM
4
OUT 2
GA1 FREE GA2 TUP
PWANDOR
Link 1
DCCR TO/FROM RFCOH ( Service)
SPI 6.48 Mbit FPGA Link 2
From Battery Filter 1 and 2 Alarms battery OE D CK 374 8

DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRASTBY0 )
DCCR TO/FROM
Service Battery
DCCR TO/FROM
Stuffing el.store RST (RRA1) DCCR mapping DCCR extracting DCCR extracting RST (RRA2
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA 3)
Stuffing Stuffing el.store el.store DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA4 ) DCCR mapping DCCR mapping DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA5) DCCR extracting DCCR extracting Link 3 Can 0
Can 0 Can 1 Control. Control. 374 Can 1 8
OE E CK
HK5 HK6 HK7 HK8 HK9 HK10 GA31 GA32
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA6
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA 7)
OE F CK 374 8 OE G CK
Fig. 143. DCCR and summarizing/housekeeping alarms management block diagram

3DB 02839 AA AA
Ck + SY from main channel Sy from CK 38.88 + SY
Stuffing Stuffing el.store el.store DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA8 ) DCCR mapping DCCR mapping DCCR extracting DCCR extracting DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA9)
514
Ck + SY from
main channel
RRA 0,1,2,8,9 Ck + SY from Sby channel
MUXMUX
LogicLogic EPLD Daina
Ck + Sy from
Dip Switch
EPLD
279 / 514
5.2.7 Flash Card description

Refer to para.3.6.2 on page 140 for the unit physical views and operative information. The FLASH CARD contains, after the system SW loading and system configuration carried out through the Craft Terminal: 1) 2) the whole Equipment software programs (susceptible to be downloaded toward the Supervisory Units); the system configuration data. This configuration data set is named MIB and can be saved as a file in the Craft Terminal (or OS) environment, as well as can be restored in the Flash Card retrieving this file from the Craft Terminal (or OS); the routing configuration data (N.B.): Local Configuration OS Configuration NTP Server Configuration LAPD Configuration Ethernet Configuration RAP Configuration MESA Configuration. This configuration data set cannot be saved together with MIB data.
3)
The presence of the FLASH CARD as individual part simplifies the maintenance procedure in case of failure of the System Controller, as explained in para.7.7.4.4 on page 384 and para.7.7.4.5 on page 384. N.B. This list is merely for general information only. Refer to the C.T. Operators Handbook for a more precise list.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 280 / 514
5.2.8 Additional Housekeeping unit description

The Additional Housekeeping (HKDEV) is an optional unit. By its use, other 18 HK Inputs become available, besides those already available with the System Controller unit. Fig. 144. herebelow shows the unit block diagram. (M1) is the connector for getting the 18 HK Inputs (for pinout see point a ) on page 154). The connector (M2) is connected by cable to connector (M179) of Baseband shelf (see Fig. 95. on page 178). By this cable the unit: receives power supply is connected to the System Controller unit by CAN 0 BB bus sends the Card Fail and Card Missing signals to the System Controller
A red led on the front indicates the failure of Additional Housekeeping unit
18 Housekeeping Inputs M1 SUBD 25 pins female 3.45 V 5.3 V M2 SUBD 9 pins male HKDEV Card Fail
led
CEPT INTERFACE
Remote Inventory
HC12 mP
HKDEV Card Missing Can 0 BB
Fig. 144. Additional Housekeeping block diagram
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 281 / 514
5.3 Power supply subsystem

The Power Supply subsystem distributes both batteries BATT.A and BATT.B voltages to each user circuit in the following way: a) Primary voltage distribution (see Fig. 145. herebelow for block diagram, and Fig. 94. on page 176 for physical implementation). Primary sources BATT.A and BATT.B are connected to TRU distribution frame. From TRU box, BATT.A and BATT.B are distributed by individual cables, each one protected by circuit breakers, to the subracks (Tab. 15. on page 128 indicates the TRU breaker utilization). Power Supply distribution in the Transceiver shelf (see Fig. 145. herebelow and Fig. 97. on page 181). Power supply cables from TRU are connected to following connectors: (M2) for BATT.A and (M3) for BATT.B, by means of which transceivers TR0 to TR4 receive power through the shelf backpanel (M5) for BATT.A and (M6) for BATT.B, by means of which transceivers TR5 to TR9 receive power through the shelf backpanel
BATT. A
b)
BATT. B
TR0
TR9
TOP RACK UNIT
...
TRX BACK PANEL
B.B. BACK PANNEL
FAN SUBRACKS
ADM BACK PANEL
Fig. 145. Power Supply distribution from Top Rack Unit and Transceiver shelf Power Supply distribution
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 282 / 514
c)
Power Supply distribution in the Baseband shelf Power supply cables from TRU (see Fig. 145. on page 282) are connected to following connectors: BATT.A cable connected to Power Supply Input connector of PSF1 unit equipped in slot 25 (i.e. on the left) of Baseband shelf BATT.B cable connected to Power Supply Input connector of PSF2 unit equipped in slot 36 (i.e. on the right) of Baseband shelf N.B. PSF unit front view is depicted in Fig. 76. on page 153 PSF1 and PSF2 position in the shelf is shown in Fig. 64. on page 135 The distribution of Power supply from PSF units to the subrack is depicted in Fig. 146. herebelow: each PSF unit receives also the power supply voltage from the other PSF; after filtering: BATT.A and BATT.B primary voltages are distributed through the backpanel toward the Power Supply units PSU0 .... PSU9 (slots (E) in Fig. 64. on page 135) converted voltages are distributed through the backpanel to units SERVICE and SYSTEM CONTROLLER in the shelf (respectively in slot (A) and (B) in Fig. 64. on page 135), and, through its cable, to ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING unit (see para.3.6.8 on page 154) The distribution of Power supply from PSU units to the units MODEM and RRA/RRAS is depicted in Fig. 146. herebelow: PSU units are grouped in 2units groups (i.e. PSU0+PSU1 , PSU2+PSU3 , ..). Each PSU pair converts and then distributes, through the backpanel, power supply to the correspondent pair of RRA and MODEM.
AL0
+5,3V Power Supply 0 +3,45V +5,3Vp +3,45Vp
MODEM 0 RRA 0 or RRASTBY RRA1
AL1
+5,3V
Power +3,45V Supply 1 Battery 2 Battery 1 AL8

+5,3V
+5,3Vp +3,45Vp
MODEM 1
Power Supply 8 +3,45V +5,3Vp Filter1 BATT. 1 Bat 1 DC/DC ALf1 AL9
+5,3V +3,45Vp
MODEM 8 RRA 8
RRA9 MODEM 9
Power +3,45V +5,3Vp Supply 9 +3,45Vp Bat 2 ALf2 +3,45Vp BATT. 2 DC/DC Filter2 SERVICE +5,3Vp
Additional Housekeeping SERVICE BATTERY

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SYSTEM CONTROLLER
Fig. 146. Power Supply distribution in Baseband shelf
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 283 / 514
d)
Service Battery to System Controller unit In addition to the voltage distributed by PSF1 and PSF2 units, the System Controller unit receives also the battery voltage by means of the cable used for Station Alarms management (see Tab. 37. on page 191). This allows the System Controller unit to manage the TRU lamps also in case of power supply missing from both PSF1 and PSF2 units.
e)
Power Supply distribution to Additional Housekeeping unit The Additional Housekeeping unit is powered as the System Controller unit (of which it must be considered an extension), as depicted in Fig. 146. on page 283. From the physical point of view, power supply is lead on the cable connecting the Additional Housekeeping unit to the BB shelf (see Tab. 40. on page 192).
f)
Power Supply distribution in the Fans shelves Power supply cables from TRU (see Fig. 145. on page 282) are connected to following connectors of Fans shelf (see Fig. 93. on page 172): (M1) for BATT.A (M4) for BATT.B As depicted in Fig. 163. on page 312, both BATT.A and BATT.B voltages are distributed to both FANS ASSEMBLED units. Inside each FANS ASSEMBLED unit, as depicted in Fig. 164. on page 313, there are two power supply units (one receiving BATT.A power supply voltage, the other receiving BATT.B power supply voltage) from which, diodedecoupled, power supply is distributed to the four fans of the assembly.
g)
Power Supply distribution in the 1650SMC (ADM) shelf Please make reference to 1650SMC specific documentation (see para.18.2.2.2 on page 471).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 284 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Select by ECT FPGA HDB3 unprotected 1x2Mb/s from Access Area NRZ Protected 1x2Mb/s from Service 9 1 9
03
RRA
SRS RFCOH
1
5.4 Baseband subsystem
5.4.1 Interconnection general block diagrams
955.203.292 Q
STM1
O/E
RST
MOD
IF to TR
DCCR 5.1 Mb
The RFCOH and one WST can be protected only two channels
From RRA 2/8/9
5.1 Mb
F QB3 PIO Switch logic N+1
SC SERVICE
DCCR
Protected second WST use with Modem/ RRA Protected 1x2Mb/s in future release EOW 64 Kb DSI,MC,ATPC
DCCR 5.1 Mb
5.1 Mb
STM1
The following Fig. 147. and Fig. 148. show the unit interconnection block diagram respectively for Tx side and Rx side configurations, with regard to the transmitted/received signals and the internal signal and message exchange.
Fig. 147. Block diagram of Up to 7+1 Terminal configuration Tx side
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
O/E
MUX RFCOH
RST
MOD
IF 0 to TR0
RRA Stby
Ktx FPGA Select by ECT
HDB3 unprotected 1x2Mb/s from Access Area NRZ Protected 1x2Mb/s from Service
285 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Select by ECT FPGA HDB3 unprotected 1x2Mb/sto Access Area NRZ Protected 1x2Mb/s to Service
03 9 9 1
955.203.292 Q
RRA DEM
RFCOH APSE RST O/E
STM1
IF from TR
The RFCOH and one WST can be protected only two channels
5.1 Mb RRA 2/8/9 DCCR 5.1 Mb
Protected second WST Modem/ RRA in future release

Protected 1x2Mb/s Switch logic N+1 DCCR EOW 64 Kb
SC
QB3 PIO
DSI,MC,ATPC 5.1 Mb 0
SERVICE
5.1 Mb
DCCR
Fig. 148. Block diagram of Up to 7+1 Terminal configuration Rx side

IF from TR
3DB 02839 AA AA
DEM
514
RFCOH
MATRIX
RST
O/E
STM1
RRA Stby
HDB3 unprotected 1x2Mb/sto Access Area FPGA Select by ECT NRZ Protected 1x2Mb/s to Service
286 / 514
5.4.2 RRACHANNEL STM1+1WST and STM0+0WST description

RRACHANNEL performs the following main functions: Electrical CMI NRZ and NRZCMI conversion RSOH line side Extraction /Insertion from/to Service Unit DCCR line side Extraction /Insertion from/to Service Unit RFCOH radio side Extraction/insertion from/to Service Unit DCCR radio side Extraction /Insertion from/to Service Unit Unprotected 1*2Mbit WST Insertion/Extraction Hitless Switch Serial BUS (Insertion on parallel wires of Modem/ RRA alarms) On the front of the board the following interfaces are available: the STM1 electrical interface (it is fixed on the board and cannot be extracted) one red led to indicate the card failure On the RRACHANNEL unit it is possible to insert the optical interface module (refer to para.5.4.4 on page 292 for its description). RRACHANNEL description See Fig. 149. on page 288. An electrical CMI /NRZ conversion is performed with LOS input alarm generation in Tx section. In the receive section the complementary operations are performed. The RRA uses two ASICs: one implementing: the Input/Output RRA Section (Regeneration Termination Adaptation according to G783) and the Hitless switch, performing the RPS (Radio Protection Switching) function the other, implementing: the RFCOH Insertion/Extraction function and the unprotected 1*2Mbit WST Insertion/Extraction function. All these functions are bidirectional. Delay cells, placed in TX sides, compensate the static delays resulting from the different paths of the two signals. The delay can be set with one bit step in the range 0 to 256 bits. Delay cells, placed in RX side, compensate the static delays resulting from the different paths of the two signals. The static delay equalization is obtained by means an automatic procedure to facilitate the approach during field installation. At RX side, whenever both paths are aligned, the phase comparator generates an OK command, indicating that a switching operation can be performed. The Switch command comes from the logic switch placed on the service board. Inside the ASIC, the loopback connections are present, as described in the Equipment Control Subsystem description (see para.5.2.1.2.2 on page 226). The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) is managed by the ASIC.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The alarms, commands, and every other information regarding the communication with System controller are organized in the registers of SPI and converted by Microcontroller in Can 0 BBBus. The FPGA download uses Can 1 BB bus.
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 287 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
DCCR RSOH Equalizer CMI/NRZ SEL
TCXO
03
RFCOH Vcxo A
vcxo
To RRASTBY
delay
955.203.292 Q
38.800 Mhz
Signal input
Electrical STM1
LOS input
Switch Optical
ASIC
NRZ+CK MUX MUX RX RX TX TX
2 * 2Mbit WST
To modem RFCOH Delay 256 bits 0256 To modem RFCOH TX TX

Loopback only local
RST RST
NRZ Loopback only local

NRZ
Optical STM1 Optical Interface

loopback loopback G.A CERBERO
.
2 * 2Mbit WST
RFCOH RFCOH
NRZ+CK
DEMUX A.L.S TX delay PhasePhase comparcompar
TCXO
DEMUX TX
RX
RST
RST RX
ElasticElastic memmem . Delay Delay 0256 32bit 32bit 256 0 Elastic Elastic mem mem . 32bit 32bit
RX From Modem
38.88 Mhz 38.88 Mhz
CK
NRZ CK
From Modem
Missing
SEL 155.520 Mhz Pat KRn Ok Bit Kofin 38.88 Mhz From RRASTBY DCCR RSOH Ok
vcxo
vcxo
WST1 FAIL Switch LOS_ R RFCOH NRZ 2Mbit WST protected. From/to Service KAIS 12 RRA MISSING
Fig. 149. RRACHANNEL block diagram SPI NRZ/HDB3

68HC012
TX fail /degrade (only optical)version
Red led WST1 LOS Parallel wire alarms

RRA ALARMS RRA ALARMS
3DB 02839 AA AA
can
514 Can 1BB Can 0BB Serial Bus To Service
Parallel Serial Fast alarms
HDB3 1 * 2Mbit WST unprotected. Parallel alarms from Modem
288 / 514
5.4.3 RRASTANDBY STM1+1WST and STM0+0WST description

The RRASTBY unit performs the following main functions: Electrical CMI NRZ and NRZCMI conversion RSOH and DCCR line side Extraction /Insertion to/ from Service Board RFCOH radio side Insertion/Extraction to/from Service Board TX/RX distributor Switch of the reference signal Unprotected 1*2Mbit WST Insertion/Extraction
In N+0 configuration there are two possibilities: 1) 2) RRASTBY unit forced to be used as RRA unit Use RRA unit instead of RRASTBY
On the front of the board the following interfaces are available: the STM1 electrical interface (it is fixed on the board and cannot be extracted) a onedigit display to indicate the number of the channel protected (1... 9) one red led to indicate the card failure On the RRACHANNEL unit it is possible to insert the optical interface module (refer to para.5.4.4 on page 292 for its description). RRASTBY description See Fig. 150. on page 291. An electrical CMI /NRZ conversion is performed with LOS input alarm generation. In the receive section the complementary operations are performed. The RRASTBY uses an ASIC and a FPGA: one implementing: the Input/Output RRA Section (Regeneration Termination Adaptation according to G783) and the Hitless switch, performing the RPS (Radio Protection Switching) function the other, implementing: the RFCOH Insertion/Extraction function and the unprotected 1*2Mbit WST Insertion/Extraction function. All these functions are bidirectional. Delay cells, placed in TX sides, compensate the static delays resulting from the different paths of the two signals. The delay can be set with one bit step in the range 0 to 256 bits. Delay cells, placed in RX side, compensate the static delays resulting from the different paths of the two signals. The static delay equalization is obtained by means an automatic procedure to facilitate the approach during field installation. The Mux insert one of nine streams (38.88Mbit/s) from RRA 1 to RA 9. From Switch Logic the unit receives the Keta command that selects, by MUX, the transmit channel to be paralleled toward the standby path.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 289 / 514
At RX side the unit receives a 155 Mbit stream from RFCOH section (this signal comes from standby demodulator) and sends it by splitter to the respective RRA1/RRA9 unit.
Inside the RRASTBY there are the loopback connections, as described in the Equipment controller sub system chapter. The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) is managed by the ASIC. The alarms, commands, and every other information regarding the communication with System controller are organized in the registers of SPI and converted by Microcontroller in Can 0 BBBus. The FPGA download uses Can 1 BB bus.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 290 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
From RRA1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9 DCCR KOP
FPGA
Delay 256 0
RSOH 38.800 Mhz
LOS_RIFn
03
Equalizer CMI/NRZ
Electrical STM1 SEL

TCXO
Delay 0256 Vcxo A
955.203.292 Q Switch Optical Signal I/O NRZ+CK

MUX RX TX ASIC RST TX delay RX
Phase compar Elasticmem Delay 0256 32bit Elasticmem . 32bit
LOS input
. TX 1 * 2Mbit WST RST
RFCOH
To modem NRZ Loopback only local
loopback
Optical STM1 Optical NRZ+CK

. DEMUX
A.L.S
RFCOH
RX
Interface
NRZ CK From modem
Missing
TCXO
vcxo
SEL 155.520 Mhz RSOH
38.88 vcxo Mhz
38.88 Mhz
LOS_ R RFCOH Switch Red led RRA CARD fail
Fig. 150. RRA STANDBY block diagram
TX fail/degrade (only optical version)
FPGA
SPLITTER FPGASCIARON KAIS 12
To RRA1..RRA9
3DB 02839 AA AA
Serial Fast alarms Serial
SPI to ASIC & FPGA
NRZ 2Mbit WST protected. From/to Service RRA MISSING
514
68HC012
Fast alarms
RRASTBY ALARMS
SeeTable RRASTBY DATA ALARMS
NRZ/HDB3
1 * 2Mbit WST unprotected. Parallel wire alarms RRASTBY ALARMS
can
Can 1BB
Can 0 BB
Serial BusTo Service FPGA Parallel alarms from Modem HDB3 1 * 2Mbit WST unprotected.
291 / 514
5.4.4 STM1 optical module description

See Fig. 71. on page 148 (physical view) and Fig. 151. on page 292 (block diagram). The STM1 optical module is the optical physical interface for the STM1 cards. Different types are available according to the connector type, fibre and optical power range. Each module contains two optical components (Tx and Rx), two level adapters, the remote inventory and the ALSrestart pushbutton. The RX optical component converts the 155.52 Mb/s STM1 optical signal into electrical, recoveries the clock, detects the LOS alarm. The TX optical component converts the electrical signal (data & clock) into optical, detects the Laserfailure and Laserdegrade alarms. Receives the Lasershutdown command from the controller and the ALSrestart command from a front pushbutton.
OPTICAL INPUT
EDR Rx Opt. Module ECKR Level Adapter
DATA RX CLOCK RX
LOS
EDT ECT OPTICAL OUTPUT Tx Opt. Module Level Adapter
DATA TX CLOCK TX
Laser Fail Laser deg. Laser Shutdown ALSRestart o o Remote GND Inventory Rinv TO CAN BUS
OPTICAL MODULE
Fig. 151. STM1 optical module block diagram
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 292 / 514
5.4.5 128QAM MODEM STM1 1WST and STM0 0WST description

The modem performs the following main functions: Terminal / repeater Modulator Terminal / repeater Demodulator XPIC / Base Band Combiner
On the front of the board the following interfaces are available: Demodulator first IF input Second IF input XPIC or IF diversity Third IF input XPIC from cross polar receiver (has to be utilized when reuse and diversity are used contemporaneously) IF Modulator Output
The second and third IF input are associated to optional baby boards. One red led is also present to indicate the MODEM card fail. Modem description In a single ASIC the following parts are implemented: MLC code and decoder, Mapping 128 QAM, Digital filter, BSE, FSE, XPIC and Base Band combiner. The main functions are described in the following, according to MODEM block diagram (see Fig. 152. on page 296): I/O The input/output interface, composed by NRZ signal and CK signal, is internal interface. The signals come from/to RRA unit / RRA STBY or DROP in repeater configuration, no external access is available. The input/output signal is converted in four parallel streams; because of different transmission capacities planned, the streams have, accordingly, different rates. MLC code error The MLC 6,5/7 coding scheme employs a set of binary codes of decreasing Hamming distance combined with nested signal constellations of increasing Euclidean distance. Each code selects one of the two subsets into which the corresponding constellation level is portioned. In this way a more efficient use of redundancy is possible, since more powerful codes protect points a low Euclidean distance, while less powerful codes are used for points at larger Euclidean distance. The coding scheme uses both convolutional and blocks code. The convolutional codes are the powerful ones in the scheme, while the block codes is a simple parity check. The first level code/decoder convolutional is obtained by Viterbi decoder for the code 2/3 The second level code /decoder convolutional works with an other Viterbi for the code 7/8 The Third level has a Wagner decoder for code 24,23 To reduce the effects of burst errors due to the convolutional code, a suitable interleaving technique has been implemented. The structure of the interleaving is based on the introduction of distinct delay chains on the parallel signal stream. The two signals, the in phase channel and the quadrature channel, after MLC code QAM mapping they are sent at 1/T frequency to a 36 taps digital shaping filter. The two filtered signals come out from the ASIC at 2/T frequency. ASIC output signals are converted into analog signals by two D/A converters (10 bits) and, then, a Butterworth filter (7 poles) filters them.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 293 / 514
First IF/BB Side demodulation First IF (140 MHz) signal (from main Transceiver) is BB converted by means of two mixers that are controlled by a carrier recovery circuit. Converted signal is, then, filtered by two Butterworth analog filters that have to guarantee proper NFD for different modulation formats (poles number =9, cutoff frequency fco=0.55 0.65/T). Two A/D converters sample filters out coming signals. Second IF and third IF A baby board called second IF and third IF carry out the same function of the first IF main. Second IF is applied from diversity or cross polar signal. When diversity and copolar are contemporaneously used, a third IF input is connected to crosspolar main receiver. Clock recovery A Gardner synchronizer that controls a VCXO, which provides a sampling signal at 2/T frequency, performs clock recovery. Gardner algorithm is implemented in ASIC Modem Equalizer cable for space diversity system
1IF Maim
Delay 1
The delays adjustment is Self acting by ECT
2IF diversity Delay 2
3 IF cross Main 0 Delay 3
Every IF can be delayed a maximum 7x Ts/2 at Ts/2 step , compensate the static delays resulting from the different paths of the two signals diversity. An automatic procedure by ECT set the difference of the delays respective First and Second IF. There is not automatic procedure for delay of the third IF.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 294 / 514
BB/IF Side modulation Two IF (140 MHz) inquadrature carriers are modulated by the two filtered signals by means of two balanced mixers. Then, modulated carriers are summed in order to generate a 128 QAM CROSSmodulated signal.
Equalizer (FSE/DFE) Into ASIC are implemented a synchronous equalizer (BSE Baud Spaced Equalizer), and a Fractionally Spaced Equalizer (FSE). FSE consists of a dual structure FIR filter and two mixers. Filtering section is 4D structured, (i.e. it consists of four 19 taps filters), DFE consist of four 1 tap decision. XPIC When the frequency reuse is requested the XPIC cancellers the crosspolar interference. On each way in dual polarization the IF signal is baseband converted, filtered and sampled by A/D converters at 2/T frequency. Samples taken at t=KT are distinguished from those taken at t=(KT+T/2) by XPIC S/P converters by means of 1/T frequency clock signal. XPIC is adapted by means of error signals coming from equalizer and its central coefficient is left spare for phase errors recovering. XPIC output signal is sent to equalizer way adder. XPIC way ASIC receives algorithm switch control signal and deep fading reset signal from equalizer way ASIC. Base band Combiner Space diversity is based on the simultaneous reception of the transmitted signal at two vertically separated antennas, its effectiveness depend on the fact that the correlation between the two fields is low if the antennas are well separated. The baseband combiner, which operates on the coherently demodulated signals is based on the minimization if the mean square error at the decision device. The scheme is the same of XPIC with these difference: the central coefficient is constrained, we have one Clock recovery by a Gardner synchronizer for each IF signal. An estimation of the power of the signal at the output of the two FSE is calculated. The clock that has the grater power is selected Gardner algorithm is implemented in ASIC Modem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 295 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
VCXO A Los_M Data/ ck S/P S/P 90 + FIR QFIR Q D/A 140Mhz
XO
03
Electronic fuses interleaverinterleaver , Elastic Rate Rate encoderMLCencoderMLC , store adapter mapper adapter mapper FIR I D/A IF out Mod Squelch Main
DELAY DELAY DROP DROP
+5.3 +3.45 v
955.203.292 Q
Mir Pseudo Pseudo random random A/D + VCXO B 140Mhz Decoder ElasticElastic P/S DecisionDecision MLC memory SUM
From RRA or RRASTBY or DROP
IF MAIN
vco T/2
T/2
Delay Delay and and Equal
to RRA or RRASTBY or DROP

Data/ck
DROP MISSING
DEM loss
90 A/D gardnergardner
Card fail,missing and Remote Inventory
VCXO C
Mhz
MODEM CARD fail

Red led Modem Alarms
2 Squelch
Clock select
A/D A/D gardner gardner 90 90 A/D A/D Delay and and EQUAL. CorrCorr .
B&W vcos TO vcos TO carriercarrier
Parallel wire alarms
Fig. 152. MODEM block diagram

T/2
T/2
Second IF
Second IF loss A/D A/D
Agent Modem
3DB 02839 AA AA
90 90 A/D A/D
514
Card fail,missing and Remote Inventory
spi Baby boards alarms
ALARMS, SQUELCH CONTROL
Third IF
ASIC
68HC12 can
3 Squelch Can 0BB
Third IF loss
296 / 514
5.4.6 SERVICE and ADDITIONAL VOICE unit description

The Service Terminal performs the following main functions: N.B. Insertion/Extraction and termination of RSOH bytes Rerouting of RSOH bytes on RFCOH bytes Protection and management of RFCOH bytes System service channels and telephone services management I/O service channels and telephone services I/O DSI, ATPC, MC bytes, DCCR Switch logic N+1, 1+1, 1:1 I/O protected WST channel Switch and SW logic for WST signals The RFCOH bytes and 2 x 2Mbit/s WST can be protected only on the two channels selected by ECT from the couples shown in the following table: Tab. 57. Channels protectable for RFCOH bytes and 2 x 2Mbit/s WST N+1 Terminal 0,1 0,9 1,2 8,9 1,9 2 X (4+1) WEST (N.B.) 0,1 0,4 1,2 3,4 1,4 2 X (4+1) EAST (N.B.) 9,8 9,5 8,7 6.5 8,5
N.B.
Configurations not available in first release
On the front of the board are provided the following connectors and led: Phone Jack (EOW ) Reset button One red led that indicates engaged line One green led that indicates free line One red led that indicates SERVICE card fail One display that indicates the protected Rx channel One yellow led indicating the manual operation of switch logic N+1 Input /output 2 x 2Mbit protected WST
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 297 / 514
5.4.6.1 Service Channels The characteristics of service channels are given in para.6.2 on page 316. The service channels (see Fig. 153. on page 299) are managed by a FPGA able to provide on external interfaces (programmable by ECT) the RSOH bytes from/to line side channel (channel 0 to 9) and also RFCOH bytes protected in 1+1 from RRA units. Eight channels are be provided towards Users. In particular: One (omnibus channels on E1 byte), one telephone jack and three analog party lines 3 x 64 kbit/s V11 or 2 x 64 kbit/s and 1 x128 kbit/s , V11 (Sw configurable for connection to 1 or 2 bytes) 3 x 64 kbit/s G703 1 x 9600 kbit/s V24/V28 Data channel
The service unit manages a TPH byte only to/from the RFCOH byte protected in 1+1 or to/from external connection. The desk telephone TPH, by HD selection, can be sent either into RFCOH byte or toward ADM in format G703 (see block diagram). E1, F1, D1D3 bytes are always accessible both at radio and line side, while a maximum of 5 bytes line and radio side may be accessed chosen between the remaining RSOH bytes. At radio side, the service channels (comprehensive of DCCR, monitoring channels, ATPC, DSI bytes) are dropped/inserted in 1+1 protected mode (splitted at Tx side and switched at RX side). The Tx service alarm (ATL RFCOH) is remotized by means of monitoring channel (with 1+1 protection) to be used with ATL and HBER remote alarms as minor switching criteria, while demodulator alarm and HBER alarm are considered major switching criteria. By means of a matrix function it is possible: to address to service the lineside user interfaces RSOH bytes from different RRA and/or RFCOH bytes (7 bytes) on RRA used for 1+1 protection; to reroute RSOH bytes to RFCOH and viceversa.
The alarms, commands, and every other information regarding the communication with System controller are organized in the registers of SPI and converted by Microcontroller in Can 0 BBBus. For the detailed description of RSOH, RFCOH and DCCR management, please make reference to para.5.2.4 on page 245 (Signal Management). 5.4.6.2 2Mbit Way side traffic See Fig. 153. on page 299. The FPGA, after HDB3/NRZ conversion, splits the 2Mbit/s asynchronous digital stream. The two channels (N.B.) are inserted/extracted to/from a selected couple of RRA units among the those specified in Tab. 57. on page 297. To minimize the errors during the switching operation a make before break switch is adopted and particular care is taken in switching logic. N.B. In first release, only one channel can be used (see Fig. 69. on page 145).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 298 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Open on 1st SERVICE unit in 4+0/4+1 E/W configuration
03 Dip switch
SERVICE CARD fail
DCCR 192kbit
Radio Radio side Rerouting A Rerouting A side
DEMUX DEMUX MATRIX MATRIX
RFSOHRX/TX # 59
# 04
955.203.292 Q
Lineside side Line
FPGA
K RR
K RR
RFCOHRX/TX # 0 RFCOHRX/TX # 1 RFCOHRX/TX # 2 RFCOHRX/TX # 8 RFCOHRX/TX # 9 To /from RRA 0/1/2/8/9 Like RFCOH frame Red led
MATRIX MATRIX
E1 E1
MUXMUX
FPGA NTONI E COMBO
M U X // D E M U X
I/O Line
I/O TPH Hd command
NRZ G703 NRZ RZ NRZ
I/O Radio
DSI,ATPC,MC
DCCR 192kbit
SPI service
68HC012
Additional
TPH TPH
ALARMS, CONTROL
AIS I/O Insertion

CAN 0 BB
V
COMBO
ANA ANA LOG LOG
NRZ, CK, 64, SYNC
Fig. 153. SERVICE block diagram

V28 V11 G703
Out Loudspeaker
WST Los 1and 2
SERVICE MISSING
3DB 02839 AA AA
EOW RJ11
To M190 BB Access Area
DUAL LINE INTERFACE 1 To ADM 2x2 Mb/s
CAN 1 BB
514
1x 9600Kb/s
x Party Lines 3 x 64 kb/s 3 x 64 kb/s TPHTPH Party 33 x Line 1x 64 Kb/s 1x 64 Kb/s
299 / 514
5.4.6.3 Switch Logic N+1 In, N+1 configuration, this function performs the hitless switch, by processing the propagation alarms coming from demodulators. The Tx and Rx functions, respectively in station A and station B of the link, must be connected by 64 Kb/s (DSI channel) to exchange information for Tx signal parallel before RX switch. The 64 Kbit signal is processed in Switch logic. The Switch logic N+1 is carried out inside FPGA and performs the following functions (see Fig. 154. herebelow and Fig. 155. on page 301): gets the switching controls from the regular and standby channels determines the weights of various channels: priorities and simulations protects and releases the channels in N+1 configuration, using two service units in 4+1 E/W configurations (this latter function not used in current release) performs the lookout and incoming inhibit manages the freezing operations manages the manual forcing at the receive side.
Modem 1 Parallel alarms
DAT A
T O
MD 1 Missing
SYNC CK RRA 1
E S C
MD 9 Missing Modem 9
RRA 1 Missing
Parallel alarms
DAT A
U N I T
Modem MD 0 Missing 0 RRA 9
SYNC CK
RRA9 Missing
Parallel alarms DAT A SYNCH CK RRA Stby
RRAStby Missing FPGA RRA n Missing

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ENTONI
SERVICE
Fig. 154. Switch logic N+1
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 300 / 514
The following figure shows the input/output of the switch logic: J=0 to 9 channel units n=1 to 9 channel units
FPGA
Switch commands
Agent Service FAST SERIAL BUS
SW forcing
Mod FailJ EWj LBERj HBERj SWITCH LOGIC Modem J =0 9 Modem J =09 DEMfailj DemCARD fail j Modem missing j Los Mod j Serial/Parallel RRA fail j Logic Output RRACARD fail j RRA and RRASTBY RRAmissing J=0 Los R side Dem j n=1 LosStbyn OK pat n Ok bit n K_OPMAN Los_ Rifn RRASTBY
DSI 64 kb/s to/from EPLD
KRRA To RRASTBY KOP Korifn To RRA 1/9 KRPS
Yellow led
FROM RRAJ K display RX
Fig. 155. Input/output command signals of the Switch logic
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 301 / 514
5.5 Transceiver subsystem 5.5.1 Interconnection general block diagrams

Please refer to: para.2.4.3.2 on page 53 for an introductive description Tab. 27. on page 156 for the transceiver equipping rules para.3.7.4 on pages 158 thru 167 for the assembly drawings and operative notes.
The transceiver operates from 4 to 13 GHz. Different P/Ns are envisaged according to the operating frequency. Each Radio Transceiver is equipped with the following modules (see Fig. 156. on page 303 for the transceiver configuration without Rx diversity, and Fig. 157. on page 303 for the transceiver configuration with Rx diversity): transmit & service module receiver & IF Rx module (main & diversity) DC/DC converter Local oscillators RX and TX
Fig. 158. on page 304 shows the signals exchanged among Transceiver internal modules. For maintenance and installation purposes each Radio Transceiver unit must be considered as a unique block. A RI (remote inventory) identifies the unit Transceiver, the Local oscillator Tx and the Local oscillator Rx, via software. RI is housed in the service TX. A pin No_missing is available.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 302 / 514
OL TX MON +VB GND VB
DC/DC CONVERTER RI
OL TX
RF TX
RF OUT
RF MON
SERVICE TRX
IF IN Canbus No_missing L.O. Sync .
RI
P
OL RX MON
OL RX RI
RF RX
RX IN
IF OUT
Fig. 156. Functional block diagram of Transceiver without Rx Diversity
OL TX MON +VB GND VB
DC/DC CONVERTER RI
OL TX
RF TX
RF OUT
RF MON
SERVICE TRX
IF IN Canbus No_ missing L.O. Sync .
RI
P
OL RX MON
OL RX RI
RF RX RF RX MAIN RF RX DIV.
RX IN
RX IN IF OUT
IF OUT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
RF RX
Fig. 157. Functional block diagram of Transceiver with Rx Diversity
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 303 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
V Battery
IF
+5V
Canbus
+V Battery
DC/DC
03
RF
+5V 12V PRX Measurement Squelch 4 Bit Remote inventory Manual gain control Manual/Auto RX command OL+/ command
adj +7V +8V 4 Bit control for +7V adj
5.5.2 DC/DC converter module
955.203.292 Q
RX
Main
TX & SERVICE MODULE
IF OL Main MON
OL
OL Diversity
+3.3V +8V +15V 12V Squelch Alarm loss loop Alarm low level 3 Bit dati control 4 Bit Remote inventory
RF
+5V 12V Measurement
Diversity
Squelch 4 Bit Remote inventory
RX
Fig. 158. Signals exchanged among Transceiver internal modules
DC/DC converter receives primary voltage from the shelf backpanel and supplies to Service module the following voltages: +5V, +8V, +7Vmax (digitally adjustable from 4V to 7V). See Fig. 158.
3DB 02839 AA AA
IF
OL TX
OR alarm module
514
Manual gain control Manual/Auto RX command OL+/ command
MON
MW
+3.3V +8V +15V 12V Alarm loss loop Alarm low level 3 Bit dati control 4 Bit Remote inventory
OL
RF
MON
304 / 514
5.5.3 Transmit and Service module

GENERAL Transmit and Service module here described includes the following hardware components (depicted in Fig. 81. on page 159: RT CONTROL AMPLIFIER UP CONVERTER DELAY LINE Fig. 159. herebelow shows the module block diagram. IF input connectors are 75 1.0/2.3 Siemens, microwave output connectors are SMA 50. Coaxial cable connects Tx output to branching filters. Return loss of TX output is guaranteed by dropin isolator. Transmit & service module performs the following functions: management of all transceiver functions by mean of service module IF amplification upconversion of IF input signal to RF frequency linear microwave amplification
+5V MW +8V Power. red +8V +7V adj 4 Bit for 7V +5V +3,3V RXmain +5V 12V OL+/command Squelch Remoteinventory Manual gain control Manual/auto +5V 12V +8V +15V OL TX +8V +3,3V +15V 12V Alarm loss loop Alarm low level 3 bit dati control Remote . inv In IF IFblock OL RX +8V +3,3V IF detectorlevel OL+/OL command +15V 12V Alarm loss loop Alarm low level 3 bit dati control Remote . inv Squelch Drain fet finale PTX meas . Temp . Meas . Attenuator . com
DC/DC +5V
RX div . +5V 12V OL+/ command Squelch Remote inventory Manual gain control Manual/auto
Can bus
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 159. Transmit and Service module block diagram
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 305 / 514
RT CONTROL RT control performs the following functions: DC power distribution of the following voltages to different modules: TX amplifier : 12V, +5V, +8V, +15V ,+7Vmax. RX module: 12V, +5V. OL module : 12V, +3.3V, +8V, +15V Gain and output power of amplifying chain control Cable losses recovering Input IF level control OL+/ for upconverter setting
A microprocessor controls all the functions of Transceiver, besides it holds a Remote Inventory made with an E@PROM. Controlled functions are: Tx module linearization and temperature compensation of transmitted power. warning management protection vs overtemperature management of BER measure management of ATPC function with power consumption control setting of Tx Pout . ON/OFF by software command. Selection of LO+ or LO condition.
In Tx module the signals incoming/outgoing from microprocessor are: RF detector level output RF Attenuator command series RF Attenuator command parallel PTx Measurement Temperature Measurement Manual/Automatic TX command Tx Temperature alarm IF Tx detector level OR alarm module 12V +8V +15V +7V (digitally adjustable) OL+/OL command Presence reference negative voltage Switch command for +8V ATPC control LO module warning management. Selection of frequency. ON/OFF by software command. Selection of Master/Slave condition (for RxLO only)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In LO module the signals incoming/outgoing from microprocessor are: Alarm loss loop TX Alarm low level TX Dati
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 306 / 514
Rx module
warning management. linearization and temperature compensation of field received indication. Selection of master/slave condition. Selection of LO+ or LO condition. ON/OFF by software command. squelching.
In Rx module the signals incoming/outgoing from microprocessor are: PRx Measurement Manual/Automatic RX command Squelch command Manual gain command OL+/OL command DC/DC converter warning management. voltage control with ATPC command for power consumption reduction.
AMPLIFIER, UP CONVERTER AND DELAY LINE The block diagram of upconversion and amplification unit is shown in Fig. 160. herebelow. REVEALED
xn
T
IF Vatt
MONITORED
OUT RF
LO
n = 2 for C band 4 for 11 & 13 GHz Fig. 160. Block diagram of upconversion and amplification unit 1) IF TX The IF amplifier line accepts signal from 120 to 160 MHz with an input matched to 75 W. It recovers cable losses (up to 30 m), therefore the incoming signal level can change from 12 dBm to 4 dBm ( standard input level is: 5 dBm). IF signal is splitted and used to drive the circuits of Power consumption reduction. These circuits include a delay line to synchronize the envelope resulting command with RF signal on final Fet drain. The output IF signal is held constant with an AGC circuit and with a power splitter 2 way 90_ is possible to select L.O. condition ( USB or LSB).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 307 / 514
2)
UPCONVERSION The mixer is implemented in MMIC technology developed in Alcatel. In the same package are placed an SSB mixer, with four IF quadrature input signals, and a x2 frequency multiplier. The IF input level is 11 dBm +0 / 1 dB, and LO power is 15 dBm 1 dB For 11 and 13 GHz frequency band the multiplying factor is x4, obtained with a third MMIC placed in the same package. On the same substrate and using the same technologies ,the RF chain is completed with an active variable attenuator and a power amplifier, both realized in MMIC technology.
3)
LINEAR MICROWAVE AMPLIFICATION The RF output of upconverter is feeded into the input of power amplifier. This is realized with two discrete transistor (GaAs Mosfets internally matched). Final Fets have an output power of 4/12 W. At the output, before the dropin isolator, a double microstrip directional coupler will provide two signals, one for monitoring and one for AGC detector. The circuits are implemented on a duroid metalbacked substrate.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 308 / 514
5.5.4 Receive & IF Rx module

GENERAL
RF IN
T
Vatt IF
n = 2 for C band 4 for 11 & 13 GHz Fig. 161. Block diagram of Receive & IF Rx module Receive & IF Rx module performs the following functions: low noise amplification of RF incoming signal signal variable attenuation following the incoming signal variations downconversion to IF signal IF amplification.
xn
LO
The RF input of the module is connected to the branching by coaxial cable with SMA connectors/50 .The return losses are guaranteed by dropin isolator. The connectors for IF signals are 75 1.0/2.3 Siemens. FRONT END The RF incoming signal is amplified by a first stage ultra low noise HEMT amplifier. A variable attenuator, driven by the AGC voltage, allows a protection against up fading propagation. A second stage contains a GaAs MMIC amplifier. The downconversion from RF to IF frequency is performed by the same micromodule used in upconversion function. It has four IF outputs signal in quadrature. A MMIC multiplier x2 doubles the L.O frequency (x4 in 11 GHz version). The LO power is 15 dBm 1 dB. The four outputs are connected with hybrid 90_ and 180_ to create IF signal ; by properly connecting hybrid 90_ is possible to select LSB or USB. IF Rx IF block amplifier contains two attenuators for AGC, controlled from a filtered detector. Then a IF filter reduces the signal level of adjacent and alternate channels. The IF section supplies alarms for low field, for RFRx failure and a measure of received signal level. Another function controlled by IF section is the squelch of RX for low fields
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 309 / 514
5.5.5 Local Oscillator module

GENERAL LO scheme for 9600LSY application includes the following functions: TX LO module Rx LO module, selectable master or slave option for H/V reuse applications. A block diagram of the module is shown in the next Fig. 162.
Master Slave All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
Lock Alarm
Power Alarm
Switch Position
Output Power Detection
Logic
Ext. VCO Power Detection Diversity Output
Switch Position Lock Detect
VCO
Switch
X2 Multiplier
Splitter
Main Output
VCO Output External VCO
Fig. 162. Block diagram of Local Oscillator module
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 310 / 514
TRANSMITTER LO MODULE The module houses on the same multi layer board the Synthesizer, the Switch and the Multiplier. It has two RF outputs port, named main and diversity and a monitor VCO output, moreover, for the synchronization in master slave configuration, it makes available its VCO signal and can accept an external VCO signal. 1) Synthesizer The synthesizer is a single narrow band loop filter with a BiCMOS technology IC used for PLL function, a low phase noise VCO and a 2 order active loop filter. The signal is obtained locking the VCO frequency with a stable frequency reference TCXO. At the output theres RFIC in order to achieve a good isolation from external circuits. The Synthesizer makes available the Lock Detection status. Multiplier The multiplier is composed by monolithic input buffer, a BJT active X2 multiplier, bandpass filter, RFIC amplifier and power splitter. To avoid dangerous emission, the output power is delivered only when the VCO is locked. The unit makes available the output power detection External VCO Input Power 5 dBm + 5 dBm Master/Slave Configuration The Transmitter LO Module can run only in Master configuration, at the start up the Switch is connected at the external VCO and only when its VCO is locked, the Switch must connect the internal VCO
2)
3)
RECEIVER LO MODULE 1) Synthesizer As that of Transmitter LO Module Multiplier As that of Transmitter LO Module Master/Slave Configuration In Master configuration the LO runs with its internal VCO . At the start up, the Switch is connected at the external VCO and there is no power delivered at the output ports; when its VCO is locked, the Switch must connect the internal VCO and give power at the outputs. This setting does not to be modified by alarm during the running condition. A buffer (Frequency Reuse kit module) is present between the output of the external VCO and the MASTER/SLAVE input, with the aim of increasing insulation. In Slave configuration the LO runs with external VCO. At the start up, the Switch is connected at the external VCO, after the start up time, if is not detected the VCO external power, the Switch must connect the internal VCO. During the running condition, in the case of lack of VCO external power, the switch must connect the internal VCO; when the power of external VCO is back, the Switch must reconnect the external VCO.
2)
3)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 311 / 514
5.6 Fans subsystem

The following Fig. 163. shows the block diagram of a fans shelf equipped with two FANS ASSEMBLED units. Fig. 164. on page 313 shows the block diagram of one FANS ASSEMBLED unit. Please refer to: para.2.4.6 on page 61 for an introductive description para.3.9 on pages 169 thru 173 for equipping rules, assembly drawings and operative notes point f ) on page 284 for the power supply description.
The FANS ASSEMBLED unit includes a microprocessor to manage together with the System Control subsystem, through the CAN bus: the Remote Inventory its logical address according to the position of the DIPSwitches present on the Fanshelf front panel the unit alarms (internal PSU failure, individual Fan alarms).
FAN B
FAN D
FAN B
FAN D
FAN A
0/1
FAN C
FAN A
FAN C
0/1
LED
CAN BATTERYA
LED
CAN TERMINATION BATTERYB
Fig. 163. Fan subsystem block diagram
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 312 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
P RI
FAN ALARM
PSU ALARM
CAN
FAN A
FAN B
PSU
BATT. B BATT. A
PSU
LED FAN C FAN D
Fig. 164. FANS ASSEMBLED unit block diagram
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
313 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
314 / 514
6 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 6.1 Introduction

This chapter describes the technical characteristics of the 9600LSY. Data indicated in the handbook must be considered as standard values Data indicated in the contract must be considered as guaranteed values This chapter is organized as follows: System characteristics General Characteristics Power supply characteristics Mechanical characteristics Transceiver characteristics Regenerator and Modem characteristics Modem XPIC & Combiner (XPIC STM1 only) Regenerator Power consumption (Regenerator only) Branching interfaces Protections on page 316, including: on page 317 on page 323 on page 323 on page 324 on page 326, including: on page 326 on page 328 on page 329 on page 331 on page 332 on page 332 on page 333 on page 333 on page 334 on page 335 on page 337 on page 338
Environmental characteristics on page 333, including: General characteristics Mechanically active substances ETS 300019 Class 3.2: partly Temperature controlled locations ETS 300019 Class 3.1: Temperaturecontrolled locations Storage Transportation Optical Safety on page 339
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 315 / 514
6.2 System Characteristics

GENERAL NOTES ON FOLLOWING TABLES: t * May support both STM1 and STM0 transmission Tolerance: 0.5 dB at ambient temperature; 1.5 dB in temperature range 5 C 55C
Points A A and C C according to what defined in the relevant ETSI specification: A

TX RF TX FILTER
TX BRANCHING
TX FEEDER
A
RX
RF RX FILTER
RX BRANCHING
RX FEEDER
Fig. 165. ETSI Reference points
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 316 / 514
6.2.1 General characteristics

EQUIPMENT 9640 LSY 9647 LSY 9662 LSY 9667 LSY 9674 LSY 9681 LSY 9611 LSY 9613 LSY
Version Mechanical practice Station type Configuration Space diversity Transmission capacity (2 x STM1 with frequency reuse with STM1 only) 1x STM1 2x STM1 (with freq. reuse) 1x STM1 2x STM1 (with freq. reuse) 1x STM1 2x STM1 (with freq. reuse)
INDOOR See para.2.4.2 page 51 Regenerator Terminal Wireless Multiservice Node (one side or two sides) N+0 / N+1 YES 1x STM1 2x STM1 (with freq. reuse) 1x STM1 2x STM1 (with freq. reuse) 1x STM0 1x STM1 2x STM1 (with freq. reuse) 1x STM0 1x STM1 2x STM1 (with freq. reuse) 1x STM1 2x STM1 (with freq. reuse) 1x STM0
User interfaces
155.520 Mb/s (STM1) 139.264 Mb/s (PDH) 3 x 34.368 Mbit/s 3 x 44.736 Mbit/s 63 x 2.048 Mbit/s 155.520 Mb/s (STM1)
Electrical ITUT Rec. G.703 Electrical ITUT Rec. G.703 Electrical ITUT Rec. G.703 Electrical ITUT Rec. G.703 Electrical ITUT Rec. G.703 Optical ITUT Rec. G.957 G.958
Auxiliary channels
STM 1 : 1 x 2 Mbit/s WST in RFCOH STM0 : no WST Omnibus voice channel (E1) DTMF (rec. Q23) 600 Ohm Tx 0 dB, Rx 4 dB, selective call. 3 x 64 Kb/s V11 or 2x 64 Kb/s + 1x 128 Kb/s (SW configurablecontradirectional) 3 x 64 Kb/s G.703 (codirectional) 1 x 9.6 Kb/s RS 232 TMN channel ( D1D3 regenerator terminal D4 D12 WMSN ) voice frequency party line (E1) (Four wire bal. , 600 Ohm, level 3 dB 1 voice frequency (point to point only) Digital party line for extension 64 Kb/s, G. 703 code Output to loudspeaker 400 mW, 4 Ohm Telephone set driver for TPH desk 600 Ohm, Tx 0 dB, Rx 4 dB.
Service channels
LHR Transit time STM1 STM0

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
TBD TBD Fig. 171. on page 343
Tx Spectrum (C) table continues
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 317 / 514
EQUIPMENT
9640 LSY
9647 LSY
9662 LSY
9667 LSY
9674 LSY
9681 LSY
9611 LSY
9613 LSY
Spectrum Scrambler/ Descrambler STM1 STM0 MODULATION FREQUENCY BAND [GHz] (Channel plan)
221.31 2201 128 QAM
3.64.2 (F.635)
4.45.0 (F.1099)
5.96.4 (F.383)
6.47.1 (F.384)
7.47.7 F.385 annex1) 7.17.7 (F.385 annex3) 7.47.9 (F.385 annex4) t 7.27.6 (F.385 rec.1) t
7.78.3 (F. 386) 8.28.5 (F.386 annex3) t 7.98.4 (annex4) t
10.7 11.7 (F.387)
12.75 13.25 (F.497) t
3.64.2 (F.382)
4.45.0 (Spain)
5.66.2 (OIRT)
3.64.2 (DTI)
3.64.2 (F.635) 3.43.9 (OIRT)
TRANSMITTER OUTPUT POWER (W ATPC) * [dBm] (A)
32,0
32,0
32,0
32,0
32,0
32,0
30,0
28,0
TRANSMITTER OUTPUT POWER (W/O ATPC) * [dBm] (A)
30.0
30.0
30.0
30.0
30.0
30.0
28.0
27.0
table continues
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 318 / 514
EQUIPMENT 1x103 BER TH (A) (Received power) [dBm] STM1
9640 LSY
74,0 typ 73,0 gua
9647 LSY
74,0 typ 73,0 gua
9662 LSY
74,0 typ 73,0 gua
9667 LSY
74,0 typ 73,0 gua
9674 LSY
73,5 typ 72,5 gua
9681 LSY
73,5 typ 72,5 gua
9611 LSY
73,5 typ 72,5 gua
9613 LSY
73,0 typ 72,0 gua
1x103 BER TH (A) (Received power) [dBm] STM0 1x106 BER TH (A) (Received power) [dBm] STM1 1x106 BER TH (A) (Received power) [dBm] STM0 Net System Gain (CC) dB* (with branching losses and with ATPC) STM1 103 1+1 and 3+1 Heterofreq. Net System Gain (CC) dB* (with branching losses and with ATPC) STM1 106 1+1and 3+1 Heterofreq. Max input power at antenna port (Received field [dBm] 103/1010 Background BER (at nominal Prx level) Frequency reuse (XPIC) table continues
72,0 typ 71,0 gua 72,0 typ 71,0 gua
N.A.
78,5 typ 77,5 gua 72,0 typ 71,0 gua 72,0 typ 71,0 gua 71,5 typ 70,5 gua 76,5 typ 75,5 gua
78,5 typ 77,5 gua 71,5 typ 70,5 gua 76,5 typ 75,5 gua
N.A.
78,0 typ 77,0 gua 71,0 typ 70,0 gua 76,0 typ 75,0 gua
71,5 typ 70,5 gua
N.A.
N.A.
98
97.5
100
100.5
98.5
98.5
96
93.5
96
95.5
98
98.5
96.5
96.5
94
91.5
16,0/TBD
1 x 10E13
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
YES
(STM1 only)
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 319 / 514
EQUIPMENT
9640 LSY >50 @ 40 MHz >45 @ 29 MHz
9647 LSY
9662 LSY
9667 LSY
9674 LSY
9681 LSY
9611 LSY
9613 LSY
NFD one adjacent channels (guar) STM1 [dB]
>50 @ 40 MHz
>50 @ 29.65 MHz
>50 @ >45 @ 40 MHz 28 MHz
>50 @ 29.65 MHz
>50 @ 40 MHz
t.b.d.
NFD one adjacent channels (guar) STM0 dB XPD antenna for CCDP application [dB] XPIC filters XPI ratio lockin [dB] XPI ratio lockout [dB] table continues
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
t.b.d.
t.b.d.
N.A.
t.b.d.
38
19 taps 7
= 4
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 320 / 514
EQUIPMENT
9640 LSY
9647 LSY
9662 LSY
9667 LSY
9674 LSY
9681 LSY
9611 LSY
9613 LSY
Behavior vs modulated digital channel interference: cochannel STM1 1*103 Fig. 175. on page 345 cochannel STM1 1*106 cochannel STM0 1*103 N.A. cochannel STM0 1*106 adj.channel STM1 40 MHz 1*103 adj.channel STM1 40 MHz 1*106 adj.channel STM1 30 MHz 1*103 Fig. 177. on page 347 adj.channel STM1 30 MHz 1*106 adj.channel STM0 14 MHz 1*103 N.A. adj.channel STM0 14 MHz 1*106 N.A.
Fig. 175. on page 345
Fig. 175. N.A. pg.345
Fig. 176. N.A. pg.346 N.A.
Fig. 176. N.A. pg.346
Fig. 177. N.A. pg.347
N.A.
Fig. 178. pg.347
table continues
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 321 / 514
EQUIPMENT
9640 LSY
9647 LSY
9662 LSY
9667 LSY
9674 LSY
9681 LSY
9611 LSY
9613 LSY
C/I for 1 dB threshold degrad. @ 10E3 [dB] : cochannel STM1/STM0 adjacent ch. mono lateral STM1 40MHz adjacent ch. mono lateral STM1 30MHz adjacent ch. mono lateral STM0 14 MHz C/I for 1 dB threshold degrad. @ 10E6 [dB]: cochannel STM1/STM0 adjacent ch. mono lateral STM1 40MHz adjacent ch. mono lateral STM1 30MHz adjacent ch. mono lateral STM0 14 MHz C/I dB for Error Free: cochannel STM1/STM0 BER Curve: STM1
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
50
50
N.A.
50
N.A.
N.A.
50
N.A.
29
29
29
N.A.
29
29
N.A.
29
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
TBD
N.A.
TBD
TBD
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
48
48
N.A.
48
N.A.
N.A.
48
N.A.
24
24
24
N.A.
24
24
N.A.
24
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
TBD
TBD
N.A.
TBD
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
Fig. 169. on page 341 Fig. 170. on page 342 Fig. 170. N.A. pg.342
STM0
N.A.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 322 / 514
6.2.2 Power supply characteristics

EQUIPMENT
9640 LSY
9647 LSY
9662 LSY
9667 LSY
9674 LSY
9681 LSY
9611 LSY
9613 LSY
Input battery source
48 to 60 Vdc or 24 Vdc
POWER CONSUMPT. Tolerance $ 10% [W] W/o Sp.Div. (with Sp.Div.) 1+1/2+0 Het. 2+1/3+0 Het. 3+1/4+0 Het. 4+1/5+0 Het. 5+1/6+0 Het. 6+1/7+0 Het. 7+1/8+0 Het. 200 280 350 430 510 590 670 (210) (300) (380) (460) (540) (630) (710)
6.2.3 Mechanical characteristics

EQUIPMENT Rack dimensions [mm] all configurations weight: 1+1 Regen. 3+1 Regen. 9640 LSY 9647 LSY 9662 LSY 9667 LSY 9674 LSY 9681 LSY 9611 LSY 9613 LSY
(l x d x h) 600 x 300 x 2200 TBD TBD
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 323 / 514
6.3 Transceiver characteristics

GENERAL NOTES ON FOLLOWING TABLES: (*) Tolerance: 0.5 dB at ambient temperature; 1.5 dB in temperature range 5 C 55C .
Points A A and C C according to what defined in the relevant ETSI specification (Fig. 165. on page 316) EQUIPMENT 9640 LSY 9647 LSY 9662 LSY 9667 LSY 9674 LSY 9681 LSY 9611 LSY 9613 LSY
Tx output range with ATPC guaranteed. ( A) ( * ) [dBm]
+15 to +32
+15 to +32
+15 to +32
+15 to +32
+15 to +32
+15 to +32
+15 to +30
+15 to +28
Tx output range w/o ATPC (1dB step by SW preset) guaranteed. (A) ( * ) [dB]
+15 to +30
+15 to +30
+15 to +30
+15 to +30
+15 to +30
+15 to +30
+15 to +28
+15 to +27
Max. ATPC Range [dB]
17
17
17
17
17
17
15
13
NF guaranteed [dB] NF Typical [dB] IF freq. [MHz]
2.3 2.0
2.3 2.0
2.5 2.2
2.5 2.2 140
2.8 2.5
2.8 2.5
3.0 2.7
3.5 3.2
Nominal Received level [dBm] IF Nominal input / output level [dBm] L.O. freq. stability (p.p.m.) AGC range [dB] AGC response time [dB/sec.] table continues
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
30 5 1 dB 10 > 60 100
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 324 / 514
EQUIPMENT
9640 LSY
9647 LSY
9662 LSY
9667 LSY
9674 LSY
9681 LSY
9611 LSY
9613 LSY
Transmitted spectrum (Typical) (C) STM1 STM0 ETSI normatives Referred for spectrum mask: Referred class STM1 Referred class STM0
Fig. TBD
ETSI EN 300234, EN 301127, EN 301461 ETSI EN 301216 Compliant with the relevant ETS (EN) specification according to the freq. arrangement Compliant with the relevant ETS (EN) specification according to the freq. arrangement See Fig. 172. on page 344
Spectral lines at symbol rate (dBm) Tx and Rx spurious signals emission IF filter selectivity STM1/STM0 Transceiver power consumption [W] 1+1/2+0 2+1/3+0 3+1/4+0 4+1/5+0 5+1/6+0 6+1/7+0 7+1/8+0
120 180 230 290 350 410 470
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 325 / 514
6.4 Regenerator and Modem characteristics 6.4.1 Modem

EQUIPMENT Modulation type Coding MLC Error corrector Coding gain Radio scrambler/ descrambler Equivalent roll off factor Gross symbol rate [Mbit/s] STM1 STM0 Intermediate modulator frequency [MHz] IF impedance (all modem ports) IF nominal modulator output level [dBm] IF input/output Return Loss (all modem ports) Shaping filter (Tx side) Shaping filter and equalizer (Rx side) Digital filter Demodulation IF demodulator nominal input level [dBm] Post demodulation filter STM1 STM0 table continues 9640 LSY 9647 LSY 9662 LSY 9667 LSY 9674 LSY 9681 LSY 9611 LSY 9613 LSY
128 QAM CROSS 2/3 7/8 2423 MLC 6.5/7 (7.69 % redundancy) TBD 2 7,3 1 0.21
24.458 8.153 140 " 50 ppm
75 Ohm 5 " 1 dB
x 25 dB in the band 140 MHz " 15 MHz
Raised cosine T/2 equaliser ( 19 taps ) 36 taps coherent 5 (+1 to 6 dB)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Butterworth 9 poles Fig. 173. on page 345 Fig. 174. on page 345
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 326 / 514
EQUIPMENT
9640 LSY
9647 LSY
9662 LSY
9667 LSY
9674 LSY
9681 LSY
9611 LSY
9613 LSY
Demodulator bandwidth recovery [MHz] Clock recovery time after IF interruption [msec.] Synchronism recovery [msec.] Signature STM1: BER =1*10E4 BER =1*10E6 STM0 : BER =1*10E4 BER =1*10E6 C/N STM1 [dB] BER =1*10E3 BER =1*10E4 BER =1*10E6 C/N STM0 [dB] BER =1*10E3 BER =1*10E4 BER =1*10E6 Modem Transit time Absolute delay Interleave block length Carrier recovery (after RF interruption) msec.
$ 0.8
< 100
x 0.1
Kn gua. = 0.9 ; Kn gua. =1 ; Kn gua. = 1.3 ; Kn gua. = 1.5 ;
Kn typ.= 0.4 9 Kn typ.= 0. 55 Kn typ.= 0.55 Kn typ.= 0.65
(6.3 nsec.) see also Fig. 179. pg.348 (6.3 nsec.) see also Fig. 180. pg.349 (6.3 nsec.) see also Fig. 181. pg.350 (6.3 nsec.) see also Fig. 182. pg.351
24.5 Guar 23.7 Typ 25.2 Guar 24.3 Typ 26.5 Guar 25.5 Typ
24.5 Guar 23.7 Typ 25.2 Guar 24.3 Typ 26.5 Guar 25.5 Typ t.b.d.
120 symbols x 500 (STM1) t.b.d. (STM0)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 327 / 514
6.4.2 XPIC & Combiner (XPIC STM1 only)

Intermediate frequency [MHz] IF Nominal input [dBm] IF impedance IF input Return loss Post demodulation filter Adaptive equalizer Base Band static delay equalization [ns] XPIF Guar [dB] @ 1x106
140 " 1
5 (+1 to 6 dB) 75 Ohm x 25 dB in the band 140 MHz " 15 MHz Butterworth 9 poles T/2 19 taps
0 to 140 step T/2
17 for symmetrical degradation ( 3 dB less for unbalanced degradation ) TBD
@ 1x103
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 328 / 514
6.4.3 Regenerator
EQUIPMENT
9640 LSY
9647 LSY
9662 LSY
9667 LSY
9674 LSY
9681 LSY
9611 LSY
9613 LSY
Input/output signal
155.520 Mb/s 4.6 p.p.m. (standard payload ) 155.520 Mb/s 20 p.p.m. (AIS payload ) 271 Electrical Optical 75 Ohm 1V pp 12.7 dB at 78 MHz as vf NRZ+CK 155.520 Mb/s ITUT G.703 (Siemens 1.0/2.3 connector) CMI 75 ohm unbal. 1 Vpp 15 dB from 8 to 240 MHz 12.7 dB at 78 MHz as vf ITUT G.825 ITUT G.958 ITUT G.958 ITUT G.957 (S1.1 type FCPC and SC connectors) 12601360 nm 28 8
Line Scrambler/ Desc. User interface Impedance Level Cable equalizer Optical input Bit rate I/O signal elect. Interf. Code Impedance Signal level Return loss Input cable equalizer
Max. input jitter Max. output jitter Jitter transfer function

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
I/O signal optical inter. Operating wavelength. Min. Sensitivity dBm Min. overload dBm Output mean launched power dBm
8 (max.) ; 15 (min.)
table continues
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 329 / 514
EQUIPMENT
9640 LSY
9647 LSY
9662 LSY
9667 LSY
9674 LSY
9681 LSY
9611 LSY
9613 LSY
Max. input jitter Max. output jitter Jitter transfer function DCCr (D1 to D3) bit rate Kbit/s interface DCCm (D4 to D12) bit rate Kbit/s interface Unprotected 2Mbit/s I/O access I/O signal bit rate I/O level Signal Code Protected 2Mbit/s I/O access I/O signal bit rate I/O level Signal Code AIS management: Regenerator Tx and/or Rx side 64 Kbit/s channels Tx/Rx Alarms detection/removal [msec].
ITUT G.825 ITUT G.958 ITUT G.958
192 Managed internally by the System Controller The entire MSOH is not managed and passedthrough 576 Not managed by pass condition From backpanel access area 1.02.3 Siemens connectors 75 Ohm 2048 Kb/s G 703 2.37 V p HDB3 From Service unit front panel 1.02.3 Siemens connectors 75 Ohm 2048 Kb/s G 703 2.37 V p HDB3
MSAIS (Contains a valid RSOH and an all1 pattern on MSOH and payload in case of LOS,LOF) All 1
Loss Of Frame : 3/1 (24 frames/8 frames) Loss Of Signal : 0.625/0.250 (5 frames/2 frames) Out Of Frame Detection : >1000 ones or zeros consecutively
ATPC channel
64 Kbit/s channel in RFCOH 1+1 protected
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 330 / 514
6.4.4 Power consumption (Regenerator only) W " 10%

EQUIPMENT
9640 LSY
9647 LSY
9662 LSY
9667 LSY 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
9674 LSY
9681 LSY
9611 LSY
9613 LSY
1+1/2+0 Hetero 2+1/3+0 Hetero 3+1/4+0 Hetero 4+1/5+0 Hetero 5+1/6+0 Hetero 6+1/7+0 Hetero 7+1/8+0 Hetero
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 331 / 514
6.5 Branching interfaces

9640 LSY RF feeder interface Tx/Rx Antenna circulator common port input return loss [dB] (C, C) 9647 LSY 9662 LSY 9667 LSY 9674 LSY 9681 LSY 9611 LSY UDR 100 9613 LSY UDR 120
UDR 40 UDR 48 UDR 70 UDR 70 UDR 70 UDR 84
x 26
6.6 Protections
Radio Protection Switching (RPS) type Occasional traffic RPS Switching Method RPS Criteria / Switching Time [ms]
1+1/N+1
Optional, available only in N+1 Hitless revertive and not revertive in 1+1 Hitless revertive in N+1 RRA/MODEM Failure RRA/MODEM Missing unit HBER ( detection TBD ; restore TBD ) LBER ( detection TBD ; restore TBD ) EW ( detection TBD ; restore TBD )
RPS Switching time [msec.] 1+1 N+1 Tx/Rx Static delay equalization bits Max. dynamic recoverable delay bits Regenerator user interface protection
1 (from alarm detection) 10 (from alarm detection) 0256 ( 1 bit step )
10
Not available
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 332 / 514
6.7 Environmental characteristics 6.7.1 General characteristics

EQUIPMENT Environment: EMIEMC Safety Temperature Humidity Transportation Storage Compliant with EN 55022 ETSI EN 3014891 ETSI EN 3014894 Compliant with IEC 60950 add. IV and IEC 215 5/+55C ; 5 to 95 % compliant with ETS 300 019 class 2.3 compliant with ETS 300 019 class 1.2 9640 LSY 9647 LSY 9662 LSY 9667 LSY 9674 LSY 9681 LSY 9611 LSY 9613 LSY
6.7.2 Mechanically active substances

ETS 300 019 Class 3.1 recommends the following environmental parameters: Environmental Parameter a) Sand b) Dust (suspension) c) Dust (sedimentation) Value 30 mg/m3 0.2 mg/m3 1.5 mg/ (m2 h)
Overcoming these values could affect Fans Assembled Unit operation. For further information, see para.7.6.2 on page 374.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 333 / 514
6.7.3 ETS 300019 Class 3.2: partly Temperature controlled locations

See climatogram on Fig. 166. herebelow This applies to locations: where installed equipment may be exposed to solar radiation and heat radiation. They may also be exposed to movements of the surrounding air due to draughts in buildings, e.g. through open windows. They may be subjected to dew and to presence of water from sources other than rain and icing. They are not subjected to precipitations; where mould growth or attacks by animals, except termites, may occur; with normal levels of contaminants experienced in urban areas with industrial activities scattered over the whole area and/or with heavy traffic; In close proximity to sources of sand or dust; with vibration of low significance, e.g. for products fastened to light supporting structures subjected to hardly perceptible vibrations. The conditions of this class may be found in : entrances and staircases of buildings; garages; cellars; certain workshops; buildings in factories and industrial process plants; unattended equipment stations; certain telecommunication buildings; ordinary storage rooms for frost resistant products and farm buildings, etc.
Fig. 166. Climatogram for Class 3.2 : Partly temperature controlled locations
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 334 / 514
6.7.4 ETS 300019 Class 3.1: Temperaturecontrolled locations

This class is a combination of classes 3K3/3Z2/3Z4/3B1/3C2(3C1)/3S2/3M1 in IEC standard 72133 [3].
This class applies to a permanently temperature controlled closed location. Humidity is usually not controlled. The climatogram is shown in Fig. 167. herebelow: 60 50 45 40 35 30
AIR TEMPERATURE 0C
20 10 5 0 5 10 20 30 40 0
1.5 1.0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80 85
90
100
RELATIVE AIR HUMIDITY %
Exceptional climatic limits. Normal climatic limits: Values outside these limits have a probability of occurrence of less than 1% Values outside this field have a probability of occurrence of less than 10%(see IEC standard 72130 [2], Class 4)
NOTE: Exceptional conditions may occur following the failure of the temperature controlling system Fig. 167. Climatogram for Class 3.1: Temperaturecontrolled locations Heating, cooling, forced ventilation and humidification are used to necessarily maintain the required conditions especially where there is a great difference between room environment and external high or low temperatures.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 335 / 514
ABSOLUTE AIR HUMIDITY g/m3
25 20
This class applies to locations: where installed equipment may be exposed to solar radiation and to heat radiation. It may also be exposed to movements of the surrounding air due to draughts in buildings. They are not subjected to dew, precipitation, water from source other than rain or icing; without particular risks of biological attacks. This includes protective measures, e.g. special product design, or installations at locations of such construction that mould growth and attacks by animals, etc. are not likely to occur; with normal levels of contaminants experienced in urban areas with industrial activities scattered over the whole area and/or with heavy traffic; without special precautions to minimize the presence of sand or dust, but which are not situated in close proximity to sources of sand or dust; with insignificant vibration and shock.
The conditions of this class may be found in : normal living or working areas, e.g. living rooms, rooms for general use (theatres, restaurants); offices; shops; workshops for electronic assemblies and other electrotechnical products; telecommunication centers; storage rooms for valuable and sensitive products.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 336 / 514
6.7.5 Storage
The equipment meet the following requirements vs. storage:
ETS 300 019, class 1.2 Class 1.2 weatherproofed, not temperaturecontrolled storage location.
This class applies to weatherproofed storage having neither temperature nor humidity control. The location may have openings directly to the open air, i.e., it may be only partly weatherproofed. The climatogram is shown on Fig. 168. herebelow. This class applies to storage locations: where equipment may be exposed to solar radiation and temporarily to heat radiation: They may also be exposed to movements of the surrounding air due to draughts, e.g. through doors, windows or other openings. They may be subjected to dew, dripping water and to icing. They may also be subjected to limited winddriven precipitation including snow; where mould growth or attacks by animals, except termites, may occur; with normal levels of contaminants experienced in urban areas with industrial activities scattered over the whole area, ad/or with heavy traffic; in areas with sources of sand or dust, including urban areas; with vibration of low significance and insignificant shock. The conditions of this class may occur in: unattended buildings; some entrances of buildings; some garages and shacks.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 168. Climatogram for Class 1.2: not temperature controlled storage location
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 337 / 514
6.7.6 Transportation
Compliant with ETS 300 019 Class 2.3 The equipment meets the following requirements vs. transportation: ETS 300 01911 : 1992, class 2.2 Class 2.2 Careful transportation.
This class applies to transportation where special care has been taken e.g. with respect to low temperature and handling. Class 2.2 covers the condition of class 2.1. In addition class 2.2 includes transportation in all types of lorries and trailers in areas with welldeveloped road system. It also includes transportation by ship and by train with specially designed, shockreducing buffers. Manual loading and unloading of up to 20 Kg is included. Extreme low temperature protection during transportation is permitted for equipment in its standard packing: At 40 C for 72 Hours maximum without damaging the Optical interfaces.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 338 / 514
6.8 Optical Safety

N.B.
This paragraph applies to LHR system only. As far as OPTINEX Rack and 1650SMC are concerned, please refer to relevant Technical Documentation (para.18.2.2 on page 471).
6.8.1 Related Units

This description is relevant only to LHR regenerator system. As far as 1650SMC equipment, please refer to the relevant Technical Documentation (para.18.2.2 on page 471) The Optical Safety characteristics and related precautions to avoid possible exposure to hazardous laser radiation given herein, are relevant to the optical modules that can be housed on the equipment units with STM1 interfaces: in LHR system: RRACHANNEL and RRASTANDBY units.
6.8.2 Hazard Level classification

The HAZARD LEVEL classification of the different optical interfaces of LHR system is given in Tab. 58. on page 339. The hazard level was assigned in accordance with the requirements of IEC 608251 (1993) and IEC 608252 (1993). Tab. 58. Hazard level classification of different optical interfaces
UNIT/PORT
STM1
OPTICAL INTERFACE
S1.1 (short haul)
HAZARD LEVEL
1
6.8.3 Incorporated laser sources characteristics

Output optical interfaces data: the wavelength and the maximum optical power at the output connector of incorporated laser sources is given in para.6.4.3 on page 329.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 339 / 514
6.8.4 Labelling
The labels reproduced below are affixed during factory settings, except those (explanatory) concerning the STM1 ports. In this case the labels are placed in a plastic bag and provided together with the optical module. The customer shall affix the label on the fibre protection cover of the involved card, depending on the particular interface of the module (STM1 port). In the following description it is specified when the label shall be affixed by the customer. [1] Standard label for all modules
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
The label is put on the fibre protection cover of all the involved card (see para.6.8.1 on page 339). [2] Multilanguage Label Kit The multilanguage label kit, for STM1 ports, is placed in the same plastic bag provided together with the module where explanatory labels (in English language), above mentioned, are put. The multilanguage label kit contains a set of label that reproduce the same (explanatory) above depicted in the following languages: Italian Francaise Spanish German The customer, to its own discretion, may stick the labels with appropriate language upon the preexisting ones or, in case of STM1 ports, directly on the fibre protection cover of the involved card (see para.6.8.1 on page 339)
6.8.5 Aperture and fiber connectors

The locations of apertures and fibre connectors are reported on topographical drawings of units front view and access cards front view: in para.3.6.4 on page 147 (RRACHANNEL unit) in para.3.6.5 on page 149 (RRASTANDBY unit)
6.8.6 Engineering design features

In normal operating conditions, unless intentional manumission, the laser radiation is never accessible. The laser beam is launched in optical fibre through an appropriate connector that totally shuts up the laser radiation. Moreover a plastic cover is fitted upon optical connectors by means of screws. In case of cable fibre break, to minimize exposure times, ALS procedure according to ITUT G.958 Rec. is implemented either on STM1 ports. ALS timing are not longer than maximum specified in G.958.
6.8.7 Safety instruction

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The safety instructions for proper assembly, maintenance, and safe use including clear warning concerning precautions to avoid possible exposure to hazardous laser radiation, are reported in para.19.3 on page 484.
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 340 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
Fig. 169. 9600 LSY BER curves (STM1)
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
341 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
Fig. 170. 9600 LSY BER curves (STM0)
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
342 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q Fig. 171. STM1 128 QAM typical RF spectrum (measured at point C)
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
343 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Fig. 172. STM1/STM0 128 QAM IF RX Filter
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
344 / 514
TO BE DONE (future edition)

Fig. 173. Post demodulation filter STM1
Fig. 174. Post demodulation filter STM0
Fig. 175. STM1 /STM0 BER 1*103 and 1*106 threshold degradation for cochannel interference
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 345 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
Fig. 176. STM1 BER 1*103 and1*106 threshold degradation for adjacent channel 40 MHz digital interference
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
346 / 514
Fig. 177. STM1 BER 1*103 and 1*106 threshold degradation for adjacent channel 30 MHz digital interference
Fig. 178. STM0 BER 1*103 and 1*106 threshold degradation for adjacent channel 14 MHz digital interference
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 347 / 514
STM1/128QAM
BER = 1 x 10 4
Mask for signature shape only
Fs=24.46 MHz ; T= 6.3 ns Typical signature: DF = 25.4 MHz ; Bc = 22.7 dB Guaranteed signature: Kn = 0.9
(Kn = 0.49)
Fig. 179. Typical signature for STM1 capacity @ BER=1 X 10 E4
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 348 / 514
STM1/128QAM
BER = 1 x 10 6
Fs=24.46 MHz ; T= 6.3 ns Typical signature: DF = 26 MHz ; Bc = 22 dB Guaranteed signature: Kn = 1.0
(Kn = 0.55)
Fig. 180. Typical signature for STM1 capacity @ BER=1 X 10 E6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 349 / 514
STM0/128QAM
BER = 1 x 10 4
Fs=8.15 MHz ; T= 6.3 ns Typical signature: DF = 8.2 MHz ; Bc = 31 dB Guaranteed signature: Kn = 1.3
(Kn = 0.55)
Fig. 181. Typical signature for STM0 capacity @ BER=1x10e4.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 350 / 514
STM0/128QAM
BER = 1 x 10 6
Fs=8.15 MHz ; T= 6.3 ns Typical signature: DF = 8.2 MHz ; Bc = 29.3 dB Guaranteed signature: Kn = 1.5
(Kn = 0.65)
Fig. 182. Typical signature for STM0 capacity @ BER=1x10e6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 351 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
352 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Chapter 7 Maintenance SECTION CONTENT
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
MAINTENANCE
514 PAGE 355
353 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
354 / 514
7 MAINTENANCE 7.1 Introduction

Maintenance consists of a set of operations which maintain or bring back the assembly to optimum operating conditions in a very short time, with the aim of obtaining maximum operational availability. Maintenance is classified as: ROUTINE (preventive) CORRECTIVE (troubleshooting and repair)
This chapter describes the routine and corrective maintenance of 9600LSY equipment in the LHR configuration, and and is organized as follows: Warnings EMC norms Safety rules Maintenance Personnel skill Instruments and accessories Software tools System and Maintenance Tool Kits on page 356, including:
on page 357 on page 357, including: on page 357 on page 358
Alarm Description on page 361, including: Centralized Equipment Alarms on page 361 Station Alarms (TRU) on page 363 Unit alarms managed by System Controller (SYSCO) on page 363 Alarm visual indications on units on page 363 Summarizing / Housekeeping Alarms on page 364 Set of spare parts on page 370, including: Suggested Spare Parts on page 370 General rules on spare parts management on page 372 Spare Flash Card management on page 372 Routine Maintenance on page 373, including: Routine Maintenance every year on page 373 Routine Maintenance for Fans Assembled Units on page 374 Corrective Maintenance on page 375, including: General flowchart on page 375 Alarm acknowledgment and attending on page 376 TroubleShooting on page 377 Unit replacement on page 381 Faulty unit repair and Repair Form on page 409
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 355 / 514
7.2 Warnings 7.2.1 EMC norms
ATTENTION
EMC NORMS
WHEN CARRYING OUT THE GIVEN OPERATIONS OBSERVE THE NORMS STATED IN PARA. 19.4.3 ON PAGE 493
7.2.2 Safety rules

The Safety Rules stated in para.19.3 on page 484 thru 490 describe the operations and/or precautions to observe to safeguard operating personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment safety. Please read them with accuracy before to start every action on the equipments.
SAFETY RULES
General Carefully observe the frontpanel warning labels prior to working on optical connections while the equipment is inservice. Should it be necessary to cut off power during the maintenance phase, proceed to switch off the power supply units as well as cut off power station upstream (rack or station distribution frame) Electrical safety DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Personal injury can be caused by 48 V dc. DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Short circuiting, low-voltage, low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in burns and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before working with primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals. Optical safety DANGER: Possibility of eyes damage: read carefully and strictly observe the rules pointed out in para.19.3.4.2 on page 488.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 356 / 514
7.2.3 Maintenance Personnel skill

Maintenance Personnel must have been an adequate technical training on telecommunications. Experience in maintenance activities is a must. In particular, Maintenance Personnel must be familiar: with the equipment this handbook refers to and with the use of the Craft Terminal applications of the equipment this handbook refers to.
Without these prerequisites, reading this handbook and the associated handbooks indicated in para.18.2 on page 466 is usually not enough to properly maintain equipment.
7.3 Instruments and accessories 7.3.1 Software tools

There is a local terminal (PCECT) which permits to display all the alarms and manages the Equipment. The relative processing is described in the relevant Craft Terminal Operators Handbook (see Tab. 79. on page 468). When a TMN is implemented, an Operation System will display alarms and manage all the connected Equipment of the network. Refer to the relevant handbooks. With reference to Fig. 67. on page 141: connection with the PC is achieved through connector (M3) available on the System Controller unit through connectors (J1) to (J3), the same unit can be connected to an Operations System associated to the Transmission Management Network in order to execute operations similar to those carried out by the PC.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 357 / 514
7.3.2 System and Maintenance Tool Kits

The following Tab. 59. lists the items contained in the LSY SYSTEM TOOL KIT (for P/N see REF.[40] in Tab. 13. on page 122). Drawings and descriptions are given for special items. Tab. 59. LSY System Tool Kit ITEMS BAGS Tool bag Maintenance Tool bag Fixed spanner 8 x 10 Fixed spanner 6 x 1 Fixed spanner 12 x 13 Screwdriver 3 x 100 Screwdriver 3.5 x 100 Screwdriver 5.5 x 200 Crosshead Screwdriver 3 x 60 Crosshead Screwdriver 4.5 x 80 Crosshead Screwdriver 4.5 x 250 Socket wrench Socket wrench Special screwdriver Torque wrench Insulating plug with pliers Antistatic wristband Antistatic applications cord Plug with crocodile pliers Female button termination 810.704.305 W 870.704.306 X STANDARD TOOLS & MISCELLANEOUS 870.952.110 J 870.952.106 K 870.952.119 P 870.959.130 V 870.959.140 F 870.959.166 V 870.959.530 W 870.959.540 G 870.959.565 V 870.952.800 X 870.952.995 E 870.959.815 Q 870.952.302 X 041.720.010 B COMPONENTS OF ANTISTATIC WRISTBAND 041.172.011 Y 041.911.001 U 041.172.010 B 248.501.099 Y SPECIAL EXTRACTORS Cables 1.0/2.3 extractor Electrical/Optical module extractor Extractors holder bracket LABELS Label for codebar Label for codebar 268.001.431 K 268.001.702 G 245.701.842 S 241.901.305 V 241.901.306 W see Fig. 184. on page 360 see Fig. 230. on page 494 FACTORY P/N NOTES
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 358 / 514
The following Tab. 60. lists the items contained in the LSY MAINTENANCE TOOL KIT (for P/N see REF.[41] in Tab. 13. on page 122). Drawings and descriptions are given for special items.
Tab. 60. LSY Maintenance Tool Kit ITEMS BAGS Maintenance Tool bag 75ohm Transition Coax. transition75 plugplug Coax. transition 50 female Nmale SMA Coax. transition 75 male BNCfemale1.6/5.6 Coax. cord Coax. cord Coax. cord Cord Bipolar cord fitted with male connectors Special cord for PRx measurement 870.704.306 X 018.860.001 N 018.860.002 P 040.198.018 M 040.198.103 Q 041.962.184 T 041.962.264 J 041.962.276 N 041.997.010 X 049.911.081 U 041.992.608 K SPECIAL EXTRACTORS Cables 1.0/2.3 extractor Electrical/Optical module extractor LABELS Label for codebar Label for codebar 268.001.431 K 268.001.702 G 245.701.842 S 241.901.305 V see Fig. 184. on page 360 see Fig. 183. on page 359 FACTORY P/N NOTES
plug M1 or M2 in Fig. 89. on page 167
Fig. 183. Special cord for PRx measurement
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 359 / 514
Extractor for Electrical/Optical module and Fans Assembled Unit
Cables 1.0/2.3 extractor
Extractions holder bracket Fig. 184. Special extractors and holder bracket
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 360 / 514
7.4 Alarm Description 7.4.1 Centralized Equipment Alarms

All the alarms detected on the units are collected and processed by the System Controller unit in Baseband shelf which gives centralized optical indications by means of LEDs on its front coverplate. Specifically (see Fig. 185. herebelow): Red LED URG (1): detection of an URGENT alarm Red LED NURG (2): detection of a NOT URGENT alarm Yellow LED ATTD (3): alarm condition ATTENDED (see para.7.4.1.1 herebelow) Yellow LED ABN (4): detection of an ABNORMAL operative condition. Yellow LED IND (5): detection of an INDICATIVE alarm
(1) OR of all URGENT alarms (red) (2) OR of all NOT URGENT alarms (red) (3) ATTENDED alarm (yellow) (4) OR of all ABNORMAL conditions (yellow) (5) OR of all INDICATIVE alarms (yellow) (7) Lamp Test Pushbutton (8) Alarm storing Pushbutton (Attended)
(6) bicolor led: red on: Card failure alarm green flashing: SW download in progress (internal or toward other boards) off: normal condition
Fig. 185. System Controller front view (particular) N.B. On the Craft Terminal (C.T.) and on the Operation System (O.S). application the URGENT (URG), NOT URGENT (NURG) and INDICATIVE alarm are named in a different way; the relationship between this two terminologies is explained in Tab. 61. herebelow.
Tab. 61. Relationship between Alarm severity terminology displayed on C.T./O.S. and alarm severity terminology used for the System Controller unit remote alarm connector pins. Alarm severity terminology on C.T. and O.S. CRITICAL or MAJOR MINOR WARNING
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Alarm severity terminology used for SYSTEM CONTROLLER UNIT remote alarm connector pins URG , T*URG, T*RURG, NURG, T*NURG, T*RNURG INDICATIVE
INDETERMINATE (not used)
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 361 / 514
7.4.1.1 Alarm Attending See Fig. 185. on page 361: the detected alarm condition can be stored through pushbutton (8) on the System Controller unit. This operation will turn OFF the LEDs URG/NURG (1) (2) and will light up the yellow LED ATTD (3) on the System Controller unit (Attended). a possible new alarm condition (following the Attending) will turn on the LEDs URG (1) or NURG (2). when the fault has been repaired, the yellow lamp (if the alarm had been attended) or the red ones (if the alarm had not been attended and no further alarms had occurred in the mean time) will turn off.
7.4.1.2 Relationship between Alarms and their severity (Urgent / Not Urgent) See Tab. 63. on page 368.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 362 / 514
7.4.2 Station Alarms (TRU)

Some equipment alarms processed by the System Controller unit are carried to Baseband shelfs connector M184 and then lead by a cable to TRUs connector M8 in order to switch on/off the TRU alarm lamps. The four alarm lamps on TRU are depicted in Fig. 186. herebelow.
RED (1) RED (2) YELLOW GREEN Fig. 186. Station Alarms on TRU Their management is as follows: The RED (1) lamp is activated in case of urgent (URG) alarm and a relevant telealarm is released (this last function is excludible). The RED (2) lamp is activated in case of non urgent (minor) alarm and a relevant telealarm is released (this last function is excludible). The YELLOW lamp is lighted up in case of manual storing of alarm events (see para.7.4.1.1 on page 362). In this case the RED lamps are switched off to be ready to other new alarm indications. This YELLOW lamp is lighted up in case of ABNORMAL condition, together with led (4) of System Controller unit (see para.7.4.1 on page 361). The GREEN lamp is activated by the buzzer input. By presetting, it is possible to change this alarm criteria and to drive the activation with the presence of the service voltage.
The signals sent to TRU are also available for Customer applications on other TRUs connectors (see para.4.7.7 on page 208 for connectors, connector pinout and signal description).
7.4.3 Unit alarms managed by System Controller (SYSCO)

All details of the alarms for each card and relevant indications are included in the Alarm status procedure in the Operators Handbook .
7.4.4 Alarm visual indications on units

Besides the LEDs of Centralized Equipment Alarms described in para.7.4.1 on page 361, some other equipment units are provided with specific alarm LED on their front coverplate, indicating the failure of the unit. Tab. 65. on page 377 lists such LEDs and indicate their normal status (alarm absence).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 363 / 514
7.4.5 Summarizing / Housekeeping Alarms

Summarizing and Housekeeping alarms, processed by the System Controller unit, are made available to Customer by means of relay contacts whose interface access is described in para.4.7.8 on page 208. The following Tab. 62. gives the relationship among remote alarms, housekeeping outputs and alarm primitives. Tab. 63. on page 368 gives the relationship between Remote and Station Alarms. Tab. 62. Relationship among remote alarms, housekeeping outputs and alarm primitives Remote alarm TOR TAND TUP URG NURG IND ABN TORC TANC Opt STM1 module fail/missing INT Refer. ANDOR ANDOR GA2 GA4 GA5 GA6 GA7 GA8 GA9 GA Remote Alarm primitives VBATT1 failure or VBATT2 failure VBATT1 failure and VBATT2 failure SYSCO card fail or missing or of all urgent alarms or of all not urgent alarms or of all indicative alarms (severity = Major or Critical) (severity= Minor) (severity = Warning or Indeterminate)
or of all the abnormal conditions PSF1 or PSF2 card fail PSF1 and PSF2 card fail or of the following alarms: STM1 Opt. X (X = 0,..,9) module fail STM1 Opt. X (X = 0,..,9) module missing or of all the internal alarms card fail, card missing, equipment mismatch, RC unreachable, battery fail/missing, LAN alarm, transmitter Failure, transmitter Degraded software mismatch, software processing error, housekeeping alarm, unconfigured equipment or of the following alarms: FANSL X (X = 1,2) card fail (ADM cooling) FANSL X (X = 1,2) card fail (LHR cooling) or of the following alarms: Service card fail Service card missing TPHDEV card fail TPHDEV card missing
GA10
FANS card fail/ missing SERV card fail/ missing
GA12
GA13
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 364 / 514
.. continues Tab. 62. Remote alarm

Refer. GA16
Remote Alarm primitives N+0: or of the following alarms : RRA X (X = 0,..,9) card fail RRA X (X = 0,..,9) card missing N+1: or of the following alarms : RRA X (X = 1,..,9) card fail RRA X (X = 1,..,9) card missing RRASBY 0 card fail RRASBY 0 card missing or of the following alarms : MD X (X = 0,..,9) card fail MD X (X = 0,..,9) card missing or of the following alarms : TRI X (X = 1,..,10) card fail TRI X (X = 1,..,10) card missing LO Y (Y = 1,..,20) card fail LO Y (Y = 1,..,20) card missing RX Y (Y = 1,..,20) card fail RX Y (Y = 1,..,20) card missing or of highBER of all channel X (X = 0,..,9) or of lowBER of all channel X (X = 0,..,9) or of the following alarms: PSF1 card fail PSF1 card missing or of the following alarms: PSF2 card fail PSF2 card missing or of the following alarms: PSU X (X=0,..,9) card fail, PSU X (X=0,..,9) card missing or of the following alarms: Second IF X.1 (X=0,..,9) module fail, Second IF X.1 (X=0,..,9) module missing or of the following alarms: Third IF X.2 (X=0,..,9) module fail, Third IF X.2 (X=0,..,9) module missing
RRA card fail/missing
MD card fail/missing
GA15
TRI card fail/missing
GA11
HBER LBER PSF1 card fail/ missing PSF2 card fail/ missing PSU card fail/missing Second IF unit card fail/missing Third IF unit card fail/missing
GA17 GA18 GA 40
GA 41
GA 30
GA 42
GA 43
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 365 / 514
.. continues Tab. 62. Remote alarm CHX_affect (X = 0,..,9) Refer. Remote Alarm primitives
CH0 = GA 20 or of all alarms related to channels X (from 0 to 9) and CH1 = GA 21 affecting the traffic: CH2 = GA 22 equipment alarms: CH3 = GA 23 RRA X card fail CH4 = GA 24 RRA X card missing CH5 = GA 25 STM1 Opt. X card fail CH6 = GA 26 STM1 Opt. X card missing CH7 = GA 27 MD X card fail CH8 = G A28 MD X card missing CH9 = GA 29 Second IF (X.1) card fail Second IF (X.1) card missing Third IF (X.2) card fail Third IF (X.2) card missing TRI X card fail TRI X card missing LO X.Y (Y = 1, 2) card fail LO X.Y (Y = 1, 2) card missing RX X card fail RX X card missing PSU X card fail PSU X card missing sfwrEnvironmentProblem (RRA X, MD X, TRI X) communication alarms: LOS (STM1 Opt. X) LOF (STM1 Opt. X) transmitterFailure (STM1 Opt. X) transmitterDegraded (STM1 Opt. X) LOF (RRA X, rsCTPBid line/radio side) modulationFail (MD X) modLOS (MD X) demodulationFail (MD X) demLOS (MD X) rxFail (RX X) txLOS (TRI X) txFail (TRI X) incompatibleTxPower (TRI X) LOF (RRA X, radioSPITTPBidR1) HBER (MD X) LBER (MD X) TIM (RRA X) RCIM (RRA X) atpcLoop (RRA X) atpcIdentifierMismatch (RRA X) rxDivFail (RX Div. X) demDivLOS (Second IF X.1) demXpicLOS (Second or Third IF X.1 or X.2)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 366 / 514
.. continues Tab. 62. Remote alarm

Refer.
Remote Alarm primitives
CHX on protection (X = 1,..,9)
CH1 = GA 31 for each channel, it will indicate if the switch is on protecting CH2 = GA 32 channel (in the N+1 configuration only one channel can be on CH3 = GA 33 protection) CH4 = GA 34 CH5 = GA 35 CH6 = GA 36 CH7 = GA 37 CH8 = GA 38 CH9 = GA 39
end of Tab. 62.
N.B.
Concerning the management of the remote alarms for 1+1 configuration, only the alarms raised by the boards of the allowed channels have to be considered.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 367 / 514
Tab. 63. Relationship between Remote and Station Alarms N.B. For the alarm meaning refer to Tab. 62. on page 364 Remote Alarm TOR TAND TUP URG NURG IND ABN TORC TANC Opt. STM1 module fail/missing INT FANS card fail SERV card fail/missing RRA card fail/missing MD card fail/missing Second IF unit card fail/missing Third IF unit card fail/missing TRI card fail/missing PSF1 card fail/missing PSF2 card fail/missing HBER
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Station Alarm TOR RNURG RURG RURG RURG RNURG HW HW HW SW SW
HW HW HW SW SW SW SW SW HW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW
NURG URG URG INT
SW HW HW
ABN NURG INT URG INT URG/NURG/IND INT (note 1) SW HW SW RNURG RURG RURG/ RNURG
SW SW HW SW
URG/NURG/IND INT URG/NURG/IND INT URG/NURG/IND INT (note 1) URG/NURG/IND INT (note 1) URG/NURG/IND INT (note 1) URG/NURG/IND INT (note 1) URG/NURG/IND INT (note 1) URG/NURG/IND INT URG/NURG/IND INT URG/NURG/IND
SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW
RURG/ RNURG RURG/ RNURG RURG/ RNURG RURG/ RNURG RURG/ RNURG RURG/ RNURG RURG/ RNURG RURG/ RNURG RURG/ RNURG RURG/ RNURG
SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW
Tab. 63. continues ..
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 368 / 514
Consequent Remote Alarms
.. continues Tab. 63. LBER

SW SW SW
URG/NURG/IND
SW
RURG/ RNURG
SW
CHX_affect (X=0..9) CHX on protection (X=1..9) end of Tab. 63.
(note 1) A CHX_affect consequent remote alarm is generated according to the channel affected by the primary alarm.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 369 / 514
7.5 Set of spare parts 7.5.1 Suggested Spare Parts

The overall number of spares depends on Customer requirements, and should be based on the average amount of transmission circuits available to be accounted for not only during MTBF but also during MTTR; the latter depending on the amount of spare parts available. The set of spare parts is inclusive of a minimum number of spares for each type of replaceable plugin unit, as detailed in following: para.7.5.1.1 herebelow (all units, with exception of Transceivers) para.7.5.1.2 on page 371 (Transceivers) N.B. The unit replacement procedures described in paragraph Corrective Maintenance in this chapter presume that the units present in the sparepart stock correspond exactly to the plugin replaceable units that are equipped in the system, i.e.: with the same Part Numbers and including the same babyboards (with the same Part Numbers)1. with the aim of speedingup the corrective maintenance and to avoid complex unit manipulation (baby board mounting/dismounting on/from the main board) which could result in unit and/or babyboard damage.
7.5.1.1 All units, with exception of Transceivers Tab. 64. Spare parts list UNIT FANS ASSEMBLED SYSCO FLASH CARD (see para.7.5.3 page 372) SERVICE RRA CHANNEL RRA STANDBY (if used) OPTICAL MODULE (if used) MODEM (STM0 or STM1) PSU PSF ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING (if used) 1 or 2 CANCCOMB (STM0 or STM1) (optional) Tab. 20. on page 138 Tab. 21. on page 138 Tab. 23. on page 139 Tab. 17. on page 136 Tab. 19. on page 137 ADDITIONAL VOICE (optional) N.B.1 Tab. 16. on page 136 Tab. 18. on page 136 BABY BOARDS DETAILS FOR P/Ns AND EQUIPPING RULES Tab. 29. on page 169
N.B.1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
As spare part, SYSCO is shipped from factory always with its subunit ESCON already mounted. Customer is never allowed to dismount it from the main board. Conversely, the SYSCO spare part is usually shipped from factory without the Flash Card, that is available as individual item.
1. a policy is under study to supply Customers with spare units already equipped with baby boards, according to Customers System configuration.
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 370 / 514
7.5.1.2 Transceivers Please refer to para.3.7.3 on page 157 for the detailed description of the Transceiver composition in the various possible configurations.
a)
Spare Transceiver subassembly Fig. 194. on page 396 shows the Transceiver assembly supplied as spare part. The assembly is shown with the cover plate removed (see Fig. 80. on page 158). There are two possibilities: 1) Transceiver + Main Receiver This assembly includes the following components: standard components: Transceiver box with covers (see Fig. 80. on page 158) RT control Amplifier Up Converter Delay Line DC/DC Converter The P/N of this assembly is frequency dependent. Main Receiver The P/N of this component is frequency dependent.
2)
Transceiver only This assembly includes the standard components cited above, but does not contain the Main Receiver, whose spare must be provisioned as individual item (see point c ) herebelow).
This assembly (Transceiver + Main Receiver or Transceiver only does not include the following subcomponents: b) RX Local Oscillator TX Local Oscillator Diversity Receiver Frequency Reuse kit module see point b ) herebelow see point c ) herebelow see point d ) herebelow
Spare Local Oscillator subassembly Fig. 191. on page 390 shows the Local Oscillator subassembly supplied as spare part. The P/N of this component is frequency dependent.
c)
Spare Main and Diversity Receiver subassembly The Main Receiver subassembly is necessary as spare part in the case the spare Transceiver subassembly is supplied without the Main Receiver already assembled inside. The Diversity Receiver subassembly is necessary as spare part only in Diversity configurations. Fig. 192. on page 392 shows the Receiver subassembly supplied as spare part. The P/N of this component is frequency dependent.
d)
Spare Frequency Reuse kit module subassembly This spare is necessary only in Frequency Reuse configurations. Fig. 193. on page 395 shows the Frequency Reuse kit module subassembly supplied as spare part. The P/N of this component is frequency independent.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 371 / 514
7.5.2 General rules on spare parts management

Before storing the spare units make sure that they are working by inserting them in an operating equipment It is suggested to periodically check those spare units that have not been utilized for over a year. If the spare parts and the equipment are stored in the same environment, make sure that the spare parts are placed in cabinets to safeguard them from dust and damp. Moreover, they should also be well grounded to avoid electrostatic discharges. If the spare parts are stored in another room, or have to be moved from another place, building or site, make sure that the following is observed: the spare parts must be wrapped in antistatic and padded envelopes; the spare parts must not touch wet surfaces or chemical agents that might damage them (e.g. gas); if during transportation the temperature is lower than that of the room where they had been kept, make sure that before using them they pass a certain period in a climatic chamber to prevent thermal shocks and/or the possibility of steaming up. When replacing a unit/subunit, make sure that the spare unit/subunit is set exactly as the replaced one.
7.5.3 Spare Flash Card management

Please refer to para.5.2.7 on page 280 for the Flash Card description. The Flash Card supplied as spare part is empty (i.e. without SW) and must be left as it is for its possible use as spare part. ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) Do not use a Flash Card already loaded with SW as spare part, unless you use the specific instructions given in the Operators Handbook (that include the Flash Card reset and the SW download through SIBDL application). You must be aware that if a Flash Card with a SWP (different from that running in the system) is inserted as it is in the System Controller (and the System Controller is inserted in its shelfs slot), the software download will be automatically carried out from the Flash Card toward the Systems EC, RC and SUs, thus causing a complete system crash.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 372 / 514
7.6 Routine Maintenance

Routine maintenance is a periodic set of measurements and checks. This maintenance discovers those devices whose function has deteriorated with time and therefore need adjustment or replacement. Typically, digital equipment requires no routine maintenance. The equipment allows to assess the quality of the connection links or counting the errored events and obtaining performance data. The Performance Monitoring Application, described in the Operators Handbook, allows this function.
7.6.1 Routine Maintenance every year

It is suggested to carry out the following operations yearly: [1] Mechanical checks Check that: the power supply units, the coaxial cables, the waveguides, the mounting fixtures are connected correctly. Grounding check Check that the racks, subracks, and modules are grounded. Power cables check
[2]
[3]
SAFETY RULES DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Personal injury can be caused by 48 V dc. DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Short circuiting, low-voltage, low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in burns and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before working with primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals. Make these operations: Check that the power cable is perfectly safety grounded. Make sure that the subrack has been tightly fastened to the rack with screws, to guarantee grounding (the rack is connected to the station ground). [4] Operative checks Visual check: During the normal operation, check the led normal condition, as specified in Tab. 65. on page 377 Check of the following functions: Automatic switches Alarms
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 373 / 514
[5]
7.6.2 Routine Maintenance for Fans Assembled Units

The MTBF of the Fans Assembled Unit equipped below BaseBand shelf (and, if equipped, below 1650SMC shelf) is about 20 years, provided that Environmental Conditions regarding sand and dust are in the limits specified by Recc.ETS 300 019 Class 3.1 (see point 6.7.2 on page 333). Even though the operating environment is compliant with these limits, it is suggested to carry out the following operation every three years: pull out Fans Assembled Unit and clean fans removing dust and sand. In the case of worse environmental conditions, perform this operation more frequently.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 374 / 514
Software checks Use the Craft Terminal to check the system status (see the Operator Handbook). Access the reference Network Element, select HISTORY DISPLAY, read the alarm history memory, the statuses, and forcings.
7.7 Corrective Maintenance

If not yet done, please read N.B. on page 370.
7.7.1 General flowchart

START Alarm acknowledgment and attending (para.7.7.2 page 376)
TroubleShooting starting with visual indications (para.7.7.3.1 page 377)
Other measures
TroubleShooting starting via Craft Terminal (para.7.7.3.2 page 379). Identification of a unit to be replaced.
Unit replacement (para.7.7.4 page 381).
System check via Craft Terminal try again with another unit N Fault repaired ?
Y If possible, restore replaced unit in the system and perform system check via Craft Terminal, to verify that is really faulty possible intermittent failure N fixed fault ? Y Restore spare part in the system and perform system check via Craft Terminal
Send back faulty unit to Repair Centre together with Repair Form compiled (para.7.8 page 409)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
END Fig. 187. Corrective Maintenance general flowchart
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 375 / 514
7.7.2 Alarm acknowledgment and attending

The need for Operator intervention is notified: locally (in front of the equipment or in the station): when the URG/NURG/IND/ABN LED alarm on SYSCO unit lights up (see para.7.4.1 on page 361) or the same alarms, propagated through the Station Alarms cable, operate the TRU lamps (see para.7.4.2 on page 363) or similar remote device and/or when the alarm LEDs listed in Tab. 65. on page 377 are not in normal status.
remotely (in a TMN maintenance center) when the OS acknowledges the presence of problems in the station.
When the local Operator decides to manage the problem, he should carry out the alarm attending operation (see para.7.4.1.1 on page 362). This operation has the scope to notify locally in the station and remotely to the TMN maintenance center that a local operator is attending the problem.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 376 / 514
7.7.3 TroubleShooting
7.7.3.1 TroubleShooting starting with visual indications
Some problems may be localized looking the LEDs indicated in following Tab. 65. In any case, the inspection through the Craft Terminal (if possible) is recommended before doing any unit replacement. Refer to Fig. 188. on page 378 to carry out this procedure. Tab. 65. Normal condition (no alarms) of LEDs on equipments units
TRU SHELF
UNIT TRU FIGURE Fig. 186. on page 363 all LED NORMAL STATUS OFF
BASE BAND SHELF board area

UNIT System Controller Service RRACHANNEL and RRASTANDBY (09) Modem (09) PSU (09) PSF (01) FIGURE Fig. 185. on page 361 Fig. 69. on page 145 Fig. 71. on page 148 Fig. 75. on page 152 Fig. 76. on page 153 Fig. 76. on page 153 LED (6) bicolor (10) red (1) red (1) red (2) green (4) green NORMAL STATUS OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON
BASE BAND SHELF access area

UNIT Additional Housekeeping FIGURE Fig. 77. on page 154 LED (1) red NORMAL STATUS OFF
TRANSCEIVER SHELF
UNIT FIGURE LED (1) green Transceiver (09) Fig. 89. on page 167 (2) red OFF NORMAL STATUS ON
FAN SHELF (01)

UNIT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
FIGURE Fig. 93. on page 172
LED (1) red
NORMAL STATUS OFF
FANS Assembled (01)
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 377 / 514
Before starting this inspection, perform lamp test (para 3.6.2.1 page 142). START one or both PSF green led off ?
any PSU green led off ?
verify circuit breakers on TRU (see para.3.4 on page 128) Y
PSU switch on ? N
problem solved? N
PSU probably faulty
PSF probably faulty why ? solve problem
SYSCO card fail on (led (6) red)? N perform lamp test (para 3.6.2.1 page 142)
N OK ? carry out procedure in para.7.7.3.4 page 380 Y
try login NE by Craft Terminal
N login successful ? carry out procedure in para.7.7.3.3 page 379
carry out procedure in para.7.7.3.2 page 379
Fig. 188. TroubleShooting starting with visual indications
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 378 / 514
7.7.3.2 TroubleShooting via Craft Terminal The 9600LSY LHR equipment has been designed to dialog with a Personal Computer (PC) in order to service, activate and troubleshoot the equipment. The troubleshooting operating instructions and details of the alarms for each card and relevant indications are included in the Alarm status procedure in the Operator Handbook (section Maintenance). The operating instructions make it possible to identify the faulty unit for all assemblies of the system. Having located the suspected faulty unit/module, replace it with a spare one (see para.7.7.4 on page 381).
7.7.3.3 Problems with the Craft Terminal Whenever the login with the Craft Terminal does not work, proceed with the following checks: Restart the Craft Terminal (logout and switch off/on). With the Craft Terminal connected to the equipment Finterface, open the Alcatel Lower Layer Manager screen (by clicking with the mouse pointer on the Alcatel symbol menu bar). The fields to be verified in this screen are: Port COM1 Physical ON OSI or Logical ON in the MSWindows
Verify that the CT port is effectively that connected by cable to equipments F interface If Physical is OFF, the problem can be due to: CT physical port faulty SYSCOs Finterface port faulty the cable
If possible, verify the correct working of the Craft Terminal and of the CTF interface cable using them with another Alcatel equipment. If the problem persists also with it, solve the problem. Otherwise, proceed with the SYSCO unit replacement, or perform steps indicated in para.7.7.3.4 on page 380. If OSI/Logical is OFF, the problem can be due to: FLASH CARD missing on SYSCO unit (verify) or FLASH CARD/SYSCO faulty SAMs Radio Controller section faulty or in abnormal condition.
Proceed with the SYSCO unit replacement, or perform steps indicated in para.7.7.3.4 on page 380.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 379 / 514
7.7.3.4 CARD FAIL red led on SYSCO Unit turned on If the bicolor LED CARD FAIL on SYSCO unit is redon (led (6) in Fig. 185. on page 361), (or it is off, but lamp test does not work) and the Craft Terminal application: responds (login successful), proceed investigating the problems through the Craft Terminal application does not respond (login unsuccessful): 1) 2) push the RESET button on SYSCO unit (button (9) in Fig. 67. on page 141) and wait 3 minutes; if, within 3 minutes, the Craft Terminal application responds, open the Alarm status procedure and proceed investigating the system state; if, after 3 minutes, the Craft Terminal application does not respond, replace the SYSCO unit, as described in para.7.7.4.4 on page 384; if the problem persists also after the SYSCO unit replacement, the failure or content corruption of the FLASH CARD must be suspected (a very extraordinary event); proceed with its replacement, as indicated in para.7.7.4.5 on page 384.
3)
4)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 380 / 514
7.7.4 Unit replacement

7.7.4.1 Introduction
The general procedure is described in para.7.7.4.2 on page 382. This procedure is fully applicable, without additional instructions, to the following types of units: SERVICE RRACHANNEL RRASTANDBY PSF ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING (taking into account its different housing and fixing by bolts, as depicted in Fig. 77. on page 154).
Additional instructions/cautions are given for the following types of units: PSU , in para.7.7.4.3 on page 383 SYSCO , in para.7.7.4.4 on page 384 FLASH CARD (housed on SYSCO unit), in para.7.7.4.5 on page 384 MODEM , in para.7.7.4.6 on page 385 TRANSCEIVER Two cases must be distinguished: a spare Transceiver already assembled is available, fully equipped with internal parts exactly equal (types and P/Ns) to those of the Transceiver unit to be replaced; in this case proceed as specified in para.7.7.4.7 on page 386. Transceiver components are available as individual spare parts, as explained in para.7.5.1.2 on page 371; in this case proceed as specified in para.7.7.4.8 on page 387.
OPTICAL MODULE, in para.7.7.4.9 on page 407 FANS ASSEMBLED , in para.7.7.4.10 on page 408
For the operative instructions and physical view of each board refer to the relevant paragraph of chapter 3 (list on page 121).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 381 / 514
7.7.4.2 General procedure The replacement of a suspected faulty unit/module with one taken from the spare part stock must be done in the following way: 1) get the spare from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that of the unit/module to be replaced (see para.7.5.2 on page 372 for cautions); do not touch the electronic components. If the unit to be replaced houses one or more babyboards, verify that the spare part does really have the same babyboards as far as quantity and P/Ns (see Tab. 64. on page 370). N.B. In the case of SYSCO unit, the P/Ns matching of the ESCON subunit is not important. disconnect all cables (and, before, protection cap, if present on the Optical module of RRA unit) from the front plate. Suggestion: before doing it, if no labels are present on the cables, put labels with writings to be able to reconnect them correctly; N.B. to extract Cables 1.0/2.3, use the special extractor (see Fig. 184. on page 360) to extract a plugin board: wear the antistatic protection device kit (see Fig. 230. on page 494) and connect its termination to a grounded structure ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) this avoids the possible damage of the electronic devices for electrostatic discharges turn off the screws present into the extraction/insertion levers of the board ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) this avoids the breakage of levers 4) operate the levers to extract the board
2)
3)
only for RRA units: if the unit is equipped with Optical module to be recovered and mounted on the spare part, extract it and mount it on the spare part (refer to para.7.7.4.9 on page 407 for details) unit hardware presetting: accessing the section Hardware setting documentation in this handbook, check if the board has hardware settings: if no hardware settings are envisaged, go to next step 6 ) if hardware settings are envisaged: locate the position of setting switches using the appropriate MSZZQ document set these switches on the spare part exactly as they are set on the unit to be replaced
5)
6)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
insert the spare plugin board in the system operating the levers now you could wear off the antistatic protection device kit
7)
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 382 / 514
8)
turn on the screws present into the extraction/insertion levers of the board ATTENTION
(caution to avoid equipment damage) The screw tightening torque for fixing the units to the subrack must be:
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) " 10 %

Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking. 9) reconnect all cables (and, after, the protection cap, if were present on the Optical module of RRA unit) on the front plate exactly as they were connected before the unit extraction.
10 ) wait some minutes (software download is usually carried out toward Supervisory Units) N.B. software download is carried out only if the SW version present in the spare units SU is different from that present in the FLASH CARD.
11 ) check the system status by LED visual inspection and through the Craft Terminal.
7.7.4.3 PSU replacement procedure Instructions in addition to those given in para.7.7.4.2 on page 382: 1) 2) as step 1 ) on page 382 turn off (position O ) the switch on the PSU unit front panel (see Fig. 76. on page 153): of the spare PSU unit and of the PSU unit to be replaced ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) For the high current absorbed by the unit, its extraction/insertion with its switch in open position could produce electrical arcs that would result in the damage of both the units and backpanels connectors. 3) 4) 5) as steps 2 ) to 3 ) and 6 ) to 9 ) on page 382383 turn on (position I ) the switch on the new PSU unit front panel (see Fig. 76. on page 153) as steps 10 ) to 11 ) on page 383.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 383 / 514
7.7.4.4 SYSCO replacement procedure Instructions in addition to those given in para.7.7.4.2 on page 382: 1) 2) 3) as steps 1 ) to 3 ) on page 382 extract the FLASH CARD from unit SYSCO (see Fig. 65. on page 140) unit hardware presetting: accessing the section Hardware setting documentation in this handbook, get the relevant MSZZQ documents get the spare unit SYSCO and, using the above said documents to locate switches: set the dipswitches on ESCON subunit exactly as those of the replaced unit ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) These dipswitches must be usually in OFF position. If unproperly set, these dipswitches will reset the FLASH CARD content, and you will loose all the software herein contained (programs and system configuration data) b) set the dipswitches on SYSCO main board exactly as those of the replaced unit ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) some of these dipswitches (that define the system configuration), if unproperly set, will cause system malfunction even though hardware is not faulty. Care must also be taken to switch defining service battery voltage 4) reinsert the FLASH CARD into the spare unit SYSCO (in case of doubts see Fig. 66. on page 140) as steps 6 ) to 10 ) on page 382383 check the system status by LED visual inspection After the unit insertion, you should wait about 10 minutes for the completion of software download from FLASH CARD toward SC, RC and SU (N.B.); this phase is notified by bicolor LED redflashing condition (led (6) in Fig. 67. on page 141). At the end, all red LEDs on SYSCO unit should be off. N.B. 7) software download is carried out only if the SW version present in the spare units SC, RC and SU, is different from that present in the FLASH CARD.
a)
5) 6)
connect Craft Terminal and check the system status by its Alarm application.
7.7.4.5 FLASH CARD replacement procedure The need for this replacement is described in para.7.7.3.4 on page 380. The FLASH CARD contains all system software.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Its replacement with an empty spare FLASH CARD (see para.7.5.3 on page 372) must be done following the specific instructions given in the C.T. Operators Handbook.
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 384 / 514
7.7.4.6 MODEM replacement procedure Instructions in addition to those given in para.7.7.4.2 on page 382:
1) 2)
as step 1 ) on page 382 turn off (position O ) the switch on the PSU unit front panel (see Fig. 76. on page 153) of the PSU corresponding to the MODEM unit to be replaced, i.e.: PSU0 for MD0 PSU1 for MD1 .... PSU9 for MD9 according to following Fig. 189. ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) The successive insertion of the spare MODEM must be done without voltage at its connector on the backplane. Only the powering on of the MODEM already pluggedin guarantees the correct startup powering timing. If you insert the MODEM with its PSU switched on, you run the risk of having subsequent indeterminate (and in some case unrecoverable) unit states. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
S Y S C O
S E R V
R R A 0
R M R D A 0 1
M D 1
R M R D A 2 2
R M R D A 3 3
R M R D A 4 4
R M R D A 5 5
R R A 6
M D 6
R M R D A 7 7
R M R D A 8 8
R M R D A 9 9
P S F 1
P S U 0
P S U 1
P S U 2
P S U 3
P S U 4
P S U 5
P S U 6
P S U 7
P S U 8
P S U 9
P S F 2
24 25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Fig. 189. PSU to be switched off/on for MODEM replacement 3) 4) 5)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
as steps 2 ) to 9 ) on page 382383 turn on (position I ) the switch on the PSU unit previously switched off as steps 10 ) to 11 ) on page 383.
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 385 / 514
7.7.4.7 TRANSCEIVER replacement procedure N.B. This procedure can be followed if a spare Transceiver is available, fully equipped with internal parts exactly equal (types and P/Ns) to those of the Transceiver unit to be replaced.
Instructions in addition to those given in para.7.7.4.2 on page 382: 1) 2) as step 1 ) on page 382 turn off (position O ) the switch on the TRANSCEIVER unit front panel (pos. (I1) in Fig. 89. on page 167): of the spare TRANSCEIVER unit and of the TRANSCEIVER unit to be replaced ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) For the high current absorbed by the unit, its extraction/insertion with its switch in open position could produce electrical arcs that would result in the damage of both the units and backpanels connectors. 3) as steps 2 ) to 9 ) on page 382383 N.B. a) b) It is suggested to verify the correspondence between the spare unit with that to be replaced as follows: put both Transceivers on a work bench wear the antistatic protection device kit (see Fig. 230. on page 494) and connect its termination to a grounded structure ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) this avoids the possible damage of the electronic devices for electrostatic discharges c) d) e) f) remove COVERPLATE A of both transceivers (see Fig. 80. on page 158). Store tidely cover and screws for successive mounting compare internal composition of transceivers (same types and same P/Ns) verify that dipswitches of spare unit are set as those of the replaced unit (see Fig. 85. on page 161); if different, correct setting of spare unit restore COVERPLATE A of both transceivers ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) The screw tightening torque for fixing the coverplate to the unit must be:
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) " 10 %

Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking or unit damage. 4)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
turn on (position I ) the switch on the new TRANSCEIVER unit front panel (pos. (I1) in Fig. 89. on page 167) as steps 10 ) to 11 ) on page 383.
5)
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 386 / 514
7.7.4.8 TRANSCEIVER repair and replacement procedure N.B.

This procedure must be followed if Transceiver components are available as individual spare parts, as explained in para.7.5.1.2 on page 371.
CONVENTIONS In the following Fig. 194. thru Fig. 201. the following conventions have been applied: connectors and cables: each connector is denoted by a number and letter (e.g. 11A); the two ends of a cable have the same number (e.g. 11A and 11B are the two connectors of the same cable); all cables are twoconnector cables, with the exception of connector depicted in Fig. 195. on page 399. The instructions given in the following for the replacement of internal components require that you consult the correct internal cabling diagram, that depends on the configuration: Tab. 66. Transceiver internal cabling diagram according to configuration
FREQUENCY REUSE DIVERSITY USAGE TR HOUSING
INTERNAL CABLING DIAGRAM Fig. 196. on page 403 Fig. 198. on page 405 Fig. 200. on page 406 Fig. 197. on page 404 Fig. 199. on page 405 Fig. 197. on page 404
N N Y
LO MASTER LO SLAVE
N Y Y
LO MASTER LO SLAVE
the letter T indicates a screw metallic tap on an unused SMA connector. ATTENTION: CAUTIONS TO AVOID EQUIPMENT DAMAGE The following rules must be strictly followed: a) Operator skills For the operations described hereafter, repair Operator must have deep knowledge and experience of electronic repair through subcomponents replacement. Protection against electrostatic discharges During operations described hereafter, repair Operator must always wear the antistatic protection device kit (see Fig. 230. on page 494) and connect its termination to a grounded structure. The screw tightening torque for fixing the subcomponents to the unit must be:
b)
c)
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) " 10 %

Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking or unit damage. d) The SMA connector tightening torque for fixing coaxial cables to the subcomponents must be:
812 kg x cm (0.8 1.2 Newton x m)

Exceeding this value may result in subcomponents connector breaking.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
e)
Coaxial cable handling Coaxial cables should be handled carefully avoiding any excessive bending which could compromise their functionality.
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 387 / 514
GENERAL FLOW CHART a ) Start of procedure (page 389): Faulty Transceiver extraction from shelf Faulty Transceiver opening
Replacement of
b ) Rx or Tx Local Oscillator (page 390) c ) Diversity Receiver (page 392) d ) Main Receiver (page 394) e ) Frequency Reuse kit module (page 395) f ) Transceiver + Main Receiver (page 396) g ) Transceiver (page 401)
h ) End of procedure (page 402): Repaired Transceiver preparing for insertion in shelf Repaired Transceiver insertion in shelf and functional checks
Fig. 190. General flow chart of Transceiver repair procedure
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 388 / 514
Instructions in addition to those given in para.7.7.4.2 on page 382: a)

Start of procedure Proceed as follows: FAULTY TRANSCEIVER EXTRACTION FROM SHELF 1) on the TRANSCEIVER unit to be replaced, turn off (position O ) the switch on the unit front panel (pos. (I1) in Fig. 89. on page 167) ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) For the high current absorbed by the unit, its extraction with its switch in open position could produce electrical arcs that would result in the damage of both the units and backpanels connectors. 2) as steps 2 ) and 3 ) on page 382
FAULTY TRANSCEIVER OPENING 3) 4) put the Transceiver to be repaired on a work bench remove COVERPLATE A (see Fig. 80. on page 158) of the Transceiver to be repaired. Store tidely cover and screws for successive mounting.
NEXT STEP 5) the procedure proceeds according to the component to be replaced: Rx or Tx Local Oscillator Diversity Receiver Main Receiver go to step b ) on page 390 go to step c ) on page 392 go to step d ) on page 394
Frequency Reuse kit module go to step e ) on page 395 Transceiver + Main Receiver go to step f ) on page 396 Transceiver go to step g ) on page 401
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 389 / 514
b)
Replacement of Rx or Tx Local Oscillator The spare subassembly is as in Fig. 191. herebelow.

CONNECTOR FOR FLAT CABLE (10B or 12B)
P/N and Remote Inventory
SMA CONNECTORS
A1
A3 A2
MMCX CONNECTOR Fig. 191. Spare Local Oscillator subassembly N.B. A1, A2, A3 show the position of the three screws fixing the Local Oscillator to the Transceiver. The SMA connectors are used differently according to the use as Rx or Tx LO and according to the Transceiver configuration. SMA connectors are for mounting coaxial cables by screwed connectors. The unused SMA connectors must be closed by suitable metallic screw taps. MMCX connector is used to house a cable connector that is inserted/extracted simply pushing into or pulling out.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 390 / 514
Proceed as follows: REFERENCE INTERNAL CABLING DIAGRAM

1)
according to Tab. 66. on page 387, get the correct transceiver internal cabling diagram according to configuration and use it as reference for successive steps
CHOICE OF UNIT TO REPLACE 2) verify which LO must be replaced (Rx or Tx). Operate on that, in the following steps
FAULTY UNIT EXTRACTION 3) turn off cables connectors present on LOs SMA connectors (but, do not dismount metallic screw taps present on unconnected SMA connectors) pull out cable from MMCX connector pull out flat cable from suitable connector turn off screws A1, A2, A3 and extract the LO; store tidely screws for successive mounting
4) 5) 6)
SPARE UNIT PREPARATION 7) get the spare LO from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that of the component to be replaced (see para.7.5.2 on page 372 for cautions); do not touch the electronic components. N.B. 8) Rx and Tx Local Oscillators must have the same P/N
dismount the metallic screw taps present on SMA connectors of faulty LO and mount them on the same SMA connectors of the spare LO See point d ) on page 387 for tightening torque
SPARE UNIT INSERTION 9) position spare LO inside transceiver and fix it through screws A1, A2, A3
10 ) push flat cable into LOs suitable connector 11 ) push cable into MMCX connector (there is a locked position) 12 ) turn on cables connectors on LOs SMA connectors See point d ) on page 387 for tightening torque NEXT STEP 13 ) go to step h ) on page 402
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 391 / 514
c)
Replacement of Diversity Receiver The spare subassembly is as in Fig. 192. herebelow.

SMA CONNECTOR A1 A2
CONNECTOR FOR FLAT CABLE A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
P/N and Remote Inventory
Fig. 192. Spare Receiver subassembly N.B. A1 to A9 show the position of the three screws fixing the Diversity Receiver to the PLATE COVERING MAIN RECEIVER The SMA connector is for mounting coaxial cable by screwed connector.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 392 / 514

1)
FAULTY UNIT EXTRACTION 2) 3) 4) turn off cables connector present on Diversity Receivers SMA connector (6A) pull out flat cable from suitable connector (7A) turn off screws A1 ... A9 and extract the Diversity Receiver; store tidely screws for successive mounting
SPARE UNIT PREPARATION 5) get the spare Receiver from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that of the component to be replaced (see para.7.5.2 on page 372 for cautions); do not touch the electronic components.
SPARE UNIT INSERTION 6) 7) 8) position spare Receiver inside transceiver and fix it through screws A1 ... A9 push flat cable into Receivers suitable connector (7A) turn on cables connectors on Receivers SMA connector (6A) See point d ) on page 387 for tightening torque
NEXT STEP 9) go to step h ) on page 402
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 393 / 514
d)
Replacement of Main Receiver The spare subassembly is as in Fig. 192. on page 392. Proceed as follows: REFERENCE INTERNAL CABLING DIAGRAM 1) according to Tab. 66. on page 387, get the correct transceiver internal cabling diagram according to configuration and use it as reference for successive steps
EXTRACTION OF DIVERSITY RECEIVER (if equipped) 2) 3) 4) turn off cables connector present on Diversity Receivers SMA connector (6A) pull out flat cable from suitable connector (7A) turn off screws A1 ... A9 and extract the Diversity Receiver; store tidely the Diversity Receiver and its screws for successive mounting
FAULTY MAIN RECEIVER EXTRACTION With reference to Fig. 196. on page 403: 5) 6) 7) 8) remove the plate covering main receiver (8 screws); store tidely cover and screws for successive mounting turn off cables connector present on Main Receivers SMA connector (4B) pull out flat cable from Main Receivers suitable connector (5A) turn off screws A1 ... A9 and extract the Main Receiver; store tidely screws for successive mounting
SPARE MAIN RECEIVER PREPARATION 9) get the spare Receiver from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that of the component to be replaced (see para.7.5.2 on page 372 for cautions); do not touch the electronic components. N.B. Main Receiver and Diversity Receiver must have the same P/N
SPARE MAIN RECEIVER INSERTION With reference to Fig. 196. on page 403: 10 ) position spare Main Receiver inside transceiver and fix it through screws A1 ... A9 11 ) push flat cable into Main Receivers suitable connector (5A) 12 ) turn on cables connectors on Main Receivers SMA connector (4B) See point d ) on page 387 for tightening torque 13 ) position and fix the plate covering main receiver (8 screws) INSERTION OF DIVERSITY RECEIVER (if equipped) With reference to transceiver internal cabling diagram of step 1 ) above: 14 ) position Diversity Receiver inside transceiver and fix it through screws A1 ... A9 15 ) push flat cable into Diversity Receivers suitable connector (7A) 16 ) turn on cables connectors on Diversity Receivers SMA connector (6A) See point d ) on page 387 for tightening torque
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NEXT STEP 17 ) go to step h ) on page 402
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 394 / 514
e)
Replacement of Frequency Reuse kit module The spare subassembly is as in Fig. 193. herebelow. A1
P/N CONNECTOR FOR FLAT CABLE (10C) A3
A2
SMA CONNECTOR (8B)
SMA CONNECTOR (9A) Fig. 193. Spare Frequency Reuse kit module subassembly
A4
N.B. A1 to A4 show the position of the three screws fixing the Frequency Reuse kit module to to the Transceiver The SMA connectors are for mounting coaxial cables by screwed connector. Proceed as follows: REFERENCE INTERNAL CABLING DIAGRAM 1) according to Tab. 66. on page 387, get the correct transceiver internal cabling diagram according to configuration and use it as reference for successive steps
FAULTY UNIT EXTRACTION 2) 3) 4) turn off cables connectors present on Frequency Reuse kit modules SMA connectors (8B and 9A) pull out flat cable from suitable connector (10C) turn off screws A1 .. A4 and extract the module; store tidely screws for successive mounting
SPARE UNIT PREPARATION 5) get the spare module from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that of the component to be replaced (see para.7.5.2 on page 372 for cautions); do not touch the electronic components.
SPARE UNIT INSERTION 6) 7) 8)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
position spare module inside transceiver and fix it through screws A1 ... A4 push flat cable into modules suitable connector (10C) turn on cables connectors on modules SMA connectors (8B and 9A) See point d ) on page 387 for tightening torque
NEXT STEP 9) go to step h ) on page 402
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 395 / 514
f)
Replacement of Transceiver + Main Receiver The spare subassembly is as in Fig. 194. herebelow.
1A
2A
4A*
3A*
MAIN RECEIVER (inside)
PLATE COVERING MAIN RECEIVER
5B*
1B
10B 10A 2B
12A
12B
* For 3B, 4B and 5A see Fig. 196. on page 403 Fig. 194. Spare Transceiver + Main Receiver subassembly This subassembly includes just the internal cabling necessary for the basic configuration (i.e. without diversity and without frequency reuse); this internal cabling corresponds to that depicted in Fig. 196. on page 403. In few words, the procedure (that is detailed in the following) consists of: remotion from the faulty transceiver of the standard components: Rx and Tx Local Oscillators remotion from the faulty transceiver of the optional components, if equipped: Diversity Receiver and associated cabling Frequency Reuse kit module and associated cabling insertion into the spare transceiver and cabling of: the standard components and the optional components, if were equipped in the faulty transceiver
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 396 / 514

1)
PREPARATION OF SPARE TRANSCEIVER + MAIN RECEIVER 2) get the spare spare Transceiver + Main Receiver (Fig. 194. on page 396) from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that of the component to be replaced (N.B.); see para.7.5.2 on page 372 for cautions; do not touch the electronic components. N.B. the P/N label position is shown in Fig. 80. on page 158. This P/N is just that of the Transceiver only. If you wish to verify also the Main Receiver P/N, you should dismount it and then remount as indicated here, with reference to Fig. 196. on page 403: remove the plate covering main receiver (8 screws); store tidely cover and screws for successive mounting turn off cables connector present on Main Receivers SMA connector (4B) pull out flat cable from Main Receivers suitable connector (5A) turn off screws A1 ... A9 and extract the Main Receiver; store tidely screws for successive mounting now you can check the Main Receiver P/N (see Fig. 192. on page 392) position Main Receiver inside transceiver and fix it through screws A1 ... A9 push flat cable into Main Receivers suitable connector (5A) turn on cables connectors on Main Receivers SMA connector (4B) See point d ) on page 387 for tightening torque position and fix the plate covering main receiver (8 screws) remove spare Transceivers COVERPLATE A (see Fig. 80. on page 158). Store tidely cover and screws for successive mounting. accessing the section Hardware setting documentation in this handbook, locate the position of setting switches using the appropriate MSZZQ document (the dipswitch position is shown also in Fig. 85. on page 161) and set these switches on the spare Transceiver exactly as they are set on the faulty Transceiver
3)
4)
REMOTION OF LOCAL OSCILLATORS FROM FAULTY TRANCEIVER With reference to Fig. 191. on page 390 (LO drawing) and Fig. 196. on page 403 (transceiver standard internal cabling) operate on both Rx and Tx Local Oscillators as follows: 5) turn off cables connectors present on LOs SMA connectors (but, do not dismount metallic screw taps present on unconnected SMA connectors) pull out cable from MMCX connector pull out flat cable from suitable connector turn off screws A1, A2, A3 and extract the LO store tidely Rx and Tx Local Oscillators and their screws for successive mounting N.B. Distinguish Rx from Tx LOs, because the use of SMA connectors is different from each other
6) 7) 8)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
9)
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 397 / 514
REMOTION OF DIVERSITY RECEIVER FROM FAULTY TRANCEIVER (if equipped) With reference to Fig. 192. on page 392 (Receiver drawing) and transceiver internal cabling diagram of step 1 ) on page 397, operate on faulty Transceiver as follows: 10 ) DO NOT remove cables connector present on Diversity Receivers SMA connector 6A 11 ) DO NOT remove flat cable from connector 7A 12 ) turn off screws A1 ... A9 and extract the Diversity Receiver together with the flat cable 7A7B and the cable 6A6B connected to it; store tidely the assembly and screws for successive mounting INSERTION OF DIVERSITY RECEIVER INTO SPARE TRANSCEIVER + MAIN RECEIVER (if equipped) With reference to Fig. 192. on page 392 (Receiver drawing) and transceiver internal cabling diagram of step 1 ) on page 397, operate on spare Transceiver + Main Receiver as follows: 13 ) position the Diversity Receiver (together with the flat cable 7A7B and the cable 6A6B connected to it) inside transceiver and fix it through screws A1 ... A9 14 ) position the flat cable 7A7B and insert its connector 7B according to cabling diagram 15 ) position the cable 6A6B according to cabling diagram
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 398 / 514
REMOTION OF FR KIT FROM FAULTY TRANCEIVER (if equipped) With reference to Fig. 193. on page 395 (FR module drawing) and transceiver internal cabling diagram of step 1 ) on page 397, operate on faulty Transceiver as follows:
16 ) DO NOT remove cables connectors present on Frequency Reuse kit modules SMA connector (8B and 9A) 17 ) pull out flat cable from connector10C 18 ) disconnect connector 8A from Transceivers front plate 19 ) turn off screws A1 .. A4 and extract the module together with cables 8B8A and 9A9B connected to it 20 ) extract the 3connector flat cable 10A10B10C shown in Fig. 195. :

10A
10C
10B
Fig. 195. Spare Frequency Reuse kit 3connector flat cable subassembly 21 ) if present (see Fig. 200. and Fig. 201. on page 406) disconnect connector 11A from Transceivers front plate 22 ) store tidely for successive mounting: the module together with cables 8B8A and 9A9B connected to it its screws the flat cable 10A10B10C the cable 11A11B (if equipped) INSERTION OF FR KIT INTO SPARE TRANSCEIVER + MAIN RECEIVER (if equipped) Operate on spare Transceiver + Main Receiver as follows: 23 ) With reference to Fig. 196. on page 403, remove flat cable 10A10B (it is no longer necessary) 24 ) With reference to transceiver internal cabling diagram of step 1 ) on page 397: a) insert flat cable 10A10B10C on Transceivers connectors 10A and 10B and position cable end 10C according to cabling diagram if cable 11A11B was equipped, mount its connector 11A on Transceivers front plate and position cable end 11B according to cabling diagram position module (together with cables 8B8A and 9A9B connected to it) inside transceiver and fix it through screws A1 ... A4 push flat cable into modules connector 10C mount connector 8A on Transceivers front plate position cable end 9B according to cabling diagram
b)
c)
d)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
e) f)
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 399 / 514
INSERTION OF LOCAL OSCILLATORS RECEIVER
INTO SPARE TRANSCEIVER + MAIN
N.B.
Distinguish Rx from Tx LOs, because the use of SMA connectors is different from each other
25 ) position LO inside transceiver and fix it through screws A1, A2, A3 26 ) push flat cable into LOs suitable connector 27 ) push cable into MMCX connector (there is a locked position) 28 ) turn on cables connectors on LOs SMA connectors See point d ) on page 387 for tightening torque NEXT STEP 29 ) go to step h ) on page 402
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 400 / 514
With reference to Fig. 191. on page 390 (LO drawing) and transceiver internal cabling diagram of step 1 ) on page 397, mount the Rx and Tx Local Oscillators (previously removed from faulty Transceiver) on the spare Transceiver + Main Receiver as follows:
g)
Replacement of Transceiver The spare subassembly is similar to that shown in Fig. 194. on page 396. With respect to it, the missing items are: the Main Receiver and the cables 4A4B and 5B5A that belong to the Receiver own part list Proceed as follows: REFERENCE INTERNAL CABLING DIAGRAM 1) as step 1 ) on page 397
PREPARATION OF SPARE TRANSCEIVER 2) as steps 2 ) to 4 ) on page 397
REMOTION OF LOCAL OSCILLATORS FROM FAULTY TRANCEIVER 3) as steps 5 ) to 9 ) on page 397
REMOTION OF DIVERSITY RECEIVER FROM FAULTY TRANCEIVER (if equipped) 4) as steps 10 ) to 12 ) on page 398
REMOTION OF MAIN RECEIVER FROM FAULTY TRANCEIVER With reference to Fig. 192. on page 392 (Receiver drawing) and and Fig. 196. on page 403 (transceiver standard internal cabling) operate on faulty Transceiver as follows: 5) 6) 7) 8) remove the plate covering Main Receiver (8 screws); store tidely cover and screws for successive mounting DO NOT remove cables connector present on Main Receivers SMA connector 4B DO NOT remove flat cable from connector 5A turn off screws A1 ... A9 and extract the Main Receiver together with the flat cable 5A5B and the cable 4B4A connected to it; store tidely the assembly and screws for successive mounting restore the plate covering Main Receiver (8 screws)
9)
INSERTION OF MAIN RECEIVER INTO SPARE TRANSCEIVER With reference to Fig. 192. on page 392 (Receiver drawing) and and Fig. 196. on page 403 (transceiver standard internal cabling) operate on spare Transceiver as follows: 10 ) remove the plate covering Main Receiver (8 screws); store tidely cover and screws for successive mounting 11 ) position the Main Receiver (together with the flat cable 5A5B and the cable 4B4A connected to it) inside transceiver and fix it through screws A1 ... A9 12 ) position the flat cable 5A5B and insert its connector 5B according to cabling diagram 13 ) position the cable 4B4A according to cabling diagram 14 ) restore the plate covering Main Receiver (8 screws) NEXT STEPS 15 ) as steps 13 ) (page 398) thru 29 ) (page 400)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 401 / 514
h)
End of procedure Proceed as follows:

REPAIRED TRANSCEIVER PREPARING FOR INSERTION IN SHELF 1) 2) restore COVERPLATE A of repaired Transceiver (see Fig. 80. on page 158) verify that, on the repaired Transceivers front panel, the switch pos. (I1) in Fig. 89. on page 167 is turned off (position O ) ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) For the high current absorbed by the unit, its insertion with its switch in open position could produce electrical arcs that would result in the damage of both the units and backpanels connectors. REPAIRED TRANSCEIVER INSERTION IN SHELF AND FUNCTIONAL CHECKS 3) 4) as steps 6 ) to 9 ) on page 382383 turn on (position I ) the switch on the new TRANSCEIVER unit front panel (pos. (I1) in Fig. 89. on page 167) as steps 10 ) to 11 ) on page 383.
5)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 402 / 514
WITHOUT DIVERSITY AND WITHOUT FREQUENCY REUSE

main receiver 1A 2A
T1
4A
T3 T4
3A
T6
T7
T8
Rx LO
Tx LO
4B plate covering main receiver
5A
5B
1B
10A
10B
2B
12A
12B
3B
Fig. 196. Transceiver internal connectors for repair 1/6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 403 / 514
WITH DIVERSITY AND WITHOUT FREQUENCY REUSE WITH DIVERSITY AND WITH FREQUENCY REUSE, RX LO SLAVE
T3 1A 6A 2A 6B 4A* T4 3A* T6 T7 T8
Rx LO
Tx LO
diversity receiver
7A
1B 5B* 7B 10A 10B 2B 12B 12A
* For 3B, 4B and 5A see Fig. 196. on page 403
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 404 / 514
WITHOUT DIVERSITY AND WITH FREQUENCY REUSE, RX LO MASTER 9A

10C T1
4A* T3
9B
3A* T6 T7 T8
8A 8B
1A
2A
Rx LO
Tx LO
5B* * For 3B, 4B and 5A see Fig. 196. on page 403
1B
10A
10B
2B
12A
12B
WITH DIVERSITY AND WITH FREQUENCY REUSE, RX LO MASTER (differences with Fig. 198. above) 6A 6B instead of T1
Rx LO
Tx LO
diversity receiver
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
7A
7B
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 405 / 514
WITHOUT DIVERSITY AND WITH FREQUENCY REUSE, RX LO SLAVE 11B 11A 1A 2A T1 4A* T4 3A* T6 T7 T8
Rx LO
Tx LO
5B* * For 3B, 4B and 5A see Fig. 196. on page 403
1B
10A
10B
2B
12A
12B
WITH DIVERSITY AND WITH FREQUENCY REUSE, RX LO SLAVE (differences with Fig. 200. above) 6A 6B instead of T1
Rx LO
Tx LO
diversity receiver
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
7A
7B
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 406 / 514
7.7.4.9 OPTICAL MODULE replacement procedure Instructions in addition to those given in para.7.7.4.2 on page 382:
N.B.
In order to replace an Optical module without replacing the RRA unit housing it, it is not necessary to extract the unit from the shelf. as step 1 ) on page 382 disconnect cables from the module (and, before, the protection cap, if present on the Optical module). Suggestion: before doing it, if no labels are present on the cables, put labels with writings to be able to reconnect them correctly; N.B. to extract Cables 1.0/2.3, use the special extractor (see Fig. 184. on page 360) turn off the two screws fixing the module extract the module insert the spare module and fix it turning on the two screws ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) The screw tightening torque for fixing the modules to the unit must be:
1) 2)
3) 4) 5)
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) " 10 %

Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking. 6) reconnect cables to the module (and, after, fix the protection cap, if it was present on the Optical module). as steps 10 ) to 11 ) on page 383.
7)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 407 / 514
7.7.4.10 Fans Assembled Unit replacement in case of alarm [1] Considerations about MINOR and MAJOR alarms Whenever the alarm regarding Fans Assembled Unit arises, you should be aware of the following: the alarm can be: MINOR for the failure of one fan only of the unit; MAJOR for the failure of two, three or of all the fours fans of the unit; this condition should be considered in conjunction with: the rackhousingroom effective environmental temperature, taking into consideration that the loss of all fans can produce an overtemperature of about 20 0C inside the rack; and the temperature limits specified in para.6.7.1 on page 333. because an excessive internal temperature could decrease the equipment overall MTBF. In conclusion: the Fans Assembled Unit MINOR alarm usually does not require an immediate intervention; nevertheless, in case of alarm, it is suggested to carry out the unit replacement without waiting a very long time. the Fans Assembled Unit MAJOR alarm requires an immediate intervention.
[2]
Replacement procedure 1) 2) 3) as step 1 ) on page 382 Remove FANS SHELFs front plate (see Fig. 92. on page 171) turning off the six screws wear the antistatic protection device kit (see Fig. 230. on page 494) and connect its termination to a grounded structure ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) this avoids the possible damage of the electronic devices for electrostatic discharges 4) Extract the faulty FANS ASSEMBLED UNIT operating the suitable extractor (see Fig. 184. on page 360) inside the units suitable hole (see Fig. 93. on page 172) Insert the spare FANS ASSEMBLED UNIT now you could wear off the antistatic protection device kit Restore FANS SHELFs front plate (see Fig. 92. on page 171) turning on the six screws ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) The screw tightening torque must be:
5) 6) 7)
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) " 10 %

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking. 8) check the system status by LED visual inspection and through the Craft Terminal.
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 408 / 514
7.8 Faulty unit repair and Repair Form 7.8.1 Faulty unit sending back to repair center
Faulty unit repair must be done by authorized repair centers only. According to the policy (under study) described in footnote <1.> on page 370, the units with babyboards (see Tab. 64. on page 370) must be sent back to the repair center together with their babyboards, without dismounting them from the assembly.
7.8.2 Repair Form filling

To facilitate repair operation, data on the faulty unit must be reported on the form shown in Fig. 202. on page 410. The repair form must be filledin with as much data as possible and returned to Alcatel together with the faulty unit.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 409 / 514
ALCATE L
REPAIR FORM
Fill in this form and affix it to the faulty unit to be returned to Alcatel
CUSTOMER NAME ORDER NUMBER/CONTRACT NUMBER
SITE
BRANCH/UNIT/COUNTRY
SYSTEM/EQUIPMENT
PRODUCT RELEASE
EQUIPMENT SOFTWARE PART NUMBER
STATION/RACK
SUBRACK
SLOT
TO BE FILLED IN BY THE SENDER
MNEMONIC
ALCATEL PART NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER
FAULTY UNIT SOFTWARE VERSION
FAULT PHASE
INSTALLATION / TURN ON CLEAR FAULT
REASON FOR REPAIR

DROP IN PERFORMANCE
PRESUMED CAUSE
INTERNAL
LIGHTNING OPERATION INTERMITTENT FAULT UPGRADE/QUALITY ALERT EXTERNAL AIR COND.
MAINTENANCE
TEMPERATURE FAULT
OTHER
DATE FAULT STILL PRESENT AFTER REPAIR
NAME OF SENDER
COMMENTS
TO BE FILLED IN BY THE REPAIR OPERATOR
PROCESSING
NO FAULTS FOUND A STANDARD REPAIRING BD SUBSTITUTED QUALITY ALERT I SX NOTE : LETTERS ARE FOR FACTORY USE NOT REPAIRABLE (REJECTED) M UPGRADE I MECHANICAL V1 SOLDERING / WIRING C
FAULTS DETECTED
COMPONENT FL PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD V1 CORROSION V3 OTHER DIRT V2 ADJUSTMENT P
COMMENTS
DATE
REPAIRING NUMBER
REPAIRING CENTRE
NAME OF REPAIR OPERATOR
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 202. Repair form
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 410 / 514
FREQUENCY PLANS & PART NUMBERS

SECTION CONTENT Chapter 8 Introduction to section Frequency Plans & Part Numbers Chapter 9 9640LSY Chapter 10 9647LSY Chapter 11 9662LSY Chapter 12 9667LSY Chapter 13 9674LSY Chapter 14 9681LSY Chapter 15 9610LSY Chapter 16 9611LSY
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
PAGE 413 415 425 429 433 435 447 453 455 459
Chapter 17 9613LSY
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 411 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
412 / 514
8 INTRODUCTION TO SECTION FREQUENCY PLANS & PART NUMBERS

In this section, the Part Numbers and the Remote Inventory Labels of the frequencydependent items (transceiver components) are given. The transceiver components are described in para.3.7.2 thru 3.7.4 on pages 156 thru 161. N.B. : for frequencyindependent items please refer to Tab. 13. on page 122. Moreover, the channel plans utilized with 9600 LSY radios and criteria to be taken into account for the use of each specific one are described, according to the following general notes: The main parameters affecting the choice of radiofrequency channel arrangements, according to ITUR Rec. F.746, are : CS Channel Separation between two consecutive centre frequencies for the related alternated radiofrequency channel arrangement: it is also considered equal to the Channel Bandwidth. defined as the radiofrequency separation between the centre frequencies of adjacent radiofrequency channels on the same polarization and in the same direction of transmission: so XS is equal to twice the CS for the alternated radio frequency channel arrangement and is equal to the CS for the cochannel band reuse radio frequency channel arrangement (please consider that an alternated frequency channel arrangement may be further implemented with cochannel band reuse). Tx/Rx Duplex Spacing, defined as the radiofrequency separation between corresponding go and return channels, constant for each couple of ith and ith frequencies, within a given channel arrangement. defined as the frequency of the centre of the band of frequencies occupied. reference frequency of the homogeneous pattern.
XS
DS
f fr
Main spectrum utilization characteristics for each frequency band of the 9600 LSY family are summarized in Tab. 67. on page 414. In general, the equipment of this family may work, in case of for STM1 stream, in cochannel frequency reuse operation (CCDP), utilizing the XPIC unit, allowing the transmission of 2 x STM1 signals on a single RF channel. Reused configurations are not foreseen for STM0 capacity.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 413 / 514
Tab. 67. Implemented radiofrequency channel arrangements and list of Chapters

SYSTEM FREQUENCY (GHz) 3.64.2 3.64.2 9640 LSY (L4) 3.84.2 3.84.2 3.64.2 3.64.2 3.43.9 4.45.0 9647 LSY (U4) 4.45.0 5.9256.425 5.6756.179 6.4257.11 7.117.44 7.447.75 7.4287.897 9674 LSY 7.4257.725 7.117.44 7.247.56 7.417.74 7.7258.275 9681 LSY 8.2758.5 7.98.4 9610 LSY 10.02810.630 10.711.7 9611 LSY 9613 LSY 10.711.7 12.75 13.25 ITUR FREQ. PLAN ITUR F.635 ANNEX 1 fig.3 ITUR F.635 recommends 1 (Finland) ITUR F.382 ITUR F.382 extended DTI (United Kingdom) ITUR F.635 ANNEX 1 fig.6 OIRT ITUR F.1099635 ANNEX 1 fig.2 Spain Defence Department ITUR F.383, CEPT T/R 1401 OIRT ITUR F.384, CEPT T/R 1402 ITUR F.385 ANNEX 3 L ITUR F.385 ANNEX 3 H ITUR F.385 ANNEX 4 ITUR F.385 ANNEX 1 ITUR F.385 rec. 1L ITUR F.385 rec. 1M ITUR F.385 rec. 1H ITUR F.386 ANNEX 1 ITUR F.386 ANNEX 3 ITUR F.386 ANNEX 4 MEDIASET ITUR F.387 rec. 1 ITUR F.387 ANNEX 2 ITUR F.497 rec. 1 CHANNEL SPACING (MHz) 40 40 29 29 28 30 28 40 28 29.65 28 40 28 28 14 28 28 14 28 14 28 14 28 29.65 14 28 14 28 28 40 40 14 28 SDH TRANSPORT STM1 STM1 STM1 STM1 STM1 STM1 STM1 STM1 STM1 STM1 STM1 STM1 STM1 STM1 STM0 / STM1 STM1 STM0 / STM1 STM0 / STM1 STM0 / STM1 STM1 STM0 / STM1 STM0 / STM1 STM1 STM1 STM1 STM0 / STM1 15 on page 453 16 on page 455 17 on page 459 14 on page 447 13 on page 435 10 on page 425 9 on page 415 CHAPTER
9662 LSY (L6) 9667 LSY (U6)
11 on page 429 12 on page 433
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 414 / 514
9 9640LSY 9.1 9640LSY part list

Tab. 68. 9640LSY Transceiver Part List Label for Remote Inventory MAX Qty
NAME
ANV P/N
Factory P/N
9640LSY TRANSCEIVER N.B. Refer to para.para.3.7.2 thru 3.7.4 on pages 156 thru 161. for summary information on transceiver composition and equipping notes 3DB02524AA 411200543 4L128T 8
3,64,2 GHZ. TRANSCEIVER 128QAM 3,44,2 GHZ RECEIVER 9640LSY L.O. 9640LSY OIRT L.O. TR. FREQUENCY REUSE KIT
3DB02513AA 3DB02668AA 3DB02667AA 3DB03830AA
474210265 474210292 474210291 299702973
4L128R 4LLO 4LLOOIR
16 16 16 4
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 415 / 514
9.2 9640LSY frequency plans

The possible channel plans to be used with 9640LSY equipment, for the exploitation of the 3.6 to 4.2 GHz or 3.8 to 4.2 GHz bands, are shown in the figures from Fig. 203. to Fig. 209. : Channel plan A) is completely defined by the fig.3/Annex 1 of ITUR Recommendation F.635. Channel plan B) is derived from the general formula defined in recommends 1 of the same Recommendation. Channel plan C) ) is completely defined by the ITUR Recommendation F.382. Channel plan D) is an extended plan derived from the same Recommendation Channel plan E) is used in UK, and is defined by DTI (Department of Trade and Industry). Channel plan F) is defined in ITUR Recommendation F.635, Annex I, fig.6, Channel plan G) is a specific channel plan for the OIRT (Russia)
Warning: because of the third order intermodulation product caused by the antenna circulator, the utilization of high power amplifiers is allowed only utilizing channel plans with alternate polarized channels. It means that, in general, no reused channels can be used. Channel plans A and B See Fig. 203. on page 418 and Fig. 204. on page 419. Both channels are based on a frequency channel spacing of 40 MHz. 9640LSY can work in frequency reuse operation (CCDP) by utilization of XPIC unit, allowing the transmission of 14xSTM1 signals, the maximum system configuration being 2 x (6 + 1). In this case each RF channel is contemporary used on H and V polarization, requiring double Polarises antennas. The minimum frequency distance between two adjacent channels on the same branching is 40 MHz. All the odd and even channels can be connected to the same antenna polarization. In case of simple transmission of a single STM 1 per RF frequency, channel plan A) and B) allow the use of a single Polarises antenna up to a 6+1 system configurations . Channel plan C Channel plan in Fig. 205. on page 420 is completely defined, for the exploitation of the 3.84.2 GHz band, by ITUR Recommendation F.382, fig.3, with the center frequency by recommends 6 (or recommends 5, for the interleaved channels).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 416 / 514
Channel plan D See Fig. 206. on page 421. This channel plan is used in certain countries, where the 3.63.8 GHz band is also available, to allows the exploitation of the 3.64.2 band by the addition of three RF channels. This channel plan then allows, theoretically, the use of a system with 9 go and return channels, but the actual limit of the 9600LSY system is of using separately channels from A to C with an up to 2+1 system or channels from 1 to 6 with an up to 5+1 system. Channel plans are based on a frequency channel spacing of 29 MHz and 9640LH may work in frequency reuse operation (CCDP) up to 2x(5+1) system configuration. In this case each RF channel is contemporary used on H and V polarizations always requiring double polarized antennas . In case of simple transmission of a single STMI per RF frequency, channel plans allow the use of a single Polarises antenna up to a 2+ 1 system configuration (using double Polarises antennas the limit is 5+1). These limits are derived from the minimum distance between adjacent channels on the same branching, equal to 58 MHz in this case and from the maximum of 7+1 for the multichannel protection system Channel plan E Channel plan in Fig. 207. on page 422 is used in UK, and is defined by DTI (Department of Trade and Industry). This channel plan is based on 28 MHz channel spacing. Limit for a multichannel system is 4+1, using single polarized antenna, and 7+1 using double polarized antenna. These limits are derived from the minimum distance between adjacent channels on the same branching, equal to 56 MHz in this case, and from the maximum of 7+ l of the multichannel protection system. Channel plan F Channel plan in Fig. 208. on page 423 has been recently defined (January 97) in ITUR Recommendation F.635, Annex 1, fig.6, for the exploitation of the 3.64.2 GHz band and adopted by Italian administration. It allows 9 go and return channels spaced 30 MHz with a centre gap of 80 MHz. 9640LH can work in this plan with frequency reuse operation (CCDP), by means of the XPIC unit, allowing the transmission of 2xSTM1 signals per RF channel [up to 2x(7+1)]. In this case each RF channel is contemporary used on H and V polarization always requiring double polarized antennas. In case of simple transmission of a single STM I per RF frequency, channel plans in Figure 15. at page 53 allows the use of up to a 4+1 system configuration on a single polarized antenna . Using double polarized antennas the limit is 7+1 (these limits are derived from the minimum distance between adjacent channels on the same branching, equal to 60 MHz in this case, and from the maximum of 7+1 for the multichannel protection system). Channel plan G Channel plan shown in Fig. 209. on page 424 is used in Russia and is defined by OIRT. It is based on 28 MHz channel spacing and can be used also in CCDP operation. Limits for a multichannel system are 3+1 using single polarized antenna and 7+1 using double polarized antenna.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 417 / 514
9640 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR Recommendation F.635. fig.3/Annex 1 STM1 ITUR F 635 CS=40 DS=320 fn=f0320+40n fn=f0+40n, f0=3900, n : from 1 to 7 LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Freq. [MHz] 3620 3660 3700 3740 3780 3820 3860 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Freq. [MHz] 3940 3980 4020 4060 4100 4140 4180
3620
3700
3780
3860
3940
4020
4100
4180
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5
6 7 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
3660
3740
3820
3980
4060
4140
f0 = 3900 Fig. 203. 9640 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR Recommendation F.635. fig.3/Annex 1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 418 / 514
9640 LSY Channel plan B: ITUR F.635 recommends 1
ITUR F 635 STM1 CS=40 DS=320 fn=f0320+40n fn=f0+40n, f0=3890, n : from 1 to 7 LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Freq. [MHz] 3610 3650 3690 3730 3770 3810 3850 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Freq. [MHz] 3930 3970 4010 4050 4090 4130 4170
3610
3690
3770
3850
3970
4050
4130
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
1 2
3 4
5 6
3650
3730
3810
3930
4010
4090
4170
f0 = 3890 Fig. 204. 9640 LSY Channel plan B: ITUR F.635 recommends 1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 419 / 514
9640 LSY Channel plan C: ITUR Recommendation F.382
ITUR F.382 STM1 CS=29 ; DS=213 fn=f0208+29n fn=f0+5+29n f0=4003.5 n : from 1 to 6 LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 Freq. [MHz] 3824,5 3853,5 3882,5 3911,5 3940,5 3969,5 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 Freq. [MHz] 4037,5 4066,5 4095,5 4124,5 4153,5 4182,5
ITUR F.382 STM1 CS=29 ; DS=213 fn=f0208+29n fn=f0+5+29n f0=3989 n : from 1 to 6 LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 Freq. [MHz] 3810 3839 3868 3897 3926 3955 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 Freq. [MHz] 4023 4052 4081 4110 4139 4168
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5
6 1
2 3
4 5
f0 = 4003.5 N.B. Note: Dotted arrows indicate interleaved channels. Each channel is 14.5 MHz lower than the correspondent main plan channel. Fig. 205. 9640 LSY Channel plan C: ITUR Recommendation F.382
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 420 / 514
NORMAL CHANNELS
INTERLEAVED CHANNELS
9640 LSY Channel plan D: ITUR F. 382 (Extended ) Recommendation NORMAL CHANNELS
INTERLEAVED CHANNELS ITUR F.382 EXTENDED STM1 CS=29 ; DS=213 fn=f0208+29n fn=f0+5+29n f0=3989 n : from 1 to 6 LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 Freq. [MHz] 3810,0 3839,0 3868,0 3897,0 3926,0 3955,0 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 Freq. [MHz] 4023,0 4052,0 4081,0 4110,0 4139,0 4168,0
ITUR F.382 EXTENDED STM1 CS=29 ; DS=213 fn=f0208+29n fn=f0+5+29n f0=4003.5 n : from 1 to 6 LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 Freq. [MHz] 3824,5 3853,5 3882,5 3911,5 3940,5 3969,5 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 Freq. [MHz] 4037,5 4066,5 4095,5 4124,5 4153,5 4182,5
f0=3703,5 MHz fn=f0121+29n fn=f0+5+29n n : from 1 to 3 A B C 3611,5 3640,5 3669,5 A B C 3737,5 3766,5 3795,5 A B C
f0=3689 MHz; fn=f0121+29n fn=f0+5+29n n : from 1 to 3 3597,0 3626,0 3655,0 A B C 3723,0 3752,0 3781,0
f0 = 3689
3611.5 3669.5 3766.5 3824.5 3882.5
f0 = 3989
3940.5 4037.5 4095.5 4153.5
H (V) V (H) A
B C
A B
C 1
2 3
4 5
6 1
2 3
4 5
f0 = 3703.5 N.B.
f0 = 4003.5
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Dotted arrows indicate interleaved channels. Each channel is 14.5 MHz lower than the correspondent main plan channel. Fig. 206. 9640 LSY Channel plan D: ITUR F. 382 (Extended ) Recommendation
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 421 / 514
9640 LSY Channel plan E: DTI channel plan
LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Freq. [MHz] 3633,0 3661,0 3689,0 3717,0 3745,0 3773,0 3801,0 3829,0 3857,0
UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Freq. [MHz] 3941,0 3969,0 3997,0 4025,0 4053,0 4081,0 4109,0 4137,0 4165,0
3633
3689
3745
3801
3857
3941
3997
4053
4109
4165
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 9 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 9
3661
3717
3773
3829
3969
4025
4081
4137
f0 = 3899 Fig. 207. 9640 LSY Channel plan E: DTI channel plan
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 422 / 514
DTI STM1 CS=28 DS=308 fn=f0294+28n fn=f0+14+28n, f0=3899 n : from 1 to 9
9640 LSY Channel plan F: ITUR Recommendation F.635, Annex 1, fig.6
ITUR F 635 Annex1 fig.6. STM1 CS=30 DS=320 fn=f0310+30n fn=f0+10+30n, f0=3900 n : from 1 to 9 LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Freq. [MHz] 3620 3650 3680 3710 3740 3770 3800 3830 2860 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Freq. [MHz] 3940 3970 4000 4030 4060 4090 4120 4150 4180
3620
3680
3740
3800
3860
3940
4000
4060
4120
4180
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 9 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 9
3650
3710
3770
3830
3970
4030
4090
4150
f0 = 3900 Fig. 208. 9640 LSY Channel plan F: ITUR Recommendation F.635, Annex 1, fig.6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 423 / 514
9640 LSY Channel plan G: O.I.R.T. (Russia)
LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Freq. [MHz] 3422,5 3450,5 3478,5 3506,5 3534,5 3562,5 3590,5 3618,5
UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Freq. [MHz] 3688,5 3716,5 3744,5 3772,5 3800,5 3828,5 3856,5 3884,5
3450.5
3506.5
3562.5
3618.5
3716.5
3772.5
3828.5
3884.5
H (V) V (H)
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
3422.5
3478.5
3534.5
3590.5
3688.5
3744.5
3800.5
3856.5
f0 = 3653.5 Fig. 209. 9640 LSY Channel plan G: O.I.R.T. (Russia)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 424 / 514
O.I.R.T. STM1 CS=28 DS=266 fn=f0310+30n fn=f0+7+28n, f0=3653,5 n : from 1 to 8

NAME
ANV P/N
Factory P/N
9647LSY TRANSCEIVER N.B. Refer to para.para.3.7.2 thru 3.7.4 on pages 156 thru 161. for summary information on transceiver composition and equipping notes 3DB02526AA 411200545 4U128T 8
4,45,0 GHZ. TRANSCEIVER 128QAM 4,35,0 GHZ RECEIVER 9647LSY L.O. TR. FREQUENCY REUSE KIT
3DB02512AA 3DB02669AA 3DB03830AA
474210264 474210292 299702973
4U128R 4ULO
16 16 4

In Fig. 210. and Fig. 211. the channel plans for the 9647LSY equipment to be used for the exploitation of the 4.4 to 5.0 GHz band are shown. The channel plan shown in Fig. 210. on page 426 is completely defined by the fig.2/Annex 1 of ITUR Recommendation F.1099. This channel plan is based on a frequency channel spacing of 40 MHz. 9647LSY can work with frequency reuse operation (CCDP) allowing the transmission of 14xSTM1 signals [max system configuration being 2 x (6 + 1)]. In this case each RF channel is contemporary used on H and V polarization, requiring double polarized antennas. The minimum frequency gap between two adjacent channels on the same branching is 40 MHz and all the odd and even channels can be connected to the same polarization of the antenna . Note that, even in case of transmission of a single STM1 per RF carrier, this channel plan requires always the use of double polarized antenna due to the different polarization of the go and return channel. The channel plan shown in Fig. 211. on page 427 is a specific channel plan used in Spain by the Spanish defence department and it is based on a 28 MHz channel spacing. Warning: because of the third order intermodulation product caused by the antenna circulator, the utilization of high power amplifiers is allowed only utilizing channel plans alternate polarized channels. It means that, in general, no reused channels can be used.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 425 / 514
9647 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR Recommendation F.1099, Annex 1, fig. 2
LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Freq. [MHz] 4430 4470 4510 4550 4590 4630 4670
UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Freq. [MHz] 4730 4770 4810 4850 4890 4930 4970
4430
4510
4590
4670
4770
4850
4930
H (V) (MHz) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
1 2
3 4
5 6
4470
4550
4630
4730
4810
4890
4970
f0 = 4700 Fig. 210. 9647 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR Recommendation F.1099, Annex 1, fig. 2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 426 / 514
STM1 ITUR F 1099 CS=40 DS=310 fn=f0310+40n fn=f010+40n, f0=4700, n : from 1 to 7
9647 LSY Channel plan B: Spain Defence
STM1 128 QAM SPAIN DEFENCE CS=28 DS=314 fn=f0307+28n fn=f0+7+28n f0=4700, n : from 1 to 9 LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Freq. [MHz] 4421 4449 4477 4505 4533 4561 4589 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Freq. [MHz] 4735 4763 4791 4819 4847 4875 4903
4421
4477
4533
4589
4645
4735
4791
4847
4903
4959
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 9 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 9
4449
4505
4561
4617
4763
4819
4875
4931
f0 = 4700 N.B. Channels 2, 8, 2, 8 are used for low capacity transmission only. Fig. 211. 9647 LSY Channel plan B: Spain Defence
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 427 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
428 / 514

NAME
ANV P/N
Factory P/N
9662LSY TRANSCEIVER N.B. Refer to para.para.3.7.2 thru 3.7.4 on pages 156 thru 161. for summary information on transceiver composition and equipping notes 3DB01264AA 411200518 6L128T 8
3DB01268AA 3DB02670AA 3DB03830AA
474210145 474210294 299702973
6+128R 6LLO
16 16 4

In Fig. 212. on page 430 the channel plan for the 9662LSY equipment to be used for the exploitation of the 5.925 to 6.425 GHz band is shown. This channel plan (based on 29.65 MHz channel spacing) is completely defined by the ITUR Recommendation F.383, using the alternate polarization arrangement defined in recommend 3, and by the CEPT T/R 1401. Another feasible specific channel plan (based on 28 MHz channel spacing) for the OIRT (Russia) is shown in Fig. 213. on page 431, allowing also the associated 14 MHz shifted pattern. 9662LSY may work in the above plans by cochannel frequency reuse operation (CCDP) with the XPIC unit allowing the transmission of 2xSTM1 signals per RF channel. In this case each RF channel is contemporary used on H and V polarizations always requiring an external double polarized antenna. Warning: because of the third order intermodulation product caused by the antenna circulator, the utilization of high power amplifiers is allowed only utilizing channel plans alternate polarized channels. It means that, in general, no reused channels can be used. In case of transmission of a single STM1 per RF frequency, channel plans allow the use of a single polarized antenna up to 3+1/4+0 system configuration and using a double polarized antenna up to 7+1/8+0 system configuration.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 429 / 514
9662 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR F 383
LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Freq. [MHz] 5945,20 5974,85 6004,50 6034,15 6063,80 6093,45 6123,10 6152,75
UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Freq. [MHz] 6197,24 6226,89 6256,54 6286,19 6315,84 6345,49 6375,14 6404,79
5945.20
6004.50
6063.80
6123.10
6197.24
6256.54
6315.84
6375.14
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
5974.85
6034.15
6093.45
6152.75
6226.89
6286.19
6345.49
6404.79
f0 = 6175 Fig. 212. 9662 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR F 383
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 430 / 514
ITUR F 383 STM1 fn=f0259.45+29.65n fn=f07.41+29.65n CS=29.65 DS=252.04 f0=6175 n: from 1 to 8
9662 LSY Channel plan B: O.I.R.T.
NORMAL CHANNELS O.I.R.T. STM1 fn=f0259+28n fn=f0+7+28n 036 CS=28 DS=266 f0=5920 n: from 1 to 8 LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Freq. [MHz] 5689 5717 5745 5773 5801 5829 5857 5885 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Freq. [MHz] 5955 5983 6011 6039 6067 6095 6123 6151
INTERLEAVED CHANNELS O.I.R.T. STM1 fn=f0259+28n fn=f0+7+28n CS=28 DS=266 f0=5934 n: from 1 to 8 LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Freq. [MHz] 5703 5731 5759 5787 5815 5843 5871 5899 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Freq. [MHz] 5969 5997 6025 6053 6081 6109 6137 6165
H (V) (MHz) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
f0 = 5920 N.B. Dotted arrows indicate interleaved channels. Each channel is 14 MHz higher than correspondent main channel. Fig. 213. 9662 LSY Channel plan B: O.I.R.T.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 431 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
432 / 514

NAME
ANV P/N
Factory P/N
9667LSY TRANSCEIVER N.B. Refer to para.para.3.7.2 thru 3.7.4 on pages 156 thru 161. for summary information on transceiver composition and equipping notes 3DB01265AA 411200519 6U128T 8
3DB01268AA 3DB02671AA 3DB03830AA
474210145 474210295 299702973
6+128R 6ULO
16 16 4

In Fig. 214. on page 434 the channel plan for the 9667 LSY equipment to be used for the exploitation of the 6.4 to 7.1 GHz band is shown. This channel plan (based on 40 MHz channel spacing) is completely defined by the ITUR Recommendation F.384 . The only difference between the two plans is that in plan a) the go and return channels have different polarization and in plan b) the polarization is the same. In case of transmission of a single STM1 per RF frequency, channel plan a) requires the use of a double polarized antenna even in case of 1+0 system, due to the different polarization of the Go and return channel. On the contrary, channel plan b) allows the use of a single polarized antenna up to 3+1 system configuration (in both cases max system configuration is 7+1 using double polarized antenna). 9667LSY may work in the above plans by cochannel frequency reuse operation (CCDP) with the XPIC unit allowing the transmission of 2xSTM1 signals per RF channel. In this case each RF channel is contemporary used on H and V polarization always requiring a double polarized antenna. Warning: because of the third order intermodulation product caused by the antenna circulator, the utilization of high power amplifiers is allowed only utilizing channel plans alternate polarized channels. It means that, in general, no reused channels can be used.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 433 / 514
9667 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR F.384, CEPT T/R 1402 ITUR F.384 STM1 CS=40 ; DS=340 fn=f0350+40n fn=f010+40n f0=6770 n : from 1 to 8 LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Channel plan a)
6460 6540 6620 6700 6840 6920 7000 7080
UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Freq. [MHz] 6800 6840 6880 6920 6960 7000 7040 7080
Freq. [MHz] 6460 6500 6540 6580 6620 6660 6700 6740
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
6500
6580
6660
6740
6800
6880
6960
7040
f0 = 6770 Channel plan b)

6460 6540 6620 6700 6800 6880 6960 7040
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
6500
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
6580
6660
6740
6840
6920
7000
7080
f0 = 6770 Fig. 214. 9667 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR F.384, CEPT T/R 1402
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 434 / 514

NAME
ANV P/N
Factory P/N
9674LSY TRANSCEIVER N.B. Refer to para.para.3.7.2 thru 3.7.4 on pages 156 thru 161. for summary information on transceiver composition and equipping notes 3DB02531AA 3DB02533AA 3DB02672AA 3DB03830AA 411200547 474210268 474210296 299702973 07128T 7+128R 07LO 8 16 16 4
7,17,7 GHZ TRANSCEIVER 128QAM 7,18,5 GHZ RECEIVER 9674LSY L.O. TR. FREQUENCY REUSE KIT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 435 / 514

In the figures from Fig. 215. to Fig. 220. the possible channel plans for the 9674 LSY equipment to be used for the exploitation of the 7.1 to 7.9 GHz bands are shown. These channel plans are all based on ITUR Recommendation F.385, with the following details: Fig. 215. on page 437: ITUR F.385 Annex 3 L&H : based on 28 MHz channel spacing, in case of transmission of a single STM1 per RF frequency, channel plans allow the use of a single polarized antenna up to a 2+1/3+0 system configuration and of a double polarized antenna up to a 4+1/5+0 system configuration. Shifted pattern 14 MHz lower is available as well. 9674LSY may work in the above plan by cochannel frequency reuse operation (CCDP) utilizing the XPIC unit allowing the transmission of 2xSTM1 signals per RF channel. In this case each RF channel is contemporary used on H and V polarization always requiring a double polarized antenna. Fig. 216. on page 438: ITUR F.385 Annex 4 :It is used in UK and It is defined By DTI (Department of Trade and Industry). Based on 28 MHz channel spacing, in case of simple transmission of a single STM1 per RF frequency, channel plans allow the use of a single polarized antenna up to a 3+1/4+0 system configuration and up to 7+1/8+0 using double polarized antennas. 9674LSY may work in the above plan by cochannel frequency reuse operation (CCDP) utilizing the XPIC unit allowing the transmission of 2xSTM1 signals per RF channel. In this case each RF channel is contemporary used on H and V polarization always requiring a double polarized antenna. 14 MHz channel spacing is available as well to support the STM0 signal. Fig. 217. on page 440: ITUR F.385 Annex 1 :based on 28 MHz channel spacing, in case of simple transmission of a single STM1 per RF frequency, channel plans allow the use of a single polarized antenna up to a 1+1/2+0 system configuration and up to 3+1 using double polarized antennas, due to the narrow distance between the innermost channels (42 MHz). 9674LSY may work in the above plan by cochannel frequency reuse operation (CCDP) utilizing the XPIC unit allowing the transmission of 2xSTM1 signals per RF channel. In this case each RF channel is contemporary used on H and V polarization always requiring a double polarized antenna. Warning: because of the narrow distance between channels 8 and 1, with F. 385 Annex 1 channel plan, the utilization of these channels connected to the same branching is not allowed. Fig. 218. on page 441: ITUR F.385 Rec. 1L Fig. 219. on page 443: ITUR F.385 Rec. 1M Fig. 220. on page 445: ITUR F.385 Rec. 1H Based on 28 MHz channel spacing, in case of simple transmission of a single STM1 per RF frequency, channel plans allow the use of a single polarized antenna up to a 1+1/2+0 system and of a double polarized antenna up to a 3+1/4+0 system configuration. This limit is due to the narrow frequency distance between the innermost channels (49 MHz), not sufficient being these channels on the same antenna polarization. Three shifted patterns 7 MHz higher are available as well. LSY may work in the above plan by cochannel frequency reuse operation (CCDP) utilizing the XPIC unit allowing the transmission of 2xSTM1 signals per RF channel. In this case each RF channel is contemporary used on H and V polarization always requiring a double polarized antenna. MHz channel spacing is also available to support the STM0 signal. Shifted pattern (7 MHz higher) is available as well. N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
F385 Rec. 1M in particular supports the channel plan GPR11 (OIRTRussia) that utilizes the channels 1int3, 2int3, 3int3, 4int3 and 5int3 (and correspondent 1int3, 2int3, 3int3, 4int3 and 5int3 return channels) as main channels and 1int1, 2int1, 3int1, 4int1 and 5int1 and (correspondent 1int1, 2int1, 3int1, 4int1 and 5int1 return channels) as interleaved channels.
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 436 / 514
9674 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR F.385 Annex 3 L&H ITUR F.385 ANNEX 3 L STM1 CS=28 DS=196 fn=f0182+28n fn=f0+14+28n f0=7275 n: from1 to 5 LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1i 1 2i 2 3i 3 4i 4 5i 5 Freq. [MHz] 7107 7121 7135 7149 7163 7177 7191 7205 7219 7233 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 i 1 2 i 2 3 i 3 4 i 4 5 i 5 Freq. [MHz] 7303 7317 7331 7345 7359 7373 7387 7401 7415 7429 ITUR F.385 ANNEX 3 H STM1 CS=28 DS=196 fn=f0168+28n fn=f0+28n f0=7597 n: from1 to 5 LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1i 1 2i 2 3i 3 4i 4 5i 5 Freq. [MHz] 7443 7457 7471 7485 7499 7513 7527 7541 7555 7569 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 i 1 2 i 2 3 i 3 4 i 4 5 i 5 Freq. [MHz] 7611 7625 7639 7653 7667 7681 7695 7709 7723 7737
ITUR F.385 ANNEX 3L

7107 7121 7163 7177 7219 7233 7303 7317 7359 7373 7415 7429
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5 1
2 3
4 5
7135
7149
7191
7205
7331
f0 = 7275
7345
7387
7401
ITUR F.385 ANNEX 3H

7443 7457 7499 7513 7555 7569 7611 7625 7667 7681 7723 7737
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5 1
2 3
4 5
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
7471
7485
7527
7541
7639
f0 = 7597
7653
7695
7709
Fig. 215. 9674 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR F.385 Annex 3 L&H
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 437 / 514
9674 LSY Channel plan B: ITUR F.385 Annex 4
LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Freq. [MHz] 7435 7449 7463 7477 7491 7505 7519 7533 7547 7561 7575 7589 7603 7617 7631 7645
UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Freq. [MHz] 7680 7694 7708 7722 7736 7750 7764 7778 7792 7806 7820 7834 7848 7862 7876
LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel Freq. [MHz] 7442
UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel Freq. [MHz] 7687
7470
7715
7498
7743
7526
7771
7554
7799
7582
7827
7610
7855
8 7890
7638
7883
Fig. 216. 9674 LSY Channel plan B: ITUR F.385 Annex 4 Fig. 216. continues ...
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 438 / 514
ITUR F.385 ANNEX 4 STM0 fn=f0241.5+14n fn=f0+3.5+14n CS=14 DS=245 f0=7662.5 n: from1 to 16
ITUR F.385 ANNEX 4 STM1 fn=f0248.5+28n fn=f03.5+28n CS=28 DS=245 f0=7662.5 n: from1 to 8
... Fig. 216. continues
STM0
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel. 7435 7463 7491 7519 7547 7575 7603 7631 7680 7708 7736 7764 7792 7820 7848 7876
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 9
10 11
12 13
14 15
16 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 9
10 11
12 13
14
16 15
7449 7477 7505 7533 7561 7589
7617
7645
7694 7722 7750 7778 7806 7834
7862 7890
f0 = 7662.5
STM1
7442 7498 7554 7610 7687 7743 7799 7855
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
7470
7526
7582
7638
7715
7771
7827
7883
f0 = 7662.5
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 439 / 514
9674 LSY Channel plan C: ITUR F.385 Annex 1
LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 1i 2 2i 3 3i 4 4i 5 5i Freq. [MHz] 7442 7456 7470 7484 7498 7512 7526 7540 7554 7568
UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 1 i 2 2 i 3 3 i 4 4 i 5 5 i Freq. [MHz] 7596 7610 7624 7638 7652 7666 7680 7694 7708 7722
7442
7456
7498
7512
7554
7568
7596
7610
7652
7666
7708
7722
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5 1
2 3
4 5
7470
7484
7526
7540
7624
7638
7680
7694
f0 = 7575 Fig. 217. 9674 LSY Channel plan C: ITUR F.385 Annex 1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 440 / 514
ITUR F.385 ANNEX 1 STM1 fn=f0161+28n fn=f07+28n CS=28 DS=154 f0=7575 n: from1 to 5
9674 LSY Channel plan D: ITUR F.385 Rec. 1L
ITUR F.385 rec. 1 L STM0 fn=f0161+14n fn=f0+14n CS=14 DS=161 f0=7275 n : from 1 to 10 LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 1i 2 2i 3 3i 4 4i 5 5i 6 6i 7 7i 8 8i 9 9i 10 10 i Freq. [MHz] 7128 7135 7142 7149 7156 7163 7170 7177 7184 7191 7198 7205 7212 7219 7226 7233 7240 7247 7254 7261 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 1 i 2 2 i 3 3 i 4 4 i 5 5 i 6 6 i 7 7 i 8 8 i 9 9 i 10 10 i Freq. [MHz] 7289 7296 7303 7310 7317 7324 7331 7338 7345 7352 7359 7366 7373 7380 7387 7394 7401 7408 7415 7422
ITUR F.385 rec. 1 L STM1 fn=f0175+28n fn=f014+28nn CS=28 DS=161 f0=7275 n : from 1 to 5 LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 1int1 1int2 1int3 2 2int1 2int2 2int3 3 4int1 4int2 4int3 5 5int1 5int2 5int3 6 6int1 6int2 6int3 Freq. [MHz] 7128 7135 7142 7149 7156 7163 7170 7177 7184 7191 7198 7205 7212 7219 7226 7233 7240 7247 7254 7261 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 1int1 1int2 1int3 2 2int1 2int2 2int3 3 3int1 3int2 3int3 4 4int1 4int2 4int3 5 5int1 5int2 5int3 Freq. [MHz] 7289 7296 7303 7310 7317 7324 7331 7338 7345 7352 7359 7366 7373 7380 7387 7394 7401 7408 7415 7422
Fig. 218. 9674 LSY Channel plan D: ITUR F.385 Rec. 1L

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 218. continues ...
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 441 / 514
STM0
7128 7135 H (V) V (H)
7156 7184 7212 7163 7191 7219
7240 7247
7289 7296
7317 7345 7373 7324 7352 7380
7401 7408
7142 7149
7170 7198 7177 7205
7226 7233
7254 7261
7303 7310
7331 7359 7338 7366
7387 7394
7415 7422
STM1
7128 7135 7142 7149 7184 7191 7198 7205 7240 7247 7254 7261 7289 7296 7303 7310 7345 7352 7359 7366 7401 7408 7415 7422
H (V) V (H)
7156 7163 7170 7177
7212 7219 7226 7233
7317 7324 7331 7338
7373 7380 7387 7394
f0 = 7275
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 442 / 514
9674 LSY Channel plan E: ITUR F.385 Rec. 1M
ITUR F 385 rec. 1 M STM0 fn=f0161+14n fn=f0+14n CS=14 DS=161 f0=7400 n : from 1 to 10 LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 1i 2 2i 3 3i 4 4i 5 5i 6 6i 7 7i 8 8i 9 9i 10 10 i Freq. [MHz] 7253 7260 7267 7274 7281 7288 7295 7302 7309 7316 7323 7330 7337 7344 7351 7358 7365 7372 7379 7386 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 1 i 2 2 i 3 3 i 4 4 i 5 5 i 6 6 i 7 7 i 8 8 i 9 9 i 10 10 i Freq. [MHz] 7414 7421 7428 7435 7442 7449 7456 7463 7470 7477 7484 7491 7498 7505 7512 7519 7526 7533 7540 7547
ITUR F 385 rec. 1 M STM1 fn=f0175+28n fn=f014+28n CS=28 DS=161 f0=7400 n : from 1 to 5 LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 1int1 1int2 1int3 2 2int1 2int2 2int3 3 3int1 3int2 3int3 4 4int1 4int2 4int3 5 5int1 5int2 5int3 Freq. [MHz] 7253 7260 7267 7274 7281 7288 7295 7302 7309 7316 7323 7330 7337 7244 7351 7358 7365 7272 7379 7386 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 1int1 1int2 1int3 2 2int1 2int2 2int3 3 3int1 3int2 3int3 4 4int1 4int2 4int3 5 5int1 5int2 5int3 Freq. [MHz] 7414 7421 7428 7435 7442 7449 7456 7463 7470 7477 7484 7491 7498 7505 7512 7519 7526 7533 7540 7547
Fig. 219. 9674 LSY Channel plan E: ITUR F.385 Rec. 1M

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 443 / 514
STM0
7253 7260 H (V) V (H) 7281 7309 7337 7288 7316 7344 7365 7372 7414 7421 7442 7470 7498 7449 7477 7505 7526 7533 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
7267 7274
7295 7323 7302 7330
7351 7358
7379 7386
7428 7435
7456 7484 7463 7491
7512 7519
7540 7547
STM1
7253 7260 7267 7274 7309 7316 7323 7330 7365 7372 7379 7386 7414 7421 7428 7435 7470 7477 7484 7491 7526 7533 7540 7547
H (V) V (H)
7281 7288 7295 7302
7337 7344 7351 7358
7442 7449 7456 7463
7498 7505 7512 7519
f0 = 7400
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 444 / 514
9674 LSY Channel plan F: ITUR F.385 Rec. 1H
ITUR F 385 rec. 1 H STM0 fn=f0161+14n fn=f0+14n CS=14 DS=161 f0=7575 n : from 1 to 10 LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 1i 2 2i 3 3i 4 4i 5 5i 6 6i 7 7i 8 8i 9 9i 10 10 i Freq. [MHz] 7428 7435 7442 7449 7456 7463 7470 7477 7484 7491 7498 7505 7512 7519 7526 7533 7540 7547 7554 7561 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 1 i 2 2 i 3 3 i 4 4 i 5 5 i 6 6 i 7 7 i 8 8 i 9 9 i 10 10 i Freq. [MHz] 7589 7596 7603 7610 7617 7624 7631 7638 7645 7652 7659 7666 7673 7680 7687 7694 7701 7708 7715 7722
ITUR F 385 rec. 1 H STM1 fn=f0175+28n fn=f014+28n CS=28 DS=161 f0=7575 n : from 1 to 5 LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 1int1 1int2 1int3 2 2int1 2int2 2int3 3 3int1 3int2 3int3 4 4int1 4int2 4int3 5 5int1 5int2 5int3 Freq. [MHz] 7428 7435 7442 7449 7456 7463 7470 7477 7484 7491 7498 7505 7512 7519 7526 7533 7540 7547 7554 7561 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 1int1 1int2 1int3 2 2int1 2int2 2int3 3 3int1 3int2 3int3 4 4int1 4int2 4int3 5 5int1 5int2 5int3 Freq. [MHz] 7589 7596 7603 7610 7617 7624 7631 7638 7645 7652 7659 7666 7673 7680 7687 7694 7701 7708 7715 7722
Fig. 220. 9674 LSY Channel plan F: ITUR F.385 Rec. 1H

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 445 / 514
STM0
7428 7435 H (V) V (H) 7456 7484 7512 7463 7491 7519 7540 7547 7589 7596 7617 7645 7673 7624 7652 7680 7701 7708 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
7442 7449
7470 7477
7498 7526 7554 7505 7533 7561
7603 7610
7631 7659 7638 7666
7687 7694
7715 7722
STM1
7428 7435 7442 7449 7484 7491 7498 7505 7540 7547 7554 7561 7589 7596 7603 7610 7645 7652 7659 7666 7701 7708 7715 7722
H (V) V (H)
7456 7463 7470 7477
7512 7519 7526 7533
7617 7624 7631 7638
7673 7680 7687 7694
f0 = 7575
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 446 / 514

NAME
ANV P/N
Factory P/N
9681LSY TRANSCEIVER N.B. Refer to para.para.3.7.2 thru 3.7.4 on pages 156 thru 161. for summary information on transceiver composition and equipping notes 3DB02532AA 411200548 08128T 8
7,78,3 GHZ TRANSCEIVER 128QAM (N.B.1) 8,28,5 GHZ TRANSCEIVER 128QAM (N.B.2) 7,18,5 GHZ RECEIVER 9681LSY L.O. TR. FREQUENCY REUSE KIT
3DB04243AA 3DB02533AA 3DB02673AA 3DB03830AA
411200589 474210268 474210297 299702973
08128T 7+128R 08LO
8 16 16 4
N.B.1
For 7.78.3 GHz band both STM0 and STM1 capacity (F386 annex 1) all channels, and for OIRT (F386 annex 4) only lower halfband channels. For 8.28.5 GHz band both STM0 and STM1 capacity (F386 annex 3) all channels, and for OIRT (F386 annex 4) only upper halfband channels.
N.B.2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 447 / 514

In Fig. 221. thru Fig. 223. the possible channel plans for the 9681LSY equipment to be used for the exploitation of the 7.7 to 8.5 GHz are shown. All these channel plans are based on ITUR Recommendation F.386 with the following details: Fig. 221. on page 449: ITUR F.386 ANNEX 1 based on 29.65 MHz channel spacing, in case of simple transmission of a single STM1 per RF frequency, channel plan allows the use of a single polarized antenna up to a 3+1/4+0 system configuration for odd or even channels and of a double polarized antenna up to a 7+1/8+0 system configuration for alternated channels . 9681LSY may work in the above plan by cochannel frequency reuse operation (CCDP) with the XPIC unit allowing the transmission of 2xSTM1 signals per RF channel. In this case each RF channel is contemporary used on H and V polarization always requiring a double polarized antenna. Fig. 222. on page 450: ITUR F.386 ANNEX 3 based on 28 MHz channel spacing, in case of simple transmission of a single STM1 per RF frequency, channel plan allows the use of a single polarized antenna up to a 2+1/3+0 system configuration for odd or even channels and of a double polarized antenna up to a 5+1/6+0 system configuration for alternated channels . Shifted pattern 14 MHz higher is available too, loosing the upper channel. 9681LSY may work in the above plan by cochannel frequency reuse operation (CCDP) with the XPIC unit allowing the transmission of 2xSTM1 signals per RF channel. In this case each RF channel is contemporary used on H and V polarization always requiring a double polarized antenna. 14 MHz channel spacing is available too to support the STM0 capacity. Fig. 223. on page 451: ITUR F.386 ANNEX 4 based on 28 MHz channel spacing, in case of simple transmission of a single STM1 per RF frequency, channel plan allows the use of a single polarized antenna up to a 3+1/4+0 system configuration and of a double polarized antenna up to a 7+1/8+0 system configuration for alternated channels. 9681LSY may work in the above plan by cochannel frequency reuse operation (CCDP) with the XPIC unit allowing the transmission of 2xSTM1 signals per RF channel. In this case each RF channel is contemporary used on H and V polarization always requiring a double polarized antenna. This channel plan is in particular, utilized by OIRT (Russia). 14 MHz channel spacing is also available to support the STM0 capacity.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 448 / 514
9681 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR F.386 ANNEX 1
ITUR F.386 ANNEX 1 STM1 fn=f0281.95+29.65n fn=f0+29.37+29.65n CS=29.65 DS=311.32 f0=8000 n : from 1 to 8 LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Freq. [MHz] 7747,70 7777,35 7807,00 7836,65 7866,30 7895,95 7925,60 7955,25 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Freq. [MHz] 8059,02 8088,67 8118,32 8147,97 8177,62 8207,27 8236,92 8266,57
7747.70
7807.00
7866.30
7925.60
8059.02
8118.32
8177.62
8236.92
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
7777.35
7836.65
7895.95
7955.25
8088.67
8147.97
8207.27
8266.57
f0 = 8000 Fig. 221. 9681 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR F.386 ANNEX 1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 449 / 514
9681 LSY Channel plan B: ITUR F.386 ANNEX 3
LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 Freq. [MHz] 8293 8307 8321 8335 8349 8363
UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 Freq. [MHz] 8412 8426 8440 8454 8468 8482
LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 1i 2 2i 3 Freq. [MHz] 8293 8307 8321 8335 8349
UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 1 i 2 2 i 3 Freq. [MHz] 8412 8426 8440 8454 8468

STM0
8412 8440 8468 2 1 3 4 5 6
8293
8321
8349
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5
8307
8335
8363
8426
8454
8482
f0 = 8387.5
STM1
8293 8307 8349 8412 8426 8468
H (V) V (H) 1 1i
2i 3 1 1i
2i 3
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
8321 8335
8426 8454
f0 = 8387.5 Fig. 222. 9681 LSY Channel plan B: ITUR F.386 ANNEX 3
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 450 / 514
ITUR F.386 ANNEX 3 STM0 fn=f0108.5+14n fn=f0+10.5+14n CS=14 DS=119 f0=8387.5 n : from 1 to 6
ITUR F.386 ANNEX 3 STM1 fn=f0122.5+28n fn=f03,5+28n CS=28 DS=119 f0=8387.5 n : from 1 to 3
9681 LSY Channel plan C: ITUR F.386 ANNEX 4
ITUR F.386 ANNEX 4 STM0 fn=f0259+14n fn=f0+7+14n CS=14 DS=266 f0=8157 n : from 1 to 16 LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Freq. [MHz] 7912 7926 7940 7954 7968 7982 7996 8010 8024 8038 8052 8066 8080 8094 8108 8122 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Freq. [MHz] 8178 8192 8206 8220 8234 8248 8262 8276 8290 8304 8318 8332 8346 8360 8374 8 8388 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
ITUR F.386 ANNEX 4 STM1 fn=f0259+28n fn=f0+7+28n CS=28 DS=266 f0=8157 n : from 1 to 8 LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel Freq. [MHz] 7926 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel Freq. [MHz] 8192
7954
8220
7982
8248
8010
8276
8038
8304
8066
8332
8094
8360
8122
8388
Fig. 223. 9681 LSY Channel plan C: ITUR F.386 ANNEX 4 Fig. 223. continues ...
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 451 / 514
STM0
7912 77940 7968 7996 8024 8052 8080 8108 8178 8206 8234 8262 8290 8318 8346 8374 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 9
10 11
12 13
14 15
16 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 9
10 11
12 13
14 15
16
7926 7954 7982 8010 8038 8066
8094 8122
8192 8220 8248 8276 8304 8332
8360 8388
f0 = 8157
STM1
7996
7982
8038
8094
8192
8248
8304
8360
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
7954
8010
8066
8122
8220
8276
8332
8388
f0 = 8157
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 452 / 514

NAME
ANV P/N
Factory P/N
9610LSY TRANSCEIVER N.B. Refer to para.para.3.7.2 thru 3.7.4 on pages 156 thru 161. for summary information on transceiver composition and equipping notes 3DB04131AA 3DB04126AA 3DB03971AA 3DB03830AA 411200588 474210183 474210449 299702973 10128T 10128R 10LO 8 16 16 4

In Fig. 224. on page 454 the channel plan for the 9610LSY equipment to be used for the exploitation of the 10.0 to 10.7 GHz band is shown. This channel plan is completely defined by the CEPTERC 1205 Recommendation and is based on a frequency channel spacing of 28 MHz. In case of simple transmission of a single STM1 per RF frequency, the above channel plan allows the use of a single or double polarized antenna up to a 7+1/8+0 system configuration. 9610LSY may work in the above plan by cochannel frequency reuse operation (CCDP) with the XPIC unit allowing the transmission of 2xSTM1 signals per RF channel. In this case each RF channel is contemporary used on H and V polarization always requiring a double polarized antenna.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 453 / 514
9610 LSY Channel plan A: MEDIASET
LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Freq. [MHz] 10028 10056 10084 10112 10140 10168 10196 10224 10252 10280
UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Freq. [MHz] 10378 10406 10434 10462 10490 10518 10546 10574 10602 10630
10028
10084 10140 10196
10252
10378
10434 10490 10546
10602
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 9
10 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 9
10
10056
10112
10168
10224 10280
10406
10462 10518
10574 10630
f0 = 10329 Fig. 224. 9610 LSY Channel plan A: MEDIASET
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 454 / 514
CEPTERC 1205 STM1 CS=28; DS=350 fn=f0329+28n fn=f0+21+28n f0=10329 n : from 1 to 10

NAME
ANV P/N
Factory P/N

In Fig. 225. on page 456 ( ITUR F.387 rec. 1 ) and Fig. 226. on page 457 ( ITUR F.387 ANNEX 2 ) the two possible channel plans for the 9611LSY equipment to be used for the exploitation of the 10.7 to 11.7 GHz band are shown. These channel plans are completely defined by the ITUR Recommendation F.387 and are based on a frequency channel spacing of 40 MHz. In case of simple transmission of a single STM1 per RF frequency, the above channel plans allow the use of a single polarized antenna up to a 5+1/6+0 system configuration and of a double polarized antenna up to a 7+1/8+0 system configuration for alternated channels. 9611LSY may work in the above plans by cochannel frequency reuse operation (CCDP) with the XPIC unit allowing the transmission of 2xSTM1 signals per RF channel. In this case each RF channel is contemporary used on H and V polarization always requiring a double polarized antenna.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 455 / 514
9611 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR F.387 rec. 1
LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Freq. [MHz] 10715 10755 10795 10835 10875 10915 10955 10995 11035 11075 11115 11155
UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Freq. [MHz] 11245 11285 11325 11365 11405 11445 11485 11525 11565 11605 11645 11685
10715
10795 10875 10955
11035 11115
11245
11325
11405 11485
11565 11645
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 9
10 11
12 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 9
10 11
12
10755
10835 10915
10995 11075
11155
11285
11365
11445
11525 11606 11685
f0 = 11200 Fig. 225. 9611 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR F.387 rec. 1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 456 / 514
ITUR F.387 recomm.1 STM1 CS=40; DS=530 fn=f0525+40n fn=f0+5+40n f0=11200 n : from 1 to 12
9611 LSY Channel plan B: ITUR F.387 ANNEX 2
ITUR F.387 ANNEX 2 STM1 CS=40; DS=490 fn=f0505+40n fn=f015+40n f0=11200 n : from 1 to 12 LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Freq. [MHz] 10735 10775 10815 10855 10895 10935 10975 11015 11055 11095 11135 11175 UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 11265 11305 11345 11385 11425 11465 11505 11545 11585 11625 11665 Freq. [MHz]
10735
10815 10895 10975
11055 11135
11225
11305
11385 11465
11545 11625
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 9
10 11
12 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 9
10 11
12
10775
10855 10935
11015 11095
11175
11265
11345
11425
11505 11585 11665
f0 = 11200 Fig. 226. 9611 LSY Channel plan B: ITUR F.387 ANNEX 2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 457 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
458 / 514

NAME
ANV P/N
Factory P/N

In Fig. 227. on page 460 the channel plan for the 9613LSY equipment to be used for the exploitation of the 13 GHz band is shown. Channel plan is completely defined by the ITUR Recommendation F.497. 9613LSY may work in the above plan by cochannel frequency reuse operation (CCDP) with the XPIC unit allowing the transmission of 2xSTM1 signals per RF channel. In this case each RF channel is contemporary used on H and V polarization always requiring a double polarized antenna. 14 MHz channel spacing is also available to support the STM0 capacity.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 459 / 514
9613 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR F.497 Rec.1
LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Freq. [MHz] 12758 12772 12786 12800 12814 12828 12842 12856 12870 12884 12898 12912 12926 12940 12954 12968
UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 13038 13052 13066 13080 13094 13108 13122 13136 13150 13164 13178 13192 13206 13220 Freq. [MHz]
LOWER HALF OF THE BAND Channel Freq. [MHz] 12765
UPPER HALF OF THE BAND Channel Freq. [MHz] 13031
12793
13059
12821
13087
12849
13115
12877
13143
12905
13171
12933
13199
8 13234
12961
13227
Fig. 227. 9613 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR F.497 Rec.1 Fig. 227. continues ...
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 460 / 514
ITUR F.497 rec.1 STM0 CS=14; DS=268 fn=f0252+14n fn=f0+14+14n f0=12996 n : from 1 to 16
ITUR F.497 rec.1 STM1 CS=28; DS=268 fn=f0259+28n fn=f0+7+28n f0=12996 n : from 1 to 8
STM0
12758 12786 12814 12842 12870 12898 12926 12954
13024
13082 13080 13108 13136 13164 13192 13220
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 9
10 11
12 13
14 15
16 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 9
10 11
12 13
14 15
16
12772 12800 12828 1285612884 12912 12940 12968
13038 13066 13094 1312213150 13178 13206 13234
f0 = 12996
STM1
12765
12821
12877
12933
13031
13087
13143
13199
H (V) V (H) 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
12793
12849
12905
12961
13059
13115
13171
13227
f0 = 12996
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 461 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
462 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Chapter 18 Documentation Guide SECTION CONTENT Chapter 19 SafetyEMCESD norms and equipment labelling
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
APPENDICES
PAGE
483
465
463 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
464 / 514
18 DOCUMENTATION GUIDE 18.1 Introduction

This chapter contains all information regarding the Customer Documentation and is organized as follows: INFORMATION REGARDING 9600LSY REL.1.0 & 2.0 CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION Productreleaseversion handbooks on page 466 gives the list and description of the Customer Documentation set this handbook belongs to.
INFORMATION REGARDING CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION IN GENERAL General on Alcatel Customer Documentation including: on page 472
CustomerIndependent Standard Customer Documentation Product levels and associated Customer Documentation
Typical contents of Technical & Craft Terminal Operators Handbooks on page 475 Documentation on paper Documentation on CDROM Handbook and CDROM supply to Customers on page 477 on page 479 on page 481
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 465 / 514
18.2 Productreleaseversion handbook

This paragraph: lists and briefly describes the handbooks making up the documentation set envisaged for 9600LSY Rel.1.0 & Rel.2.0 product releases and points out those the Operators should have, in order to carry out the required operations on the 9600LSY/LHR equipment configuration.
Please refer to following para.18.3 on page 472 for a general description of Alcatel Customer Documentation system. The list of handbooks given here below is valid as at the issue date of this Handbook and can be changed without any obligation for ALCATEL to update it in this Handbook. Some of the handbooks listed here below may not be available as at the issue date of this Handbook. The 9600LSY system can be supplied in the basic configurations (LHR, LHRC and WMSN) introduced in para.2.2.3 on page 41. In para.18.2.1, starting herebelow, the documentation set specific for 9600LSY subsystem types (LHR and LHRC) is described. In para.18.2.2 on page 471, the documentation sets specific for associated subsystems types (OPTINEX rack and 1650SMC) are described.
18.2.1 9600LSY specific equipment handbooks and CDROMs

The standard Customer Documentation in the English language for the 9600LSY Rel.1.0 & Rel.2.0 system is modularly composed by different handbooks, each of which can be applied to a specific version/configuration or to various versions/configurations. Tab. 77. on page 467 lists the handbooks and indicates their use according to the versions/configurations stated above. The [REF] indication in Tab. 77. is relevant to the handbook brief description given in tables Tab. 78. thru Tab. 83. in the following.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 466 / 514
Tab. 77. Handbooks usage according to System configuration USAGE

HANDBOOK
REF
Rel.1.0 LHR LHR
Rel.2.0 LHRC
TECHNICAL HANDBOOKS 9600LSY/LHR Technical Handbook 9600LSY/LHRC Technical Handbook [A] [B] X X
OPERATORS HANDBOOKS 9600LSY CT Operators Handbook SWP 1.0 9600LSY CT Operators Handbook SWP 2.0 1320CT Basic Operators Handbook 1330AS Operators Handbook ELM Operators Handbook [C] [D] [J] [K] [L] X X X X X X
INSTALLATION AND LINEUP HANDBOOKS 9600LSY/LHR Installation Handbook 9600LSY/LHR Lineup Guide 9600LSY/LHRC Installation Handbook 9600LSY/LHRC Lineup Guide Interference investigation procedure [E] [F] [G] [H] [I] X X X X X
DOCUMENTATION CDROM DCP 9600LSY CD_ROM [M] X
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 467 / 514
The standard Customer Documentation in the English language for the equipment whose product-release-version is stated in para.1.2 on page 21 consists of the following handbooks:
Tab. 78. Technical Handbooks related to the specific configuration THIS HDBK or NOTE
REF
HANDBOOK
ANV Part No.
FACTORY Part No.
9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Technical Handbook [A]
3DB 02839 AAAA
955.203.292 Q
To be used in the 9600LSY/LHR Regenerator configuration. Provides information regarding Equipment description and composition, Hardware setting documentation, and Maintenance (together with handbook REF.[C] or REF.[D]) 9600LSY/LHRC Rel.2.0 Technical Handbook 3DB 02839 BAAA 955.203.293 R
[B]
To be used in the 9600LSY/LHRC Regenerator configuration. Provides information regarding Equipment description and composition, Hardware setting documentation, and Maintenance (together with handbook REF.[D])
Tab. 79. Handbooks related to the specific product SWP management and local product control THIS HDBK or NOTE
REF
HANDBOOK
ANV Part No.
FACTORY Part No.
9600LSY Rel.1.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 1.0 [C]
3DB 02838 AAAA
957.207.022 A
To be used with: SWP REG.9600LSY R.1.0 in association with LHR configuration only. Provides 9600LSY/LHR screens and operational procedures for Equipment SW management and maintenance. 9600LSY Rel.2.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 2.0 3DB 02838 BAAA 957.207.023 B
[D]
To be used with: SWP REG.9600LSY R.2.0 in association with both LHR and LHRC configurations. Provides 9600LSY/LHR/LHRC screens and operational procedures for Equipment SW management and maintenance.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 468 / 514
Tab. 80. Installation and LineUp Handbooks related to the specific configuration
The Installation Handbook provides information regarding Equipment installation, according to Alcatel Installation Engineering Dept. rules. The Lineup Guide provides information regarding equipment line up, according to Alcatel Installation Engineering Dept. rules. HANDBOOK ANV Part No. FACTORY Part No. THIS HDBK or NOTE
REF
[E]
9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Installation Handbook
3DB 02840 AAAA
955.203.302 S
To be used in the 9600LSY LHR Regenerator configurations. 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Line Up guide 3DB 02841 AAAA 955.203.312 K
[F]
To be used in the 9600LSY LHR Regenerator configurations. 9600LSY/LHRC Rel.2.0 Installation Handbook 3DB 02840 BAAA 955.203.303
[G]
To be used in the 9600LSY LHRC Regenerator configurations. 9600LSY/LHRC Rel.2.0 Line Up guide 3DB 02841 BAAA 955.203.313
[H]
To be used in the 9600LSY LHRC Regenerator configurations. Tab. 81. Handbooks common to all Alcatel Radio Transmission products THIS HDBK or NOTE
REF
HANDBOOK
ANV Part No.
FACTORY Part No. 955.203.374 Z
Interference investigation procedure [I]
3DB 04165 EAAA
Describes the measurement procedure for the interference searching in the various RF bands used by Alcatel Radio Transmission products.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 469 / 514
Tab. 82. Handbooks common to Alcatel Network Elements using 1320CT platform N.B. 1320CT and Q3CTP are equivalent terms FACTORY Part No. THIS HDBK or NOTE
REF
HANDBOOK
ANV Part No.
1320CT Basic Operators Handbook [J]
3AL 79186 AAAA
957.130.542 E
Provides general information and operational procedures common to all 1320CT (Craft terminal) of Alcatel InfoModel Network Elements. 1330AS Rel.5.0 Operators Handbook [K] Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the alarm Surveillance software embedded in the 1320CT software package. ELM Rel.5.0 Operators Handbook [L] 3AL 71081 AAAA 957.130.462 E 3AL 71079 AAAA 957.130.442 A
Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the Event Log Management software embedded in the 1320CT software package.
Tab. 83. Documentation on CDROM REF CDROM TITLE DCP 9600LSY 1.0/2.0 CDROM [M] ANV Part No. 3DB 02831 AAAA FACTORY Part No. 417.200.017 D
Contains, in electronic format, all handbooks: REF.[A] to [L] Envisaged after the release of all handbooks (of a Network Element type)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 470 / 514
18.2.2 Related equipment handbooks and CDROMs
18.2.2.1 Handbooks and CDROMs of OPTINEX Rack Tab. 84. Handbooks related to the products hardware FACTORY Part No. 955.100.922 C
REF [N]
HANDBOOK Optinex Racks Rel.3.0.0 Technical Handbook
ANV Part No. 3AL 37953 AAAA
Tab. 85. Documentation on CDROM REF CDROM TITLE Optinex Racks Rel.3.0 CDROMDOC EN [O] Contains, in electronic format, the following handbooks: REF.[N] ANV Part No. 3AL 37954 AAAA FACTORY Part No. 417.100.026
18.2.2.2 Handbooks and CDROMs of 1650SMC 1650SMC has its own: Technical Handbook Installation Handbook Commissioning Handbook CT Operators Handbook CDROM containing the above cited handbooks.
Their P/Ns are not indicated here, as they depend on the Product release and Software Package version.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 471 / 514
18.3 General on Alcatel Customer Documentation

This paragraph describes in general the Alcatel Customer Documentation system, details the association between the product levels and the associated documentation, and explains Customer Documentation characteristics as well as the policies for its delivery and updating. This paragraph is fully applicable to the 2nd generation Radio Product families of Alcatel WTD (Wireless Transmission Division) only. The documentation typical contents described in para.18.3.3 on page 475, apply to handbooks issued after February 2002.
18.3.1 CustomerIndependent Standard Customer Documentation

a) Definition Standard Customer Documentation, referred to hereafter, must be always meant as plantindependent and is always independent of any Customization. Plantdependent and/or Customized documentation, if envisaged by the contract, is subjected to commercial criteria as far as contents, formats and supply conditions are concerned N.B. b) Plantdependent and Customized documentation is not described here.
Aims of standard Customer Documentation Standard system, hardware and software documentation is meant to give the Customer personnel the possibility and the information necessary for installing, commissioning, operating, and maintaining the equipment according to Alcatel Laboratory design and Installation Dept. choices. In particular: N.B. the contents of the handbooks associated to the software applications focus on the explanation of the manmachine interface and of the operating procedures allowed by it; maintenance is described down to faulty PCB location and replacement. No supply to Customers of design documentation (like PCB hardware design and production documents and files, software source programs, programming tools, etc.) is envisaged.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 472 / 514
18.3.2 Product levels and associated Customer Documentation

See Fig. 229. on page 474.
a)
Products A product is defined by the network hierarchical level where it can be inserted and by the whole of performances and services that it is meant for. E.g. 9600USY is a product (STM1/0 Urban Digital Radio Link). Product-releases A product evolves through successive product-releases, which are the real products marketed for their delivery at a certain product-release availability date. A certain product-release performs more functionalities than the previous one. E.g. 9600USY Rel.1.0 and 9600USY Rel.2.0 are two successive product-releases of the same product. A productrelease comprehends a set of hardware components and at least one Software Package (SWP); as a whole, they identify the possible network applications and the equipment performances that the specific product-release has been designed, engineered, and marketed for. Configurations and Network Elements In some cases, a product-release includes different possible configurations which are distinguished from one another by different Network Element (NE) types and, from the management point of view, by different SWPs. E.g. 9600USY Rel.1.0 includes various configurations with various NE types (Regenerator 1+0/1+1/2+0 with NE types UHR/UHRC; Regenerator 3+1/4+0 with NE type UHRN; WMSN with NE types UHR/UHRC/UHM/UHMC) each of which has its own specific SWP. SWP Releases and Versions See Fig. 228. herebelow. A SWP is identified by the configuration name and by the version number (tree digits). The versions first digit corresponds to the productrelease number first digit; the second digit identifies, together with the first, the SWP release. The third digit of the SWP version identifies the Patch Level of the SWP Release. SWP version SWP Release Product Releases first digit SWP evolution for bug fixing purposes (same SWP Release within same ProductRelease) SWP evolution for additional features (new SWP Release within same ProductRelease) (N.B. see next page) SWP evolution for additional features (new SWP Release of a new ProductRelease) 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 2. 0. 0. 0. 1. 0. 0. Patch Level
b)
c)
d)
7 9 7 2 7 2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 228. Example of SWP Release and Version numbering
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 473 / 514
N.B.
Sometimes, different SWP Releases (within the same ProductRelease) are commercially distinguished by different names, e.g. :
SWP version 1.0.x 1.1.x 1.2.x
SWPRelease commercial name 1.0 1.0B 1.0C
e)
Customer Documentation A product-release(configuration) has its own set of standard Customer Documentation, usually formed of several handbooks, i.e., in general: System and Hardware documentation: one (or more) Technical Handbook(s) (see page 475 for details) an Installation Handbook a Commissioning Handbook or LineUp Guide Software documentation: a Craft Terminal Operators Handbook, associated to the specific SWPRelease (see page 476 for details) other Operators Handbooks (typically those associated to the SW platform embedded in the SWP) PRODUCT
evolution PRODUCTRELEASE 1.0 PRODUCTRELEASE 2.0
ALTERNATIVE CONFIGURATIONS
CONFIG.A
CONFIG.B
PRODUCT LEVELS DOCUMENTATION CONFIG.A System & HW Documentation
SWP REL.1.0
evolution
SWP REL.1.1
SWP REL.1.0 SW Documentation
SWP REL.1.1 SW Documentation
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 229. Example of Product levels and associated Customer Documentation
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 474 / 514
18.3.3 Typical contents of Technical & Craft Terminal Operators Handbooks

a)
Technical Handbook It is usually composed by a main handbook and enclosed documents. Information is divided into the following levels (not necessarily in this sequence): MAIN HANDBOOK: GENERAL INFORMATION Documentation Guide : contains general information on the Customer Documentation set envisaged for the equipment and detailed information regarding the specific handbook, like handbook structure/history and abbreviation list. SafetyEMCESD norms and equipment labelling : describes the equipment labelling and the norms mandatory or suggested that must be considered to avoid injuries on persons and/or damage to the equipment.
INFORMATIVE LEVEL System Description : gives the firstlevel description of equipment in the specific configuration the handbook is meant for. The information given is enough to understand the equipment composition and operation and to read the operative level chapters. Functional Description : gives the secondlevel description of equipment in the specific configuration the handbook is meant for. Reading this chapter is not necessary to carry out standard installation commissioning and maintenance activities. Technical Specifications : it supplies in detail the equipment technical characteristics.
OPERATIVE LEVEL Physical Configuration : gives detailed operative information regarding: the equipments items (P/Ns, equipping rules, labels for remote inventory) their physical and logical position in the system the unit assembly/subassembly and front panel drawings, with the usage description of the access points (connectors, visual indicators, buttons) hardware setting description pinout description of connectors for Customer usage summary and operative information on characteristics of external interfaces Station Layouts : lists and describes the most common of all the available system configurations envisaged for the specific configuration the handbook is meant for. For each configuration a station layout (with cable interconnection diagram) and a simple system block diagram are present. Maintenance : describes the equipment routine and corrective maintenance procedures as well as those for the unit replacement with spare parts. Hardware Setting Documentation & Annexes : lists the enclosed documents having P/N different from that of the handbook (they can be used also as annexes to other handbooks) and describes how to use the Hardware Setting Documents enclosed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS : Hardware Setting Documents and other documents for specific purposes (typical examples: ODU repair procedures, branching detailed configurations and drawings, etc.)
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 475 / 514
b)
Craft Terminal Operators Handbook It is usually composed by various sections. Each section is an independent document that can evolve independently from the others. The sections always present are: SECTION 1: INTRODUCTION containing the following main parts (not necessarily in this sequence): Documentation Guide and SafetyEMCESD norms and equipment labelling, as Technical Handbook SWP description : lists and describes the Software Packages the Handbook refers to. Installation : describes in detail the operations necessary for the SWP installation and upgrading (ECT parts and equipment parts). ECTequipment remote connections : gives instructions to allow the remote connection between ECT and the equipment.
SECTION 2: NE MANAGEMENT : gives the description of the menu structure and of all the NE functionalities available in the Craft Terminal. This section is organized in several chapters grouped according to the following general scheme: General information Equipment configuration management Setting of parameters for maintenance Events Log and Performance Monitoring management Software management
SECTION 3: NE MAINTENANCE : gives the description of the NE troubleshooting based on the use of the Craft Terminal.
Depending on the SWP contents, other sections can be present in the handbook, to describe other specific applications or features.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 476 / 514
18.3.4 Documentation on paper

a)
Handbook format Handbooks are supplied on A4sized papers for text and general drawings, and, when necessary, A3sized papers for detailed drawings, in four ring solid/plasticcovered binders.
b)
Handbook languages Handbook standard language is English. As far as handbooks supplied in other languages, translation is relevant to the text and the drawings within the text. With regard to Operators Handbooks containing screen prints of the software applications, the screens included are in the language envisaged by the applicative software supplied to the Customer (e.g. an Operators Handbook translated in Russian has the screens in English if the user interface is not in Russian). Engineering documentation (like selected sheets of unit schematics and component layout given only as hardware presetting documentation) is bilingual ItalianEnglish.
c)
Handbook identification Each handbook is identified by: the name of the product-release, the name of the configuration, if more than one is envisaged within the product-release, the first two digits of the SWPversion as far as Operators Handbook is concerned, the handbook name, the handbook part number, the handbook edition: first draft edition=01A second draft edition=01B ..... first validated edition=01 second validated edition=02 nnth validated edition=nn the handbook issue date. The date on the handbook does not refer to the date of printing, but to the date on which the handbook source file has been completed and released for production.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 477 / 514
d)
Handbook updating The documentation is maintained updated according to the technical changes of the product it refers to, provided that these technical changes does really impact Customer Documentation (e.g.: generally, bugfixing releases do not impact the Operators Handbook). Updating of handbooks, when necessary, is done synchronously with the products industrial technical change, in due time for having the new product version and the handbooks associated new edition available at the same time. 1) Changes introduced in the same product-release (same handbook P/N) In case of handbook updating for its technical contents: the edition, hence the date, is increased; the sections/chapters modified with respect to the previous edition are listed in a suitable Handbook History Table in the Handbook Guide section; a specific note in the same section sumsup the reasons for the change; in the affected chapters, revision bars on the left of the page indicate modifications in text and drawings (this is done after the first officially released and validated version). NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS Handbooks relevant to software applications (typically the Operators Handbooks) are not modified unless the new SWP version distributed to Customers implies manmachine interface changes or in case of slight modifications not affecting the understanding of the explained procedures. Moreover, should the screen prints included in the handbook contain the SWP version marking, they are not replaced in the handbooks related to a subsequent version if the screen contents are unchanged. 2) Changes due to a new product-release A new product-release changes the handbook P/N and the edition starts from 01. In this case, the modified parts of the handbook are not listed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 478 / 514
18.3.5 Documentation on CDROM

a)
Contents A CustomerDocumentation CDROM is conceived to contain in readonly electronic format the handbooks of all the product-release(configurations) of one productrelease. The first edition of a CDROM is created only when all the handbooks of the first released product-releaseconfiguration of one productrelease have been issued as first validated editions. If envisaged, the handbooks relevant to other product-releaseconfigurations of the same productrelease are added in a further CDROM edition, when they are all completed and validated. No additional information is added to each handbook, so that the documentation present in the CDROM is exactly the same the Customer would receive on paper (with the same handbook editions).
b)
Standards CDROMs are generated according to ISO 9660 norms. A master CDROM is obtained as follows: each source document is converted into .pdf format by Adobe Acrobat Distiller 4.0; bookmarks are generated for complex documents in order to make the navigation inside the documents easier; some hyperlinks, which make the navigation through the various handbooks easier, are manually added. The following hyperlinks are standard: from the INDEX document toward each individual file contained in the CDROM from section Hardware Setting Documentation & Annexes of each Technical Handbook, toward each specific document listed in the section itself (these documents could be collected in a separate file). The files processed in this way are then transferred on a PC where a master CDROM is recorded. Suitable checks are made in order to have a virusfree product. The CDROM can be used both in PC and Unix WS environments or any other environment for which a suitable Reader has been envisaged by Adobe. In order to open correctly the pdf files contained in the CDROM, the use of Acrobat Reader Version 4.0 at least is mandatory. The CDROM does not contain the Acrobat Reader program. Getting it and installing it on the Customer specific platform is on Customers charge.
c)
CDROM identification Each CDROM is identified: 1) by the following external identifiers, that are printed both on the booklet and the CDROM upper surface: the name of the productrelease, a writing indicating the language(s), the CDROM P/N (Factory P/N and ANV P/N), the CDROM edition (first edition=01) and, internally, by the list of the source handbooks and documents (P/Ns and editions) by whose collection and processing the CDROM itself has been created.
2)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 479 / 514
d)
CDROM updating The list of source handbook/document P/Nseditions indicated in previous para.c ) point 2 ), in association with the CDROMs own P/Nedition, is also loaded in the AlcatelInformationSystem as a structured list. Whenever a new edition of any of such handbooks/documents is released in the Alcatel archive system, the AlcatelInformationSystem automatically rises a warning toward the Customer Documentation department, indicating the list of CDROMs that must be updated to include the new editions of these handbooks/documents. This causes the planning and creation of a new edition of the CDROM. Updating of CDROMs always follows, with a certain delay, the updating of the single handbooks composing the collection.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 480 / 514
18.3.6 Handbook and CDROM supply to Customers

a)
Standard supply Handbooks and CDROMs are standard commercial items and are ordered and delivered as any other Alcatel commercial item. Handbooks and CDROMs are not automatically delivered together with the equipment they refer to. The number of handbooks or CDROMs per type to be supplied must be decided at contract level.
b)
Productdocumentation consistency Equipment description and layout are always general, i.e. they never describe the actual composition of the equipment supplied to Customer (this task is entrusted to plantdependent documentation). Detailed hardware documentation concerns actually supplied units and is coherent with the production issue of such units. Softwareassociated handbooks are coherent with the supplied SWP release. Copies of the handbooks regarding a specific productrelease previously delivered can be required specifying P/N and edition.
c)
Inadvance supply Whenever handbooks or CDROMs are delivered before the relevant equipment delivery, there is the risk that their contents might not agree with the characteristics of the equipment which will be delivered: the more they are in advance the less are they likely to agree.
d)
Supplying updated handbooks and CDROMs to Customers Supplying updated handbooks or CDROMs to Customers who have already received previous issues is subject to commercial criteria. By updated handbook delivery, we mean the supply of a complete copy of a new issue of the handbook (supplying erratacorrige sheets is not envisaged).
e)
Copyright notification The technical information of the handbooks and CDROMs supplied to Customers is the property of ALCATEL and must not be copied, reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.
f)
Supply to Customers of Customer Documentation source files Presently not envisaged.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 481 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
482 / 514
19 SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING 19.1 Introduction

This chapter describes the equipment labelling and the norms mandatory or suggested (see also point 3 ) on page 16) that must be considered to avoid injuries on persons and/or damage to the equipment. The stated norms apply both to the operations described in this manual and to those described in the related manuals listed in para.18.2 on page 466. This chapter is organized as follows: Compliance with European Norms Safety Rules including: General Rules Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command Dangerous Electrical Voltages Harmful Optical Signals Risks of Explosions Moving Mechanical Parts Heatradiating Mechanical Parts Microwave radiations Specific safety rules in this handbook herebelow on page 484
on page 484 on page 485 on page 486 on page 487 on page 489 on page 489 on page 490 on page 491 on page 491 on page 492
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms) including: EMC General Norms Installation EMC General Norms Turnon, Tests & Operation EMC General Norms Maintenance
on page 492 on page 493 on page 493 on page 494 on page 494 on page 495
Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges Suggestions, notes and cautions Labels affixed to the Equipment including: Labels specific for 9600LSY Equipment General use labels
19.2 Compliance with European Norms

Refer to chapter 6 on page 315.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 483 / 514
19.3 Safety Rules 19.3.1 General Rules

Before carrying out any installation, turnon, tests & operation and maintenance operations carefully read the related Handbooks, in particular: Installation LineUp or Commissioning Maintenance chapter of the Technical Handbook
Observe safety rules When equipment is operating nobody is allowed to have access inside on the equipment parts which are protected with Cover Plate Shields removable with tools In case of absolute need to have access inside, on the equipment parts when it is operating this is allowed exclusively to service personnel, where for Service Personnel or Technical assistance is meant : personnel which has adequate Technical Knowledge and experience necessary to be aware of the danger that he might find in carrying out an operation and of the necessary measurements to reduce danger to minimum for him and for others. The Service Personnel can only replace the faulty units with spare parts. The Service Personnel is not allowed to repair: hence the access to the parts no specified is not permitted. The keys and/or the tools used to open doors, hinged covers to remove parts which give access to compartments in which are present high dangerous voltages must belong exclusively to the service personnel. For the eventual cleaning of the external parts of the equipment, absolutely do not use any inflammable substance or substances which in some way may alter the markings, inscriptions etc. It is recommended to use a slightly wet cleaning cloth.
The Safety Rules stated in the handbook describe the operations and/or precautions to observe to safeguard service personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment safety, i.e., not exposing persons, animals, things to the risk of being injured/damaged. Whenever the safety protection features have been impaired, REMOVE POWER. To cut off power proceed to switch off the power supply units as well as cut off power station upstream (rack or station distribution frame). The safety rules described in this handbook are distinguished by the following symbol and statement:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SAFETY RULES
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 484 / 514
19.3.2 Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command

It is of utmost importance to follow the instructions printed on the labels affixed to the units and assemblies.
The labels are fully compliant with International Norms ISO 38461984. The symbols or statements are enclosed in geometric shapes: ISO 38641984.
CONTAINS A SYMBOL STATEMENT INDICATES FORBIDDANCE (WHITE BACKGROUND WHIT RED RIMBLACK SYMBOL OR STATEMENT) IT IS A COMMAND (BLUE BACKGROUNDWHITE SYMBOL OR STATEMENT).
CONTAINS A SYMBOL INDICATES WARNING OR DANGER (YELLOW BACKGROUNDBLACK SYMBOL AND RIM)
CONTAINS A STATEMENT PROVIDING INFORMATION OR INSTRUCTION. (YELLOW BACKGROUNDBLACK STATEMENT AND RIM)
The labels have been affixed to indicate a dangerous condition. They may contain any standardknown symbol or any statement necessary to safeguard users and service personnel against the most common ones, specifically: dangerous electrical voltages harmful optical signals risk of explosion moving mechanical parts heatradiating Mechanical Parts microwave radiations
Pay attention to the information stated in the following, and proceed as instructed
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 485 / 514
The symbols presented in para.19.3.3 through 19.3.8 are all the possible symbols that could be present on Alcatel equipment, but are not all necessarily present on the equipment this handbook refers to.
19.3.3 Dangerous Electrical Voltages

19.3.3.1 Electrical safety: Labelling The following warning label is affixed next to dangerous voltages (>42.4 Vp; >60 Vdc).
If it is a Class 1 equipment connected to mains, then the label associated to it will state that the equipment will have to be grounded before connecting it to the power supply voltage, e.g.:
WARNING ! Ground protect the equipment before connecting it to manins Make sure that power has been cut off before disconnecting ground protection.
19.3.3.2 Electrical safety: general rules carefully observe the specific procedures for installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where a.c. or d.c. power is present, described in the relevant installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance documents and the following general rules: a) Personal injury can be caused by 48 V dc (or by 220 V ac if envisaged in the equipment). Avoid touching powered terminals with any exposed part of your body. Short circuiting, low-voltage, low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in burns and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before working with primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.
DANGER! Possibility of personal injury:
b)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 486 / 514
19.3.4 Harmful Optical Signals

19.3.4.1 Optical safety: Labelling
If the assembly or unit is fitted with a LASER, the labels must comply with the IEC 608251 and 2 International Norms. If the assembly or unit is fitted with a LASER, the labels must comply with the IEC 82511993 International Norms.
The symbol indicates the presence of a LASER beam. Danger level is stated within a rectangular label:
If the LASER is a class 1 product, the label depicting the symbol within a triangle is not compulsory. The rectangular shaped label bears all the information needed, i.e.: LASER class Power emitted Wave length Ref. Norm Precautionary measures taken depend on LASER class Indications given on openings, panels and safety interlockers
CAUTION LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN

DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS P.MAX=31m...... =1300mm. IEC 825 1993
CLASS 3A LASER PRODUCT
exemple of power and lenght values
See para.6.8.4 on page 340 for further information.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 487 / 514
19.3.4.2 Optical safety: general rules On handling optical equipments or units or cables always check that laser labels are properly affixed and that the system complies with applicable optical standards.
DANGER! Possibility of eyes damage: invisible infrared radiations emitted by

the fiber optic transmitters can cause eyes damages. Carefully observe the specific procedures for installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance of units containing laser devices or cables transporting optical signals, described in the relevant installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance documents and the following general rules: a) Laser radiation is not visible by the naked eye or with laser safety glasses. Although it cannot be seen, laser radiation may be present. Never look directly into an unterminated fiber optic connector or into a broken optical fiber cable, unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present. Never look at an optical fiber splice, cable or connector, unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present. All optical connectors, terminating either fibers and transmitters/receivers, are provided with protective covers that must always be used, as soon as possible, when any optical link is disconnected for installation/test/maintenance purposes or whatever operation. Never look directly into an unterminated fiber optic connector or into a broken optical fiber cable by means of magnifiers/microscopes, unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present. A magnifier/microscope greatly increases the damage hazard to the eyes. Never point an unterminated optical fiber splice, cable or connector to other persons, unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present. Always remove electrical power from near and far optical transmitters before disconnecting optical links between the transmitter and the receiver. Wearing of laser safety goggles or eyes shields is recommended for every person working on optical devices, whenever the above listed rules cannot be followed.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
19.3.4.3 Optical safety: equipment specific data Refer to para.6.8 on page 339.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 488 / 514
19.3.5 Risks of Explosions

19.3.5.1 Labelling and safety instructions
This risk is present when batteries are used, and it is signalled by the following label:
Therefore, slits or apertures are made to let air circulate freely and allow dangerous gasses to down flow (batteryemitted hydrogen). A 417IEC5641 Norm. compliant label is affixed next to it indicating that the openings must not be covered up.
19.3.6 Moving Mechanical Parts

19.3.6.1 Labelling and safety instructions The following warning label is affixed next to fans or other moving mechanical parts:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Before carrying out any maintenance operation see that all the moving mechanical parts have been stopped.
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 489 / 514
19.3.7 Heatradiating Mechanical Parts

19.3.7.1 Labelling and safety instructions The presence of heatradiating mechanical parts is indicated by the following warning label in compliancy with IEC 417 Norm, Fig.5041:
As stated by IEC 950 Norm., para.1.4.7 the touchable mechanical parts are those whose temperature T exceeds the limits established by the following formula (temperatures in C ):
(TTamb) (DTmax + 25 Tmra)

where:
T Tamb DTmax Tmra
Temperature of the mechanical part measured at ambient temperature Tamb. Ambient temperature during the test. Value defined by IEC 950 Norm, Table 16 part 2a, para.5.1, and specified in the table below. The maximum room ambient temperature permitted by the equipment specification or 25C, whichever is greater.
Tab. 86. IEC 950 Table 16: Overtemperature limits, Part 2 Maximum overtemperature (C ) Operatoraccessible parts Metal Handle knob, etc., held or touched for short periods Handles, knobs, etc., regularly held Outer surface of the equipment that can be touched Inner surface of the equipment that can be touched 35 30 45 45 Glass, porcelain 45 40 55 55 Plastic, rubber 60 50 70 70
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
carefully observe the specific procedures for installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where heatradiating mechanical parts are present, described in the relevant installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance documents and the following general rule: a) Personal injury can be caused by heat. Avoid touching powered terminals with any exposed part of your body.
DANGER! Possibility of personal injury:
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 490 / 514
19.3.8 Microwave radiations

Microwave radiations can endanger your health. Ensure the transmitters are switched OFF before working close to and in front of the antennas. No dangerous level of microwave radiations exists outside the antenna feeder. Nevertheless, body should not be exposed to the radiation in front of the antenna ( < 0.5 m ) for a long time ( > 6 minutes ).
19.3.9 Specific safety rules in this handbook

Specific safety rules are specified in the following chapters: chapter 7, para.7.2.2 on page 356 chapter 7, para.7.6.1 on page 373
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 491 / 514
19.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms)

The equipments EMC norms depend on the type of installation being carried out (cable termination, grounding etc.,) and on the operating conditions (equipment, setting options of the electrical/electronic units, presence of dummy covers, etc.). Before starting any installation, turnon, tests & operation and maintenance work refer to the Technical Handbook, specifically to Handbooks: Installation, LineUp or Commissioning Maintenance chapter in this Handbook
The norms set down to guarantee EMC compatibility, are distinguished inside this handbook by the symbol and term:
ATTENTION
EMC NORMS
19.4.1 EMC General Norms Installation

All connections (towards the external source of the equipment) made with shielded cables use only cables and connectors suggested in this technical handbook or in the relevant Plant Documentation, or those specified in the CustomersInstallation Norms. (or similar documents) Shielded cables must be suitably terminated Install filters outside the equipment as required Ground connect the equipment utilizing a conductor with proper dia. and impedance Mount shields (if utilized), previously positioned during the installation phase, but not before having cleaned and decrease it. Before inserting the shielded unit proceed to clean and decrease all peripheral surfaces (contact springs and connection points, etc.) Screw fasten the units to the subrack. To correctly install EMC compatible equipment follow the instructions given.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 492 / 514
19.4.2 EMC General Norms Turnon, Tests & Operation
Preset the electrical units as required to guarantee EMC compatibility Check that the equipment is operating with all the shields properly positioned (dummy covers, ESD connector protections, etc.) To properly use EMC compatible equipment observe the information given
19.4.3 EMC General Norms Maintenance

Before inserting the shielded unit, which will replace the faulty or modified unit, proceed to clean and decrease all peripheral surfaces (contact springs and connection points, etc.) Clean the dummy covers of the spare units as well. Screw fasten the units to the subrack.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 493 / 514
19.5 Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges

Before removing the ESD protections from the monitors, connectors etc., observe the precautionary measures stated. Make sure that the ESD protections have been replaced and after having terminated the maintenance and monitoring operations. Most electronic devices are sensitive to electrostatic discharges, to this concern the following warning labels have been affixed:
Observe the precautionary measures stated when having to touch the electronic parts during the installation/maintenance phases. Workers are supplied with antistatic protection devices consisting of: an elasticized band worn around the wrist a coiled cord connected to the elasticized band and to the stud on the subrack.
ELASTICIZED BAND COILED CORD Fig. 230. Antistatic protection device kit
19.6 Suggestions, notes and cautions

Suggestions and special notes are marked by the following symbol: Suggestion or note.... Cautions to avoid possible equipment damage are marked by the following symbol: TITLE...
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(caution to avoid equipment damage) statement....
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 494 / 514
19.7 Labels affixed to the Equipment

This paragraph indicates the positions and the information contained on the identification and serial labels affixed to the equipment, with the exception of those already mentioned in para.19.3.2 (page 485) thru 19.5 (page 494). The label description is grouped as follows: Label specific for 9600LSY Equipment, herebelow General Use Labels, starting on page 496.
19.7.1 Label specific for 9600LSY Equipment

LABEL POSITION
ALCATEL
9662 LSY
12345
1111111
A
Certificato Omologazione ITALIA
ISCTI/2/1/01/044000 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
SYMBOL OR WRITING
ALCATEL
MEANING Alcatel Logo Equipment Acronym European Community Logo Notified body Not harmonized frequency logo Electrostatic Device Logo
9662 LSY (example) CE 12345 (example) !
1111111 (example) A ISCTI/2/1/01/044000 (example) xxxxxxxxxxxxxx (example)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Factory identification Factory identification bar code 128 Omologation certificate number (optional) Omologation certificate number (optional)
Fig. 231. LSY equipment identification label
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 495 / 514
19.7.2 General use labels

Fig. 232. thru Fig. 237. illustrate the most common positions of the labels on the units, modules and subracks. Fig. 238. thru Fig. 239. illustrate the information (e.g., identification and serial No.) printed on the labels. The table below relates the ref. numbers stated on the figures to the labels used. Labelling depicted hereafter is for indicative purposes and could be changed without any notice.
Tab. 87. Label references Ref. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Name of Label Label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N. and serial number) Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N. and serial number) Item identification label item on catalog Label identifying the equipment Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N.) + CE mark Serial number of item specified on catalogue + Subrack ESD mark Omologation certificate number (optional)
On contract basis, customized labels can be affixed to the equipment. Standard labels can be affixed to any position on the equipment, as required by the Customer. However, for each of the above are applied the rules defined by each individual Customer.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 496 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on Tab. 87. on page 496
955.203.292 Q
Fig. 232. Largesubrack labels
ABCD
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
497 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED 7 5
Fig. 233. Smallsubrack labels
03
955.203.292 Q
NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on on Tab. 87. on page 496.
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
498 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
ABC
03
xxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx
NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on Tab. 87. on page 496
955.203.292 Q
Fig. 234. Labels on units with standard cover plate
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
499 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
ABC
03
955.203.292 Q
Fig. 235. Modules label
NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on on Tab. 87. on page 496.
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
500 / 514
NB.1
ABC
NB.1 = The label is present on the p.c.s. component side NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on Tab. 87. on page 496
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 236. Internal label for Printed Board Assembly
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 501 / 514
NB.1
ABC
NB. 1 = The label is present on p.c.s. components side or rear side on the empty spaces.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on Tab. 87. on page 496 Fig. 237. Back panels internal label
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 502 / 514
FACTORY P/N + CS FACTORY SERIAL NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER BAR CODE (format 128; Module = 0,166; EN 799; Subset B/C)
Fig. 238. Label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N. and serial number)
ANV ITEM PART NUMBER + space + ICS ANV ITEM PART NUMBER + ICS BAR CODE (format ALFA 39 (+ * start, stop); Module = 0,166; Ratio = 2) ALCATEL FACTORY PART NUMBER + SPACE + CS
ACRONYM
SERIAL NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER BAR CODE (format ALFA 39 (+ * start, stop); Module = 0,166; Ratio = 2)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 239. Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N. and serial number)
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 503 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
504 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
SECTION CONTENT Chapter 20 Hardware Setting Documentation & Annexes
03
955.203.292 Q
HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION & ANNEXES
3DB 02839 AA AA PAGE 507
514
505 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
506 / 514
20 HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION & ANNEXES 20.1 Introduction

This chapter contains the documents sheets to refer to for unit/subunit hardware setting options. The list of the enclosed documents is given in Tab. 90. on page 511, according to the ANV part number. Other enclosed documents are listed in Tab. 91. on page 513.
20.2 Hardware setting documents explanation

UNIT IDENTIFICATION P/Ns AND CHANGE STATUS Each unit or sub-unit is distinguished by: a dual Part No.: Factory P/N (4xx.xxx.xxx x) ANV P/N (xxx.xxxxx xx) (NOTE) The last two ANV-P/N letters (in the following stated as suffix) stand for a feasible alternative, they might differentiate two units even though still functionally compatible. For this reason the indicated ANV P/N does not include the last two letters. For example : the units having P/Ns 3AL34065AAAA and 3AL34065AABA are functionally compatible and, as regards to hardware settings, the MSxxx document (described hereafter) 3AL34065AAAA-MSxxx is applicable for both.
NOTE
and by a pair of design & production series (change status): CS, associated to the Factory P/N (4xx.xxx.xxx x) ICS, associated to ANV P/N (xxx.xxxxx xx)
The following table shows an example of correspondence between FACTORY P/N + CS and ANV P/N + ICS Tab. 88. Example of correspondence between CS and suffix + ICS FACTORY CODE P/N 487.156.612 487.156.612 487.156.612 CS 01 02 03 ANV CODE P/N 3AL 34422 AA AA 3AL 34422 AA AB 3AL 34422 AA AC ICS 01 01 01
N.B.
The P/Ns used in this example have no correspondence with those of the actual equipment part list! In this example you can see that the production series is identified only by the CS as far as the Factory code is concerned, and by the suffix + ICS if the ANV code is referred to. Some of the possible positions of the label indicating the units P/Ns and CSICS are illustrated in section HANDBOOK GUIDE.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 507 / 514
CROSSREFERENCE Tab. 89. on page 510 lists the units having HW setting options and, for each of them, indicates the documents to be used, that are listed in Tab. 90. on page 511.
The HARDWARE SETTINGS can be executed after having checked all the subunits belonging to a unit, by considering the above cited crossreference, and by using the presetting documents indicated in Tab. 90. on page 511 and presented in the following point. ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS For each type of unit or sub-unit having customizable setting options, the document ANV P/NMSxxx is annexed to this handbook. The MSxxx documents are enclosed in the ANV P/N order. The Edition of the enclosed MSxxx document is the highest available at the date on which the Technical Handbook is assembled, or the CDROM containing it is burned. Use of the document MSxxx: MSxxx means document for hardware presetting options (the MSxxx documents Part No. is as that of the unit or sub-unit and its MS acronym defines type). The xxx part of MSxxx is relevant to ANV internal identification codes. As the Customer may have to manage many units of the same type (same P/N) but with different CSICS, the document MSxxx describes with possible different chapters the different setting options, according to all the possible CSsICSs. For this purpose, a table at the beginning of document (PREFACE) indicates the chapter to be used according to the CS or the corresponding suffix + ICS, taking into account that: a change of the production series does not necessarily imply a change in the setting options; a change of the ANV P/N suffix does not imply a new MSxxx document; the CS, SUFFIX and ICS must be meant as: from specified CS, SUFFIX or ICS (included) to next CS, SUFFIX or ICS (excluded) if listed the sequence of CSs is increasing from alphanumeric to numeric (e.g. CS=A0 is lower than CS=01). Each chapter contains: one or more tables defining the relationship between the functions achievable and the setting options to make; the unit layout drawing which shows the exact location of all the setting options. N.B. N.B. IDENTIFIES PIN 1 OF COMPONENT To make TC Hardware Settings (when necessary) remove the protective cover plate present on the rear side of the board and replace it at the end of the operation
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The setting options described in the documents MSxxx must be used according to 3AL377470001 (962.000.022 F) MSxxx document, inserted in Tab. 90. on page 511, which shows the ON (closed) position of microswitches. Those setting options that on the table are indicated by the caption For factory use only should never be modified.
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 508 / 514
EXAMPLE N.B.
The P/Ns used in this example have no correspondence with those of the actual equipment part list! Taking into account the same unit of Tab. 88. on page 507: FACTORY CODE P/N 487.156.612 487.156.612 487.156.612 CS 01 02 03 ANV CODE P/N 3AL 34422 AAAA 3AL 34422 AAAB 3AL 34422 AAAC ICS 01 01 01
and supposing that the setting options valid for CS=01 are equal to those for CS=02, but change for CS=03, the table at the beginning of the document 3AL 34422 AAAA MSZZQ will be: FACTORY P/N CODICE DI FABBRICA FROM CS DA CS 01 03 ANV P/N CODICE ANV FROM SUFFIX DA SUFFISSO AA AC FROM ICS DA ICS 01 01
CHAPTER CAPITOLO
1 2
If you have the unit identified by one of this identification data: FACTORY CODE P/N 487.156.612 487.156.612 CS 01 02 ANV CODE P/N 3AL 34422 AAAA 3AL 34422 AAAB ICS 01 01
you will use Chapter 1 of document 3AL 34422 AAAA MSZZQ
If you have the unit identified by one of this identification data: FACTORY CODE P/N 487.156.612
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ANV CODE P/N 3AL 34422 AAAC 3AL 34422 AAAD ICS 01 01
CS 03 04
487.156.612
you will use Chapter 2 of document 3AL 34422 AAAA MSZZQ
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 509 / 514
20.3 List of enclosed documents

20.3.1 Documentation for hardware settings Tab. 89. on this page gives the association between a unit and the documents enclosed to be used for the unit hardware setting. Tab. 90. on page 511 lists the documents enclosed to the handbook, sorted according to ANV P/N.
Information for the use of HW setting documents is given in para.20.2 on page 507. Tab. 89. Hardware setting documentation cross references WARNING ABOUT MODEM AND TRANSCEIVER UNITS Different types of Modem and Transceiver units are listed in this table. Be sure to use the correct document MSZZQ, according to the unit P/N. UNIT ANV P/N (Factory P/N) COMMON UNITS (listed by P/N) MODEM LH STM11WST 3DB 02136 AA (411.200.535 ) 3DB 02140 AA (411.200.536 ) 3DB 02155 AA (411.200.539 ) Documents to use (column Id in Tab. 90. on page 511)
UNIT NAME
[f] + [a] [g] + [a] [h] or [r] + [a] [b] or [c] + [i] or [q]+ [a]
See also para.3.6.2.2 on page 142. See point c ) on page 173
MODEM LH STM00WST
SERVICE
SYSTEM CONTROLLER
3DB 02162 AA (411.200.540 )
FANS ASSEMBLED
3DB 03238 AA (411.200.559)
TRANSCEIVERS (listed by frequency) 3,64,2 GHZ. TRANSCEIVER 128QAM (N.B.: 9640LSY) 4,45,0 GHZ. TRANSCEIVER 128QAM (N.B.: 9647LSY) 5,96,4 GHZ. TRANSCEIVER 128QAM (N.B.: 9662LSY) 3DB 02524 AA (411.200.543) 3DB 02526 AA (411.200.545) 3DB 01264 AA (411.200.518)
[p] + [j] + [a] [p] + [k] + [a] [p] + [d] + [a]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 510 / 514
UNIT NAME
UNIT ANV P/N (Factory P/N) 3DB 01265 AA (411.200.519 ) 3DB 02531 AA (411.200.547) 3DB 02532 AA (411.200.548) 3DB 04243 AA (411.200.589) 3DB 04131 AA (411.200.588) 3DB 02900 AA (411.200.555) 3DB 02890 AA (411.200.554)
Documents to use (column Id in Tab. 90. on page 511)
6,47,1 GHZ. TRANSCEIVER 128QAM (N.B.: 9667LSY) 7,17,7 GHZ TRANSCEIVER 128QAM (N.B.: 9674LSY) 7,78,3 GHZ TRANSCEIVER 128QAM (N.B.: 9681LSY) 8,28,5 GHZ TRANSCEIVER 128QAM (N.B.: 9681LSY) 10.010.7 GHZ TRANSCEIVER 128QAM (N.B.: 9610LSY) 10,711,7 GHZ TRANSCEIVER 128QAM (N.B.: 9611LSY) 12,713,2 GHZ TRANSCEIVER 128QAM (N.B.: 9613LSY)
[p] + [e] + [a] [p] + [l] + [a] [p] + [m] + [a] [p] + [t] + [a] [p] + [s] + [a] [p] + [o] + [a] [p] + [n] + [a]
Tab. 90. List of enclosed hardware setting documents The edition of the documents (listed in this table) that are physically enclosed in the handbook is the highest available when this handbook is assembled. The edition of enclosed documents is not specified in this table.
Id
UNIT NAME
UNIT ANV P/N (Factory P/N)
Enclosed Document
Documents listed and enclosed by P/N order
[a] [b] [c] [d] [e]

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
MICROSWITCHES ON POSITIONS ESCONX N.B. older with respect to [c]
3AL 79208 AA (487.156.807) 3AL 79208 AB (487.156.992) 3DB 01264 AA (411.200.518) 3DB 01265 AA (411.200.519 ) 3DB 02134 AA (487.210.560 )
3AL 37747 0001 MSZZQ 3AL 79208 AAAA MSZZQ 3AL 79208 ABAA MSZZQ 3DB 01264 AAAA MSZZQ 3DB 01265 AAAA MSZZQ 3DB 02134 AAAA MSZZQ
ESCONWTD N.B. newer with respect to [b]
5,96,4 GHZ. TRANSCEIVER 128QAM (N.B.: 9662LSY) 6,47,1 GHZ. TRANSCEIVER 128QAM (N.B.: 9667LSY)
[f]
ED
03
MODEM LH STM11WST
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA 514
511 / 514
Id
UNIT NAME
UNIT ANV P/N (Factory P/N) 3DB 02138 AA (487.210.561 ) 3DB 02153 AA (487.210.564 ) 3DB 02160 AA (487.210.566 ) 3DB 02524 AA (411.200.543) 3DB 02526 AA (411.200.545) 3DB 02531 AA (411.200.547) 3DB 02532 AA (411.200.548) 3DB 02890 AA (411.200.554) 3DB 02900 AA (411.200.555) 3DB 03329 AA (487.210.804 ) 3DB 03341 AA (487.210.816 ) 3DB 03345 AA (487.210.820 ) 3DB 04131 AA (411.200.588) 3DB 04243 AA (411.200.589)
Enclosed Document
[g] [h] [i] [j] [k] [l] [m] [n] [o] [p] [q] [r] [s] [t]
MODEM LH STM00WST SMA N.B. ESC N.B. older with respect to [q] older with respect to [r]
3DB 02138 AAAA MSZZQ 3DB 02153 AAAA MSZZQ 3DB 02160 AAAA MSZZQ 3DB 02524 AAAA MSZZQ 3DB 02526 AAAA MSZZQ 3DB 02531 AAAA MSZZQ 3DB 02532 AAAA MSZZQ 3DB 02890 AAAA MSZZQ 3DB 02900 AAAA MSZZQ 3DB 03329 AAAA MSZZQ 3DB 03341 AAAA MSZZQ 3DB 03345 AAAA MSZZQ 3DB 04131 AAAA MSZZQ 3DB 04243 AAAA MSZZQ
3,64,2 GHZ. TRANSCEIVER 128QAM (N.B.: 9640LSY) 4,45,0 GHZ. TRANSCEIVER 128QAM (N.B.: 9647LSY) 7,17,7 GHZ TRANSCEIVER 128QAM (N.B.: 9674LSY) 7,78,3 GHZ TRANSCEIVER 128QAM (N.B.: 9681LSY) 12,713,2 GHZ TRANSCEIVER 128QAM (N.B.: 9613LSY) 10,711,7 GHZ TRANSCEIVER 128QAM (N.B.: 9611LSY) RT CONTROL ESC N.B. SMA N.B. newer with respect to [i]
newer with respect to [h]
10,010,7 GHZ TRANSCEIVER 128QAM (N.B.: 9610LSY) 8,28,5 GHZ TRANSCEIVER 128QAM (N.B.: 9681LSY)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 512 / 514
20.3.2 Other documents (Annexes) Tab. 91. herebelow lists other documents enclosed to this handbook. Their use is explained in other parts of the handbook. Tab. 91. List of enclosed Annexes The edition of the documents (listed in this table) that are physically enclosed in the handbook is the highest available when this handbook is assembled. The edition of enclosed documents is not specified in this table.
Documents listed and enclosed by System order REF [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] DOCUMENT P/N 8BW 04007 0003 MSZZQ 8BW 04007 0004 MSZZQ 8BW 04007 0001 MSZZQ 8BW 04007 0002 MSZZQ 8BW 04007 0005 MSZZQ 8BW 04007 0006 MSZZQ CONTENT Branching 9640/47 LSY Branching 9640/47 LSY XPOL Branching 9662/67/74/81 LSY Branching 9662/67/74/81 LSY XPOL Branching 9611/13 LSY (N.B.) Branching 9611/13 LSY XPOL (N.B.)
N.B.
These drawings apply also to 9610 LSY.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 513 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
END OF DOCUMENT
3DB 02839 AA AA
514
514 / 514
UNIT HW PRESETTING PREDISP.HW UNITA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 FROM - DA CS= UNMEANINGFUL NON SIGNIFICATIVO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 3 3
01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
990126 DATE CHANGE NOTE
E.Monzani ITAVE APPRAISAL AUTHORITY MICROSWITCHES ON POSITION
E.Maisano ITAVE ORIGINATOR
ED
ED
01 962.000.022 MSZZQ 3AL 37747 0001 MSZZQ 3 1/ 3
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI The table present in the Table of contents indicates the first and the two most recent editions. La tabella presente nellindice (Table of contents) indica la prima e le due pi recenti edizioni del documento. PREFACE - PREFAZIONE See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS, SUFFIX and ICS. Si rimanda al Manuale Tecnico per lutilizzo di questo documento ed il significato di CS, SUFFISSO e ICS.
FACTORY P/N CODICE DI FABBRICA FROM CS DA CS ANV P/N CODICE ANV FROM SUFFIX DA SUFFISSO 01 FROM ICS DA ICS
CHAPTER CAPITOLO
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 962.000.022 MSZZQ 3AL 37747 0001 MSZZQ 3 2/ 3
1 FROM - DA
CS= UNMEANINGFUL NON SIGNIFICATIVO
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO: DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: P/N HDZZQ ED.02
FRONT VIEW - VISTA FRONTALE
END OF DOCUMENT-FINE DEL DOCUMENTO

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 962.000.022 MSZZQ 3AL 37747 0001 MSZZQ 3 3/ 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 3 3 4
01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
011016 DATE
SC01092804 CHANGE NOTE
E.MONZANI ITAVE APPRAISAL AUTHORITY ESCONX
A.PIROVANO ITAVE ORIGINATOR
ED
ED
01 487.156.807 MSZZQ 3AL 79208 AAAA MSZZQ 4 1/ 4
FACTORY P/N CODICE DI FABBRICA FROM CS DA CS 03 ANV P/N CODICE ANV FROM SUFFIX DA SUFFISSO AA FROM ICS DA ICS 03
CHAPTER CAPITOLO
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
1 FROM - DA
CS=01


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni Vedere Manuale di Operatore della corretta SW Release Refer to correct SW Release of the operators handbook
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
TABLE OF CONTENTS
01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
020404 DATE
SC02040401 CHANGE NOTE
E.Monzani ITAVE APPRAISAL AUTHORITY ESCONWTD
A.Pirovano ITAVE ORIGINATOR
ED
ED
01 487.156.992 MSZZQ 3AL 79208 ABAA MSZZQ 4 1/ 4
CHAPTER CAPITOLO
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
1 FROM - DA
CS=01


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO: DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: vedere Manuale di Operatore della corretta SW Release Refer to correct SW Release of the operators handbook
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
TABLE OF CONTENTS
02 01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
020910 011114 DATE
S402090901
E.CORRADINI ITAVE E.CORRADINI ITACO
G.MAISTO ITAVE G.MAISTO ITACO ORIGINATOR
ED
CHANGE NOTE
APPRAISAL AUTHORITY 5.96.4 GHZ TRANSCEIVER 128 QAM
ED
02 411.200.518 MSZZQ 3DB 01264 AAAA MSZZQ 6 1/ 6
CHAPTER CAPITOLO
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
1 FROM - DA
CS=03
Utilizzare il documento : Use the document :
3DB 03329 AAAA (487.210.804)
MSZZQ
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO: DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: P/N ECZZQ ED.01
*=
FACTORY PRESETTING - Predisposizioni di fabbrica
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
411.200.518 MSZZQ
3DB 01264 AAAA MSZZQ
5/ 6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
411.200.518 MSZZQ
6/ 6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
02 01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
020910 011114 DATE
S402090901
ED
CHANGE NOTE
ED
CHAPTER CAPITOLO
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
1 FROM - DA
CS=03
3DB 03329 AAAA (487.210.804)
MSZZQ
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED

*=
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
411.200.519 MSZZQ
5/ 6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
411.200.519 MSZZQ
6/ 6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
E.CORRADINI ITACO APPRAISAL AUTHORITY
G.MAISTO ITACO ORIGINATOR
ED
MODEM LH STM11WST
ED
CHAPTER CAPITOLO
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
1 FROM - DA
CS=03

TC : Ponticelli a goccia di stagno (Ove non specificato, di solo uso interno) TC : Straps with solder drop (where not stated, factory use only)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
REAR SIDE VIEW VISTA LATO RETRO
01
487.210.560 MSZZQ
4/ 7

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO: DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: P/N EJZZQ ED.03
*=
FUNZIONAMENTO Operation
SELEZIONE CANCCOMB (CON IF2 PRESENTE) CANCCOMB selection ( with IF2 present ) CANC
SWITCH R. S. PONTIC. StrapSwitch Schm. CHIUSI APERTI Ref Closed Open I11
I11
X X
COMB
I11
COMANDO PORTANTE NON MODULATA Unmodulated carrier command DISABILITAZIONE PORTANTE NON MODULATA Unmodulated carrier disable ABILITAZIONE PORTANTE NON MODULATA Unmodulated carrier enable DI USO INTERNO Factory use only DI USO INTERNO Factory use only POLARIZZAZIONE V O H MODULATORE V or H modulator polarization POLARIZZAZIONE V MODULATORE V modulator polarization POLARIZZAZIONE H MODULATORE H modulator polarization
I12
* I12
I12
X X X X
* I13 * I14
I21
I21 I21
X X
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
POLARIZZAZIONE V O H DEMODULATORE V or H demodulator polarization POLARIZZAZIONE V DEMODULATORE V demodulator polarization POLARIZZAZIONE H DEMODULATORE H demodulator polarization DI USO INTERNO Factory use only DI USO INTERNO Factory use only DI USO INTERNO Factory use only
I22
X X X X
I22
* I23 * I24
* I3
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
487.210.560 MSZZQ
7/ 7
TABLE OF CONTENTS
01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
E.CORRADINI ITACO APPRAISAL AUTHORITY
ED
MODEM LH STM00WST
ED
CHAPTER CAPITOLO
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
1 FROM - DA
CS=01

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
487.210.561 MSZZQ
4/ 6

*=
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
487.210.561 MSZZQ
6/ 6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
E.CORRADINI ITACO APPRAISAL AUTHORITY SMA
ED
ED
CHAPTER CAPITOLO
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
1 FROM - DA
CS=02

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED

*=
DI USO INTERNO Factory use only DI USO INTERNO Factory use only DI USO INTERNO Factory use only DI USO INTERNO Factory use only DI USO INTERNO Factory use only DI USO INTERNO Factory use only DI USO INTERNO Factory use only DI USO INTERNO Factory use only DI USO INTERNO Factory use only
I12
X X X X
I13
I14 I15
I16
X X X
I17 I18
I2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
TABLE OF CONTENTS
01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
E.CORRADINI ITACO APPRAISAL AUTHORITY ESC
ED
ED
CHAPTER CAPITOLO
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
1 FROM - DA
CS=02

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
FRONT SIDE VIEW VISTA FRONTALE
ED
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
487.210.566 MSZZQ
4/ 7

*=
PER CONFIGURAZIONI SOFTWARE For Software configuration DI USO INTERNO Factory use only DI USO INTERNO Factory use only PER CONFIGURAZIONI SOFTWARE For Software configuration
I2
I3
I4
I1 / I4 : Per eseguire queste predisposizioni fare riferimento al Manuale dOperatore. In order to do these settings, please refer to Operator s Handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
DI USO INTERNO Factory use only DI USO INTERNO Factory use only MEMORIZZAZIONE ALLARMI LOCALE Loca attending of alarms MEMORIZZAZIONE ALLARMI ESTESO ALLA TESTATA DI TELAIO Alarm attending extended to rack TRU INTERFACCIA ACCESSO UNITA 10 BASE 2 Interface 10 base 2 access unit FUNZIONE HEARTBEAT INSERITA HEARTBEAT function enabled FUNZIONE HEARTBEAT DISINSERITA HEARTBEAT function disabled BATTERIA DI SERVIZIO 48V/60V Service battery 48V/60V BATTERIA DI SERVIZIO 24V Service battery 24V ALLARME TOR ABILITATO TOR Alarm enabled ALLARME TOR INIBITO TOR Alarm disabled
SWITCH R. S. PONTIC. StrapSwitch Schm. CHIUSI APERTI Ref Closed Open
* TC1 * TC2 * TC3

TC3
12
12
12
12
* TC4
TC4
12
12
* TC5
TC5 12
12
* TC6
TC6 12
12
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
DI USO INTERNO Factory use only DI USO INTERNO Factory use only DI USO INTERNO Factory use only DI USO INTERNO Factory use only DI USO INTERNO Factory use only DI USO INTERNO Factory use only DI USO INTERNO Factory use only
SWITCH R. S. PONTIC. StrapSwitch Schm. CHIUSI APERTI Ref Closed Open
* TC7 * TC8 * TC11 * TC12
12
12 12
12
* TC13 * TC14 * TC15
12 12
12
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
TABLE OF CONTENTS
02 01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
020910 011114 DATE
S402090901
ED
CHANGE NOTE
ED
CHAPTER CAPITOLO
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
1 FROM - DA
CS=01
3DB 03329 AAAA (487.210.804)
MSZZQ
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED

*=
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
411.200.543 MSZZQ
5/ 6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
411.200.543 MSZZQ
6/ 6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
020909 DATE
S402090901 CHANGE NOTE
E.CORRADINI ITAVE APPRAISAL AUTHORITY 4,45,0 GHZ TRANSCEIVER 128 QAM
G.MAISTO ITAVE ORIGINATOR
ED
ED
CHAPTER CAPITOLO
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
1 FROM - DA
CS=01
3DB 03329 AAAA (487.210.804)
MSZZQ
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED

*=
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
411.200.545 MSZZQ
5/ 6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
411.200.545 MSZZQ
6/ 6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
02 01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
020910 011114 DATE
S402090901
ED
CHANGE NOTE
ED
CHAPTER CAPITOLO
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
1 FROM - DA
CS=01
3DB 03329 AAAA (487.210.804)
MSZZQ
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED

*=
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
411.200.547 MSZZQ
5/ 6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
411.200.547 MSZZQ
6/ 6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
02 01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
020910 011114 DATE
S402090901
ED
CHANGE NOTE
ED
CHAPTER CAPITOLO
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
1 FROM - DA
CS=02
3DB 03329 AAAA (487.210.804)
MSZZQ
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED

*=
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
411.200.548 MSZZQ
5/ 6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
411.200.548 MSZZQ
6/ 6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
020909 DATE
ED
ED
CHAPTER CAPITOLO
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
1 FROM - DA
CS=02
3DB 03329 AAAA (487.210.804)
MSZZQ
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED

*=
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
411.200.554 MSZZQ
5/ 6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
411.200.554 MSZZQ
6/ 6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
020909 DATE
ED
ED
CHAPTER CAPITOLO
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
1 FROM - DA
CS=02
3DB 03329 AAAA (487.210.804)
MSZZQ
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED

*=
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
411.200.555 MSZZQ
5/ 6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
411.200.555 MSZZQ
6/ 6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
020909 DATE
E.CORRADINI ITAVE APPRAISAL AUTHORITY RT CONTROL
ED
ED
CHAPTER CAPITOLO
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
1 FROM - DA
CS=03

TC : Straps with solder drop (where not stated, factory use only) TC : Ponticelli a goccia di stagno (Ove non specificato, di solo uso interno)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED

For the dipswitch I2I3I5 meaning, use the specific Tranceivers MSZZQ document.
Per il significato dei dipswitch I2I3I5 utilizzare il documento MSZZQ dello specifico Ricetrasmettitore.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
TABLE OF CONTENTS
01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
020918 DATE
E.CORRADINI ITAVE APPRAISAL AUTHORITY ESC
ED
ED
CHAPTER CAPITOLO
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
1 FROM - DA
CS=01

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
FRONT SIDE VIEW VISTA FRONTALE
ED
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
487.210.816 MSZZQ
4/ 6

*=
I1 / I4 : Per eseguire queste predisposizioni fare riferimento al Manuale dOperatore. In order to do these settings, please refer to Operators Handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
487.210.816 MSZZQ
6/ 6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
020708 DATE
E.CORRADINI ITACO APPRAISAL AUTHORITY SMA
ED
ED
CHAPTER CAPITOLO
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
1 FROM - DA
CS=01

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED

*=
DI USO INTERNO Factory use only DI USO INTERNO Factory use only DI USO INTERNO Factory use only DI USO INTERNO Factory use only DI USO INTERNO Factory use only DI USO INTERNO Factory use only DI USO INTERNO Factory use only DI USO INTERNO Factory use only DI USO INTERNO Factory use only
R. S. PONTIC.SWITCH StrapSwitch Schm. CHIUSI APERTI Ref Closed Open

I11
I12
X X X X
I13
I14 I15
I16
X X X
I17 I18
I2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
TABLE OF CONTENTS
01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
020918 DATE
ED
ED
CHAPTER CAPITOLO
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
1 FROM - DA
CS=01
3DB 03329 AAAA (487.210.804)
MSZZQ
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED

*=
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
411.200.588 MSZZQ
5/ 6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
411.200.588 MSZZQ
6/ 6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
020918 DATE
ED
ED
CHAPTER CAPITOLO
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
1 FROM - DA
CS=01
3DB 03329 AAAA (487.210.804)
MSZZQ
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED

*=
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
411.200.589 MSZZQ
5/ 6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
411.200.589 MSZZQ
6/ 6
Technical Handbook
Alcatel 9600LSY
STM1/0 Long Haul Digital Radio Relay System
9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0
LHR version
955.203.292 Q Ed.03
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.03
Documentation set for 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Handbook 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Technical Handbook 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Installation Handbook 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Lineup Guide Interference investigation procedure 9600LSY Rel.1.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 1.0 9600LSY Rel.2.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 2.0 1320CT Version 1.3.x Basic Operators Handbook 1330AS Rel.5.0 Operators Handbook ELM Rel.5.0 Operators Handbook ANV P/N Factory P/N 3DB 02839 AAAA 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02840 AAAA 955.203.302 S 3DB 02841 AAAA 955.203.312 K 3DB 04165 EAAA 955.203.374 Z 3DB 02838 AAAA 957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 BAAA 957.207.023 B 3AL 79186 AAAA 957.130.542 E 3AL 71079 AAAA 957.130.442 A 3AL 71081 AAAA 957.130.462 E in alternative (according to used SWP) this Handbook
When supplied on paper, this handbook and the annexed documents are divided by registers, for an easier access to the information herein contained:
CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES HANDBOOK GUIDE DESCRIPTIONS HANDBOOK MAINTENANCE FREQUENCY PLANS & PART NUMBERS APPENDICES HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION & ANNEXES HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTS (MSZZQ) Branching 9640/47 LSY Branching 9640/47 LSY XPOL ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS Branching 9662/67/74/81 LSY Branching 9662/67/74/81 LSY XPOL Branching 9610/11/13 LSY Branching 9610/11/13 LSY XPOL
REGISTER
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
955.203.292 Q Ed.03
QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALE

THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK
COD.MANUALE HDBK P/N: 955.203.292
Q Ed.03 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.03
9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0 LHR version TECHNICAL HANDBOOK

ORIGINALE INTERLEAF: FILE ARCHIVIAZIONE: cod ANV (PD1-PD2)
No PAGINE TOTALI PER ARCHIVIAZIONE: 516+6 DIMENSIONE BINDER SORGENTE (du ks): 164.634 kbyte
INFORMAZIONI PER IL CENTRO STAMPA - ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

COMPOSIZIONE ED ASSIEMAGGIO DEL MANUALE: HANDBOOK COMPOSITION AND ASSEMBLY: SERVONO 13 SEPARATORI NUMERATI DA 1 A 13 13 REGISTERS NUMBERED FROM 1 TO 13 ARE NECESSARY STAMPARE FRONTE/RETRO RECTO-VERSO PRINTING No pagine (facciate) No pages TARGHETTE - LABELS FRONTESPIZIO - FRONT TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES INSERIRE SEPARATORE 1 - INSERT REGISTER 1 HANDBOOK GUIDE INSERIRE SEPARATORE 2 - INSERT REGISTER 2 DESCRIPTIONS INSERIRE SEPARATORE 3 - INSERT REGISTER 3 MAINTENANCE INSERIRE SEPARATORE 4 - INSERT REGISTER 4 FREQUENCY PLANS & PART NUMBERS INSERIRE SEPARATORE 5 - INSERT REGISTER 5 APPENDICES CONTINUA CONTINUES 463/514 504/514 411/514 462/514 353/514 410/514 37/514 352/514 15/514 36/514 2 1/514 14/514 numerate numbered da from a to
fase step
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
13
ED
03
RELEASED 3DB 02839 AAAA TQZZA 6 Y 1/ 6
955.203.292 TQZZA

CONTINUA CONTINUES No pagine (facciate) No pages INSERIRE SEPARATORE 6 - INSERT REGISTER 6 HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION & ANNEXES TOTALE PAGINE A4 (FACCIATE) TOTAL A4 PAGES: TOTALE FOGLI A4 TOTAL A4 SHEETS:
fase step All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
fase step
numerate numbered da from a to
14 15
505/514
514/514
516 258
STAMPARE SOLO FRONTE
RECTO PRINTING COD. DOCUMENTO document code
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
INSERIRE SEPARATORE 7 - INSERT REGISTER 7 INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT CONTINUA CONTINUES 3AL 37747 0001 MSZZQ 3AL 79208 AAAA MSZZQ 3AL 79208 ABAA MSZZQ 3DB 01264 AAAA MSZZQ 3DB 01265 AAAA MSZZQ 3DB 02134 AAAA MSZZQ 3DB 02138 AAAA MSZZQ 3DB 02153 AAAA MSZZQ 3DB 02160 AAAA MSZZQ 3DB 02524 AAAA MSZZQ 3DB 02526 AAAA MSZZQ 3DB 02531 AAAA MSZZQ 3DB 02532 AAAA MSZZQ 3DB 02890 AAAA MSZZQ 3DB 02900 AAAA MSZZQ 3DB 03329 AAAA MSZZQ 3DB 03341 AAAA MSZZQ 3DB 03345 AAAA MSZZQ 3DB 04131 AAAA MSZZQ 3DB 04243 AAAA MSZZQ
35 36
ED
03
955.203.292 TQZZA

CONTINUA CONTINUES
fase step
COD. DOCUMENTO document code INSERIRE SEPARATORE 8 - INSERT REGISTER 8 INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT Branching 9640/47 LSY INSERIRE SEPARATORE 9 - INSERT REGISTER 9 INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT Branching 9640/47 LSY XPOL INSERIRE SEPARATORE 10 - INSERT REGISTER 10 INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT Branching 9662/67/74/81 LSY INSERIRE SEPARATORE 11 - INSERT REGISTER 11 INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT Branching 9662/67/74/81 LSY XPOL INSERIRE SEPARATORE 12 - INSERT REGISTER 12 INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT Branching 9611/13 LSY INSERIRE SEPARATORE 13 - INSERT REGISTER 13 INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT Branching 9611/13 LSY XPOL 8BW 04007 0006 MSZZQ 8BW 04007 0005 MSZZQ 8BW 04007 0002 MSZZQ 8BW 04007 0001 MSZZQ 8BW 04007 0004 MSZZQ 8BW 04007 0003 MSZZQ
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
FINE ISTRUZIONI ASSEMBLAGGIO END OF ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS WARNING FOR A-UNITS OTHER THAN A-ITALY Labels are done according to A-Italy binder format. Handbook source file: ALICE 6.10 ARCHIVED BY GAPI 3.9.1 + PDF The documents MSZZQ are archived in PDAS individually (ALICE 6.10 ARCHIVED BY GAPI 3.9.1 + PDF); get the highest edition. The pdf files can be directly retrieved from intranet WTD web site. PDF file retrieved from PD1 must be opened with ACROBAT Reader Version 4.0 at least.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 TQZZA

Site VIMERCATE
WTD
Originators E.CORRADINI F.BUTORI G.MAISTO
9600LSY REL.1.0/2.0 LHR TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
Domain Division Rubric Type Distribution Codes
: : : :
9600LSY/LHR REL.1.0/2.0 TECHNICAL HDBK Internal : External :
Approvals Name App. G.CONSONNI A.PANZERI R.DIAZZI, A.BESTETTI
Name App.
M.IDI, E.PARISI
R.PELLIZZONI
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.03 9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0 STM 1/0 Long Haul Digital Radio Relay System
LHR version TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 TQZZA
9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0

STM 1/0 Long Haul Digital Radio Relay System
LHR version
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
955.203.292 Q Ed.03 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.03
VOL.1/1
9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0

STM 1/0 Long Haul Digital Radio Relay System LHR version TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
955.203.292 Q Ed.03 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.03
VOL.1/1
9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0
STM 1/0 Long Haul Digital Radio Relay System LHR version
955.203.292 Q Ed.03 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.03 TECHNICAL HANDBOOK VOL.1/1
9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0

STM 1/0 Long Haul Digital Radio Relay System LHR version 955.203.292 Q Ed.03 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.03 TECHNICAL HANDBOOK VOL.1/1
9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0

STM 1/0 Long Haul Digital Radio Relay System LHR version
955.203.292 Q Ed.03
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
VOL.1/1
ED
03
955.203.292 TQZZA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
RELEASED
955.203.292 TQZZA
FINE DEL DOCUMENTO INTERNO END OF INTERNAL DOCUMENT
3DB 02839 AAAA TQZZA
6/ 6
NOTES ON NAVIGATION AND PRINTING NAVIGATION

THIS FILE CONTAINS SEVERAL DOCUMENTS (THE HANDBOOK AND THE UNIT PRESETTING DOCUMENTS) PAGE NUMBERING RESTARTS FROM 1 AT THE BEGINNING OF EACH DOCUMENT. CROSS REFERENCES (ex. see Figure 3 on page 45) ARE ALWAYS INSIDE THE DOCUMENT WHERE YOU ARE, AND ARE REFERRED TO THE DOCUMENT PAGES (NOT TO THE PDF FILE PAGE NUMBERING).
PRINTING
BESIDES TAKING INTO ACCOUNT THE STATEMENTS GIVEN IN NAVIGATION, TAKE INTO ACCOUNT THAT: PDF FILE PAGES 1 TO 514 ARE FORMATTED FOR RECTO/VERSO PRINTING. PDF FILE PAGES 515 TO 624 ARE FORMATTED FOR RECTO PRINTING PDF FILE PAGES 625 TO 634 ARE FORMATTED FOR RECTO/VERSO PRINTING (PAGE 633/634 IS THIS PAGE). IN ORDER TO PRINT A SELECTED PART OF THE HANDBOOK: GO ON THE FIRST PAGE TO PRINT AND TAKE NOTICE OF THE PDF FILE PAGE NUMBER GO ON THE LAST PAGE TO PRINT AND TAKE NOTICE OF THE PDF FILE PAGE NUMBER THESE TWO NUMBERS ARE THE RANGE TO BE SPECIFIED FOR PRINTING.
BRANCHING DRAWINGS
THE DOCUMENTS CONTAINING BRANCHING DRAWINGS (REFERRED TO IN THE HANDBOOK ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS ) ARE NOT INCLUDED IN THIS PDF FILE (FOR THEIR SIZE). THEY ARE INDIVIDUALLY PRESENT AS PDF FILES IN THE SAME DIRECTORY OF THIS WEB SITE.
END OF FILE Click on HANDBOOK FILE in the Bookmarks area to open the handbook

Technical

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Descrição original:

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Technical

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

9600LSY/LHR REL.1.0/2.

020927 020418 011115 DATE

S402092301 S402040402 validated CHANGE NOTE

G.CONSONNI ITAVE G.CONSONNI ITACO G.CONSONNI ITACO APPRAISAL AUTHORITY

9600LSY REL.1.0/2.0 LHR TECHNICAL HANDBOOK

03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 1 / 514

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 2 / 514

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 3 / 514

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 4 / 514

FREQUENCY PLANS & PART NUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 5 / 514

459 459 459

HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION & ANNEXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505

507 507 507 510 510 513

03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 6 / 514

LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 7 / 514

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 8 / 514

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 9 / 514

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 10 / 514

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

17 25 29 29 44 44 50 50 100 101 101 103 122

03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 11 / 514

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 12 / 514

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 13 / 514

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 16 / 514

have details on system cabling

get item P/Ns (LHR)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 17 / 514

carry out unit hardware setting Tab. 1. continues ..

read para.20.2 on page 507 of this handbook

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 18 / 514

.. continues Tab. 1. If you need immediate operative information on how to:

and read read its QUICK GUIDE (same topics)

provision and manage spare parts

read para.7.5 on page 370 of this handbook

carry out routine maintenance

read para.7.6 on page 373 of this handbook

carry out corrective maintenance

read para.7.7 on page 375 of this handbook

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

03 955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 514 19 / 514

SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING

Harmful optical signals

Moving mechanical parts

Heatradiating mechanical parts Microwave radiations

Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges: TOPIC WARNING LABEL ON EQUIPMENT

Device sensitive to electrostatic discharges

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms) Other Labels affixed to the Equipment